FCC ID: 2AOUZNTG7QPRPLF2 Automotive head unit to be installed in cars with the following features FM, AM, DAB, DVBT, USB, Bluetooth, WLAN and GNSS

 

 

 

 

 

S-Class Owner's Manual Mercedes-Benz Front passenger airbag warning

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is enabled If the front passenger airbag is enabled, a child on the front passenger seat may be struck by the front passenger airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint system on a seat protected by an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG in front of it, this can result in DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child. Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle". Thank you for purchasing a Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Man ual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operat ing lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Owner's Manual. Dis regarding them may lead to damage to the vehi cle or injury to people. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol lowing factors:

R model R order R national version R availability The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show a left-hand drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehi cles, the layout of car parts and control ele ments differs accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehi cles further. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas:

R design R equipment R technical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus trations. The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle:

R printed Owner's Manual R service booklet R equipment-dependent Supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner. ohne ohne 2 Contents Symbols ........................................................ 5 At a glance .................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Indicator and warning lamps ........................... 8 Overhead control panel ................................ 10 Door control panel and seat adjustment ....... 12 Control settings in the rear passenger compartment ................................................ 14 Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 16 Digital Owner's Manual ............................. 18 Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual .......... 18 General notes ............................................. 20 Protection of the environment ...................... 20 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles ................... 20 Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ....................... 21 Owner's Manual ........................................... 22 Touch-sensitive controls ............................... 22 Operating safety ........................................... 22 Declaration of Conformity ............................. 24 Diagnostics connection ................................ 29 Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 30 Vehicle registration ....................................... 30 Correct use of the vehicle ............................. 31 Information on the REACH regulation ........... 31 Notes for persons with electronic medi cal aids ......................................................... 31 Implied warranty ........................................... 31 QR code for rescue card ............................... 32 Data storage ................................................. 32 Copyright ...................................................... 34 Occupant safety ......................................... 35 Restraint system ........................................... 35 Seat belts ..................................................... 37 Airbags ......................................................... 42 PRE-SAFE system ....................................... 49 Automatic measures after an accident ......... 51 Safely transporting children in the vehi cle ................................................................. 51 Notes on pets in the vehicle ......................... 65 Opening and closing .................................. 67 Key ................................................................ 67 Doors ............................................................ 71 Boot .............................................................. 76 Side windows ............................................... 82 Sliding sunroof ............................................. 86 Roller sunblinds ............................................ 91 Anti-theft protection ..................................... 93 Seats and stowing ..................................... 96 Notes on the correct driver's seat posi tion ............................................................... 96 Seats ............................................................ 96 Steering wheel ............................................. 111 Easy entry and exit feature .......................... 112 Operating the memory function .................. 114 Memory function in the rear compart ment ........................................................... 116 Stowage areas ............................................. 119 Cup holders ................................................ 130 Ashtray and cigarette lighter ....................... 131 Sockets ....................................................... 133 Coolbox ...................................................... 136 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial ...... 138 Fitting and removing the floor mats ............ 141 Light and sight ......................................... 143 Exterior lighting .......................................... 143 Interior lighting ............................................ 151 Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system ............................................ 152 Mirrors ........................................................ 156 Area permeable to radio waves on the windscreen ................................................. 159 Infrared-reflective windscreen function ...... 159 Climate control ........................................ 160 Overview of climate control systems .......... 160 Operating the climate control system ......... 161 Driving and parking .................................. 173 Driving ........................................................ 173 DYNAMIC SELECT switch ........................... 184 Automatic transmission .............................. 186 Function of the 4MATIC .............................. 190 Refuelling .................................................... 190 Parking ....................................................... 196 Driving and driving safety systems ............. 203 Trailer hitch ................................................ 265 Bicycle rack function .................................. 270 Vehicle towing instructions ......................... 272 Instrument Display and on-board computer .................................................. 273 Overview of the driver display ..................... 273 Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel .......................................................... 274 Operating the on-board computer .............. 275 Selecting display content, centre on the instrument cluster ....................................... 276 Status displays on the driver display .......... 277 Menus and submenus ................................. 278 Head-up Display ......................................... 283 MBUX Voice Assistant ............................. 286 Notes on operating safety .......................... 286 Operation ................................................... 286 Using MBUX Voice Assistant effectively ..... 289 MBUX multimedia system ....................... 291 Overview and operation .............................. 291 MBUX Interior Assistant .............................. 310 Driver camera ............................................. 320 Contents 3 System settings .......................................... 322 Fit & Healthy ............................................... 331 Navigation and traffic ................................. 335 Telephone ................................................... 371 Online and Internet functions ...................... 414 Media ......................................................... 422 Radio .......................................................... 429 TV ............................................................... 431 Sound ......................................................... 437 MBUX high-end Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................................................... 440 Maintenance and care ............................. 455 ASSYST PLUS service interval display ........ 455 Engine compartment .................................. 456 Cleaning and care ....................................... 462 Breakdown assistance ............................ 468 Emergency .................................................. 468 Flat tyre ...................................................... 470 Battery (vehicle) .......................................... 476 Tow-starting or towing away ....................... 482 Electrical fuses ........................................... 486 Display messages and warning/indi cator lamps ............................................... 574 Display messages ....................................... 574 Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 634 Index .......................................................... 651 4 Contents Wheels and tyres ..................................... 491 Notes on noise or unusual handling char acteristics ................................................... 491 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres ........................................................... 491 Notes on snow chains ................................. 491 Activating or deactivating snow chain mode .......................................................... 492 Tyre pressure .............................................. 492 Wheel change ............................................. 495 Emergency spare wheel .............................. 505 Technical data .......................................... 506 Notes on technical data .............................. 506 On-board electronics .................................. 506 Radio equipment approvals for the vehi cle components .......................................... 508 Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview ............................ 562 Operating fluids .......................................... 564 Vehicle data ................................................ 572 Trailer hitch ................................................. 573 In this Owner's Manual, you will find the follow ing symbols:

# Observe notes on material damage. Symbols 5

% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you. Instruction

(/ page) Further information on a topic Display Information on the multifunction dis play/media display 4 Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system Relevant submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia system Indicates a cause 5

& DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices Warning notices draw your attention to haz ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.

# Observe the warning notices.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe envi ronmental notes Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behaviour or environmentally responsible disposal.

# Observe environmental notes.

* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged. 6 At a glance Cockpit Left-hand drive vehicles At a glance Cockpit 7 1 Light switch 2 Steering wheel gearshift paddles 3 Combination switch 4 Driver display 5 DIRECT SELECT lever 6 Start/stop button ECO start/stop function 7 Central display 8 Glove compartment 9 Stowage compartment A Control panel for:

DYNAMIC SELECT switch Active Parking Assist Switching the stationary heater on/off Quick vehicle access via fingerprint sensor Switching the MBUX multimedia system on/off Volume and switching sound on/off B Hazard warning light system C Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys tem D Adjusts the steering wheel Switches the steering wheel heater on/off E Control panel:

On-board computer Cruise control or variable limiter Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC F Diagnostics connection G Opens the bonnet H Electric parking brake 291 291 146 293 111 112 275 217 221 29 457 200 143 188 145 273 186 174 182 291 121 121 184 249 166 291 8 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps Instrument display At a glance Indicator and warning lamps 9 1 #! Turn signal lights 2 Trailer hitch is not operational or is swiv elling

(red) 3 Suspension malfunction (red) Suspension malfunction (yellow) 4 # Electrical fault 5 Electric power steering malfunction Electric power steering malfunction (yel low) Rear axle steering malfunction (red) Rear axle steering malfunction (yellow) 6 6 Restraint system 7 Seat belt not fastened 8 L Distance warning 9 ! ABS malfunction A h Tyre pressure monitor B ; Engine diagnostics 145 637 645 645 640 637 637 637 637 636 636 645 646 649 640 C ESP OFF ESP D % Diesel engine: preglow E Coolant too hot/cold F Coolant temperature display G ! Electric parking brake (yellow) H ! Electric parking brake applied (red) J 8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location I J Brakes (red) J Brakes (yellow) indicator K Fuel level indicator L K High beam L Low beam T Standing lights M R Rear fog light 646 646 640 273 643 643 643 643 640 145 143 143 144 10 At a glance Overhead control panel At a glance Overhead control panel 11 2 c Switches the front interior lighting 3 u Switches the rear interior lighting 1 Sun visors on/off on/off 4 ; me button 5 Opens/closes the rear roller sunblind of the panorama sliding sunroof trol on/off 7 G SOS button 151 151 400 86 400 8 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp 9 3 Opens/closes the panorama sliding 3 Opens/closes the front roller sunblind of the panorama sliding sunroof A PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamps B Inside rear-view mirror on/off sunroof on/off 151 86 86 47 157 151 6 | Switches automatic interior lighting con 151 C p Switches the left-hand reading lamp 12 At a glance Door control panel and seat adjustment 1 Locks/unlocks the vehicle 2 Adjusts the seats electrically 3 Switches the seat heating on/off 4 Switches the seat ventilation on/off driver's seat 6 Operates the memory function 7 Operates the outside mirrors 8 Opens/closes the right side window 9 Opens/closes the rear right side window 72 96 108 110 99 114 156 82 82 At a glance Door control panel and seat adjustment 13 A Opens/closes the boot lid B Rear-window roller sunblind C Child safety lock for the rear side windows D Opens the door F Opens/closes the left side window G Adjusts the head restraints H Seat adjustment using the multimedia system 76 92 65 71 82 82 102 106 5 Adjusts the front passenger seat from the E Opens/closes the rear left side window 14 At a glance Control settings in the rear passenger compartment At a glance Control settings in the rear passenger compartment 15 1 Climate control rear operating unit 8 Adjusts the seat backrest inclination 2 Electronics compartment in the centre con 9 Sets the combined seat cushion inclination sole 230 V socket 3 Selects the front passenger seat 4 Switches the rear seat ventilation on/off 5 Switches the rear seat heating on/off and length A Memory function in the rear compartment B Stowage box in the seat backrest Refrigerator box C Stowage compartment in the rear armrest 6 Sets the head restraint fore-and-aft position D Stowage compartment in the rear armrest 7 Adjusts the head restraint height E Cup holder 161 122 134 99 110 108 100 100 100 100 116 122 136 122 122 130 16 At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns 1 QR code for accessing the rescue card 8 Fire extinguisher 2 Safety vests 3 me button and SOS button 4 To check and top up operating fluids Starting assistance 5 To tow-start and tow away 6 Flat tyre 7 Hazard warning light system At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns 17 32 468 400 564 480 483 470 146 9 Fuel filler flap with instruction labels for tyre pressure, fuel type and QR code for accessing the rescue card A To tow-start and tow away B First-aid kit (soft sided) C TIREFIT kit D Warning triangle 470 190 483 469 472 469 18 Digital Owner's Manual Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual Multimedia system:

4 5 Info 5 Owner's Manual 5 The Digital Owner's Manual describes the func tions and operation of the vehicle and the multi media system.

# Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Owner's Manual:

R Quick start: find the first steps towards set ting up your vehicle. R Tips: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle. R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions. Additional methods of calling up the Digital Owner's Manual:

Direct access: open the required content in the Digital Owner's Manual by pressing and holding an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia sys tem:

R Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the driver's display. R Language: select the language for the Digital Owner's Manual. 1 Menu 2 Search 3 Back 4 Contents section You can search for keywords using the search field Search, in order to find quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle. Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual, e.g. warning notes, can be expanded and col lapsed. Driver's display: call up brief information as dis play messages in the instrument cluster MBUX Voice Assistant: call up via the voice control system Global search: call up search results for con tents of the Digital Owner's Manual in the home screen For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated while driving. Digital Owner's Manual 19 20 General notes Protection of the environment

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the envi ronment. Please observe the following rec ommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style. Operating conditions:

# Make sure that the tyre pressure is cor rect.

# Do not carry any unnecessary weight

(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them).

# Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib ute to environmental protection.

# Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style:

# Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.

# Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary.

# Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.

# Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.

# Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to of its maximum engine speed.

# Switch off the engine in stationary traf fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function.

# Drive fuel-efficiently. Observe the ECO display for a fuel-efficient driving style. Take-back of end-of-life vehicles EU countries only:

Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) End-

of-Life Vehicles Directive. A network of vehicle take-back points and dis mantlers has been established for you to return your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these points free of charge. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving resources. For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-

back conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz website for your country. Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by not using recycled reconditioned components Mercedes-Benz AG offers recycled recondi tioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the implied warranty is valid as for new parts.

# Recycled reconditioned components and parts from Mercedes-Benz AG.

* NOTE Impairment of the operating effi ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle:

R doors R door pillars R door sills R seats R cockpit R instrument cluster R centre console R lateral roof frame

# Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas.

# Do not carry out repairs or welding.

# Have accessories retrofitted at a quali fied specialist workshop. You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal function. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. General notes 21 Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conver sion parts and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independ ently approved by a testing centre. Certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehi cle's general operating permit. This is the case in the following situations:

R the vehicle type is different from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted. R other road users could be endangered. R the exhaust gas or noise level gets worse. 22 General notes Always specify the vehicle identification number

(VIN) (/ page 562) when ordering Mercedes-

Benz GenuineParts. Owner's Manual This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of this Owner's Manual going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit ted with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illus trations. The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi cle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Touch-sensitive controls In addition to conventional switches and but tons, your vehicle is equipped with touch-sensi tive controls. These are located in the following areas of your vehicle:

R Roof and door control panel R Climate control R Steering wheel R MBUX multimedia system The controls have touch-sensitive surfaces. The surfaces are controlled by pressing or swiping to adjust settings or trigger functions, for example. In the area of the touchscreen, you also receive haptic feedback in the form of a pulse, vibration or the surface structure changing on the touch-

sensitive surface, for example. You receive haptic feedback in the following sit uations, for example:

R When pressing a button on the user interface R When scrolling in a list or table R When reaching a new area on the user inter face, e.g. a pop-up window When handling touch-sensitive surfaces, observe the following points to avoid problems operating:

R Do not affix stickers or similar objects on the surfaces. R Keep the surfaces protected from moisture and wet conditions. R Keep the surfaces free of dust and dirt. Operating safety

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc tions or system failure In order to avoid malfunctions or system fail ures:

# Always have the specified service/

maintenance work as well as any nec essary repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due

& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable R a heavy object strikes the underbody or to improper modifications to electronic components materials on hot parts of the exhaust system Modifications to electronic components, their software or wiring can impair their func tionality and/or the functionality of other networked components or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the vehicle's operating safety.

# You must not tamper with wiring, elec tronic components, or their software.

# Always have work on electrical and electronic devices carried out at a quali fied specialist workshop. If you modify the on-board electronics, the gen eral operating permit is rendered invalid. Observe the "On-board electronics" section in

"Technical data". Flammable materials can ignite on hot parts of the exhaust system.

# When driving on unpaved roads or off-

road, regularly check the vehicle under side.

# Remove trapped plants or other flam mable material, in particular.

# If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle:

R the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road R the vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pot hole General notes 23 chassis components In situations such as this, the body, the underbody, chassis components, wheels or tyres could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may not absorb the loads that arise as intended. If the underbody panelling is damaged, flam mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the underbody panelling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts on the exhaust system.

# Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. or

# If driving safety is impaired while con tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately in accordance 24 General notes with the traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist workshop.

# Never touch component parts of high-

voltage components after an accident. according to the currently valid version of Regu lation UN R10. Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys tem (EQ Boost technology) Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain high voltage components. These compo nents are marked with a high voltage label:

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys tem contain individual high-voltage compo nents. These high-voltage components are under high voltage. If you modify component parts of these high-

voltage components or touch damaged com ponent parts, you may be electrocuted. High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible.

# Never perform modifications to compo nent parts of high-voltage components.

# Never touch damaged component parts of high-voltage components. All work on high voltage components must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Declaration of Conformity Electromagnetic compatibility The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified Wireless vehicle components For EU and EFTA countries only:

The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle and of the informa tion systems and communication devices inte grated into the vehicle:

The wireless components of this vehicle comply with the basic requirements and all other rele vant conditions of Directive 2014/53/EU. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-

Benz Service Centre. Below are the addresses of the manufacturers of wireless components. The addresses cannot be displayed on the equipment due to its size or type. Brazil only:

Note on the two-way radio systems in the vehi cle:

These systems are not protected from harmful interference and must not cause interference in duly approved systems. Nigeria only:

Connection and use of the wireless communica tion equipment in this vehicle are permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission. Thailand only:

The telecommunication equipment in this vehicle meets the requirements of the National Broad casting and Telecommunications Commission

(NBTC). Ukraine only:

The manufacturer hereby declares that the wire less vehicle components meet the technical reg ulations for two-way radios. You can obtain fur ther information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Tyre pressure monitoring sensors Schrader Electronics Ltd, 11 Technology Park, Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland Remote locking system Marquardt GmbH, Schlostrasse 16, 78604 Rie theim, Germany Huf Hlsbeck & Frst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Strasse 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany Hella KGaA Hueck & Co., Rixbecker Strasse 75, 59552 Lippstadt, Germany Remote locking system control unit Marquardt GmbH, Schlostrasse 16, 78604 Rie theim, Germany Leopold Kostal GmbH & Co. KG, Hauert 11, 44227 Dortmund, Germany Continental Automotive GmbH, Siemens strasse 12, 93055 Regensburg, Germany Antenna modules Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH, Stuttgarter Strasse 45-51, 72654 Neckartenzlin gen, Germany Kathrein Automotive GmbH & Co. KG, Rmer ring 1, 31137 Hildesheim, Germany General notes 25 Door handles with near-field communication function Huf Hlsbeck & Frst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Strasse 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany Garage door openers GenteX Corporation, 600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI 49464, USA Sensor for interior monitoring META Systems, Via Galimberti 9, 42124 Reggio Emilia, Italy Radar sensors Autoliv Electronics ASP Inc., 26545 American Drive, Southfield, MI 48034, USA ADC Automotive Distance Control Systems GmbH, Peter-Dornier-Strasse 10, 88131 Lindau, Germany Robert Bosch GmbH, Daimlerstrasse 6, 71229 Leonberg, Germany Mobile communication and telematics Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH, Postfach 2260, 76303 Karlsbad, Germany 26 General notes Panasonic Automotive & Industrial Systems Europe GmbH, Robert-Bosch-Strasse 27-29, 63225 Langen, Germany Mitsubishi Electric Corporation, 2-3-33 Miwa, Sanda-City, 669-1513 Hyogo, Japan Wireless headphones Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH, Postfach 2260, 76303 Karlsbad, Germany Wireless applications in the vehicle Remote control Ruwido Austria GmbH, Kstendorfer Strasse 8, 5202 Neumarkt, Austria Valeo, 43 rue Bayen, 75017 Paris, France Wireless applications in the vehicle Besides the typical frequencies for mobile com munications, Mercedes-Benz vehicles use the following wireless applications. Heater booster function remote control Digades GmbH, uere Weberstrasse 20, 02763 Zittau, Germany Technology Frequency range Remote locking system Wireless power transfer Remote locking system Wireless power transfer 20 kHz (990 kHz) 105 kHz (90119 kHz) 125 kHz (119135 kHz) Transmission output/magnetic field strength 72 dBA/m at 10 m 42 dBA/m at 10 m 42 dBA/m at 10 m Near-field communication 13.55313.567 MHz 42 dBA/m at 10 m Remote locking system, garage door opener, tyre pressure monitor 433 MHz (433.05434.79 MHz) 10 mW e.r.p. General notes 27 Transmission output/magnetic field strength Technology Frequency range Heater booster function remote control, garage door opener Heater booster function remote control, garage door opener Bluetooth, Kleer, RLAN, remote controls, wire less headphones 868 MHz (868.0868.6 MHz) 25 mW e.r.p. 869 MHz (868.7869.2 MHz) 25 mW e.r.p. 2.4 GHz ISM band (24002483.5 MHz) 100 mW e.i.r.p. Sensor for interior monitoring, RLAN 5.8 GHz UNII-3 (57255875 MHz) 25 mW e.i.r.p. Remote locking system 7.25 GHz UWB (6.08.5 GHz) 24 GHz ISM radar 24 GHz UWB radar 24.0524.25 GHz*

24.2526.65 GHz*

76 GHz radar 7677 GHz 55 dBm peak e.i.r.p.

-41.3 dBm/MHz e.i.r.p mean 0 dBm/MHz e.i.r.p. peak 100 mW e.i.r.p.

-41.3 dBm/MHz e.i.r.p mean 0 dBm/50 MHz e.i.r.p. peak 28 General notes Carsharing module Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic field strength

* Model series launched on the market before April 2016. NFC:

13.55313.567 MHz Bluetooth:

24022480 MHz NFC:

42 dBA/m at 10 m Bluetooth:

+4 dBm (power category 2) Jack Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

EC declaration of conformity 1. The signatory, as a representative Manufacturer:

BRANO a.s. 74741 Hradec nad Moravic, Opavsk 1000, Czech Republic ID No.: 64-387-5933 VAT Reg. No.: CZ64-387-5933 declares, as our sole responsibility, that the product:

2. a) Designation:

Jack Type, number:

A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18 B) A 240 580 00 18 C) A 639 580 02 18 Year of manufacture: 2015 Fulfils all relevant conditions Directive No. 2006/42/EC b) Description and purpose of use:

The jack is only intended for raising the specified vehicle in accordance with the operating instruc tions affixed to the jack. 3. Reference data of the harmonised standards or specifications A) ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, DBL 7382.20, MBN 10435, AS 2693 B) ISO 4063, ISO 14341-A, DBL 7392.10, MBN 10435 C) DBL 7392.10, DBL 8230.10 The technical documentation of the product is stored at the manufacturer's plant. Representa tive for the compilation of the technical docu mentation: Director of the Technical Department Brano a.s. 4. Hradec nad Moravic City 5. 05.05.2015 Date Signed by Director of Quality TIREFIT kit Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

EC declaration of conformity In accordance with EC Directive 2006/42/EC We hereby declare that the product Product designation: Daimler electric air pump Model designation: 0851ve, DT/UW 200046 MB part no.: A 000 583 8200 complies with the following relevant regulations:

2004/108/EC Applied harmonised standards, in particular:

DIN EN 55014-1 DIN EN 55014-2:2009-06 Manufacturer: Dunlop Tech GmbH Address: Birkenhainerstrasse 77, 63450 Hanau Authorised representative: IMS dept. Date: June 2015 Signature: IMS-AM, IMS-AE-L General notes 29 Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic devices at a quali fied specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to con necting devices to the diagnostics con nection If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired.

# Only connect the vehicle diagnostics connection to devices which have been tested with regard to their suitability and are considered safe.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. 30 General notes

# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

* NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery.

# Check the charge level of the battery.

# If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor mation being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the neces sary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to safety-rele vant works. Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop:

R safety-relevant works R service and maintenance work R repair work R modifications as well as installations and conversions R work on electronic components MercedesBenz recommends a MercedesBenz service centre. Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehi cles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehi cle checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registra tion data. It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases:

R if your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer. R if your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz service centre. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle owner ship. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre, for example. General notes 31 Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle:

R the safety notes in this manual R technical data for the vehicle R traffic rules and regulations R laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Information on the REACH regulation EU and EFTA countries only:

The REACH regulation (Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a duty to sup ply information about substances of very high concern (SVHCs). MercedesBenz AG acts to the best of its knowl edge to prevent these SVHCs from being used and to enable customers to safely handle these substances. There are SVHCs known to MercedesBenz AG, according to supplier infor mation and internal product information, found in individual components of this vehicle in quan tities of over 0.1 percent by weight. Further information can be obtained at the fol lowing addresses:

R https://reach.daimler.com/de/home/

R https://reach.daimler.com/en/home/

Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems if there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of aids malfunction ing. Have repairs and maintenance work in the area of vehicle components carrying live voltage and transmission aerials carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. Notes for persons with electronic medical aids Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. For this reason, the following can occur in isola ted cases, depending on the aids used:

R aids malfunctioning R adverse health effects Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac turer of the aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and your doctor. Mercedes-

Implied warranty

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instruc tions. Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola tion of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

# Follow the instructions in these operat ing instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehi cle damage. 32 General notes QR code for rescue card The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card con tains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at https://

www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. Data storage Electronic control units Electronic control units are fitted in your vehicle. Some of these are necessary for the safe opera tion of your vehicle, while some assist you when driving (driver assistance systems). In addition, your vehicle provides comfort and entertainment functions, which are also made possible by elec tronic control units. Electronic control units contain data memories which can temporarily or permanently store technical information about the vehicle's operat ing state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or faults. In general, this information documents the state of a component part, a module, a system or the surroundings such as:

R operating status of system components (e.g. fill levels, battery status, tyre pressure) R status messages concerning the vehicle or its individual components (e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, longitudinal accel eration, lateral acceleration, display of fas tened seat belts) R malfunctions or faults in important system components (e.g. lights, brakes) R information on events leading to vehicle R system reactions in special driving situations

(e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of sta bility control systems) R ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain damage sensor) In addition to providing the actual control unit function, this data assists the manufacturer in detecting and rectifying faults and optimising vehicle functions. The majority of this data is temporary and is only processed in the vehicle itself. Only a small portion of the data is stored in the event or fault memory. When your vehicle is serviced, technical data from the vehicle can be read out by service net work employees (e.g. workshops, manufactur ers) or third parties (e.g. breakdown services). Services include, for example, repair services, maintenance processes, warranty claims and quality assurance measures. The read out is per formed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The respective service network locations or third parties collect, process and use the data. They document technical statuses of the vehicle, assist in finding faults and improving quality and are transmitted to the manufacturer, if neces sary. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this, the manufacturer requires technical data from vehicles. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet as part of repair or maintenance work. Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle convenience and info tainment functions yourself. This includes, for example:

R multimedia data such as music, films or pho tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system R address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an inte grated navigation system R entered navigation destinations R data about the use of internet services This data can be saved locally in the vehicle or it is located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle (e.g. a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player). If this data is stored in the vehicle, you can delete it at any time. This data is sent to third parties only at your request, par ticularly when you use online services in accord ance with the settings that you have selected. You can store or change convenience settings/

individualisations in the vehicle at any time. Depending on the equipment, this includes, for example:

R settings for the seat and steering wheel posi tions R suspension and climate control settings R customisations such as interior lighting If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can control this by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone can be output via the multimedia system. Cer tain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type of integration, this can include:

R general vehicle data R position data This allows you to use selected apps on your smartphone, such as navigation or music play General notes 33 back. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehi cle data is not directly accessible. Which type of further data processing occurs is determined by the provider of the specific app used. Which set tings you can make, if any, depends on the spe cific app and the operating system of your smartphone. Online services Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connec tion, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wire less network connection is enabled via the vehi cle's transmission and reception unit or via con nected mobile end devices (e.g. smartphones). Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online serv ices and applications/apps provided by the man ufacturer or other providers. Manufacturer's services Regarding online services of the manufacturer, the individual functions are described by the pose of the collection and use of personal data when services are provided by third parties. Copyright Information on licences for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website:

https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource 34 General notes manufacturer in a suitable place (e.g. Owner's Manual, website of the manufacturer) along with the relevant data protection information. Per sonal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data is exchanged via a secure connection, e.g. the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Personal data is collected, pro cessed and used via the provision of services exclusively on the basis of legal permissions or with prior consent. The services and functions (sometimes subject to a fee) can usually be activated or deactivated. In some cases, this also applies to the entire vehicle's data connection. This excludes, in par ticular, legally prescribed functions and services. Third party services If it is possible to use online services from other providers, these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. The manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged. For this reason, please ask the service provider for information about the type, extent and pur Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint system The restraint system includes the following com ponents:

R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems The restraint system can help prevent the vehi cle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, seat belt tensioners and/or airbags supplement the protection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Seat belt tensioners and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident. In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu pant must observe the following information:

R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos sible. R Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. However, no system available today can com pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying. Occupant safety 35 Reduced restraint system protection

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system Vehicle occupants may no longer be protec ted as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system.

# Never alter the parts of the restraint system.

# Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their software. If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom modate a person with disabilities, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driv ing aids which have been approved for your vehi cle by Mercedes-Benz. Restraint system functionality When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint sys 36 Occupant safety tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional. Malfunctioning restraint system A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys tem if:

R the 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on R the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc tions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe cialist workshop. Function of the restraint system in an acci dent How the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated:

R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-

emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the colli sion. Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a deci sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, for exam ple, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle deceleration. Depending on the detected deployment situa tion, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other:

R Seat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: fron tal impact R Knee airbag: frontal impact R Side airbag: side impact R Centre airbag: side impact, rollover R Window airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact R Belt airbag: frontal impact R PRE-SAFE Impulse Side: side impact The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 47).

& WARNING Rick of burns from hot airbag components The airbag parts are hot after an airbag has been deployed.

# Do not touch the airbag parts.

# Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, partic ularly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an airbag deployed. If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an air bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released:

R The bang will not generally affect your hear ing. R In general, the powder released is not haz ardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Occupant safety 37

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly.

# Always ensure that all vehicle occu pants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Always observe the instructions about the cor rect driver's seat position and adjusting the seat

(/ page 96). In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro vide the intended level of protection, each vehi cle occupant must observe the following infor mation:

R The seat belt must not be twisted and must fit tightly and snugly across the body. 38 Occupant safety R The seat belt must be routed across the centre of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. R The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. R Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoul der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin ted, abrasive or fragile objects. R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Never allow babies and chil dren to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads

(/ page 119). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat. If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on

"Children in the vehicle" (/ page 52). Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. You could slip beneath the seat belt and injure yourself.

# Adjust the seat properly before com mencing your journey.

# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable addi tional restraint system.

# Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in a suitable restraint system.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt anchorage Objects next to the front seat that block the seat belt buckle or the moving seat belt anchorage on the front seat impair the func tion of the seat belt tensioners.

# Before starting the journey, make sure that there are no objects around the seat belt buckle or between the front seat and door.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations:

R the seat belt is damaged, has been modi fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty R modifications have been made to the seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified belt tensioners may be deployed unintentionally or not function as intended.

# Never modify the seat belts, seat belt tensioners, seat belt anchorages or seat belt retractors.

# Make sure that the seat belts are not damaged, are not worn and are clean.

# Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tension ers Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protec tive function.

# Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners immediately replaced at a qualified specialist work shop. Occupant safety 39 Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident.

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.

# Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted. Information on the belt airbag in the rear seat belt The BELTBAG identification indicates that a rear seat belt is equipped with a belt airbag. When activated, the belt airbag increases the protected area of the vehicle occupant's ribcage. 40 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to use of a non-approved child restraint sys tem In an accident, the belt airbag may damage a non-approved child restraint system or a child restraint system which has not been approved for use in conjunction with the belt airbag. As a result, the child restraint system may not be able to provide the intended level of protection. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom mends that you only use a child restraint sys tem which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz in combination with a belt airbag. Information on child restraint systems

(/ page 55). Extending/retracting the seat belt extender in the rear The seat belt extender for the rear seat helps you fasten your seat belt.

# Close the door. The seat belt extender extends. The seat belt extender retracts again in the fol lowing cases:

R the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle R the seat belt tongue is not engaged in the seat belt buckle within a certain time R the respective door is opened R a certain speed is exceeded after pulling away The seat belt extender must always be retracted while the vehicle is in motion.

% You can deactivate the seat belt extender. Activate the child safety lock for the rear side windows (/ page 65). When fitting a child restraint system to the rear seat, observe the vehicle-specific infor mation (/ page 57). Fastening and adjusting seat belts If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can not be pulled out any further.

# Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the Seat belt adjustment function seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor responding seat.

# Press and hold the seat belt outlet release and slide seat belt outlet 3 into the desired position.

# Let go of the seat belt outlet release and ensure that seat belt outlet 3 locks into position.

* NOTE Deployment of the seat belt ten sioner and side impact airbag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front passenger seat, the seat belt tensioner and the side impact airbag may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other sys tems.

# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: if the front seat belt is not pulled tightly across your body, the seat belt adjustment may automatically apply a cer tain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia sys tem (/ page 41). Releasing a seat belt

# Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue. Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Occupant protection

# Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment. Occupant safety 41 Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger The seat belt warning lamp in the instru ment display is a reminder that all vehicle occu pants must wear their seat belts correctly. In addition, a warning tone may sound. As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. Function of the rear seat belt status display The rear seat belt status display is only available for certain countries. 42 Occupant safety When the ignition is switched on, the rear seat belt status display informs you for a certain amount of time which rear seat belt is not fas tened. The status of the rear seat belt can be recog nised by the colour of the seat symbol in the instrument cluster:

R Grey: rear seat belt not fastened. R Green: the seat belt tongue of the rear seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the corresponding seat. Every vehicle occupant must always fasten their seat belt correctly before starting a journey. R Red: a vehicle occupant in the rear has pressed the release button on the seat belt buckle and unfastened the rear seat belt. If a vehicle occupant unfastens a seat belt in the rear, the rear seat belt status display appears again. In addition, a warning tone may sound. Airbags Overview of airbags Driver's/front passenger seat 1 Knee airbag 2 Driver's airbag 3 Front passenger airbag 4 Window airbag 5 Side airbag 6 Centre airbag1 1)Only for certain countries. Rear seats 4 Window airbag 7 Side airbag The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Potential protection from each airbag:

R Kneebag: thigh, knee and lower leg R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head R Sidebag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat and ribcage occupants R Centre airbag: head and ribcage R Windowbag: head Information on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is enabled If the front passenger front airbag is enabled, a child on the front passenger seat may be struck by the front passenger airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information . Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat. Information on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 47).

* NOTE Important points to remember if the front passenger seat is unoccupied In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if:

R There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat. R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.

# Stow objects in a suitable place.

# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Occupant safety 43 Depending on the detected accident situation, the window airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied. Protection provided by the airbags Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection provided by a correctly fastened seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended pro tective function. Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following:

R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. 44 Occupant safety R Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information.

# Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant. To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular:

R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the informa tion on the correct driver's seat position

(/ page 96). R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. R Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. R Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deploy ment area of the airbag. R If children are travelling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes (/ page 52). R Always stow and secure objects correctly. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the follow ing in particular:

R There are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side wall trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deploy ment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation. R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. Limited protection provided by airbags

& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi cations to the cover of an airbag If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly.

# Never modify the cover of an airbag and do not affix objects to it. The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 42).

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as inten ded. In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could be restricted.

# You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the correspond ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc tioning sensors in the door The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work per formed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged.

# Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.

# Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro tection.

# Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced. Have deployed airbags replaced immediately. Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys tem. The front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled accordingly. Occupant safety 45 When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, always make sure of the follow ing:

R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi tioned correctly (/ page 57). R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. R Never place objects, such as cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. R Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust ment. R The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. R The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina tion and the head restraint setting accord ingly. Status of the front passenger front airbag R The backrest of the forward-facing child 46 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system Objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system could affect the func tion of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff.

# Do not place any objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system.

# The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.

# The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possi ble, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.

# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information:

R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 37). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos sible. The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example in the following situations:

R The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the sitting sur face.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:

R the classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R the front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. R the person is seated correctly.

# Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas sification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place after the front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag. Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps

(/ page 47). Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica tor lamps Vehicles without automatic front passenger air bag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side . Occupant safety 47 If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat. Have automatic front passenger airbag shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation. After fitting a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat:

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continu ously. Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously. The status of the front passenger airbag is dis played via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps after the self-test:

R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. The indicator lamp goes out after approx imately 60 seconds. R ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disa bled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. 48 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from using a rearward-facing child restraint system when the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. Always ensure that the front passenger air bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information . Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do not fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat. Instead, fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat. After fitting a forward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat: depend ing on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. Always observe the fol lowing information.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forward-

facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and you position the front passenger seat too close to the cockpit, in the event of an acci dent, the child could:

R Come into contact with the vehicle inte rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is lit, for example. R Be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.

# Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet on the vehicle to the shoul der belt guide on the child restraint sys tem. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly.

# Always observe the child restraint sys tem manufacturer's installation instruc tions. When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information . If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con tinuously or be off, depending on the person's stature. A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information:

R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person with a stature correspond ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person with a build corresponding to that of an adult should not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp either lights up continuously or remains off, depending on the classifica tion.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off: move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the per son of smaller stature should use a rear seat.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the self-test, the co-

driver airbag is disabled. If the co-driver seat is occupied, always ensure that:

R The classification of the person in the co-

driver seat is correct, and the co-driver airbag is enabled or disabled as is appro priate for the person in the co-driver seat. R The person is seated properly with a cor rectly fastened seat belt. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

R Child restraint system on the front passenger seat . Occupant safety 49 R Suitable positioning of the child restraint sys tem (/ page 57). PRE-SAFE system PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protec tion) PRE-SAFE is able to detect certain critical driv ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas ures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE can implement the following meas ures independently of each other:

R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: close the sliding sunroof. R Vehicles with memory function: move the front passenger seat to a more favourable seat position. R Vehicles with memory function in the rear compartment: move the outer rear seats to a more favourable seat position. 50 Occupant safety R Vehicles with multicontour seat: increase

# If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, the air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest. move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases. R PRE-SAFE Sound: provided that the multi media system is switched on, generates a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro tective mechanism of a person's hearing.

* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat The automatic adjustment of the seat posi tion may result in damage to the seat and/or the object.

# Stow objects in a suitable place. If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings your self. Function of PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) PRE-SAFE PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact. PRE-SAFE PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other:

R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. higher flashing frequency. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is cancel led automatically when the vehicle pulls away. Reversing the PRE-SAFE system measures R Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. System limits The system will not initiate any action in the fol lowing situations:

R when reversing or or R when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there is a risk of a rear impact The system will not initiate any braking applica tion in the following situations:

R whilst driving R when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist Function of PRE-SAFE Impulse Side If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE-

SAFE Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the centre of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact is anticipated. This increases the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant. Vehicles with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: the body can also be slightly raised. If PRE-SAFE Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual(/ page 575) display mes sage appears. Automatic measures after an accident Depending on the type and severity of the acci dent, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following measures can be implemented, for example:

R automatic braking (post-collision brake) R activating the hazard warning lights R triggering an automatic emergency call

(/ page 409) R switching off the engine To restart the vehicle, switch the ignition off and switch it back on (/ page 174). Depending on the type and severity of the accident, it is possible that the vehicle can no longer be started. R switching off the fuel supply R unlocking the vehicle doors R lowering the side windows R displaying the emergency guide in the media display R switching on the interior lighting Function of the post-collision brake Depending on the accident situation, the post-

collision brake can minimise the severity of a fur ther collision or even avoid it. If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can implement automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied. The driver can cancel automatic braking by tak ing the following actions:

R braking more strongly than automatic brak ing Occupant safety 51 R fully depressing the accelerator pedal with force Safely transporting children in the vehicle Always observe when children are travelling in the vehicle

% Also strictly observe the safety notes for the specific situation. In this way you can recog nise potential risks and avoid dangers if chil dren are travelling in the vehicle

(/ page 52). Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing the child in the child restraint system may have seri ous consequences. Always be diligent in secur ing a child carefully before every journey. To improve protection for children younger than twelve years old or under 1.50 m in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information:

R Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi cle. 52 Occupant safety R The child restraint system must be appropri ate to the age, weight and size of the child. R The vehicle seat must be suitable for fitting a child restraint system (/ page 57). Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than chil dren secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you fit a child restraint system to a rear seat. Generic term "child restraint system"

The generic term child restraint system is used in this Owner's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example:

R a baby car seat R a rearward-facing child seat R a forward-facing child seat R a child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Observing laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle. Make sure that the child restraint system is approved in accordance with the valid test speci fications and guidelines. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Only use approved child restraint systems Only child restraint systems that meet the fol lowing UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle:

R UN-R44 R UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems) Information on child restraint system approval categories and details on the approval label on the child restraint system (/ page 57). Detecting risks, avoiding danger Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems:

R the ISOFIX or i-Size mounting brackets R the vehicle's seat belt system R the Top Tether anchorages Fitting an ISOFIX or an i-Size child restraint sys tem is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of fitting the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys tem, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system

(/ page 60). Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo site direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Always secure a child restraint system cor rectly

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended.

# Be sure to comply with the manufactur er's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.

# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.

# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint sys tem.

# Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them.

# Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle If the child restraint system is fitted incor rectly or not secured, it may come loose. The child restraint system can be thrown about and strike vehicle occupants.

# Always install child restraint systems correctly, even when not in use.

# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating Occupant safety 53

instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information:

Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys tem to the rear seat (/ page 60). Secure the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat . Secure the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat . Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems . If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the jour ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the cur rent situation (/ page 47). R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. R Also secure Top Tether if present. 54 Occupant safety Notes for vehicles with the MBUX Interior Assistant If the child restraint system is not fastened by the seat belt, a corresponding message appears in the multimedia display (/ page 315). Do not alter the child restraint system

& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi cations to the child restraint system The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury.

# Never modify a child restraint system.

# Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer. MercedesBenz recommends Mercedes-Benz care products for cleaning child restraint sys tems recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition Avoid direct sunlight

& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused seat is exposed to direct sunlight

& WARNING Risk of burns when the child by the use of damaged child restraint systems Child restraint systems or their securing sys tems which have been subjected to stress in an accident may no longer be able to per form their intended protective function. The child cannot then be restrained.

# Always replace child restraint systems immediately that have been damaged or involved in an accident.

# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again. If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts may become extremely hot. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly the metallic parts of the child-

restraint system.

# Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight.

# Protect the child restraint system, for example, with a blanket.

# If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child in it.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Observe when stopping or parking

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular:

R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

R releasing the parking brake. R change the transmission position. R start the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the key out of reach of children. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the

"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If people particularly children are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injury!

# Never leave anyone particularly chil dren unattended in the vehicle.

# Never leave animals in the vehicle unat tended. Occupant safety 55 Overview of recommended child restraint systems

% Further information on the correct child restraint system can be obtained at a quali fied specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Vehicles with belt airbags:

When securing a child in a child restraint system on an outer rear seat, it is essential to observe the following instructions:

R Only use a child restraint system approved by Mercedes-Benz.

- Weight category 0, 0+ or 1: the child restraint system must be installed on the ISOFIX or i-Size child seat securing sys tem.

- Weight category II/III: only use the approved KIDFIX XP child seats. R Secure a rearward-facing child restraint sys tem with the ISOFIX or the i-Size child seat securing system. 56 Occupant safety R Secure a forward-facing child restraint sys tem with the ISOFIX or the i-Size child seat securing system and, if present, the Top Tether anchorage. R Observe the notes in "Belt airbag in rear seat belt" (/ page 39). Securing with ISOFIX Category 0+ (up to 13 kg and approx. 15 months) Type1 BABY SAFE plus Type1 DUO plus Order number2 A 000 970 43 02 1 Manufacturer: Britax Rmer. 2 With colour code 9H95. Category I (9 to 18 kg and from approx imately 9 months to 4 years) Type1 DUO plus Approval E1 04 301 133 Securing with the vehicle seat belt Order number2 A 000 970 43 02 Category 0 (up to 10 kg and approx. 6 months) and category 0+ (up to 13 kg and approx. 15 months) Type1 BABY SAFE plus II 1 Manufacturer: Britax Rmer. 2 With colour code 9H95. Category II/III (15 to 36 kg and from approx imately 4 to 12 years) Type1 KIDFIX XP Size category E Approval E1 04 301 146 Approval E1 04 301 146 Order number2 A 000 970 38 02 Order number2 B6 6 86 8224 1 Manufacturer: Britax Rmer. 2 With colour code 9H95. Approval E1 04 301 304 Order number2 A 000 970 49 02 Type1 Approval AMG KIDFIX XP E1 04 301 304 Order number2 A 000 970 33 02 1 Manufacturer: Britax Rmer. 2 With colour code 9H95. 1 Manufacturer: Britax Rmer. 2 With colour code 9H95. Category I (9 to 18 kg) Type1 DUO plus Size category B1 Approval E1 04 301 133 Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for fitting a child restraint system is correct for the current situation

(/ page 47). Left/right rear seat Preferred securing system:

ISOFIX child seat securing system

(/ page 59) or

(/ page 60)

(/ page 62) i-Size child seat securing system Also secure Top Tether if present Alternative securing system:

7 Vehicle seat belt Front passenger seat Securing system:

7 Vehicle seat belt Be sure to observe:

R If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag R Observe the notes on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 45) Centre rear seat Securing system:

7 Vehicle seat belt Approval categories for child restraint sys tems Only use approved child restraint systems Only child restraint systems that meet the fol lowing UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle:

R UN-R44 R UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems) Identification on the child restraint system Information about the approval category, weight category and approval number, for example, is on the approval label on the child restraint sys tem. Occupant safety 57 There may be further information such as the ISOFIX size categories, depending on the approval category of the child restraint system. Approval categories in accordance with UN-

R44 Example of an approval label R Universal: child restraint systems in the

"Universal" category are approved for instal 58 Occupant safety lation in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled U, UF or IUF. The identification IUF refers to ISOFIX child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or support points. R Semi-Universal: child restraint systems in the "Semi-Universal" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. R Vehicle-specific: child restraint systems in the "vehicle-specific" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Approval categories in accordance with UN-

R129 Example of an approval label R iSize: child restraint systems in the "iSize"

category are approved for installation in vehi cles with iSize mounting brackets. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled iU. The identification iU refers to iSize child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or support points. Observe the suitability of vehicle seats Depending on the approval category, there are forward-facing and rearward-facing child restraint systems. Their use can be restricted for certain vehicle seats:

R Suitability of seats for securing ISOFIX child restraint systems (/ page 59). R Suitability of seats for securing iSize child restraint systems (/ page 60). R Suitability of seats for securing belt-secured child restraint systems ISOFIX and i-Size child seat securing systems Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed restraint systems. The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in accordance with UN R44 (/ page 57). Attach only child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with UN R44 as per the following ISOFIX tables. Weight group 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approx. 6 months) Left/right rear seat Size class Equipment E ISO/R1 IL IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint sys tem manufacturer's vehicle model list. Weight group 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months) restraint system. Left/right rear seat Left/right rear seat Carry cot Size class Equipment F ISO/L1 G ISO/L2 X X X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight group and/or size class. Size class Equipment E ISO/R1 D ISO/R2, ISO/R2X IL IL Occupant safety 59 Size class Equipment Left/right rear seat C ISO/R3 IL (1) IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint sys tem manufacturer's vehicle model list.

(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child Weight group 1 (918 kg and approx. 9 months to 4 years) Left/right rear seat Size class Equipment D ISO/R2, ISO/R2X C ISO/R3 B ISO/F2 IL IL (1) IUF 60 Occupant safety Size class Equipment B1 ISO/F2X A ISO/F3 IUF IUF Left/right rear seat IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint sys tem manufacturer's vehicle model list. IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight group.

(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), in accordance with UN R129

(/ page 57). Child restraint systems that are permitted in accordance with UN R44 as per the ISOFIX tables (/ page 59) or UN R129 as per the following iSize tables may be attached. iSize child restraint systems (ISO/R2, ISO/

F2X, ISO/B2, ISO/B3) Front passenger seat Left/right rear seat X iU move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the X Not suitable for an i-Size i-U Suitable for forward-facing seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child child restraint system in the and rearward-facing i-Size restraint system.

"Universal" category. child restraint systems in the

"Universal" category. Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching iSize child restraint systems iSize is a standardised securing system for spe cially designed restraint systems. The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an iSize child restraint system Fitting the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system on the rear seat

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is exceeded. Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example.

# If the child and the child restraint sys tem together weigh more than 33 kg, use only an ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system that secures the child using the vehicle seat belt.

# Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system:

R in the manufacturer's installation and operat ing instructions for the child restraint system used R on a label on the child restraint system, if present Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When fitting a child restraint system, observe the following:

O Always observe the correct use of the seats and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system. ISOFIX child seat securing system

(/ page 59) or iSize child seat securing system

(/ page 60) O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. When fitting an ISOFIX child restraint sys tem, also observe the following:

O When using a Group 0/0+ baby car seat and a Group 1 rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. O When using a Group 1 forward-facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possi ble. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints imme diately and adjust them correctly. O For certain child restraint systems in weight group 2 or 3, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possi ble contact with the roof. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong Occupant safety 61 direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints accordingly. When fitting an iSize child restraint sys tem, also observe the following:

O When using a rearward-facing child restraint system: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint sys tem. O When using a forward-facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possi ble. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints imme diately and adjust them correctly. 62 Occupant safety Before every journey, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system or the iSize child restraint system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX or iSize mounting brackets.

* NOTE Be careful not to damage the seat belt for the centre seat when fitting the child restraint system The following may occur:

R The Top Tether belt may either sit too loose or too tight

# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap R The child restraint system may be loos ped. ened, positioned incorrectly or damaged and then not offer the intended protec tion.

# Never adjust the seat after the child restraint system has been installed. If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt:

The risk of injury can be reduced by a Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with ISOFIX or iSize and the vehicle.

# Fold upholstered lining 1 upwards.

# Turn the support on the rear side of uphol stered lining 1 by 90. Upholstered lining 1 will remain folded upwards.

# Attach the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint sys tem to both mounting brackets 2 in the vehicle. Securing a Top Tether

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from adjusting the seat after fitting a child restraint system Vehicles with electrically adjustable rear seats:

# If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards

(/ page 104).

# If cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3 was not removed, fold up cover 2.

# Fit the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system with Top Tether. Comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.

# Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head restraint 1 between the two head restraint bars.

# Hook Top Tether hook 5 of Top Tether belt 4 into Top Tether anchorage 3 without twisting.

# Tension Top Tether belt 4. Comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's instal lation instructions when doing so.

# If necessary, fold down cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3.

# If necessary, slide head restraint 1 down wards (/ page 104). Make sure that you do Occupant safety 63 not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 4. Child safety locks Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could:

R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

R Releasing the parking brake.

# Never leave animals in the vehicle unat tended. Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows. Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the "Notes on the addi tional door lock" section. The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside. 64 Occupant safety R Changing the transmission position. R Starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle key out of reach of vehicle. children. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the

"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If people particularly children are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injury!

# Never leave anyone particularly chil dren unattended in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example

# Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are travelling in the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows Occupant safety 65 R With indicator lamp 1 off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driv er's door. When the child safety lock is activated, the con trols in the rear compartment are disabled for:

R the rear side windows R the adjustment of the front passenger seat from the rear compartment R the roller sunblinds:

of the rear side windows of the rear window in the roof Notes on pets in the vehicle

# Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or

# Make sure that the child safety locks are 2 (deactivate). working properly.

# To activate/deactivate: press button 2. Opening/closing the side window in the rear is possible:

R With indicator lamp 1 lit: via the switch on the driver's door.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat tended in the vehicle If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten ded or unsecured, they could possibly press down buttons or switches. 66 Occupant safety Thereby an animal may:

R activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example R switch systems on or off and endanger other road users Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking manoeuvres and injure vehicle occupants in the process.

# Never leave animals in the vehicle unat tended.

# Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car rier.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the key out of reach of children. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the

"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

* NOTE Damage to the key caused by magnetic fields

# Keep the key away from strong mag netic fields. Key Overview of key functions

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular:

R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

R releasing the parking brake. R change the transmission position. R start the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Opening and closing 67 1 Indicator lamp 2 Locks 3 Unlocks (with embossed surface) 4 Opens/closes the boot lid

% If check lamp 1 does not light up after pressing the or s button, the bat tery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible. Replacing the key battery (/ page 69). The key locks and unlocks the following compo nents:

R Doors R Fuel filler flap 68 Opening and closing R Boot lid If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti-

theft protection is primed again. Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the key's functionality. Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Locking function

# Activate or deactivate Acoustic lock.

% Please note:

The selected setting for the acoustic locking verification signal must comply with the rele vant national road and traffic regulations. In some countries, including Germany, using the acoustic locking verification signal is for bidden by traffic laws (in accordance with 16 Para. 1 and 30 Para. 1 of the German national road traffic regulations). The driver of the vehicle must comply with these regu lations. In countries where the use of this function is forbidden, this function is not activated in the vehicle and must not be acti vated. Changing the unlocking settings Possible unlocking functions of the key:

R Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap

# To switch between settings: press the and s buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice. Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected:

R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the button twice. R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel filler flap are unlocked. Deactivating the key functions If you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time, you can reduce the energy consumption of the respective key. To do so, deactivate the key functions.

# To deactivate: press the s button on the key twice in quick succession. The key indicator lamp flashes twice briefly and lights up once.

# To activate: press any button on the key.

% When the vehicle is started with the key in the stowage compartment of the centre con sole, the key functions are automatically activated (/ page 175). Removing/inserting the emergency key

# To remove: press release knob 1. Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly.

# Fully remove emergency key 2. Opening and closing 69

# Keep batteries out of the reach of chil dren.

# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat teries

# To insert: insert emergency key 2 at mark ing 3 until it engages.

% You can use emergency key 2 to attach the key to a key ring. Replacing the key battery

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.

& DANGER Serious damage to health caused by swallowing batteries Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub stances. Swallowing batteries may cause serious damage to health. There is a risk of fatal injury. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Requirements:

70 Opening and closing R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist work shop.

# Remove the emergency key (/ page 69).

# Press emergency key 2 into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until cover 1 opens. When doing so, do not hold cover 1 closed.

# Insert the emergency key into the opening of the cover and lift up covering 3 and remove it.

# Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery 4 falls out of the key.

# Insert the new battery with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.

# Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other impurities.

# Insert the front tabs of covering 3 into the housing and then press on both sides to close it.

# Make sure that covering 3 is completely closed.

# Insert the front tabs of cover 1 into the housing and then press until it is completely closed.

# Insert emergency key 2 into the key until it engages. Problems with the key You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes:

R The key battery is weak or discharged. R The key is faulty.

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 69).

# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock

# Have the key checked at a qualified specialist

(/ page 69). workshop. There is interference from a powerful radio signal source The key function is impaired by, for example:

R high voltage power lines R mobile phones R electronic devices (Notebooks, Tablets) R shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or auto matic barriers

# Make sure that there is a sufficient distance between the key and the potential source of interference. You have lost a key

# Have the key deactivated at a qualified spe

# If necessary, have the mechanical lock cialist workshop. replaced as well. Doors Notes on the additional door lock The additional door lock is only available for vehicles for the United Kingdom.

& WARNING Risk of injury to persons inside the vehicle when the additional door lock is activated If the additional door lock is activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside.

# Never leave persons, in particular chil dren, unattended in the vehicle.

# If there are persons in the vehicle, do not activate the additional door lock. The additional door lock is automatically activa ted in the following situations:

R The vehicle is locked using the key. R The vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO. Opening and closing 71 If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes me connect, the additional door lock is not activa ted. If the additional door lock is activated, the doors cannot be opened from the inside.

% After locking you can issue a signal with the horn. You can prevent the additional door lock from being activated by deactivating interior protec tion before locking the vehicle (/ page 95). Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside

# United Kingdom only: observe the notes on the additional door lock (/ page 71). 72 Opening and closing Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

# Pull door handle 1.

# To unlock: press button 1.

# To lock: press button 2. The indicator lamp lights up. This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. The vehicle is not unlocked:

R If you have locked the vehicle using the key. R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY LESS-GO. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with a Digital Vehicle Key Requirements:

R one of the following versions of the Digital Vehicle Key is available:

- Digital Vehicle Key sticker suitable mobile phone R the vehicle is equipped with the "Digital Vehi cle Key" function. R the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect: https://

www.mercedes.me. R the mobile phone is sufficiently charged.

% Mercedes-Benz recommends that you carry the emergency key in case of function restrictions.

% If the mobile phone is in a protective case, this can impair the functionality. If the vehicle has been parked for longer than two weeks, the NFC aerial in the door handle is deactivated.

# Pull the door handle. The NFC aerial is activated. Opening and closing 73 In the following cases, the door handles are retracted:

R when the vehicle is locked R when pulling away R after waiting for a time

# Touch the door handle on the driver's door in the area where NFC aerial 1 is located with the part of the Digital Vehicle Key where the NFC aerial is located. The vehicle is locked or unlocked alternately. If you lose the Digital Vehicle Key, deactivate the

"Digital Vehicle Key" service in Mercedes me connect via https://www.mercedes.me. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY LESS-GO Requirements:

R the key is outside the vehicle R the distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m R the driver's door and the door at which the door handle is used are closed In the following cases, the door handles are extended:

R when the vehicle is unlocked R when the vehicle key is detected R when a door is opened

# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur face of the door handle. 74 Opening and closing

% If the door handle is not extended, touch

# Use the emergency key to unlock or lock the sensor surface 1 to unlock. vehicle (/ page 69).

# Convenience closing: touch recessed sen

# Have the vehicle and key checked at a quali sor surface 2 for an extended period. fied specialist workshop. Activating/deactivating the automatic lock ing feature The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn ing faster than walking pace.

% Further information on convenience closing

(/ page 85). If you open the boot lid from outside, the boot lid is automatically unlocked. Problems with KEYLESS-GO You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. Possible causes:

R The key functions have been deactivated

(/ page 68). R The key battery is weak or discharged. R The key is faulty.

# Activate the key functions (/ page 68).

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 69). There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. The KEYLESS-GO function is impaired by, for example:

R high voltage power lines R mobile phones R electronic devices (Notebooks, Tablets) R shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or auto matic barriers

# Make sure that there is a sufficient distance between the key and the potential source of interference.

# To activate: press and hold button 2 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds. Opening and closing 75

# To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds. When the vehicle is locked automatically, the indicator lamp in button 2 lights up. In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated:

R While the vehicle is being tow started/

R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna pushed. mometer. Power closing function If you push the door into the lock to the first detent position, the power closing function will automatically pull the door into the lock.

# Pull and hold the door handle.

# To unlock: turn the emergency key anti-

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emergency key Unlocking a left-hand vehicle door with the emergency key element Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO clockwise to position 1.

# Release the door handle. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

# If the door handle is retracted: press the front area of door handle 1. The door handle folds slightly outward.

# Pull and hold the door handle. 76 Opening and closing Locking the doors with the emergency key

# If the door handle is extended: slightly pull and hold the door handle.

# To unlock: turn the emergency key anti-

clockwise to position 1.

# Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into opening 1 on the door lock.

# To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle:

turn the emergency key clockwise as far as it will go.

# To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle:

turn the emergency key anti-clockwise as far as it will go. If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from outside. Boot Opening the boot lid

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

# Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid.

# Never drive with the boot lid open. Vehicles with boot lid convenience closing

* NOTE Damage to the boot lid by obsta cles above the vehicle The boot lid swings upwards when it is opened.

# Therefore, make sure that there is suffi cient clearance above the boot lid. You have the following options for opening the boot lid:

# Pull the boot lid handle.

# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 80).

# Pull boot lid remote operating switch 1.

# Press and hold the H button on the key.

# For a boot lid stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards and release it as soon as it starts to open. With the boot lid opening limiter activated, manually pull the stopped boot lid upwards. Opening and closing 77 If an object obstructs the boot lid during the automatic opening process, object recognition will stop the boot lid. The object recognition function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. Closing the boot lid

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.

# Before the journey, secure objects, lug gage or loads against slipping or tipping over. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. R Pull the boot lid handle.

# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper. You have the following options for closing the boot lid:

# Pull the boot lid downwards slightly. Release it as soon as it begins to close.

# For a boot lid stopped in an intermediate position, push it downwards. The boot lid will continue to close. 78 Opening and closing You have the following options for closing the boot lid:

# Pull the boot lid downwards using the handle recess and push it closed.

% If you lightly push the boot lid closed, the power closing function will automatically pull the boot lid into the lock. Vehicles with boot lid convenience closing

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the boot lid Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people in the closing area.

# Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area.

# Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:

R Press the H button on the key. R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the boot lid.

# Press the remote operating switch for the boot lid 1. Opening and closing 79 In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trap ped.

# Ensure that no body parts are in the closing area.

# If someone is trapped, use one of the following options:

R Press the H button on the key. R Press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the boot lid. R Pull the boot lid handle.

# With the boot lid completely opened, press and hold the H button on the key (with the key in the vicinity of the vehicle). Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS

# With the boot lid completely opened, make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 80). Boot lid automatic reversing function If an object obstructs the boot lid during the automatic closing process, the boot lid will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function The reversing function will not react:

R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers R towards the end of the closing procedure

# Press the closing button 1 on the boot lid. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

# Press the locking button 2 on the boot lid. If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the boot lid will close and the vehicle will be locked.

 

 

80 Opening and closing HANDS-FREE ACCESS function

% A warning tone sounds while the boot lid is When making the kicking movement, make sure that your feet are firmly on the ground, other wise you could lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Observe the following notes:

R The key is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle while performing the kicking movement. R Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again. opening or closing.

& WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system.

# Always ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the boot lid:

R when using an automatic car wash R when using a high pressure cleaner

# Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure that the key located is at least 3 m away from the vehicle in such situa tions. With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or interrupt boot lid movement by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately. Observe the notes when opening (/ page 76) and closing (/ page 77) the boot lid. The boot lid could be opened or closed uninten tionally, in the following situations:

R If a person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. R If objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage. R If clamping straps, tarpaulins or other cover ings are pulled over the bumper. R If a protective mat with a length reaching over the boot sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. R If the protective mat is not secured correctly. R When working on the trailer coupling, trailers or rear bicycle racks. Opening and closing 81 Switching separate boot locking on and off Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Locking function Switching separate boot locking on

# Select Block boot.

# Create a PIN.

# Press OK to confirm the PIN.

# Enter the PIN again and confirm it. The boot will remain locked if you unlock the vehicle centrally.

% If an accident has been detected, the boot will unlock even if separate locking is switched on. Deactivate KEYLESS-GO (/ page 68) or do not carry the key about your person in such situa tions.

% You can open the boot with the emergency key even while boot locking is active. Sepa rate boot locking will remain active. Switching separate boot locking off

# Select Block boot. 1 Detection range of the sensors If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases:

R The area around the sensor is dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow. R The kicking movement is made using a pros thetic leg. 82 Opening and closing

# Enter the PIN. If the PIN is correct, separate boot locking will be switched off and the PIN deleted. Resetting the PIN If you have forgotten the PIN, you can switch off separate boot locking with the emergency key.

# Select Block boot.

# Confirm Forgotten PIN?.

# Unlock the boot within 30 seconds with the emergency key. Separate boot locking will be switched off and the PIN deleted. Unlocking the boot lid using the emergency key

# Take the emergency key element out of the

# Insert the emergency key into the boot lock key (/ page 69). as far as it will go. Activating/deactivating the boot lid opening limiter Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Other functions

# Activate or deactivate Opening height limiter. This function allows you to avoid bumping the boot lid on a low garage ceiling, for example. Side windows Opens and closes the side windows

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when opening a side window When you open a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.

# When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.

# Turn the emergency key anti-clockwise from position 1 to position 2.

# Turn the emergency key back to position 1 and remove it.

% If you use the emergency key to unlock and open the boot lid, the anti-theft alarm sys tem will be triggered.

# If someone is trapped, release the but ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process.

# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

# If someone is trapped, release the but ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows Children could become trapped if they oper ate the side windows, particularly when unat tended.

# Activate the child safety lock for the rear side windows. Opening and closing 83

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Requirements:

R The power supply or the ignition is switched on. 1 Closing 2 Opening The buttons on the driver's door take prece dence.

# To start automatic operation: press the W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. 84 Opening and closing

# To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again. When the vehicle is switched off, the side win dows can continue being operated. This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened.

% Vehicles with electric roller sunblinds on rear doors on the left and right: the but tons for the rear side windows also open and close the roller sunblinds (/ page 91). Automatic reversing function of the side win dows If an object impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window The reversing function does not react:

R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. R during resetting. The reversing function cannot prevent some one from becoming trapped in these situa tions.

# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

# If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again. Automatic function of the side windows In the following cases, the side windows will be closed automatically when the vehicle is switched off:

R if it starts to rain (detected by the rain sensor on the windscreen) R in extreme temperatures R after a certain time (depending on the on-

board electrical system voltage) R if there is a malfunction in the power supply The side windows will be closed as far as the ventilation position. Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof:

the side windows will be closed completely if the sliding sunroof is open. If the side windows are obstructed during auto matic closing, the side window concerned will open again slightly. The automatic function for the sliding sunroof and the side windows will then be deactivated. Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.

# When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

# Press and hold the button on the key. The following functions are performed:

R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened. R The panoramic sliding sunroof is opened. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on. Opening and closing 85

% If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic slid ing sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first.

% If the roller sunblinds of the rear doors are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first.

# To interrupt convenience opening: release the button.

# To continue convenience opening: press and hold the button again. Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)

# Press and hold the s button on the key. The following functions are performed:

R The vehicle is locked. R The side windows are closed. R The panoramic sliding sunroof is closed.

# To interrupt convenience closing: release the s button.

# To close the roller sunblinds: press and hold the s button again.

% Convenience closing can also be operated with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 73).

& WARNING Risk of entrapment caused by inadvertent convenience closing Problems with the side windows When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side win dow and the sliding sunroof.

# Observe the complete closing proce dure when using convenience closing.

# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. 86 Opening and closing

# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.

# To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window. A side window cannot be closed and you can not see the cause.

# Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide.

# Adjust the side windows. Adjusting the side windows If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately:

# Immediately after this, pull the correspond ing button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately:

# Immediately after this, pull the correspond ing button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening fea ture. R The key battery is weak or discharged.

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 69). Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof

% The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the pan orama sliding sunroof.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement.

# During the opening and closing proc ess, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.

# If someone is trapped, release the con trol panel immediately. or

# Touch the control panel during auto matic operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the slid ing sunroof is operated by children Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended.

# Never leave children unattended in the

* NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice

# If in doubt, do not raise or open the sliding sunroof. Opening and closing 87 vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof.

# During the opening or closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the roller sunblind's range of movement.

# If someone is trapped, release the con trol panel immediately. or

# Touch the control panel during auto matic operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped. Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction.

# Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice.

* NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects Objects that protrude from the sliding sun roof may damage the sealing strips.

# Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof.

* NOTE Important points to remember when a roof luggage rack is fitted When a roof luggage rack is fitted, raising or opening the sliding sunroof may be limited.

# Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof lug gage rack is fitted. The sliding sunroof and the front roller sunblind are operated using control panel 1. The panorama sliding sunroof can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. Restriction: do not open the sliding sunroof if a roof luggage rack is fitted. The sliding sunroof Operating the rear roller sunblind from the front Operating the rear roller sunblind from the rear 88 Opening and closing will then encounter resistance and subsequently remain in a raised position.

# To open: swipe backwards across control

# To close: swipe forwards across control

# To raise or lower: press control panel 1 panel 1 and hold. panel 1 and hold. briefly.

# To start automatic operation: swipe for wards or backwards across control panel 1.

# To cancel automatic operation: press con trol panel 1 again. The opening/closing process will be stop ped.

# To open or close: press button 1.

# To stop: press button 1 again. You must first open or close the rear roller sun blind fully before you can move it in the other direction.

# To open/close manually: push or pull but ton 1 to the point of resistance and hold it until the roller sunblind has reached the desired position.

# To open/close fully: push or pull button 1 beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If an object is obstructing the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub stitute for your attentiveness.

# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function The reversing function will not react:

R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. R towards the end of the closing procedure. R during resetting. R when you close the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing.

# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

# If someone is trapped, release the con trol panel immediately. or

# Touch the control panel during auto matic closing. The closing process will be stopped. Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind If an object is obstructing the roller sunblind dur ing the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic revers ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of move ment.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin gers. Opening and closing 89

# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.

# If someone is trapped, release the con trol panel immediately. or

# Touch the control panel during auto matic closing. The closing process will be stopped. Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof

% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama sliding sunroof. By touching or pressing the control panel,

(/ page 86) you can cancel the automatic func tions "Rain closing function when driving" and

"Automatic lowering". The sliding sunroof will be closed automatically when the vehicle has been switched off in the following situations:

R if it starts to rain (detected by the rain sensor on the windscreen) 90 Opening and closing R in the event of extreme outside temperatures R after a certain time (depending on the on-

board electrical system voltage) R if there is a malfunction in the power supply The sliding sunroof will then rise at the rear in order to continue ventilating the vehicle interior. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during an automatic closing procedure, the roof will be opened again slightly. The automatic function for the sliding sunroof and the side windows will then be deactivated. Rain closing function when driving Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion. Automatic lowering function Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear.

# Make sure that nobody reaches into the sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion.

# If someone becomes trapped, touch the control panel. Problems with the sliding sunroof

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when closing the sliding sunroof again If you close the sliding sunroof again immedi ately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function will not be active then.

# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.

# If someone is trapped, release the con trol panel immediately. or

# Touch the control panel during auto matic closing. The closing process will be stopped. The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

% The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the pan orama sliding sunroof. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

# Immediately after automatic reversing, press and hold the control panel (/ page 86) until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and reopens again slightly:

Opening and closing 91

# Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the rear roller sunblind. Roller sunblinds Extending or retracting the roller sunblinds on the rear side windows The roller sunblinds for the rear side windows can be operated with the buttons for the side windows.

# Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof will be closed with even greater force. The rear roller sunblind does not operate smoothly.

# Reset the rear roller sunblind. Resetting the rear roller sunblind The sliding sunroof or the front roller sun blind does not operate smoothly.

# Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun blind. Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind

# Press and hold the control panel

(/ page 86) repeatedly until the sliding sun roof is completely closed.

# Press and hold the control panel for another

# Press and hold the control panel until the front roller sunblind is completely closed.

# Press and hold the control panel for another second. second.

# Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.

# Pull and hold button 1 repeatedly until the rear roller sunblind is fully closed.

# Pull button 1 for another second. 92 Opening and closing Extending or retracting the rear-window roller sunblind

# Make sure that the roller sunblind can move freely.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when extending or retracting the roller sunblind Body parts may become trapped in the roller sunblind's range of movement.

# Ensure there are no body parts in the range of movement.

# If someone becomes trapped, briefly press the button again. The opening or closing process will briefly be stopped. The roller sunblind will then return to its starting position. Extending or retracting from the driver's seat

* NOTE Damage caused by objects Objects could cause malfunctions of the roller sunblind. 1 Rear left side window / roller sunblind 2 Rear right side window / roller sunblind

# To close fully: pull the corresponding button when the side window is closed or is in the process of closing.

# To open fully: press the corresponding but ton.

# Press button 1.

% Depending on the model, button 1 is loca ted in the door control panel on the driver's side. Extending or retracting from the rear com partment

# To extend: pull switch 1.

# To retract: press switch 1.

* NOTE Damage caused by objects Objects could cause malfunctions of the roller sunblind.

# Make sure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Opening and closing 93 R when interior protection is triggered R when tow-away protection is triggered

(/ page 95)

(/ page 94) The ATA system is primed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situa tions:

R after locking the vehicle with the key R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO When the child safety lock for the rear side win dows is activated, switch 1 cannot be oper ated. Anti-theft protection Function of the immobiliser The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. The immobiliser is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off and deactivated when the ignition is switched on. ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations:

R when a door is opened R when the boot lid is opened R when the bonnet is opened 94 Opening and closing Indicator lamp 1 flashes when the ATA system is primed. The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations:

R after unlocking the vehicle with the key R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GO R after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment

(/ page 175)

% When the MercedesBenz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is auto matically sent to the Customer Assistance Centre (/ page 409). Deactivating the ATA

# Press the , s or H button on the key. or

# Press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (/ page 175) Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO

# Grasp the outside door handle with the key outside the vehicle. Function of tow-away protection An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while tow-away protection is primed. Tow-away protection is automatically primed after approximately 60 seconds:

R after locking the vehicle with the key R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Tow-away protection is only primed when the fol lowing components are closed:

R the doors R the boot lid Tow-away protection is automatically deactiva ted:

R after pressing the or H button on R after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment

(/ page 175) R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-

the key GO R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 202). Priming/deactivating tow-away protection Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Protection functions

# Prime or deactivate Tow-away protection. Tow-away protection is primed again in the fol lowing cases:

R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. Function of interior protection When interior protection is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detec ted in the vehicle interior. Interior protection is primed automatically after approximately ten seconds:

R after locking the vehicle with the key R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Interior protection is only primed when the fol lowing components are closed:

R the doors R the boot lid Interior protection is automatically deactivated:

R after pressing the or H button on R after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment

(/ page 175) R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-

the key GO R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS The following situations can lead to a false alarm:

R moving objects such as mascots in the vehi cle interior R when the side window is open R when the panoramic sliding sunroof is open Opening and closing 95 Priming/deactivating interior protection Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Protection functions

# Prime or deactivate Interior motion sensor. Interior protection is primed again in the follow ing cases:

R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. 96 Seats and stowing Notes on the correct driver's seat position

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi cle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi cle is in motion.

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas ten your seat belt. R You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent R You can move your legs freely R You can see all the displays on the instru ment cluster clearly R You have a good overview of the traffic con ditions R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body and passes across the centre of your shoul der and across your hips in the pelvic area Seats Adjusting the front seat electrically

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the digital vehicle Ensure the following when adjusting the steering wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3:

R You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration R You are sitting in an upright position R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion R Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly R The back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The seats can be adjusted when the ignition is switched off.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.

# When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil dren in the vehicle".

& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion. R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi cle is in motion.

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Seats and stowing 97 Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped.

# While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints which are not fitted or are adjusted incorrectly If head restraints are not fitted or are adjus ted incorrectly, they cannot provide protec tion as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

# Always drive with the head restraints fitted.

# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. 98 Seats and stowing Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, when you are braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide under neath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example.

# Adjust the seat properly before begin ning your journey.

# Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoul der.

* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back.

# When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats. The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feed back on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat. 1 Head restraint height/fore-and-aft position

(vehicles with an EASY ADJUST luxury head restraint) 2 Head restraint height 3 Seat height 4 Seat cushion inclination 5 Seat cushion length 6 Seat fore-and-aft position 7 Seat backrest inclination

# Save the settings with the memory function

(/ page 114).

% The head restraint height will be adjusted automatically when you adjust the seat height or the seat fore-and-aft position.

% Vehicles with EASY ADJUST luxury head restraints: the fore-and-aft position of the head restraint is pre-adjusted automatically when you adjust the backrest angle. Adjusting the front passenger seat electri cally from the driver's seat Requirements:

R For selecting the front passenger seat: the power supply is switched on You can call up the following functions for the front passenger seat:

R Seat adjustment R Seat heating R Seat ventilation R Memory function Seats and stowing 99

# To select the front passenger seat: press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.

# Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the driver's side door control panel. Adjusting the front passenger seat electri cally from the rear Requirements:

R For selecting the front passenger seat: the power supply is switched on 100 Seats and stowing

# To select the front passenger seat: press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.

# Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the door control panel in the rear passenger compartment.

% You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function

(/ page 65). Adjusting the rear seats electrically

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, when you are braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide under neath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats 1 Selects the front passenger seat 2 Head restraint height 3 Seat backrest inclination 4 Seat height 5 Seat fore-and-aft position Vehicles with an EASY ADJUST luxury head restraint 1 Selects the front passenger seat 2 Head restraint fore-and-aft position 3 Head restraint height 4 Seat backrest inclination 5 Seat height 6 Seat fore-and-aft position

# Adjust the rear seat (/ page 100). Seats and stowing 101

# Save the settings with the memory function

(/ page 116). Setting the fully reclined position Requirements:

R the power supply is switched on.

# Adjust the seat properly before begin ning your journey.

# Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoul der. The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feed back on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat. You can electrically adjust only the outer seats in the rear compartment. 1 Height/fore-and-aft position of the head restraint (vehicles with active multicontour seat) 2 Head restraint height 3 Seat backrest inclination 4 Combined seat cushion inclination and length 102 Seats and stowing

# To set the fully reclined position: press

# To restore the standard seat settings:

Head restraints button 1. R The rear seat will move into the fully reclined position. R The front passenger seat will move into the position for chauffeur mode. R The footrest will move out from under the front passenger seat. R If available, the leg rest will rise press button 1. or

# call up the settings with the memory function

(/ page 116).

% You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function

(/ page 65).

% The leg rest will fold down if overloaded. If this is the case, fold up the leg rest and engage it. Adjusting the front seat luxury head restraints mechanically

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi cle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi cle is in motion.

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas ten your seat belt.

# To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards.

# To move backwards: press release knob 1 and push the head restraint backwards. Attaching and removing the additional cush ion of the front-seat luxury head restraint

& WARNING Risk of injury due to incor rectly adjusted head restraints If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. Seats and stowing 103

# To attach the additional cushion: open Vel cro strip 4 on the rear of additional cushion 1.

# Guide Velcro strip 4 between head restraint 2 and strip 3.

# Close Velcro strip 4.

# Change the position of the additional cushion: move additional cushion 1 up or down.

# To remove additional cushion: open Velcro strip 4 of additional cushion 1.

# Remove additional cushion 1.

# Position head restraint 2 as far forwards as possible. 104 Seats and stowing Adjusting the rear seat outer head restraints mechanically

# To adjust the angle of the head restraint:

pull or push the head restraint in the direc tion of the arrow 2. Attaching and removing the additional cush ion of the head restraint in the rear compart ment (individual seats) Adjusting the outer luxury head restraints of the rear seats mechanically

# To adjust the angle of the head restraint:

pull or push the head restraint in the direc tion of arrow 1.

# To raise: pull the head restraint upwards and

# To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc let it engage. tion of the arrow. engage.

# Push the head restraint down and let it

# Position head restraint 2 as far forwards as possible.

# To attach the additional cushion: open Vel cro strip 4 on the rear of additional cushion 1.

# Guide Velcro strip 4 between head restraint 2 and strip 3.

# Close Velcro strip 4.

# Change the position of the additional cushion: move additional cushion 1 up or down.

# To remove additional cushion: open Velcro strip 4 of additional cushion 1.

# Remove additional cushion 1. Attaching heated additional cushion In vehicles with electrically adjustable head restraints, you can heat the additional cushion.

# Attach the additional cushion to the head restraint as described.

# Move the head restraint to the very top. Seats and stowing 105 Folding the centre head restraint into posi tion and folding it back mechanically

# Push press-studs 2 on the additional strip into counterpieces 1 on the head restraint.

# Move the head restraint to the desired height.

# To switch neck heating from the addi tional cushion on/off: make sure that press-studs 2 on the additional strip are correctly pushed into counterpieces 1 on the head restraint.

# Activate or deactivate the seat heating

(/ page 108).

# To fold into position: pull the head restraint upwards until it engages. 106 Seats and stowing

# To fold back: press button 1.

# Fold down the head restraint completely. The centre head restraint has a usage and non-

usage position. The usage position is the upright position in which the head restraint is locked;

the non-usage position is the position in which the head restraint is folded downwards. When the centre seat is used, the head restraint must be in the upright, locked usage position. Configuring the seat settings Setting automatic seat adjustment Multimedia system:

4 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort Adjusting the air cushions.

# In the corresponding menu, adjust the air cushions for Lumbar, Shoulders or Side bol-

sters. Setting the seat heating balance

# Select Sitzklimatisierung (Seat climate con

# Select Seat heating balance.

# Adjust the heat distribution for the desired trol). seat. Adjusting the neck warmer

# Select Neck warmers.

# Adjust the neck warmer for the desired seat.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile Selecting a profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the profile. You or other vehicle occu pants could be injured in the process.

# Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of move ment. If there is a risk of someone becoming trap ped, stop the adjustment process immedi ately:

# a) Tap the warning message on the cen tral display. or

# b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped. Requirements:

R Adapting the driver's seat and steering wheel position to body size: automatic seat adjust ment has been switched on. Multimedia system:

4 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort 5 Automatic seat adjustment Adjusting driver's seat and steering wheel position to body size The vehicle calculates a suitable driver's seat and steering wheel position on the basis of the driver's body size and sets this directly.

# To set the unit of measurement: select cm or ft/in.

# Set the size using the scale.

# Select Start positioning. The driver's seat and steering wheel position is adjusted to the body size that has been set.

% If the driver's seat and steering wheel posi tion calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be manually changed at any time via the control buttons. The exterior mirrors are not set via this func tion. Instead, they have to be set manually via the operating switches.

% You can also make these settings via the Mercedes me portal for your user profile. By synchronising the profiles in the vehicle and the Mercedes me connect profiles, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Further information about synchronising user profiles (/ page 299). Seats and stowing 107 Setting automatic adjustment of the lateral support (active multicontour seat) Multimedia system:

4 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort

# Select Dynamic multicontour seat. With this function, the lateral support of the active multicontour seat is automatically adjus ted to the driving and cornering dynamics of the vehicle.

# Select the desired setting. Overview of massage programs R Hot Relaxing back: Based on hot stone mas sage, the program combines heat and mas sage. Starts by massaging the back. In addi tion, warm pressure points become noticea ble, starting in the pelvic area. R Hot Relaxing shoulder Combination of heat and massage. Starts by massaging the shoulders. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. 108 Seats and stowing R Activating Massage Activating massage with upward-moving massage waves. R Classic Massage: Relaxing back massage. R Wave Massage: Regenerating massage via massage waves across the back and in the seat cushion. R Mobilizing Massage Mobilising massage with upward-moving massage waves. Can pro mote slower, deeper respiration. This can improve the oxygen supply to cells and the brain. R Workout, backrest and Workout, cushion:

These programs require your cooperation. Alternating between tensing and releasing helps to improve blood flow to your muscles. Press against a pressure point as soon as you feel it to activate back, abdominal and leg muscles. R Depth waves: Wave-like movements in the cushion can promote blood flow and meta bolic processes in the lower back and legs. R Deep workout: Combines the Workout, back-

rest with the Workout, cushion. The vibrating massage in the cushion intensifies the effec tiveness of the tensing and releasing of mus cles when you tense against the pressure point. This supports metabolic processes and blood flow in the seat area and legs. R Calf massage (rear): Calf massage using vibration. Can support metabolic processes and the reverse flow of blood. R Wave Massage (rear): Combines the vibration of the calf massage with the Classic Massage from the backrest in the rear passenger com partment. Selecting the massage programme for the front seats Multimedia system:

4 5 Comfort 5 Massage

# Select a massage programme (/ page 107).

# Start the program for the desired seat ;.

# To set the massage intensity: switch High intensity on or off .

% For the rear seats, the massage programmes can be selected on the following devices (if available):

R On the rear displays (/ page 446) R On the MBUX rear tablet The selection is made in the same way as on the rear displays for the rear seats on the second row of seats. Resetting seat settings Multimedia system:

4 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort

# Select Reset.

# Select for the desired seat. Switching the seat heating on/off

& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat edly switching on the seat heater Repeatedly switching on the seat heater can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. The health of persons with limited tempera ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.

# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heater. To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly.

* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heater is switched on When the seat heater is switched on, over heating may occur due to objects or docu ments placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface.

# Make sure that no objects or docu ments are on the seats when the seat heater is switched on. Requirements:

R The power supply is switched on. Seats and stowing 109

# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off. 110 Seats and stowing

% The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches off.

% If you switch the power supply off and on again within 20 minutes, the previous setting of the seat heating for the driver's seat will remain active.

% You can set the distribution of the heated sections among the seat cushions and seat backrests on the front and rear seats using the multimedia system (/ page 110).

% Vehicles with the Warmth Comfort Package:

you can adjust the heating of the centre con sole and door armrests using the multimedia system (/ page 110). Setting the panel heating Multimedia system:

4 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort 5 Heating settings 5 Panel heating When the seat heating is switched on, the armr ests, the centre panels of the doors and the centre console can be heated.

# Switch the function for the desired seats on or off. Switching the seat ventilation on/off Requirements:

R The power supply is switched on. ventilation setting for the driver's seat will remain active. Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel electrically

& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion. cle is in motion.

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt.

# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off.

% If you switch the power supply off and on again within 20 minutes, the previous seat Seats and stowing 111

& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil dren when adjusting the steering wheel Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the digital vehicle key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected. 112 Seats and stowing Switching the steering wheel heater on/off Requirements:

R The power supply or the ignition is switched on. 1 To move up 2 To move back 3 To move down 4 To move forward

(/ page 114).

# Save the settings with the memory function

# To switch on: push switch 3 into position

# To switch off: push switch 3 into position 1. 2. When you switch the ignition off, the steering wheel heater will switch off. Activating/deactivating the steering wheel heater via the multimedia system Multimedia system:

4 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort 5 Heating settings

# Activate or deactivate Steering wheel heat-

ing. Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature

& WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process for the easy exit feature You could lose control of the vehicle.

# Always wait until the adjustment proc ess is complete before pulling away. Seats and stowing 113

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped while adjusting the easy entry and exit feature You and other vehicle occupants particu larly children could become trapped.

# Ensure that no-one has a body part in the range of movement of the steering wheel or driver's seat. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel:

# Move the steering wheel adjustment lever. The adjustment process will be stop ped. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat:

# Press the seat adjustment switch. The adjustment process will be stop ped.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel will move upwards and the driv er's seat will move back in the following situa tions:

R You switch the ignition off with the driver's Vehicles with memory function: you can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position switches.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during activation of the easy entry and exit feature by children If children activate the easy entry and exit feature, they can become trapped, particu larly when unattended.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. R You open the driver's door with the ignition door open. switched off.

% The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already in the rearmost posi tion. The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last drive position in the fol lowing cases:

R You switch the power supply or the ignition on when the driver's door is closed. R You close the driver's door with the ignition switched on. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the

"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. The last drive position will be saved when:

R You switch the ignition off. 114 Seats and stowing R Vehicles with memory function: you call up the seat settings via the memory function. Operating the memory function R Vehicles with memory function: you save the seat settings via the memory function.

& WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving

# If somebody becomes trapped, immedi ately release the memory function posi tion button. The adjustment process is stopped. Vehicles with memory function: press one of the memory function position buttons to stop the adjustment process. Setting the easy entry and exit feature Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Easy entry and exit feature

# Select Steer. wheel and seat, Steering wheel only or Off.

% If you use an individual user profile and have set your body size, this information is carried over for the easy entry and exit feature. This causes the driver's seat and steering wheel to automatically move into the correct posi tion (/ page 296). If you use the memory function on the driv er's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made.

# Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is station ary.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when set ting the seat with the memory function When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants particularly children could become trapped.

# During the setting procedure of the memory function, ensure that no body parts are in the sweep of the seat or the steering wheel.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children Children could become trapped if they acti vate the memory function, particularly when unattended.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the

"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. You can use the memory function when the igni tion is switched off. Storing Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can save the following settings for the front seat:

R Seat, backrest, head restraint position and contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region R Active multicontour seat

Side bolsters of the seat backrest Shoulder of the seat backrest Contour of the seat backrest

- Dynamic function level R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sec tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest R Driver's side: steering wheel position and position of the outside mirrors on the driver's and front passenger sides R Head-up display

# Set the seat, the steering wheel, the head-up display and the outside mirror to the desired position.

# Briefly press memory button M and then press preset position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored. Seats and stowing 115

# To call up: press and briefly hold preset posi tion button 1, 2 or 3. After releasing the button, the front seat, outside mirror, head-up display and steering column are moved into the stored position automatically.

% If you release the preset position button, the seat, steering wheel and mirror setting func tions stop immediately. Vehicles with the Active Multicontour Seat Package: setting the active multicon tour seat or the 4-way lumbar support is still carried out. Vehicles without the Active Multicontour Seat Package: adjustment of the 4-way lum bar support is still carried out. 116 Seats and stowing Memory function in the rear compartment Operating the rear seat via the memory func tion in the rear passenger compartment Storing Rear seat settings for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function in the rear compartment. The following settings can be stored for the rear seats:

R Position of the seat, backrest and head restraint R Active multicontour seats: the seat side bol sters of the seat backrest as well as the con tour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sec tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest

# Press button 1. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button does not light up.

# Adjust the rear seat using the buttons in the door control panel (/ page 100). Example: vehicles without a reclining rear seat

# Briefly press memory button M and then press preset position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings for the rear seat are stored in the selected memory position. Calling up Seats and stowing 117 Operating the front passenger seat and rear seats via the memory function in the rear compartment Requirements:

R For selecting the front passenger seat: the power supply is switched on Storing Front passenger seat adjustments and rear seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function in the rear compartment. The following settings can be stored for the front passenger seat:

R Position of the seat, backrest and head The following settings can be stored for the rear seats:

R Position of the seat, backrest and head restraint R Active multicontour seats: the seat side bol sters of the seat backrest as well as the con Example: vehicles without a reclining rear seat restraint

# Press button 1.

# Press and briefly hold preset position button The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button does not light up. 1, 2 or 3.

% Seat adjustment is interrupted as soon as you release the preset position button. The adjustment of the active multicontour seat is still carried out. 118 Seats and stowing tour of the seat backrest in the lumbar and shoulder regions R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sec tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest The following settings are also stored to a mem ory position, if the indicator lamp in the v button lights up:

R Position of the footrest of the front passenger seat, if available R Position of the screen, if available Using the preset position buttons, you always store the current setting of each seat.

# Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the door control panel in the rear passenger compartment (/ page 96).

# Ensure that the indicator lamp in button 1 lights up.

# Press button 1. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp in the button does not light up.

# Adjust the rear seat using the buttons in the door control panel (/ page 100).

# Press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. Example: vehicles without a reclining rear seat

# Briefly press memory button M and then

# Press button 1. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected. press preset position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings for the front passenger seat and the rear seat are stored in the selected pre set position. Calling up Seats and stowing 119 conditions for the chauffeur mode are fulfil led .

% Seat adjustment is interrupted as soon as you release the preset position button. The adjustment of the active multicontour seat is still carried out.

% You can use the rear-compartment child safety lock to disable this function

(/ page 65). Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

# Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid.

# Never drive with the boot lid open. Example: vehicles without a reclining rear seat

# Press and briefly hold preset position button 1, 2 or 3.

% The preset positions in the area for the chauffeur mode can only be set when the 120 Seats and stowing Objects in the deployment area of an airbag may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly. Observe the notes on protection provided by the airbag (/ page 43).

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.

# Before the journey, secure objects, lug gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If you inadequately stow objects in the vehi cle interior, they could slip or be tossed around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always restrain the objects they contain in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be tossed about in these or similar situations.

# Always make sure that objects do not project from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the boot. Observe the notes on the cup holders.

& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail pipe and tailpipe trims The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.

# Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.

# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them. The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle:

R never exceed the permissible gross mass or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle

(including occupants). Information can be found on the vehicle iden tification plate (/ page 562). R the load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. R always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. R secure the load using the luggage net hooks. Distribute the load on the luggage net hooks evenly. Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior Overview of the front stowage compart ments

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If you inadequately stow objects in the vehi cle interior, they could slip or be tossed around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always restrain the objects they contain in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be tossed about in these or similar situations.

# Always make sure that objects do not project from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the boot. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. Seats and stowing 121 1 Stowage space in the doors 2 Stowage/telephone compartment beneath the armrest with a charging module for wire less charging of mobile phones, multimedia and USB ports as well as stowage space, e.g. for an MP3 player 3 Stowage compartment in the front centre console with cup holders, USB ports and charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones 4 Stowage compartment in front of the central display of the multimedia system 5 Glove compartment 122 Seats and stowing

% The rubber mat in the stowage compartment in front centre console 3 can be removed for cleaning with clear, lukewarm water. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 466). Opening the stowage compartment in the rear armrest Vehicles with a rear bench seat Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats

# Fold down the rear armrest.

# To open: press release catch 1 and swing the cover of the armrest upwards. Opening the electronics compartment in the rear-compartment centre console

# Lightly press cover 1. The electronics compartment in the rear-

compartment centre console is open. Opening the stowage box in the backrest in the rear compartment

* NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight.

# Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest. Removing the handset from the rear stowage compartment Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats

# Fold down the rear armrest.

# Open the stowage compartment in the rear armrest (/ page 122).

# Tap on handset 1. Handset 1 will rise.

# Remove handset 1. Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats

# Pull handle 1 and fold down cover 2. Seats and stowing 123 Overview of the luggage net hooks Observe the following notes:

R secure the load using the luggage net hooks. R Do not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load. These are intended only as anti-slip pro tection for light loads. R Do not route lashing materials across sharp edges or corners. R pad sharp edges for protection. Depending on the equipment installed, the boot contains up to four luggage net hooks. 124 Seats and stowing 1 Luggage net hooks Opening the through-loading feature in the rear compartment

* NOTE Damage to the soft top caused by loading The soft top can be damaged if the through-

loading feature is loaded in the rear and the boot separator has not been lowered.

# Before loading the through-loading fea ture in the rear, lower the boot separa tor. Requirements:

R The loading flap is unlocked (/ page 125). Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats

# Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats: fold down the rear armrests.

# Pull handle 1 and fold down cover 2. The stowage box in the rear-compartment backrest is open. If the through-loading feature is to be used as a stowage compartment again:

# Fold down loading flap 1 and lock it in the boot (/ page 125). Locking the through-loading feature in the boot Requirements:

R The refrigerator box is removed. Seats and stowing 125 Using the bag hooks

& WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occupants.

# Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.

# Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks. Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats

# Slide release catch 2 in the handle recess of loading flap 1 upwards. Loading flap 1 is unlocked.

# Push loading flap 1 with release catch 2 up as far back as possible until the flap locks in the highest position. The through-loading feature in the rear com partment is open.

# Slide the release catch on loading flap 1 in the boot to the right. The loading flap is locked. 126 Seats and stowing

# Pull the bag hook 2 down by the tab 1.

% Observe the notes on loading the vehicle

(/ page 119). EASY-PACK boot box Adjusting the height of the EASY-PACK boot box to any position

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped and injured when raising the floor Your hands may become trapped on the frame of the EASY-PACK boot box and objects may be thrown upwards.

# Ensure that your hands are not in the range of movement of the floor.

# If someone becomes trapped, carefully push the centre of the floor downward.

# Remove all objects from the floor before raising it.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when pressing the EASY-PACK boot box in Your hands may become trapped when you are pressing the boot box into the retracted position. Children, in particular, may injure themselves when doing so.

# Ensure that your hands are not in the range of movement of the EASY-PACK boot box.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to the extended EASY-

PACK boot box The EASY-PACK boot box may be damaged when it is extended.

# Do not place any objects on or press down on the EASY-PACK boot box frame.

# Do not close the boot lid when the EASY-PACK boot box is extended. Seats and stowing 127

% Observe the notes on cleaning the EASY-

PACK boot box (/ page 466). Installing or removing the EASY-PACK boot box Fitting

* NOTE Damage to the EASY-PACK boot box by objects Objects that are sharp-edged, pointed, frag ile, rounded or heavy and objects that roll can damage the EASY-PACK boot box and be thrown out.

# Do not transport objects that are sharp-

edged, pointed, rounded or fragile and objects that roll in the EASY-PACK boot box.

# Always stow and secure such objects outside of the box in the boot.

# Always observe the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK boot box.

# Do not use the EASY-PACK boot box when the rear seats are folded for wards. The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK boot box is 10 kg. To prevent the box from being overloaded, the box floor will lower onto the boot floor when the load reaches approximately 5 kg. 3.

# To remove: pull handle 2 on the box.

# To increase the load capacity: press the centre of floor 1 downwards to the desired position and box size.

# To reduce the load capacity: press button

# To stow: press the box in completely using handle 2 until it locks in place. 128 Seats and stowing Removing

# Turn rotating catches 6 outward.

# Lower box 1 and pull it out of anchorages in the rear shelf 4.

# Pull box 1 back out of openings 3. Opening the stowage space under the boot floor The stowage space under the boot floor can be opened in all vehicles except hybrid vehicles.

# Turn rotating catches 6 outward.

# Insert retainers 2 of box 1 into outer holes 3.

# Raise box 1 and press hooks 5 into the anchorages of the rear shelf 4.

# Turn rotating catches 6 inward.

# Pull boot floor 2 upwards using handle 1 until it rests against the boot separator.

# Fold out hook 3 on the underside of the

# Clip hook 3 onto drip rail 4. boot floor. Seats and stowing 129 Attaching a roof luggage rack

& WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.

# Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section.

* NOTE Vehicle damage from non-

approved roof luggage racks The vehicle could be damaged by roof lug gage racks that have not been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

# Use only roof luggage racks tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. 130 Seats and stowing

# Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the sliding sunroof can be fully raised when the roof luggage rack is fitted.

# Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the boot lid can be fully opened when the roof luggage rack is fitted.

# Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.

* NOTE Damage to the panorama sliding sunroof due to non-approved roof lug gage racks The panorama sliding sunroof may be dam aged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

# When a roof luggage rack is fitted, open the panorama sliding sunroof only if this has been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.

* NOTE Damage to the covers The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened.

# Do not use metallic or hard objects.

# Carefully fold covers 1 upwards in the direction of the arrow.

# Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening points beneath covers 1.

# Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manufacturer.

# Secure the load on the roof luggage rack. Cup holders Opening the cup holder in the rear armrest

* NOTE Damage to the cup holder When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged.

# Only fold the rear armrest back when the cup holder is closed.

% The cup holder in the rear armrest is availa ble only in vehicles with a rear bench seat or electrically adjustable outer seats. Ashtray and cigarette lighter Using the ashtray in the front centre console

* NOTE Damage to the stowage compart ment under the ashtray due to intense heat The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it.

# Make sure that the ashtray is fully engaged.

# To open: press cup holder 1 twice. The cup holder opens in the direction of the arrow.

# Place a container in or remove a container from cup holder 1.

% Observe the notes on loading the vehicle

(/ page 119). Seats and stowing 131

# To insert: close ashtray 2 and place it in holder 3 and then insert holder 3 into the front cup holder in the front stowage com partment.

# Check that it is seated firmly.

# Comply with the notes on loading the vehicle

(/ page 119).

# To remove: pull ashtray 2 up and out of

# To remove the holder: position your thumbs Using the rear ashtray 132 Seats and stowing holder 3.

# To open: fold lid 1 upwards.

# To close: press lid 1 downwards. Removing the holder from the cup holder on the outside of holder 1 and place the other fingers on the inside of holder 2.

# Firmly pull holder 3 upwards in the direc tion of the arrow out of the cup holder.

% Mercedes-Benz recommends removing the holder from the cup holder only for cleaning. Store the holder and ashtray in a suitable place. Comply with the loading guidelines

(/ page 119). Ashtray in the rear door (example)

# To use the ashtray: place the ashtray in one of the cup holders in the rear compartment or in the holder in the rear door.

# Check that it is seated firmly.

# Comply with the notes on loading the vehicle

# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the

# Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children.

# Never leave children unattended in the knob. vehicle. Requirements:

R The ignition is switched on.

# To open the ashtray: fold cover 1

(/ page 119). upwards. If you are not using the ashtray, close it and place it in the holder in the rear door or in the cup holder in the rear compartment. Using the cigarette lighter in the rear com partment

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from the hot cigarette lighter You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga rette lighter. In addition, flammable materials may ignite if:

R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electrically adjustable outer seats R In the boot

# Vehicles with rear bench seat or electri cally adjustable outer seats: open the elec Seats and stowing 133 tronics compartment in the rear centre con sole.

# Press in cigarette lighter 1. The cigarette lighter will pop out automati cally when the heating element is red-hot. Sockets Using the 12 V socket in the rear passenger compartment Requirements:

R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 watts (15 A). Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following 12 V sockets:

R In the front passenger footwell R On vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri cally adjustable outer seats: in the electron ics compartment of the rear centre console 134 Seats and stowing Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electrically adjustable outer seats

# Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri cally adjustable outer seats: open the elec tronics compartment in the rear centre con sole.

# Fold up socket cap 1.

# Insert the plug of the device. If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compart ment open.

# Never plug the connecting cable into a 230 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim. Using the 230 V socket in the rear passenger compartment

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor rect handling of the socket

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam aged connecting cables or sockets You could receive an electric shock if the connecting cable or the 230 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet.

# Use only connecting cables that are dry and free of damage.

# When the ignition is switched off, make sure that the 230 V power socket is dry.

# Immediately have the 230 V power socket checked or replaced at a quali fied specialised workshop if it is dam aged or has been pulled out of the trim. You could receive an electric shock in partic ular:

R if you reach into the socket. R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects into the socket.

# Do not reach into the socket.

# Only connect suitable devices to the socket. Requirements:

R Only connect devices with a suitable plug which conforms to the standards specific to the country you are in. R Do not use multiple socket outlets.

% Only devices up to a maximum of 150 watts can be connected. Seats and stowing 135

# Insert the plug of the device into 230 V socket 2. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp 1 lights up. USB port in the rear Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following USB ports in the rear passenger compartment:

R On vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri cally adjustable rear outer seats: in the elec tronics compartment of the rear centre con sole (/ page 122). R On vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri cally adjustable rear outer seats: in the stow age compartment in the rear seat armrest

(/ page 122). USB port in the rear armrest Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electrically adjustable outer seats

# Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri cally adjustable outer seats: open the elec tronics compartment in the rear centre con sole.

# Open flap 3. Example: vehicles with electrically adjustable rear outer seats You can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at USB ports 1 using a suitable charg ing cable. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the devices can be charged with up to 20 V

(5 A), when the ignition is switched on. The refrigerator box will reduce its cooling capa city or switch off in the following cases:

R too many electrical consumers are turned on R the starter battery is not sufficiently charged If this is the case, the indicator lamps will flash on the button for switching the refrigerator box on and off. The cooling function will automati cally switch back on as soon as there is suffi cient voltage. 136 Seats and stowing Coolbox Using the refrigerator box

& WARNING Risk of fire due to a covered ventilation grille on the coolbox If you cover the ventilation grille for the cool box, it may overheat.

# Always make sure that the ventilation grille is not covered. The ventilation grille for the refrigerator box is in the boot. The refrigerator box can bear a maximum load of 3.5 kg up to 4 kg. In the upper compartment of the refrigerator box, plastic bottles, for example, can be stowed with a maximum of 0.5 litres and cans with up to 0.33 l If you do not need to use the refrigerator box for an extended period you should switch it off, defrost it and clean it. After doing so, leave the lid open for a time. Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats

# Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats: fold down the rear armrests.

# Pull handle on stowage box 1 and fold down the cover of stowage box 2.

# To switch off: press button 2 repeatedly until both indicator lamps go out. Removing or fitting the refrigerator box Installing Seats and stowing 137 Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats

# To open: pull the handle on refrigerator box 1 and fold down the cover of the refrigera tor box.

# To switch on: press button 2 repeatedly until an indicator lamp (low cooling) flashes or two indicator lamps (high cooling) flash.

# Remove cover cap 1.

# Open loading flap 2 in the rear compart ment until the loading flap locks in the high est position (/ page 124).

# Pull upwards and hold handle 7. The ISOFIX connection to refrigerator box 4 is unlocked. 138 Seats and stowing

# Slide the refrigerator box with handle 7 up into the open through-loading feature. ISOFIX connection 4 and the electrical con tacts of refrigerator box 3 are inserted into sockets 5 and 6 of the through-loading feature.

# Once the refrigerator box has been connec ted in the vehicle, push down handle 7. The refrigerator box is locked. Removing

# Pull up and hold handle 7.

# Pull the refrigerator box with handle 7 up out of sockets 5 and 6 of the though-load ing compartment. ISOFIX connection 4 and the electrical con tacts of refrigerator box 3 are separated from sockets 5 and 6 of the through-load ing feature. Opening and closing the stowage compart ment of the refrigerator box in the boot

# To open: pull the stowage compartment in the refrigerator box 1 out by the handle backwards in the direction of the arrow. The stowage compartment 1 is open.

# To close: slide the stowage compartment in the refrigerator box 1 forwards in the direc tion of the arrow. The stowage compartment 1 is closed. Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects so that they can not be thrown around in such situa tions.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment Placing other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment could constitute a fire hazard.

# Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment, espe cially those made of metal.

* NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stow age compartment If objects are placed in the mobile phone stowage compartment, they may be dam aged by electromagnetic fields.

# Do not place credit cards, data storage devices, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone stowage compart ment.

* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged.

# Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment. Always observe the notes for persons with elec tronic medical aids (/ page 31). Seats and stowing 139 R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior aerial via the charging module. R The charging function and wireless connec tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior aerial are only available if the ignition is switched on. R Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment. R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior aerial. R The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may also depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background. R To ensure more efficient charging and con nection with the vehicle's exterior aerial, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protective covers which are neces sary for wireless charging are excluded. 140 Seats and stowing R When charging, the mat should be used if possible. Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front Requirements:

R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging. You can find a list of compatible mobile phones at:

https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the vehi cle has the following options for wirelessly charging the mobile phone in the cockpit:

R In the front stowage compartment R In the stowage compartment of the cockpit armrest Example: wirelessly charging the mobile phone in the front stowage compartment

# Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front stowage compartment: when a message is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. In addition, malfunc tions during the mobile phone's charging proc ess are shown in the multimedia system display. Wirelessly charging the mobile phone in the centre console below the armrest: the mobile phone is charging when the indicator lamp is lit up. In addition, malfunctions during the mobile phone's charging process are shown by the indi cator lamp flashing three times.

% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water. Wireless charging of a mobile phone in the rear passenger compartment Requirements:

R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging. You can find a list of compatible mobile phones at:

https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com

% Observe the notes on loading the vehicle

(/ page 119). Fitting and removing the floor mats

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats

# Fold down the rear armrest.

# Open the stowage compartment in rear arm rest 1 (/ page 122).

# Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of mat 2 as possible with the display facing upwards. When the indicator lamp at the front of the mobile phone system lights up, the mobile phone is being charged. In addition, malfunc tions during the mobile phone's charging process are shown by the indicator lamp flashing three times. Seats and stowing 141

# To fit: slide the corresponding seat back wards and lay the floor mat in the footwell such that it fits.

# Press the studs 1 onto the holders 2.

# Adjust the corresponding seat.

# To remove: slide the corresponding seat backwards and pull the floor mat off the holders 2. 142 Seats and stowing

# Adjust the corresponding seat. Exterior lighting Notes on adjusting the lights when driving abroad The headlamps are automatically adjusted when the vehicle enters countries where traffic drives on the other side of the road. If necessary, the headlamps can also be adjusted manually

(/ page 150). In the following cases, check the setting of the headlamps and change it manually if necessary:

R If the Dipped-beam setting (left/right-side traffic) Manual adjustment only display mes sage is displayed. R If the Check dipped-beam setting (left/right-

side traffic) display message is displayed. Once the headlamps have been converted:

R Oncoming traffic will not be dazzled. R The edge of the road will not be illuminated as far or as high. R The "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog light" functions will not be available. Light and sight 143 Information about lighting systems and your responsibility Light switch Operating the light switch The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation. 1 W Left-hand parking lights 2 X Right-hand parking lights 3 T Standing lights and licence plate light 4 Automatic driving lights (preferred light ing switch position) Switching the rear fog lights on or off Requirements:

R The light switch is in the L or posi tion.

# Press the R button. Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps. 144 Light and sight 5 L Low beam / high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog light on/off When low beam is activated, the indicator lamp for the standing lights T will be deactivated and replaced by the low-beam indicator lamp L.

# Always park your vehicle safely using suffi cient lighting, in accordance with the rele vant legal stipulations.

* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery.

# Where possible, switch on the right X or left W parking light. In the event of severe battery discharging, the standing lights or parking lights will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start. The exterior lighting (except standing and park ing lights) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting

(/ page 150). Automatic driving lights function The standing lights, low beam and daytime run ning lights are switched on automatically depending on the ignition status and the light conditions.

& WARNING Risk of accident when the dipped beam is switched off in poor visi bility When the light switch is set to , the dipped beam may not be switched on auto matically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray.

# In such cases, turn the light switch to L. The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting. Operating the combination switch for the lights 1 High beam 2 Turn signal light, right 3 Headlamp flashing 4 Turn signal light, left

# Use the combination switch to activate the desired function. Light and sight 145

# To indicate permanently: push the combi nation switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist:

R Indicator operation activated by the driver can extend for the duration of the lane change. R If the driver indicated directly beforehand but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate automatically. High beam

# To switch on: turn the light switch to the L or position.

# Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. When the high beam is activated, the indica tor lamp for low beam L will be deactiva ted and replaced by the indicator lamp for high beam K.

# To switch off: push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 or pull it in the direction of arrow 3. Headlamp flashing

# Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3. Turn signal light

# To indicate briefly: push the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times. 146 Light and sight Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights Active headlamps function When you pull away again, the hazard warning lights will switch off automatically at approx imately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning light system using the warning lamp button. Adaptive functions MULTIBEAM LED and DIG ITAL LIGHT Intelligent Light System function The headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation and provide extended functions for improved illumination of the road. The system comprises the following functions:

R Active headlamps (/ page 146) R Cornering light (/ page 147) R Motorway mode (/ page 147) R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 147) R Adverse weather light (/ page 148) R City lighting (/ page 148) The system is active only when it is dark. Functions of the active headlamps:

R The headlamps follow the steering move R Relevant areas are better illuminated during ments. a journey. The functions are active when the low beam is switched on. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving will also be evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the light in advance.

# Press button 1. The hazard warning lights will switch on auto matically if:

R the airbag has been deployed R the vehicle brakes sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill. Cornering light function The cornering light improves the illumination of the carriageway over a wide angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on. The function is active in the following cases:

R At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn sig nal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned R At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and when the steering wheel is turned Light and sight 147 Roundabout and junction function: the cor nering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current naviga tion position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or the junction. Motorway mode function Motorway mode increases the range and bright ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibil ity. R or the navigation system The function is not active in the following cases:

R At speeds below 80 km/h Enhanced fog light function The enhanced fog light function reduces self-

dazzling and improves the illumination of the edge of the carriageway. The function is active if a motorway journey is detected by means of:

R the vehicle's speed R the multifunction camera The function is automatically activated under the following conditions:

R At speeds below 70 km/h and when the rear fog light is switched on. 148 Light and sight The function is automatically deactivated under the following conditions:

R At speeds above 100 km/h after activation. R When the rear fog light is switched off.

% You can activate the enhanced fog light func tion up to a speed of 100 km/h by switching on the rear fog light. Function of the adverse weather light The adverse weather light reduces reflections in rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in the headlamps. This reduces glare for the driver and other road users. The city lighting function City lighting improves the illumination of road sides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light. The function is active in the following cases:

R At low speeds R In illuminated parts of urban areas Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off Requirements:

R The ignition is switched on. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 DIGITAL LIGHT Activating/deactivating dynamic low beam

# Activate or deactivate dynamic low beam.

% In vehicles with MULTIBEAM LED headlamps, the Intelligent Light System can be switched on and off in the MULTIBEAM LED menu. Switching enhanced assistance functions on/off

# Switch warnings, notes and Spotlight on or off.

% The warnings and notes functions are availa ble only in vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to:

R road users without lights, e.g. pedes trians R road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recog nise them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the auto matic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users.

# Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases:

R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traf fic conditions. Light and sight 149 ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the bright ness of the cone of light to the legally permitted maximum. Partial high beam uses the high beam to shine past other road users rather than dazzling them. The vehicle in front will be illuminated by the low beam. At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is suffi cient street lighting:

R The partial high beam and the high beam will be switched off automatically. At speeds greater than 30 km/h:

R If no other road users are detected, the high beam will be switched on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial high beam will be switched on automatically. At speeds above 40 km/h:

R If no other road users are detected on a straight road, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial high beam will be switched on automatically. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light:

R Low beam R Partial high beam R High beam R ULTRA RANGE Highbeam (only vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT) 150 Light and sight R If highly reflective signs are detected, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched off auto matically. At speeds greater than approximately 50 km/h:

R The headlamp range of the low beam is regu lated automatically based on the distance to other road users. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off

# To switch on: turn the light switch to the position.

# Switch on the high beam using the combina tion switch. When the high beam is switched on automat ically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the driver's display.

# To switch off: switch off the high beam using the combination switch. Setting low beam Switching the surround lighting on/off Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 DIGITAL LIGHT 5 Low beam

# Select right-hand traffic, left-hand traffic or automatic.

% In vehicles with MULTIBEAM LED headlamps, low beam can be set in the MULTIBEAM LED menu. Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Greeting

# Activate or deactivate Surround lighting. When the function is activated, the exterior light ing lights up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the sur round lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated. Activating/deactivating activation upon approach

# Switch Activation when approaching on or When the function is activated, the exterior light ing lights up as soon as the key is near the vehi cle. Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time Requirements:

R The light switch is in the position. off. Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Farewell 5 Exterior lighting delayed switch off

# Set the switch-off delay time. When the vehicle engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time. Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting Control panel inside the grab handle (rear) 1 c Switches the front interior lighting 2 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off on/off 3 | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off

# To switch reading lamps on/off: hold your hand under the respective reading lamp 4 or 5. 1 p Reading lamp on the respective side of the vehicle 2 u Rear interior lighting

# To switch reading lamps on: press button 1. The reading lamp, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will light up. Light and sight 151

# To switch reading lamps off: press button 1 once or twice. After pressing it once, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will go out. After pressing it twice, the reading lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will go out.

# To switch the rear interior lighting on or off: press button 2. The reading lamps, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamps on both sides of the vehicle will light up or go out. Adjusting the ambient lighting Multimedia system:

4 5 Comfort 5 Ambient lighting Setting the colour

# Select Colour.

# Set the desired colour or colour combination. Adjusting the brightness

# Select Brightness. 152 Light and sight Adjust the brightness. Activating the brightness for zones

# Select Brightness.

# Select Brightness zones. The Emphasis, Ambient and Impression zones can be set separately.

% The Silhouette zone can also be set in vehi cles with active ambient lighting. Activating effects

# Select Effects.

# Activate the desired effect. Depending on the vehicle equipment, different effects are available:

R Multi-colour animat.: The chosen colour com bination will change at predefined intervals. R Warning when exiting: If an object is detec ted in the blind spot while you are getting out of the vehicle, a warning will appear in the ambient lighting. R Climate: If changes are made to the tempera ture setting in the vehicle, the colour of the ambient lighting will change briefly. R Operating feedback: Depending on the previ ous status, all operating feedback is activa ted or deactivated. R Warning assistance: Depending on the previ ous status, all warning assistance is activa ted or deactivated.

% The desired operating feedback and warning assistance can be activated or deactivated via the symbol. Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Lights 5 Farewell

# Activate or deactivate Interior lighting delayed switch off. When this function is active, the interior light ing lights up for a short time after the vehicle is locked. Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system Switching the windscreen wipers on/off 1 g Windscreen wipers off 2 Automatic wiping, normal 3 Automatic wiping, frequent 4 Continuous wiping, slow 5 Continuous wiping, fast

# Turn the combination switch to the correct position 1 - 5.

# Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R Single wipe R Wipes with washer fluid Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: in position 2 or 3 , the windscreen washing process is automatically triggered if dirt is detec ted on the windscreen unless the Top up washer fluid message is being displayed. Cleaning the windscreen intensively For heavy soiling, you can clean the windscreen intensively from an outside temperature of 5C.

# In a stationary vehicle, turn the combination switch to position 1, 2 or 3.

# Press the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 and hold it for approximately two seconds. The wiper arms will move into the replace ment position and washer fluid will be distrib uted on the windscreen. After approximately 30 seconds, the wiper arms will move back again and wipe the windscreen several times. Intensive cleaning has now finished. Replacing the windscreen wiper blades

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

# Always switch off the windscreen wip ers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. Light and sight 153 Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position

# Switch the ignition on and switch off again immediately.

# Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds

(/ page 152). The wiper arms will move into the replace ment position. Removing the wiper blades

# Fold the wiper arms away from the wind screen. 154 Light and sight Fitting the wiper blades

# Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind screen.

# Switch on the ignition.

# Press the button on the combination switch. The wiper arms will move into the original position.

# Switch the ignition off.

# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direc tion of arrow 1 away from the wiper arm as far as it will go.

# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal position.

# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4.

# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1.

# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking position.

# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor rectly.

 

 

Maintenance display

% The duration until the colour changes varies Removing the wiper blades Light and sight 155 depending on the usage conditions. Replacing the windscreen wiper blades

(MAGIC VISION CONTROL) Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position

# Switch the ignition off.

# Within around 15 seconds, press the button on the combination switch

(/ page 152). The wiper arms will move into the replace ment position.

# Remove protective film 1 from the mainte nance display on the tip of the newly fitted wiper blades. When the colour of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced.

# To bring the wiper blade into position to be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly in one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow 1 beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade will engage in the removal position with a click.

# To remove the wiper blade: press release

# Press the wiper blade onto the wiper arm in 156 Light and sight knob 2, pull the wiper blade in the direction of arrow 3 and remove. Fitting the wiper blades

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas ten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis judgement of distance when using the outside mirror The outside mirrors reflect objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear.

# Therefore, always look over your shoul der in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you. the direction of arrow 3 beyond the point of resistance. The wiper blade will engage with a noticeable click and move freely again.

# Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind screen. Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors

& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi cle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi cle is in motion.

# Push the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 until release knob 2 engages. Folding the outside mirrors in/out Adjusting the outside mirrors

# Select the required mirror using button 2 or 4.

% In vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant, the required outside mirror can also be preselec ted automatically via a natural head move ment to the left or right (/ page 317).

# Use button 1 to set the position of the mir ror you have selected. Engaging the outside mirrors

# Press and hold button 3. You will hear a click and the mirror will audi bly click into place. The mirror will now be set to the correct position. Light and sight 157 The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into con tact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.

# If you come into contact with electro lyte, observe the following:

R Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. R Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

# Briefly press button 3. Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function Resetting the outside mirrors

% If the battery has been disconnected or com pletely discharged, the outside mirrors must be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.

# Briefly press button 3.

& WARNING Risk of acid burns and poi soning due to the anti-dazzle mirror elec trolyte Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. 158 Light and sight The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir ror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-dazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror. System limits The system will not go into anti-dazzle mode if:

R the engine is switched off. R reverse gear is engaged. R the interior lighting is switched on. Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi tion function The parking position makes parking easier. The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when:

R the parking position is stored (/ page 158). R the front-passenger mirror is selected. R reverse gear is engaged. The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when:

R you shift the transmission to another trans R you are travelling at a speed greater than mission position. 15 km/h. R you press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side. Storing the parking position of the front-

passenger outside mirror using reverse gear Storing

# Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2.

# Engage reverse gear.

# Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button 1. Light and sight 159 Infrared-reflective windscreen function The infrared-reflective windscreen is coated and reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle inte rior. The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio waves. Calling up

# Select the front-passenger outside mirror Area permeable to radio waves on the windscreen using button 2.

# Engage reverse gear. The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position. Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Locking function 5 Automatic fold-in

# Activate or deactivate the function. Radio-controlled equipment, such as toll sys tems, can be mounted only on areas 1 of the windscreen that are permeable to radio waves. Areas permeable to radio waves 1 are best visi ble from outside the vehicle when the wind screen is illuminated with an external light source. Note this position for vehicles with:

R Windscreen heating R Infrared reflective windscreen 160 Climate control Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control An interior air filter in combination with the pre filter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollu tion level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Make sure that the filter is installed correctly and the filter housing in the engine compartment is closed correctly using the cap and always tightly sealed when in operation. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have service work car ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Overview of the automatic climate control panel 8 Sets climate control to automatic mode, right (/ page 162) 9 Calls up the air conditioning menu

(/ page 162) A Sets climate control to automatic mode, left (/ page 162) C I Reduces the airflow or switches off cli mate control (/ page 161) 1 s Increases the temperature, left 2 Demists the windscreen 3 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off 4 Switches the rear window heater

(/ page 163) on/off 5 s Increases the temperature, right 6 J Increases the airflow or switches on climate control (/ page 161) 7 r Reduces the temperature, right Overview of the rear operating unit 1 Sets air distribution to the centre and side air vents, left 2 Sets the temperature, left 3 Sets the airflow or switches climate control on/off, left (/ page 162) 4 Switches climate control on/off

(/ page 161) Switches residual heat on/off (/ page 164) 5 Sets the airflow or switches climate control on/off, right (/ page 162) 6 Sets the temperature, right 7 Sets air distribution to the centre and side air vents, right 8 Sets climate control to automatic mode, right (/ page 162) 9 Sets the air distribution to the footwell vents, A Synchronisation is activated (/ page 163) B Sets the air distribution to the footwell vents, right left C Sets climate control to automatic mode, left

(/ page 162) The settings for the second row of seats can be configured via the rear operating unit, the multi media system (/ page 163) or the MBUX rear tablet depending on the vehicle's equipment. Climate control 161 Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off

# To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or higher via J on the climate bar on the central display.

# To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 via J on the climate bar on the central display.

% If climate control is switched off, the win dows may mist up more quickly. Switch off climate control only briefly. Switching climate control on/off via the rear operating unit

# Press button 4. or

# Set the airflow to level 0 or higher using but tons 3 and 5.

% If the rear climate control is switched off via button 4, OFF will be shown on the rear display. 162 Climate control Calling up the air conditioning menu Setting climate control to automatic mode Overview of the air distribution settings The air conditioning menu can be called up via the air conditioning line. The air conditioning line is always shown on the lower edge of the central display.

# Select the Climate menu entry in the air con ditioning line. The First row of seats menu is opened. Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system Multimedia system:

4 Climate menu Depending on the external conditions, improved cooling and dehumidification of the interior air are supported when the A/C function is activa ted.

# Select First row of seats.

# Select A/C (A/C). In automatic mode, the set vehicle interior tem perature is controlled automatically and main tained at a constant level by the air supply.

# Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central display.

% You can increase or reduce the airflow by pressing K on the climate bar on the mul timedia system.

# To switch to manual operation: switch off automatic mode or adjust an aspect of air distribution, e.g. P. Setting climate control to automatic mode via the rear operating unit In automatic mode, the set temperature is regu lated by the temperature of the dispensed air and the airflow.

# Press button 8 or C. The symbols on the display indicate which vents the airflow is being directed through:

demister vents P centre and side air vents O footwell vents Setting the air distribution Multimedia system:

4 Climate menu

# Select First row of seats or Second row of seats.

# To set the air distribution: select , P or O.

# Set the airflow.

% Several air distribution options can be selec ted at the same time, for example to set the temperature/air conditioning for the wind screen and the footwells simultaneously. The climate control for the windscreen can only be selected for the first seat row. Setting the footwell temperature Multimedia system:

4 Climate menu

Set the footwell temperature. Setting climate control for the rear passenger compartment (multimedia sys tem) Multimedia system:

4 Climate menu Setting the temperature

# Select Second row of seats.

# Set the temperature. Setting the airflow

# Select Second row of seats.

# Set the airflow. Controlling the rear climate control automat ically

# Select AUTO. Deactivating rear climate control

# Select REAR OFF. Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronisation function via the multimedia system Multimedia system:

4 Climate menu Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronisation function. The driver's settings for temperature, airflow and air distribution will be adopted automatically for all climate zones.

# Select First row of seats or Second row of seats.

# Select SYNC (SYNC). Climate control 163 Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside

# Press on the climate bar of the central display.

# If the windows remain misted up: press z on the climate bar of the central display. Windows misted up on the outside

# Switch on the windscreen wipers.

# Press the button. Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

# Press g on the climate bar on the central display. The interior air will be recirculated. Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode after some time.

% If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly. Switching residual heat on/off Activating/deactivating ionisation 164 Climate control Requirements:

R the vehicle is parked. It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilat ing the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes, depending on the temperature set.

# To switch on: select Residual heat on the climate bar on the central display. Residual heat will be switched off automatically. Switching residual heat on/off via the rear operating unit Requirements:

R The vehicle is parked. When the residual heat of the engine is activated in the rear compartment, you can heat or venti late the front and rear compartments for approx imately 15 minutes.

# Press button 4. Multimedia system:

4 Climate menu Ionisation improves the quality of the vehicle's interior air. Ionisation of the interior air is odour less.

# Select Air quality.

# Select Ionisation.

% The function can only be performed if the AUTO mode is activated or the air distribu tion is set to the side air vent. The function may be restricted if the side air vents on the driver's side are closed. Fragrance system Setting the fragrance system Requirements:

R The climate control system is switched on. R The glove box is closed. R A flacon is inserted. Multimedia system:

4 Climate menu The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra grance throughout the vehicle interior from a fla con located in the glove box.

# Select Air quality.

# Select Air freshener.

# Keep pressing until the desired intensity is reached. Inserting or removing the flacon of the fra grance system

& WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per fume If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into con tact with their eyes.

# Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been drunk.

# If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water.

# If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full flacons Full flacons must not be disposed of with household waste.

Full flacons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point. 1 Cap 2 Flacon

# To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go.

# To remove: after opening the glove box, wait for approximately seven seconds and pull out the flacon. Climate control 165 If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging. Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill it. Refillable flacon

# Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon.

# Fill the flacon with a maximum of 15 ml.

# Screw the cap back on to the flacon. Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the separate informa tion sheet with the flacon. Information on the windscreen heater The windscreen heater is activated automatically if z is switched on on the climate bar on the media display. After the vehicle is started, the windscreen heater is switched on automatically as required. 166 Climate control Stationary heater/ventilation Stationary heater/stationary ventilation function R The air inside the vehicle is heated or ventila ted to the set temperature. R The air inside the vehicle cannot be cooled down to temperatures below the outside temperature. R If the outside temperature changes, ventila tion mode automatically switches to heating mode or heating mode automatically switches to ventilation mode. The stationary heater and the exhaust gas outlet are situated behind the right-hand front wheel. Switching the stationary heater/ventilation on/off via the control panel

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi sonous exhaust gases If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi cle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.

# Always switch the stationary heater off in enclosed spaces without an air extraction systems, e.g. in garages.

# Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run ning.

# Open a window on the windward side of the vehicle to ensure an adequate sup ply of fresh air.

& WARNING Risk of fire due to hot station ary heater components and exhaust gases Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.

# When the stationary heater is switched on, make sure that:

R hot vehicle parts do not come into contact with flammable materials. R the exhaust gas can flow out of the stationary heater exhaust pipe unhindered. R the exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials.

* NOTE Battery discharge caused by sta tionary heater or stationary ventilation operation Operating the stationary heater or stationary ventilation drains the battery.

# After heating or ventilating the vehicle twice, drive for a longer period of time. Requirements:

R the fuel tank is sufficiently full.

% Please note that if the tank fill level is too low, it can result in function restrictions dur ing stationary heating operation. Climate control 167 Switching on immediately R Red: the stationary heater is switched on. R Yellow: the departure time is preselected. The stationary heater/ventilation will switch off automatically after 50 minutes. Setting the stationary heater/stationary ven tilation via the multimedia system Multimedia system:

4 Climate menu

# Select Stationary heater. Selecting the departure time

# Select the time Time A, Time B or Time C. Setting the departure time

# Select the time Time A, Time B or Time C.

# Select the pen beside the time.

# Set a time. Setting the stationary heater/ventilation via remote control Requirements:

R the fuel tank is sufficiently full.

# Set the temperature using the arrows w on the climate bar on the media display.

# Press button 1. The red or blue indicator lamp on button 1 will light up or go out. The colours of the indicator lamp have the fol lowing meaning:

R Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on.

# Press and hold the u button. Setting the departure time

# Briefly press the u button.

# Press the , or . button repeatedly until the time to be changed appears on the display. 168 Climate control

# Press the u and ^ buttons simultane ously. The symbol on the remote control display will flash.

# Press the , and . buttons to set the desired departure time.

# Press the u and ^ buttons simultane ously. The new departure time will be stored. Up to three departure times can be stored.

# To activate the departure time: select the desired departure time and press and hold the u button. The symbol, the departure time and, depending on the selected departure time, the letter A, B or C will appear on the display.

# To deactivate the departure time: select the desired departure time and press and hold the ^ button. OFF will appear on the display.

# To check the status of the active station ary heater: briefly press the u button. Switching off immediately

# Press and hold the ^ button. Overview of the remote control displays (sta tionary heater/stationary ventilation) 1 Stationary ventilation switched on 2 Stationary heater switched on 3 Selected departure time 4 Remaining time for the stationary heater/

stationary ventilation (in minutes) 5 Stationary heater/stationary ventilation active 6 Departure time activated 7 Signal strength Further possible displays:

R Time: activated departure time. R Zero minutes: the running time for the sta tionary heater is increased, as the engine has not yet reached operating temperature when it is started. R OFF: the stationary heater/stationary venti lation is switched off. Replacing the remote control battery (sta tionary heater)

& DANGER Serious damage to health caused by swallowing batteries Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub stances. Swallowing batteries may cause serious damage to health. There is a risk of fatal injury.

# Keep batteries out of the reach of chil dren.

# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. Climate control 169

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat teries Batteries contain toxic and corro sive substances.

Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Requirements:

R a CR2450 lithium battery

# Push a pointed object into recess 1.

# Slide battery cover 2 backwards in the direction of the arrow.

# Insert new battery 3 with the lettering facing upwards.

# Slide battery cover 2 in the opposite direc tion to the arrow onto the remote control until the battery cover engages. Problems with the remote control for the stationary heater/stationary ventilation Problem FAIL Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is malfunctioning. 170 Climate control Problem FAIL FAIL Air vents Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary. The starter battery is not sufficiently charged.

# Charge the starter battery. The fuel tank is not sufficiently filled.

# Refuel at the nearest filling station. The stationary heater is malfunctioning.

# Have the stationary heater checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Adjusting the front air vents

& WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite due to being too close to the air vents Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.

# Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.

# If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following:

R Always keep the vents and the vent grilles in the vehicle interior clear. R Keep the air inlet free of deposits

(/ page 461).

# To close the centre and side air vents:

Adjusting the rear air vents Climate control 171 press button 1 again. The three indicator lamps on the button will go out one by one. The air vents will be closed completely.

# To adjust the air direction of the centre air vents: hold air vent 2 in the centre and move it up or down or to the left or right.

# To adjust the air direction of the side air vents: hold the outer side air vent 3 in the centre and move it up or down or to the left or right. Adjusting the air vents in the rear

& WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite due to being too close to the air vents Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.

# Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.

# If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

# To open the rear air vents: press but ton 1. The air vents will be opened completely and the three indicator lamps on the button will light up.

# To close the rear air vents: press but ton 1 again. The air vents will be closed completely and the three indicator lamps on the button will go out one by one.

# To adjust the air direction of the rear air vents: hold air vent 2 in the centre and move it up or down or to the left or right.

# To open the centre and side air vents:

press button 1. The three indicator lamps on the button will light up. The air vents will be opened com pletely. 172 Climate control Adjusting the rear side air vents

# To close the side air vents in the rear:

press button 1 again. If the button protrudes from the side trim, the side air vent is closed.

# To adjust the air direction of the side air vents: hold air vent 2 in the centre and move it up or down or to the left or right. Opening or closing the air vent in the glove box

* NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive objects in the glove box Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the glove box may be damaged by the air vent located inside the glove compartment.

# Close the air vent when you heat the vehicle. The automatic climate control must be switched on to cool the glove box.

# To open the side air vents in the rear:

press button 1. If the button is flush with the side trim, the side air vent is open.

# At high outside temperatures, open the

# To open or close: turn controller 1 to the air vent and switch on the A/C func tion. right or left. 1 Air vent controller 2 Air vent Driving Switching on the power supply or the igni tion (without engine start)

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular:

R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

R releasing the parking brake. R change the transmission position. R start the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the key out of reach of children. Also observe the "Notes on pets in the vehicle". This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the

"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. Requirements:

R the key is located in the vehicle and the key battery is not discharged. R or: a Digital Vehicle Key is located in the cup holder (/ page 174). R the brake pedal is not depressed. Driving and parking 173

# To switch on the power supply: press but ton 1 once. You can activate the windscreen wiper, for example. The power supply is switched off again if the fol lowing conditions are met:

R you open the driver's door. R you press button 1 twice more. 174 Driving and parking

# To switch on the ignition: press button 1 twice. The indicator lamps appear on the driver dis play. The ignition is switched off again if one of the following conditions is met:

R you do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in posi tion j or the electric parking brake is applied. R you press button 1 once. Starting the vehicle Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but ton

& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

# Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.

& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system Flammable materials may ignite.

# Therefore, check regularly that there are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system. Requirements:

R the key is located in the vehicle and the key battery is not discharged. R or: a Digital Vehicle Key is located in the cup holder (/ page 174).

# Shift the transmission to position j or i.

# Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once.

# If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-

essential consumers and press button 1 once. If the vehicle still does not start, one of the fol lowing display messages appears in the driver display:

# Place the key in the marked space See Own-

er's Manual: Starting the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (/ page 175). or

# Key not detected Place smartphone in charg-

ing bracket: place the mobile phone in the marked space (/ page 140).

% You can switch off the engine while driving by pressing button 1 for about three sec onds or by pressing button 1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips"

(/ page 178). Starting the vehicle with a Digital Vehicle Key Requirements:

R one of the following versions of the Digital Using the Digital Vehicle Key for the first time Vehicle Key is available:

- Digital Vehicle Key sticker suitable mobile phone R the vehicle is equipped with the "Digital Vehi cle Key" function. R the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect: https://

www.mercedes.me. R the mobile phone is sufficiently charged.

% Mercedes-Benz recommends that you carry the emergency key in case of function restrictions.

% If the mobile phone is in a protective case, this can impair the functionality.

# Deactivate the key 1 (/ page 68).

# Place the key 1 in the cup holder 2. Driving and parking 175

# Place the mobile phone or the Digital Vehicle Key sticker in the marked space 3.

# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehi cle using the start/stop button. Any further starts with the Digital Vehicle Key The key is not needed for any further starts.

# Place the mobile phone or the Digital Vehicle Key sticker in the marked space 3.

# Start the vehicle using the start/stop button. The "Digital Vehicle Key" service can be deacti vated in Mercedes me connect at https://

www.mercedes.me. The function is then deacti vated in the mobile phone via an online connec tion. If connection to the Internet is not possible, e.g. after the mobile phone or the Digital Vehicle Key sticker has been stolen, the key function can be deactivated at a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Starting the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the display mes sage Place the key in the marked space See 176 Driving and parking Owner's Manual appears in the driver display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.

# Make sure that the cup holder 2 is empty.

# Remove the key 1 from the key ring.

# Place the key 1 in the cup holder 2. The vehicle will start after a short time. If the key 1 is removed from the cup holder 2, the engine continues running. For further vehicle starts, however, the key 1 must be located in the cup holder2 during the entire journey.

# Have the key 1 checked at a qualified spe cialist workshop. If the vehicle does not start:

# leave the key 1 in the cup holder 2.

# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehi cle using the start/stop button.

% You can also switch on the power supply or the ignition with the start/stop button. Starting the vehicle via Remote Online serv ices Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before commencing your journey Ensure the following before starting the engine:

R the legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R the fuel tank is sufficiently full. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. Charging the battery before commencing your journey If the vehicle battery is discharged, you receive a message on your smartphone. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes. Ensure the following before starting the engine:

R the legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R the fuel tank is sufficiently full. Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)

& WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap ment due to unintentional starting of the engine Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. Driving and parking 177

# Always secure the engine against unin tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work. Requirements:

R park position j is selected. R the anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R the panic alarm is not activated. R the hazard warning light system is switched off. R The bonnet is closed. R the doors are closed and locked. R the windows and sliding sunroof are closed.

# Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every vehicle start, the engine runs for ten minutes. You can carry out a maximum of two consecu tive starting attempts. The vehicle must be star ted once with the key before trying to start the vehicle again with the smartphone. you can stop the vehicle again at any time.

% Further information can be found in the R avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at smartphone app. full throttle. Securing the engine against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work:

# switch on the hazard warning light system. or

# unlock the doors. or

# open a side window or the sliding sunroof. Running-in notes To preserve the engine during the first 1,500 km:

R drive at varying road speeds and engine R drive the vehicle in drive program A R shift to the next highest gear at the very lat est when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the rev counter. R do not shift down a gear manually in order to speeds. or ;. brake. R do not depress the accelerator pedal past the pressure point (kickdown). R only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1,500 km. This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Please also observe the following running-in notes:

R in certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a cer tain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys tem effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. R brakepads, brake discs and tyres that are either new or have been replaced only ach ieve optimum braking effect and grip after several hundred kilometres of driving. Com pensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. 178 Driving and parking Notes on driving

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor

& DANGER Risk of death caused by rect footwear exhaust gases Incorrect footwear includes, for example:

R shoes with platform soles R shoes with high heels R slippers

# Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely.

& WARNING Risk of accident when switch ing off the ignition when driving If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. You will then need, for example, to use con siderably more force to steer and brake.

# Do not switch off the ignition while driv ing. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

# Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.

& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction.

# Do not shift down on slippery road sur faces to increase the engine braking effect.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi sonous exhaust gases If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi cle. This is the case when the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, for example.

# Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run ning.

# Open a window on the side of the vehi cle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may over heat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail.

# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.

# Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.

* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range.

# Do not drive with the engine in the over revving range.

* NOTE Causing wear to the brake linings by permanently depressing the brake pedal

# Do not permanently depress the brake pedal while driving.

# To use braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time. Driving and parking 179

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away

# Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi ately.

# Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.

* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata lytic converter.

# Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.

# Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on driving on salt-treated roads The braking effect is limited on salt-treated roads. 180 Driving and parking Therefore, observe the following notes:

R due to salt build-up on the brake disks and R avoid sudden steering movements R brake carefully the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored. brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side R maintain a much greater safe distance to the vehicle in front To remove salt build-up:

R brake occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey Notes on aquaplaning Aquaplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface. Observe the following notes during heavy precip itation or in conditions in which aquaplaning may occur:

R reduce speed R avoid tyre ruts

% Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tyres (/ page 491). Notes on driving through water on the road surface Water which has entered into the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage. Observe the following if you must drive through water:

R The water, when calm, may only reach the lower edge of the vehicle body. R Drive at walking pace at most, otherwise water can enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. R Vehicles travelling in front, or oncoming vehi cles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible height of the water. The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to Function of rear axle steering The rear axle steering is an electromechanical auxiliary steering on the rear axle which adjusts the steering of the rear wheels according to the position of the front wheels, depending on the speed. This results in greater manoeuvrability and improved stability. Rear axle steering has the following characteris tics:

R reduced steering effort and turning circle resulting in reduced parking effort R improved driving stability, e.g. when corner ing R more direct steering resulting in improved handling of the vehicle Observe the notes on snow chains

(/ page 491) and on activating snow chain mode. ECO start/stop function R an automatic engine start is required by the R the symbol s appears: the ECO start/

Operation of the ECO start/stop function

% The ECO start/stop function is available only in the C, A, ; and = drive pro grams (depending on the setting). The engine is switched off automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met:

R you brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans mission position h or i. R vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system: you depress the brake pedal when travelling at a low speed.

% When the HOLD function is active and in transmission position j, the engine can stop in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. when stopping at a stop sign with no vehicle in front. The engine is restarted automatically if:

R you engage transmission position h or k. R you depress the accelerator pedal. vehicle. system:

R vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical

you release the brake pedal on a downhill gradient and the vehicle does not roll. the vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and does not enter glide mode at 20 km/h. ECO start/stop function symbols in the driver display:

R the symbol (green) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R the symbol (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi tions for an engine stop have been met. R neither the symbol nor appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelli gent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stop sign. Driving and parking 181 stop function is deactivated or there is a mal function. If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/

stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. In addition, the following display message appears in the driver display:

Vehicle is operational Switch off ignition before exiting If you do not switch off the ignition, the ignition is automatically switched off after three minutes. 182 Driving and parking Deactivating or activating the ECO start/

stop function Function of the ECO rating ECO Assist function The ECO rating summarises your driving style from the start of the journey to its completion and helps you to optimise your fuel consump tion. Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys tem (EQ Boost technology)

% ECO Assist is active only in drive pro grams ; and A. ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expec ted route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an event ahead and the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and downhill gradi ent.

# Press button 1. A display appears in the instrument cluster when switching the ECO start/stop function off/on.

% A continuous OFF display appears in the instrument cluster while the ECO start/

stop function is deactivated. The ECO rating analyses the following criteria for the most economical driving style:

R coasting in good time R consistent speed R moderate acceleration The more economically you drive, the higher the ECO rating between 0 and 100. in the route event. Once the route event has been passed, the symbol 2 is faded out again. How ECO Assist appears on the driver's display 1 "Foot off the accelerator" prompt 2 Route event ahead

% In the other menus, only the "Foot off the accelerator" prompt 1 is shown next to the transmission position display. A route event detected ahead 2 is displayed as soon as the driver nears it. If the driver depresses the accelerator pedal, symbol 1 will also appear. As soon as the driver lifts off the accelerator pedal, symbol 1 is faded out. The route event 2 is shown as long as the system is intervening The following route events can be detected by ECO Assist:

1 Roundabout 2 S-bend 3 Sharp bend 4 T-junction 5 Downhill gradient 6 Vehicle in front 7 Speed limit Driving and parking 183

% If the system does not intervene during the route event, nothing will be displayed. The system is passive.

% In drive program A, only route event 6 is shown. System limits If the calculated route is adhered to when route guidance is active, ECO Assist can function even more precisely. The basic function is also availa ble without active route guidance. Not all infor mation and traffic situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the map data. ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsi ble for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. The driver must be ready to brake at all times irrespective of whether the system intervenes. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illu mination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. 184 Driving and parking R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, C (Sport): sporty driving style with lowered

Vehicle level R electric power steering Selecting the drive program direct sunlight or reflections. R If there is dirt on the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera or the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured. R If traffic signs are hard to discern, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are obscured. R If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date. R If signs are ambiguous, e.g. where there are traffic signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes. DYNAMIC SELECT switch Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT button Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change between the following drive programs:

= (Individual): individual settings B (Sport +): sporty driving style with low ered suspension suspension driving style A (Comfort): comfortable and economical N (CURVE): comfortable driving with curve inclination function (vehicles with EACTIVE BODY CONTROL)

; (Eco): particularly economical driving style

% The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display of the on-board com puter. Depending on the drive program, the following systems change their characteristics:

R drive engine and transmission management Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC availability of Glide mode R ESP R suspension suspension and damping

# Press the DYNAMIC SELECT button 1 on the left or right. The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display. Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia system) The ECO start/stop function is activated auto matically. Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT (DYNAMIC SELECT) Setting drive program I

# Select Configure Individual.

# Select and set a category. Switching the reset display on/off

# Switch Ask when starting on or off. Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an addi tional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated.

% The prompt appears only if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings. Function off: the next time the vehicle is star ted the A drive program is set automatically. Displaying vehicle data Multimedia system:

4 5 Info

# Select Vehicle. The vehicle data is displayed. Displaying engine data Multimedia system:

4 5 Info

# Select Engine data. The engine data is displayed.

% The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine tor que may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines). Driving and parking 185 Factors that can influence this are, for exam ple:

R Sea level R Fuel grade R Outside temperature R Operating temperature of the engine

% The values displayed serve only as orienta tion. The values for engine output and engine torque shown in the central display may deviate from the actual values. Calling up the fuel consumption indicator Multimedia system:

4 5 Info

# Select Consumption. The current and average fuel consumption is displayed. 186 Driving and parking Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect gearshifting If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply.

# If you engage the transmission position h or k when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the

"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position is shown in the driver display.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular:

R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

R releasing the parking brake. R change the transmission position. R start the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the key out of reach of children. j Park position k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive position Engaging reverse gear R

# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance. Engaging neutral N

# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. The transmission position display i is shown in the multifunction display. Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away. Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral i even if the ignition is switched off or the driver's door is opened:

# Start the vehicle.

# Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral i when the car is stationary.

# Release the brake pedal.

# Switch the ignition off. The Wegrollgefahr N manuell aktiviert Kein automatischer Wechsel nach P message appears in the multifunction display.

% If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in the vehicle, the automatic transmission remains in neutral i. The park position j is automatically re-engaged as soon as one of the following conditions is met:

R you switch to transmission position h or k. R you press the button j. Engaging park position P

# Observe the notes on parking the vehicle

# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle is

(/ page 196). stationary. Driving and parking 187

# When the vehicle is stationary, press button j. When the transmission position display shows j, the park position is engaged. If no transmission position display j appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.

% Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until j is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display. Park position j is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met:

R you switch off the ignition when the vehicle is stationary and the transmission is in posi tion h or k. R you open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position h or k. R you switch the engine off and bring the vehi cle to a standstill when the vehicle is rolling and the transmission is in position h or k. R you switch off the engine, bring the vehicle Manual gearshifting 188 Driving and parking to a standstill and open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when the vehicle is rolling and the transmission is in position i. R engaging park position j automatically is required by the vehicle.

% To manoeuvre with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while stationary and engage transmission position h or k again. Engaging drive position D

# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. When the automatic transmission is in transmis sion position h, it shifts the gears automati cally. This depends, among other things, on the following factors:

R the selected drive program R the position of the accelerator pedal R the driving speed When the automatic transmission is shifted to position h, you can manually shift it with the steering wheel gearshift paddle. If permitted, the automatic transmission shifts to a higher or lower gear depending on the steering wheel gearshift paddle being pulled. You have two options to manually shift the auto matic transmission:

R temporary setting R permanent setting The gears shift automatically when manual gear shifting is deactivated. Temporary setting:

# to activate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1 or 2. Manual gearshifting is activated for a short time. The transmission position display shows p and the current gear.

% How long the manual gearshifting stays acti vated is dependant on various factors. Manual gearshifting can be automatically deactivated in the following cases:

R changing the drive program R restarting the vehicle R when the transmission position h is engaged again R driving style paddle 2. paddle 1.

# To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift

# To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift

# To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2 and hold it in place. The transmission position display shows h. Permanent setting:

# change to drive program =(/ page 184).

# select drive setting p (/ page 185). Gearshift recommendation The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.

# If the gearshift recommendation 1 appears next to the transmission position display, shift to the recommended gear. Using kickdown

# Maximum acceleration: depress the accel erator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached to protect the engine from overrevving. Glide mode function With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Glide mode is characterised by the following:

R the combustion engine is disconnected from the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral. R the transmission position display h is shown in green. R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ-Boost technology): the com bustion engine can be switched off. All of the vehicle functions remain active. Driving and parking 189 Glide mode is activated if the following condi tions are met:

R drive program ; is selected. R the speed is within a suitable range. R the road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends. R There is no trailer coupled to the trailer hitch, and no bicycle rack fitted. R you do not depress the accelerator or brake pedal (except for light brake applications).

% Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program =. Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: when Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active, the glide mode function is restricted. Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow ing parameters:

R Incline 190 Driving and parking R Downhill gradient R Temperature R height R Speed R operating status of the engine R traffic situation Function of the 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe cially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.

% In wintry road conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary. Refuelling Refuelling the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly flammable.

# Fire, naked flames, smoking and crea tion of sparks must be avoided.

# Switch off the ignition and, if available, the stationary heater, before and while refuelling the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.

# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

# Do not inhale fuel vapour.

# Keep children away from fuel.

# Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.

# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten tion immediately. Do not induce vomit ing.

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour.

# Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body.

# To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process.

& WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture Vehicles with a diesel engine:

While the engine is running, component parts in the exhaust system may overheat without warning.

# Never refuel using petrol.

# Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Vehicles with a petrol engine:

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

# Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free fuel that conforms to European EN 228, or an equivalent specification. Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

R diesel R regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON R petrol with more than 10% ethanol by vol ume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100 R petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30 R petrol with additives containing metal If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

# do not switch the ignition on.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving and parking 191

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Vehicles with a diesel engine:

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

# Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel that conforms to European stand ard EN 590, or an equivalent specifica tion. In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 50 ppm. Never refuel using any of the following fuels:

R petrol R marine diesel R heating oil R pure bio-diesel fuel or vegetable oil R paraffin or kerosene If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:

192 Driving and parking

# Do not switch the ignition on.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Do not use petrol to refuel vehi cles with a diesel engine

* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi cles with a petrol engine If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

R do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

R do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

* NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by overfilled fuel tanks

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. If you have added too much fuel because of a defective filling pump, for instance:

# Do not switch the ignition on.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Requirements:

R The vehicle is unlocked.

% Do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. Observe the notes on operating fluids and fuel. The recommended octane number for your vehi cle can be found on the information label in the fuel filler flap.

# Insert the fuel filler cap from above into AdBlue (vehicles with a diesel engine only) bracket 2.

# Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

% Vehicles with a diesel engine: the tank filler neck is designed for refuelling at diesel filling pumps.

% Vehicles with a diesel engine: when the fuel tank is completely empty, top up with at least 5 litres of diesel.

% Vehicles with a diesel engine: use a filler neck with a large diameter for vehicles with a diesel engine when topping up fuel from a fuel can. Otherwise, the filler neck cannot slide into the tank.

# Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.

# Close fuel filler flap 1.

% Close the fuel filler flap before locking the Driving and parking 193 Notes on refilling AdBlue AdBlue is a water-soluble fluid for the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. In order for the exhaust gas aftertreatment to func tion properly, only use AdBlue in accordance with ISO 22241. AdBlue is characterised by the following:

R non-toxic R colourless and odourless R non-flammable If you open the AdBlue tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may be released. Only fill the AdBlue tank in well-ventilated areas. Do not let AdBlue come into contact with skin, eyes or clothes. Keep AdBlue away from chil dren. Do not ingest AdBlue. If AdBlue is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Drink plenty of water. Seek medical attention at once. 1 Fuel filler flap 2 Bracket for fuel filler cap 3 Tyre pressure table 4 QR code for rescue card 5 Fuel type

# Press on the back area of fuel filler flap 1.

# Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and vehicle. remove it. 194 Driving and parking Observe the notes on operating fluids

(/ page 564). AdBlue is available here:

R AdBlue can be topped up by fast service at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Topping up AdBlue

* NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue being in the fuel

# AdBlue must not be used to fill the R AdBlue is available at many filling stations

# Only use AdBlue to fill the AdBlue from AdBlue filling pumps. R Alternatively, AdBlue is available at qualified

# Do not overfill the AdBlue tank. fuel tank. tank. specialist workshops, e.g. Mercedes-Benz Service Centres, and at many filling stations in AdBlue refill canisters or AdBlue refill bottles.

% Ensure the connection between the refill container and vehicle filler neck does not drip.

* NOTE Contamination of the vehicle inte rior due to AdBlue leakage

# After topping up, carefully close the AdBlue refill container.

# Avoid carrying AdBlue refill containers permanently in the vehicle. Requirements:

R The vehicle is unlocked. The following messages appear in order in the driver's display when the AdBlue tank requires topping up:

R Refill AdBlue See Owners ManualThe AdBlue level has fallen below the reserve range. Top up AdBlue immediately. R Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's ManualThe low AdBlue level will lead to limited performance after the remaining distance displayed has been driven. Top up AdBlue immediately. R XX,X l Top up AdBlue Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX kmThe low AdBlue level will lead to limited perform ance from the speed displayed. After the remaining distance displayed has been cov ered, it will no longer be possible to start the engine. Top up with at least the amount of AdBlue displayed. R XX,X l Top up AdBlue Switch on ignition, wait 60 sec. or eng. start not poss.. The AdBlue tank is empty. You can no longer start the engine. Top up with at least the amount of Opening the AdBlue filler cap Topping up AdBlue Driving and parking 195 AdBlue displayed. Switch on the ignition and wait for approximately 60 seconds. Start the engine. You can see the AdBlue range and the level in the driver's display.

% The AdBlue range shown depends strongly on the driving style and operating condi tions. The actual range can therefore deviate from the calculated range.

# Press on the back area of fuel filler flap 1.

# Turn AdBlue filler cap 2 anti-clockwise and remove it.

% You can also store the AdBlue filler cap in the fuel filler cap holder in the fuel filler flap hinge arm.

# Screw on the fastener of AdBlue refill canis ter 2.

# Screw disposable hose 1 onto the opening of AdBlue refill canister 2 until hand-tight.

# Screw disposable hose 1 onto the filler neck of the vehicle until hand-tight.

# Lift up and tip AdBlue refill canister 2. The filling process stops when the AdBlue tank is completely full. AdBlue refill canister 2 can be removed when it has been only partially emptied. 196 Driving and parking

# Unscrew and close disposable hose 1 and AdBlue refill canister 2 in reverse order.

# Replace the AdBlue filler cap and turn it Parking Parking the vehicle

# Close the fuel filler flap.

# Switch on the ignition for at least 60 sec clockwise. onds.

% If the vehicle could not be started as the AdBlue tank was empty, it can take up to 60 seconds for the refill to be detected.

# Start the vehicle.

% Avoid storing AdBlue refill containers per manently in the vehicle.

# In particular, do not park on dry grass land or harvested grain fields.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehi cle rolling away.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If the vehicle is not securely parked suffi ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient.

# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.

# apply the parking brake.

# Switch the transmission to position j.

& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.

# Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular:

R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

R releasing the parking brake. R change the transmission position. R start the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the key out of reach of children. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the

"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away ing away.

# Always secure the vehicle against roll Driving and parking 197

# Engage transmission position j in a station ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied

(/ page 187).

# Switch off the engine and the ignition by pressing the 1 button.

# Release the service brake slowly.

# Get out of the vehicle and lock it.

% When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the panorama sliding sunroof for approximately five minutes if the driver's door is closed. Garage door opener Programming buttons for the garage door opener

& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by applying the brake pedal.

# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.

# Apply the electric parking brake. 198 Driving and parking

# Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.

& WARNING Risk of injury when opening or closing a door with the garage door opener When you operate or program the door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the door may become trapped or be struck by the door.

# Always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the door. Requirements:

R The vehicle has been parked outside the garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on.

% The garage door opener function is always available when the ignition is switched on.

# Point remote control 5 from a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm towards button 1, 2 or 3.

# Press and hold button 6 of remote control 5 until one of the following signals appears:

R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green contin uously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Pro gramming was successful. Additionally, synchronisation of the rolling code with the door system must also be carried out.

# If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure.

# Release all of the buttons.

% The remote control for the door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener. Synchronising the rolling code Requirements:

R The door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or door drive.

# Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow.

% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi cator lamp flashes yellow.

# Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow.

# Hold remote control 5 at the same angles

# Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until Driving and parking 199 the door opens or closes.

# If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes. Clearing the garage door opener memory

# Press and hold buttons 1 and 3. Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow.

# If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release buttons 1 and 3. The entire memory has been deleted. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects are located outside the range of movement of the door.

# Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.

# Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com pleted.

% Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive. Troubleshooting when programming the remote control

# Check if the transmitter frequency of remote control 5 is supported.

# Replace the batteries in remote control 5.

# Hold remote control 5 at various angles from a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. at various distances in front of the inside rear view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

# Note that some remote controls transmit only for a limited period, press button 6 on remote control 5 again before transmission ends.

# Align the aerial line of the door opener unit with the remote control.

% Support and additional information on pro gramming:

R On the HomeLink Hotline on (0) 08000 466 354 65 or +49 (0) 6838 907-277. R On the Internet at https://

www.homelink.com. Opening or closing the garage door Requirements:

R The corresponding button is programmed to operate the door. 200 Driving and parking Electric parking brake Electric parking brake function (applying automatically)

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular:

R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

R releasing the parking brake. R change the transmission position. R start the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

# Keep the key out of reach of children. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the

"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect. The electric parking brake is applied if the trans mission is in position j and one of the follow ing conditions is fulfilled:

R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.

% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake. In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied:

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill. R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle tionary. stationary. This is the case if one of the following conditions is also fulfilled:

R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insufficient. R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red ! indicator lamp appears in the driver's display. The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Electric parking brake function (releasing automatically) The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled:

R The driver's door is closed. R The engine is running. R The transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position j to h or k when on level ground with the driver's door closed. R If the transmission is in position k, the boot lid must be closed. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:

R You shift from transmission position j. R You have previously driven at speeds greater than 3 km/h. Driving and parking 201 When the electric parking brake is released, the red ! indicator lamp in the driver's display goes out. Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually

# Push handle 1. The red ! indicator lamp appears in the driver's display.

% The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the indicator lamp is lit continu ously. Applying Releasing

# Switch on the ignition.

# Pull handle 1. The red ! indicator lamp appears in the driver's display. Emergency braking

# Press and hold handle 1. As long as the vehicle is driving, the Release parking brake message is displayed. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red ! indicator lamp appears in the driver's display. 202 Driving and parking Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle If a collision is detected when the tow-away pro tection is primed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch on the ignition. You will receive information about the following points:

R The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged. R The force of the impact. The following situations can lead to inadvertent activation:

R The parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a two-

storey garage.

% Deactivate tow-away protection in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti vate tow-away protection, collision detection will also be deactivated. You can permanently deactivate the collision detection via the multimedia system

(/ page 202). System limits Detection may be restricted in the following sit uations:

R the vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g. if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key R an impact occurs at low speed R the electric parking brake is not applied Setting collision detection on a parked vehi cle (MMS) Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Collision notification

# Activate or deactivate the function. Activating or deactivating the collision pho tos function Please note possible legal restrictions in some countries regarding automatic recording of the vehicle surroundings.

# Activate or deactivate Collision photos. Transferring the collision photos with the Mercedes me App

# Select Upload collision photos.

# Scan the QR code on the central display with the Mercedes me App. The encrypted collision photos will then be uploaded to Mercedes me.

% Any device that can scan QR codes can be used to view the collision photos in the Mercedes me App. Copying the collision photos onto a USB flash drive

# Connect a USB flash drive (/ page 425).

# Select Manage collision photos.

# Select Copy (USB). All collision photos are copied onto the USB flash drive. Deleting collision photos

# Select Manage collision photos.

# Select Delete. All collision photos will be deleted. Notes on parking up the vehicle If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam aged by heavy discharging.

% Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Standby mode (extension of the starter bat tery's period out of use) Standby mode function

% This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimised during extended periods of non-oper ation. Standby mode is characterised by the following:

R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears in the media display. R The connection to online services is interrup ted. If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system:

R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on. Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-opera tional time may cause inconvenience, i.e. it can not be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the engine. The starter battery must be charged first in the following situations:

R The vehicle's non-operational time must be extended. R The Battery charge insufficient for standby mode message appears in the media display.

% Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on. Activating/deactivating standby mode (park ing up the vehicle) Requirements:

R The engine is switched off. Driving and parking 203 Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Other functions

# Activate or deactivate Standby mode. Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and manoeu vring the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always 204 Driving and parking take into account road, weather or traffic condi tions. Information on vehicle sensors and cameras Some driving and driving safety systems use radar, lidar or ultrasonic sensors and cameras to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle (depending on the vehicle's equip ment). Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radar and lidar sensors are integrated behind the bumpers and/or behind the Mercedes star. The ultrasonic sensors are located in the front and rear bumpers. The cameras are located behind the front and rear windows. Keep these parts free of dirt, ice and slush (/ page 465). The sensors must not be covered, for example by bicycle racks, overhanging loads, stickers, foil or foils to protect against stone chipping. Additional licence plate brackets can likewise impair the function of the ultrasonic sensors. In the event of damage to the bumpers or radia tor grille, or following a collision impacting the bumpers or radiator grille, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear win dows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. If the sensors or cameras are damaged, some driving systems and driving safety systems may no longer function properly. Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving systems and driving safety systems:

R 360 Camera (/ page 244) R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 205)

(/ page 219) R Adaptive Brake Lights (/ page 215) R AIRMATIC (/ page 233) R Active Brake Assist (/ page 208) R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 263) R Traffic Light Assist (/ page 259) R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 253) R BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 205) R Hill Start Assist (/ page 232) R E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL (/ page 236) R EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution) R ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

(/ page 208)

(/ page 205) R ESP Crosswind Assist (/ page 207) R ESP trailer stabilisation (/ page 207) R Active Speed Limit Assist (/ page 223) R HOLD function (/ page 232) R STEER CONTROL (/ page 208) R Active Steering Assist (/ page 225) R Limiter (/ page 216) R Active Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 230) R Active Parking Assist (/ page 247) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 239) R Reversing camera (/ page 241) R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 227) R Cruise control (/ page 215) R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 260) R Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 256) Function of ABS The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations:

R During braking, e.g. at full brake application or insufficient tyre traction, the wheels are prevented from locking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving. Function of BAS The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated:

R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres sure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Function of ESP (Electronic Stability Pro gram)

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is deactivated If you deactivate ESP, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. Driving and parking 205

# ESP should only be deactivated in the following situations. ESP can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations, within physical limits:

R When pulling away on wet or slippery carria geways. R When braking. If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP can stabilise the vehicle by intervening in the following ways:

R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to the situation. When ESP is deactivated, the warning lamp lights up continuously:

R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active. 206 Driving and parking

% When ESP is deactivated, you are still assis ted by ESP when braking. When the warning lamp flashes, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit:

R Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary when pulling away. Deactivate ESP in the following situations to improve traction:

R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel.

% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction. If the ESP warning lamp lights up continu ously, ESP is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information:

R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 634) R Display messages (/ page 574) ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery carriageway. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways:

R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Influence of drive programs on ESP The drive programs enable ESP to adapt to dif ferent weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 184). ESP modes Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP mode will be activated auto matically. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch

(/ page 184). ESP Comfort R drive program A, ; and N R balance between traction and stability R recommended for all road surface conditions R suitable for dry and difficult road conditions

(e.g. snow and ice or wet road surface) ESP Sport R drive program C R offers stability but with a sporty setup R allows the sporty driver a more active driving style R only suitable for good road conditions, a dry road surface and a clear stretch of road ESP Sport +

R drive program B R emphasises the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics for a more active driving style R only suitable for good road conditions, a dry road surface and a clear stretch of road Activating/deactivating ESP (Electronic Sta bility Program) Multimedia system:

4 5 5 Vehicle quick-access

% ESP can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu.

# Select ESP.

# Select On or Off. ESP is deactivated if the ESP OFF warn ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. Function of ESP Crosswind Assist ESP Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi cle in the lane:

R ESP Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx. 80 km/h and 200 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilised by means of a targe ted and individual brake application on one side. Function of ESP trailer stabilisation

& WARNING Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high centre of gravity may tip over before ESP detects this. Driving and parking 207

# Always adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather condi tions. When driving with a trailer, ESP can stabilise your vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve from side to side:

R ESP trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of 65 km/h. R Slight swerving is reduced by means of a tar geted, individual brake application on one side. R In the event of severe swerving, the engine output is also reduced and all wheels are braked. ESP trailer stabilisation may be impaired or may not function if:

R The trailer is not connected correctly or is not detected properly by the vehicle. 208 Driving and parking Function of EBD Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is char acterised by the following:

R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends. Function of STEER CONTROL STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation. This steering recommendation is given particu larly in the following situations:

R Both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake. R The vehicle starts to skid. System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R ESP is deactivated. R ESP is malfunctioning. R The steering is malfunctioning. If ESP is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering. Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions:

R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack age: Evasive Steering Assist and cornering function Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists, large animals (at animal crossings) or pedestrians, or reduce the effects of such a collision. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: to minimise the risk of collision when pulling away even further, Active Brake Assist also limits the possible acceleration. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:

Active Brake Assist can also help to minimise the risk of collision with pedestrians and cyclists when turning by monitoring the area which the vehicle will cross. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli sion, a warning tone sounds and the L dis tance warning lamp lights up. If, when pulling away at walking pace, the risk of collision with other crossing vehicles is detected, three red arrows pointing in the corresponding direction light up in the instrument cluster. Depending on the situation, these can either appear one after the other or flash simultane ously. If the situation is particularly critical, a warning tone will also sound and the L dis tance warning lamp will light up. Too small a distance to the vehicle in front 1 is displayed in red in the menu "Assistance" in the multifunction display. If the gap becomes even smaller, the vehicle in front will also be highligh ted red. In case of autonomous braking, red radar waves 2 appear in front of the vehicle. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt. If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In particularly critical situations, Active Brake Assist can also initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warn ing tone occur simultaneously with the braking application. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak ing, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max imum full-stop braking if necessary.

% If autonomous braking or situation-depend ent braking assistance has occurred, a pop up appears in the multifunction display and then automatically goes out after a short time. If the autonomous braking function or the situa tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered, Driving and parking 209 additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE) may also be initiated.

& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa tions. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might:

R Give a warning or brake without reason R Not give a warning or not brake

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec essary. 210 Driving and parking

% If the system is unavailable, the display appears in the multifunction display. Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist. The individual subfunctions are available in the following speed ranges:

The distance warning function issues a warning in the following situations:

R From approximately 30 km/h, if over several seconds the distance maintained to the vehi cle travelling in front is insufficient for the driven speed, the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. R From approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and the L distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated ten sioning of the seat belt. Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this. The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:

Vehicles travelling in front Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Crossing pedestrians Stationary pedestrians Crossing cyclists Cyclists travel ling in front Stationary cyclists Up to approx. 250 km/h Up to approx. 80 km/h No reaction Up to approx. 80 km/h No reaction Up to approx. 60 km/h Up to approx. 80 km/h No reaction Driving and parking 211 Up to approx. 250 km/h Up to approx. 100 km/h Up to approx. 120 km/h Up to approx. 120 km/h Up to approx. 70 km/h Up to approx. 120 km/h Up to approx. 80 km/h Up to approx. 70 km/h Vehicles without Driv ing Assis tance Pack age Vehicles with Driving Assis tance Pack age 212 Driving and parking The autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations:

Vehicles travelling in front Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Crossing pedestrians Stationary pedestrians Crossing cyclists Cyclists travel ling in front Stationary cyclists From 7 km/h up to approx. 200 km/h From 7 km/h up to approx. 50 km/h No reaction No reaction From 7 km/h up to approx. 60 km/h From 7 km/h up to approx. 60 km/h From 7 km/h up to approx. 80 km/h No reaction From 7 km/h up to approx. 250 km/h From 7 km/h up to approx. 100 km/h Up to approx. 120 km/h Up to approx. 120 km/h From 7 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h Up to approx. 120 km/h From 7 km/h up to approx. 80 km/h From 7 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h Vehicles without Driv ing Assis tance Pack age Vehicles with Driving Assis tance Pack age Vehicles without Driv ing Assis tance Pack age Vehicles with Driving Assis tance Pack age The situation-dependent braking assistance may intervene in the following situations:

Vehicles travelling in front Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Crossing pedestrians Stationary pedestrians Crossing cyclists Cyclists travel ling in front Stationary cyclists From 7 km/h up to approx. 200 km/h From 7 km/h up to approx. 50 km/h No reaction No reaction From 7 km/h up to approx. 60 km/h From 7 km/h up to approx. 60 km/h From 7 km/h up to approx. 80 km/h No reaction Driving and parking 213 From 7 km/h up to approx. 250 km/h From 7 km/h up to approx. 100 km/h Up to approx. 120 km/h Up to approx. 120 km/h From 7 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h Up to approx. 120 km/h From 7 km/h up to approx. 80 km/h From 7 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h Cancelling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by:

R Activating kickdown. R Releasing the brake pedal. Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli cation when one of the following conditions is fulfilled:

R You manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle. R There is no longer a risk of collision. R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle. Reaction to oncoming road users (only vehi cles with Driving Assistance Package) Active Brake Assist can also react to detected oncoming road users:

R Reaction up to speeds of approximately 100 km/h R Warning for oncoming road users through acoustic warning and warning lamp 214 Driving and parking R Autonomous braking application in order to reduce the severity of an accident Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

& WARNING Risk of an accident despite Evasive Steering Assist Evasive Steering Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa tions. In addition, the steering support of Evasive Steering Assist is generally not sufficient to avoid a collision. In such cases Evasive Steering Assist can:

R give an unnecessary warning or provide R not give a warning or not provide assis assistance tance

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.

# Be ready to brake and take evasive action, if necessary.

# Prevent the assistance by actively steering in non-critical driving situa tions.

# Drive at an appropriate speed if pedes trians are close to the path of your vehi cle. Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac teristics:

R Detection of pedestrians, cyclists and vehi cles. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if it detects a swerving manoeuvre. R Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving manoeuvre. of the vehicle. R Reaction from a speed of approximately 20 km/h up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h. You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering. Cornering function (only vehicles with Driv ing Assistance Package) If a risk of collision with an oncoming vehicle is detected when turning, autonomous braking can be initiated at speeds up to approx. 20 km/h. System limits Full system performance is not available for a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after driving off. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions. R If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged R If the sensors are impaired due to interfer ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in multi-storey car parks. R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed. R Assistance during swerving and straightening or covered. R In complex traffic situations where objects Setting Active Brake Assist Function of Adaptive Brake Lights Driving and parking 215 cannot always be clearly identified. R In the case of persons smaller than approx. 1.10 m. R If pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range. R If road users are hidden by other objects or are located close to other objects. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian or cyclist cannot be distinguished from the back ground. R If a pedestrian or cyclist is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects. R On bends with a tight radius.

% The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto matically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in period. Requirements:

R The ignition is switched on. Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Brake Assist

# Select the desired setting. The setting is retained when the engine is next started. Deactivating Active Brake Assist

% It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated.

# Select Off. The distance warning function, the autono mous braking function and the Evasive Steer ing Assist are deactivated. When the engine is next started, the medium setting is automatically selected.

% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the symbol appears in the status bar of the multifunction display. Adaptive Brake Lights warn following traffic in an emergency braking situation with the following actions:

R By flashing the brake lamps R By activating the hazard warning lights If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above 50 km/h, the brake lamps flash rapidly. This provides traffic travelling behind you with an even more noticeable warning. If the vehicle is travelling at speeds of more than 70 km/h at the beginning of the brake applica tion, the hazard warning lights switch on once the vehicle is stationary. When you pull away again, the hazard warning lights will switch off automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lights using the hazard warning button. Cruise control and limiter Function of cruise control Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. 216 Driving and parking If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. Cruise control is operated using the correspond ing steering wheel buttons. You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up to the set winter tyre limit. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nise dangers (/ page 203). Messages in the driver's display R h (grey): cruise control is selected but not yet active, or temporarily passive. R h (green): cruise control is active. A stored speed appears under the h display. If cruise control is active or temporarily passive, the speed dial in the speedometer will be greyed out up to the currently stored speed. System limits Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's brak ing effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheat ing and wearing too quickly. Do not use cruise control in the following situa tions:

R In traffic situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads. R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Function of the limiter The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To reduce the speed to the set speed, the limiter applies the brakes automatically. You can limit the speed as follows:

R Variable: for a temporary restriction of the vehicle speed, for example, in built-up areas. R Permanent: for a permanent restriction of the vehicle speed, for example, when driving in winter tyre mode. The variable limiter is operated using the corre sponding steering wheel buttons. You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up to the set winter tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the vehicle is stationary if the vehicle has been started. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nise dangers (/ page 203). Messages in the driver's display R (grey): variable limiter is selected but not yet activated. rarily passive. R (green): variable limiter is activated. R If you are driving when visibility is poor. R (flashes grey): variable limiter is tempo A stored speed appears under the display. If the variable limiter is active, the speed dial in the speedometer will be greyed out up to the currently stored speed.

% When the driving speed is greater than the stored speed, display flashes. Kickdown If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the variable limiter switches to passive mode. The pas-

sivemessage appears in the driver's display. After completion of kickdown, the variable lim iter is activated again in the following situations:

R If the driven speed drops below the stored speed. R If the stored speed is called up. R If you store a new speed. Operating cruise control or the variable lim iter

& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates.

# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. Requirements:

Cruise control R Cruise control is selected. R ESP must be activated, but not intervening. R The driven speed is at least 20 km/h. R The transmission is in position h. Variable limiter R The vehicle has been started. R The variable limiter is selected. Driving and parking 217 Steering wheel control panel for cruise control and limiter J Adopts the stored/detected speed Deactivates cruise control/the variable limiter h Selects cruise control Selects the limiter 1 Control panel to increase/decrease speed 218 Driving and parking Switching between cruise control and the variable limiter:

# To select cruise control: press h.

# To select the variable limiter: press .

% Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the variable limiter is selected by a different button (/ page 221). Activating cruise control or the variable lim iter:

# Press (SET+) or (SET-) in control panel 1. The current driven speed is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (limiter). or

# Press J. The last stored speed is called up and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (variable limiter). If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the currently driven speed is stored.

% When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is cleared. When you activate cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is cleared. Increasing/decreasing the stored speed:

# To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel 1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.

# To decrease the stored speed: swipe down wards from the top of control panel 1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h. or

# Briefly press (SET+) or (SET-) in control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or decreased to the next increment of ten (e.g. to 50 km/h or 60 km/h). or

# Press and hold (SET+) or (SET-) in control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or decreased to the next increment of ten and afterwards by increments of 10 km/h. or

# Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

# Press (SET+) in control panel 1.

% When the variable limiter is switched to pas sive mode, you cannot increase or decrease its stored speed in increments of 1 km/h. Adopting a detected speed:

If cruise control/variable limiter is activated and Traffic Sign Assist has detected a speed restric tion sign with a maximum permissible speed and this is displayed in the instrument cluster:

# Press J. The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains or does not exceed this speed. Deactivating cruise control or the variable limiter:

# Press .

% If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated. Permanent limiter If the vehicle should never exceed a specific speed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), you can set this speed with the permanent limiter. You do this by limiting the speed to a value between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multi media system (/ page 219). Shortly before the set speed is reached, it appears in the driver's display. When you con firm the message, display messages no longer appear until you switch off the vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again once the vehi cle has been restarted or if the set speed is changed. The permanent limiter does not switch to pas sive mode even during kickdown and the driven speed remains below the set speed. Setting the speed limitation for winter tyres Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Winter tyre limit

# Select a speed or deactivate the function. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is main tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved on the steering wheel on vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package, in the range between 20 km/h and 200 km/h and, on vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, in the range between 20 km/h and 210 km/h. Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:

R Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfort able or dynamic) (/ page 184) R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack age: reacts to stationary vehicles detected

(except bicycles and motorcycles) Driving and parking 219 R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack age: takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on motorways or on multi-lane roads with separate carriageways (country-

dependent) Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driv ing Assistance Package: if the vehicle has been braked to a standstill by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front driving off again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected when driving off, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nise dangers (/ page 203). 220 Driving and parking Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC display in the multifunction display 1 Vehicle in front 2 Distance indicator 3 Set specified distance Vehicle detected in front 1 is highlighted in green. It may also be in the lane to the left of your vehicle in situations where it is not permit ted to overtake on the right, for example, on motorways. Permanent status display of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R (white): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected, specified distance set R (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected The stored speed is shown under the permanent status display and highlighted on the speedome ter. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the speed is greyed out under the sta tus display. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up. When the set specified distance is increased or decreased, the display briefly appears under the vehicle in the permanent status dis play.

% On motorways or high-speed major roads, the green vehicle symbol is displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull away.

% If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to pas sive mode. The suspendedmessage appears in the multifunction display. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example:

R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions. R The windscreen in the area of the camera is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. R In multi-storey car parks or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients. R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles. In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel erating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.

& WARNING Risk of accident from acceler ation or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel erate or brake in the following cases, for example:

R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed. R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.

# Always carefully observe the traffic con ditions and be ready to brake at all times.

# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf ficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50 % of the maximum possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning.

# In these cases, adjust your speed and keep a sufficient distance.

# Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.

& WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction:

R when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes Driving and parking 221 R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex traffic conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations.

# Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly. Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Requirements:

R The vehicle has been started. R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP is activated and is not intervening. R The transmission is in position h. R All the doors are closed. R Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not being used to park the vehicle or to exit from a parking space. 222 Driving and parking R The vehicle does not skid.

# To activate without a stored speed: press the upper section (SET+) or lower section

(SET-) of control panel 1 or press J. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. or

# To activate with a stored speed: press J. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:

remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current driven speed is stored and main tained (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or limited (variable limiter) by the vehicle. Adopting the speed limitation shown in the instrument cluster

# Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.

# Press J. The speed limit displayed in the instrument cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed.

# Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from the brake pedal.

# Press J. or

# Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out. Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC still being activated when you leave the driver's seat If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.

# Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi cle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.

# Press . Switching between Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the limiter

# Press I. Activating the variable limiter or Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

% If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. Increasing or decreasing the speed

# To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel 1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.

# To decrease the stored speed: swipe down wards from the top of control panel 1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h. or

# Briefly press the upper section (SET+) or the lower section (SET-) on control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or decreased by 10 km/h. or

# Press and hold the upper section (SET+) or the lower section (SET-) on control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or decreased in increments of 10 km/h. or

# Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

# Press the upper section (SET+) on control panel 1. Increasing or decreasing the specified dis tance from the vehicle in front

# Press K. The set specified distance is shown in the assistance graphic. Function of Active Speed Limit Assist If a change in the speed limit is detected and automatic adoption of speed limits is activated, the new speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 258). The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the Instrument Display is always upda ted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign. If you are driving on German motorways and there is no speed limit, the system uses the Driving and parking 223 speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recommended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the recommended speed is 130 km/h. If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelera tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. The maximum permissible speed does not take the road condition and current weather and traf fic conditions into account. Adjust your speed accordingly, when necessary. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nise dangers (/ page 203). System limits The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs (/ page 256). 224 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as:

R In the wet or in fog R When towing a trailer

# Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations.

# Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions. fortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. Route-based speed adaptation can be activated in the multimedia system (/ page 225). The following route events are taken into account:

R Bends R Roundabouts and toll stations R T-junctions R Turns and exits R Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic Function of route-based speed adaptation

(/ page 355))

% The following function is country-dependent and only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package.

% When the toll station is reached, Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti vated, the vehicle speed will be adjusted accord ingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negoti ates a route event ahead in a fuel-saving, com Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi cator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected:

R Turning off at junctions R Driving on slowing-down lanes R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and traffic lights, as route-based speed adapta tion does not brake the vehicle to a standstill. If a corresponding route event is detected while route guidance is active, the first speed adjust ment is carried out automatically. If the turn sig nal indicator is switched on, the selected route is confirmed and further speed adjustment is acti vated. Speed adjustment is cancelled in the following cases:

R If the turn signal indicator is switched off before the route event and it is therefore assumed that the route event is not relevant to the driver. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process. System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way rules into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regu lations and driving at a suitable speed. In difficult conditions (e.g. unclear roads, narrow lanes, wet road surfaces, snow or ice) or when driving with a trailer, the speed adjustment made by the system may not always be suitable. In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adjustment Route-based speed adjustment might mal function or be temporarily unavailable in the following situations:

R If the driver does not follow the calcula ted route R If map data is not up to date or available R In road construction areas R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations

# Adjust the speed to the traffic situation. Setting route-based speed adaptation Requirements:

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa ted. Multimedia system:

4 5 5 Vehicle quick-access

# Select Route-based speed adaptation. When the function is active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead.

% Further information on the route-based speed adaptation (/ page 224). Driving and parking 225 Active Steering Assist Function of Active Steering Assist

% The following function is country-dependent and only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package. Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 210 km/h. The system helps you to stay in the centre of the lane by means of mod erate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a refer ence.

% Depending on the country, in the lower speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If nec essary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving outside the centre of the lane. If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case. 226 Driving and parking Active Steering Assist status display in the multifunction display R (grey): activated and passive R (green): activated and active R (red, flashing): prompt to the driver to actively confirm or transition from active to passive status, system limit detected

% During the transition from active to passive status, the symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is passive, the symbol is shown as grey in the multifunction display. Contact detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to inter vene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nise dangers (/ page 203). System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances:

R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying light condi tions or strong shadows on the carriageway. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R Insufficient road illumination. R The windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. R No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, e.g. in a construction area or junc tions. If the driver removes their hands from the steer ing wheel for a considerable period, display 1 appears first. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. The warning is not issued or is stopped as soon as the system detects that the driver is holding the steering wheel. If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual and acoustic warning is issued. R The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. R The distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected. R The road is narrow and winding. R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers. R When towing a trailer. The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions:

R On tight bends and when turning. R When crossing junctions. R At roundabouts or toll stations. R When actively changing lane without switch ing on the turn signal indicator. R When the tyre pressure is too low. Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable. Observe the status display of Active Steering Assist in the multifunction display.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func tioning ted. R ESP is activated, but is not intervening. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa Driving and parking 227 If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane.

# Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the traffic carefully.

# Always steer the vehicle paying atten tion to traffic conditions.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes A malfunction in the detection of lane mark ings and objects can occur. This could cause unexpected steering inter vention.

# Steer according to traffic conditions. Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist Requirements:

Multimedia system:

4 5 5 Vehicle quick-access

# Select a Act. Steering Asst. Function of Active Lane Change Assist

% The following function is country-dependent and only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package. Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes by applying steering torque if the driver operates a turn signal indicator. Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all the following conditions are met:

R You are on a motorway or high-speed major road. R The neighbouring lane is separated by a bro ken lane marking. 228 Driving and parking R No vehicle or obstacle is detected in the R The driven speed is between 80 km/h and adjacent lane. 180 km/h. R Active Lane Change Assist is switched on in the multimedia system. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are switched on and active. R There is no trailer coupled to the trailer hitch, and no bicycle rack fitted. R The sensors have detected a vehicle at a suitable distance behind your vehicle (coun try-dependent). If no vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adja cent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change begins after the driver has briefly activated the turn signal indicator. This is shown to the driver with a green arrow next to the steering wheel symbol. Green arrow 1 is dis played in the appropriate adjacent lane in con text assistance in the multifunction display. The Lane change to the left (placeholder) message also appears, for example. If a lane change is not possible directly after the driver has activated the turn signal indicator because an obstacle has been detected, for example, the arrow will be shown in grey next to the steering wheel symbol (country-

dependent). The neighbouring lane will continue to be moni tored and, if it becomes free, a lane change will be performed. If the grey arrow is hidden, the lane change must be activated again. Active Lange Change Assist can be cancelled in the following situations, in particular:

R Conditions change (e.g. detected obstacle). Active Lane Change Assist display in the "Assis tance" menu in the multifunction display 1 Green arrow: lane change initiated 2 Red arrow: obstacle detected, lane change cancelled As soon as Active Lane Change Assist is availa ble, the display appears in the instrument cluster. R The driver removes their hands from the steering wheel. R The driver steers in the opposite direction or activates the turn signal indicator in the opposite direction. R When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active Steering Assist is deactivated. Cancellation of Active Lane Change Assist can be displayed as follows:

R The arrow in the selected direction of travel turns red. R An appropriate message appears in the mul tifunction display. R A warning tone sounds.

& WARNING Risk of accident from chang ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane Lane Change Assist cannot always detect clearly if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free.

# Before changing lanes, make sure that the neighbouring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users.

# Monitor the lane change.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops func tioning If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guar antee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torques.

# Always monitor the lane change and keep your hands on the steering wheel. Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary. System limits The system limitations of Active Steering Assist apply to Active Lane Change Assist

(/ page 225). Driving and parking 229 The system may also be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R The exterior lighting shows a defect. R The system does not detect a suitable road, for example, in tight bends or shortly after entering a motorway.

% The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable or only partially available during the teach-in process; no arrow appears next to the Active Steering Assist symbol when the turn signal indicator is activated. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nise dangers (/ page 203). 230 Driving and parking Activating/deactivating Active Lane Change Assist Multimedia system:

4 5 5 Vehicle quick-access 5 Aktiver Spurwechsel-Assistent (Active Lane Change Assist)

# Activate or deactivate the function. Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist Active Emergency Stop Assist uses touch sen sors to monitor whether the driver holds the steering wheel and initiates an emergency stop if necessary. If Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated, the accelerator and brake pedal are monitored as well as the steering wheel. A warning is issued when neither the steering wheel is held nor a pedal depressed, and the vehicle is in danger of leaving the lane. Depending on the country, a lane change to the adjacent right-hand lane is carried out, if possi ble.

% It is only possible to change across one lane and only into the right-hand lane, and not onto the hard shoulder. Depending on the country, the hazard warning lights are switched on when automatic braking is initiated. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out:

R the vehicle is secured with the electric park ing brake R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended R the vehicle is unlocked R if possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre You can cancel the intervention by Active Emer gency Stop Assist before automatic braking is initiated by one of the following actions:

R steering R braking or accelerating Active Emergency Stop Assist issues the follow ing warnings in order:

R Display 1 appears in the multifunction dis R In addition to display 1 a warning tone play. sounds. R The Beginning emergency stop message appears in the multifunction display, a con tinuous warning tone sounds, the vehicle no longer accelerates, and there is a slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt. R The vehicle speed is reduced in increments until it is at a standstill. Sharp brake impul ses are also produced. You can cancel the intervention by Active Emer gency Stop Assist after automatic braking is ini tiated by one of the following actions:

R accelerating R braking: the emergency stop is cancelled, but the warning message, warning tone and power-assisted steering remain active R steering: power-assisted steering is cancel led, the warning message and warning tone remain active and the vehicle continues to be braked

% Active Emergency Stop Assist can initiate an emergency stop a maximum of three times within one ignition cycle. System limits If Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect lane markings, Active Emergency Stop Assist is not active. For the detection of vehicles and other obsta cles, observe the system limits of the following functions:

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 219) R Active Steering Assist (/ page 225) R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 227) Function of Active Traffic Jam Assist

% Active Traffic Jam Assist is country-depend ent and only available for vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus Package. Active Traffic Jam Assist helps you when in traf fic jams on multi-lane roads with separate carria geways by automatically pulling away within up to 60 seconds and with moderate steering manoeuvres. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Traffic Jam Assist automatically maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in. Active Traffic Jam Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nise dangers (/ page 203). Driving and parking 231 Active Traffic Jam Assist activates automatically when all of the following conditions are met:

R You are in a traffic jam on a motorway or high-speed major road. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is switched on and active (/ page 221). R Active Brake Assist is available

(/ page 208). R Active Steering Assist is switched on and active (/ page 227). R You are travelling no faster than 60 km/h. The following symbol is displayed in the instru ment cluster when the system is active:

System limits The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Traffic Jam Assist (/ page 225). 232 Driving and parking Activating/deactivating Active Traffic Jam Assist Multimedia system:

4 5 5 Vehicle quick-access

Select Act. Stop&Go Asst. Function of Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the fol lowing conditions:

R The transmission is in position h or k. R The electric parking brake is released. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle.

# Swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist. HOLD function HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi bility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver. System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%. Activating/deactivating the HOLD function

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being activated when you leave the vehicle If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away:

R If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

# Always secure the vehicle against roll ing away before you leave it. Requirements:

R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on the driver's side is fastened. R The engine is running or has been automati cally switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The electric parking brake is released. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti vated. R The transmission is in position h, k or i. Activating the HOLD function

# Depress the brake pedal, and after a short time quickly depress further until the display appears in the driver's display.

# Release the brake pedal. Deactivating the HOLD function

# Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or

# Depress the brake pedal until the dis play disappears from the driver's display. The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow ing situations:

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa ted. R The transmission is shifted to position j. R The vehicle is secured with the electric park AIRMATIC ing brake. In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position j and/or by the electric parking brake:

R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened. R The vehicle is switched off. R There is a malfunction in the system or the power supply is insufficient. In addition, the Brake immediately message may appear in the driver's display and a horn tone may sound at regular intervals.

# Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message disappears. The HOLD function is deactivated.

# Additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away. Driving and parking 233 Function of AIRMATIC AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with varia ble damping for improved driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clear ance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel con sumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level. AIRMATIC includes the following components and functions:

R air suspension with automatic all-round level R speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel control consumption R raised vehicle level setting manually selecta ble via the multimedia system for greater ground clearance R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant damping force adjustment) 234 Driving and parking Available suspension settings Drive program C (Sport) B (Sport +) A (Comfort)

; (Economy) Characteristics R The suspension setting is firmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above 120 km/h. R When driving at speeds below 80 km/h, the vehicle is raised again to low level -1. R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R The vehicle is lowered to low level -1 when driving at speeds above 120 km/h. R The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above 160 km/h. R When driving at speeds below 120 km/h, the vehicle is raised again to low level -1. R When driving at speeds below 80 km/h, the vehicle is raised again to the normal level.

% Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack: if the electrical connection has been correctly established, the vehicle remains at normal level irrespective of speed or the drive pro gram selected. Setting the vehicle level

& WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering.

# Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi cle lowering When lowering the vehicle, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

# Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control:

when you unload luggage or leave the vehi cle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked.

# When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.

* NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered.

# Make sure that there are no obstacles such as kerbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered. Requirements:

R The vehicle has been started. R The vehicle is not moving faster than 60 km/h. R When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/

bicycle rack): the vehicle is not moving faster than 30 km/h. Driving and parking 235 Multimedia system:

4 5 5 Vehicle quick-access Raising the vehicle

# Select Vehicle level. The indicator lamp lights up continuously. The vehicle is raised to off-road level +1. Your selection is saved. The off-road level +1 set remains stored even after the ignition has been switched off. The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit uations:

R When driving faster than 80 km/h. R When driving briefly between 60 km/h and 80 km/h. R After selecting a different drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. In this case, the vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program. R When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/

bicycle rack): the vehicle is moving faster than 30 km/h. 236 Driving and parking Lowering the vehicle

# Select Vehicle level. The indicator lamp goes out when the lower ing process is complete. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program.

% In the Sport drive program, only the normal vehicle level is possible when the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack). E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Function of E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL is an electrohydraulic suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible sus pension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driv ing safety and to reduce fuel consumption. The suspension setting is adjusted depending on the road surface, vehicle load and the drive program selected. The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function detects areas of unevenness in the road before you drive over them by means of a multifunction camera. This reduces chassis movements. The damping is adjusted individually to each wheel and depends on the following factors:

R Driving style, e.g. sporty R Road condition, e.g. bumps R Drive program E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL is comprised of the following functions and components:

R ROAD SURFACE SCAN R Curve inclination function CURVE R Air suspension with automatic level control R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant adjustment of damping characteris tics) R DYNAMIC SELECT button for selecting a drive program (/ page 184) R Manual level adjustment via the multimedia system Driving and parking 237 Characteristics per drive program Drive program C (Sport) B (Sport +) A (Comfort) N (CURVE)

; (Economy) Suspension settings and vehicle level R The suspension setting is firmer. R The vehicle is set to low level -1. R The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above 120 km/h. R When driving at speeds below 80 km/h, the vehicle is raised again to low level -1. R ROAD SURFACE SCAN is deactivated. R C: the curve inclination function is deactivated. R B: The curve inclination function is active. R The suspension setting is comfortable. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R The vehicle is lowered to low level -1 when driving at speeds above 120 km/h. R The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above 160 km/h. R When driving at speeds below 120 km/h, the vehicle is raised again to low level -1. R When driving at speeds below 80 km/h, the vehicle is raised again to the normal level. R A and N: ROAD SURFACE SCAN is active. R N: The curve inclination function is active. 238 Driving and parking

% Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack: if the electrical connection has been correctly established, the vehicle remains at normal level irrespective of speed or the drive pro gram selected. Function of ROAD SURFACE SCAN

% This function is not available in all countries. R If the windscreen in the area of multifunction camera 1 is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered. R If the road surface has no optic structure or R If you are driving too close to the vehicle in reflects light. front. R If sections of the route have a very small radius of curvature. R During abrupt driving manoeuvres, e.g. heavy braking or sudden acceleration. Observe the notes on cleaning the multifunction camera (/ page 465). The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function monitors the road in front of your vehicle using multifunction camera 1. ROAD SURFACE SCAN detects unevenness in the road surface, e.g. bumps, before the vehicle drives over them. Chassis movements are reduced and driving comfort is increased. ROAD SURFACE SCAN is automatically activated if the following conditions are met:

R Drive program A (Comfort) or N

(CURVE) is selected. R The vehicle is set to the normal level. R You are driving at a speed between 7 km/h and 180 km/h. System limits ROAD SURFACE SCAN can be impaired in the following situations or can stop functioning:

R If the carriageway is insufficiently lit, e.g. at night. R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Driving and parking 239 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multimedia system imately 0.2 m. Using the Warn early all-round

(placeholder) setting in the multimedia system, the warning tones for front and side impact pro tection can be set to sound at a greater distance of approximately 1.0 m in front and 0.6 m on the sides (/ page 241).

% The Warn early all-round (placeholder) set ting is always active in the rear of the vehi cle. If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Active Parking Assist is unavailable. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nise dangers (/ page 203). Placeholder Vehicles with Active Parking Assist without a 360 Camera Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using sen sors 1 on the front bumper and on the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows you the distance between your vehicle and a detec ted obstacle visually and audibly. In the standard setting, an intermittent warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.3 m to an obstacle in front and approximately 1.0 m to an obstacle behind. A continuous warn ing tone sounds from a distance of approx 240 Driving and parking Placeholder Placeholder Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and a 360 Camera Display of Active Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the head-up display If Active Parking Assist is deactivated and an obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 1 appears in the multimedia system at speeds below 10 km/h. Optionally, obstacles detected by Active Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approx imately 1.0 m in front 1 and 0.6 m on the sides 2 can also be displayed in the head-up display. System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa rily take into account the following obstacles:

R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of lorries. The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range.

# When parking or manoeuvring the vehi cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flowerpots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth erwise be damaged. Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones

# Set the desired level under Warning tone pitch. Reversing camera Function of the reversing camera If the symbol is shown in the multifunction display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. Multimedia system:

4 5 5 Vehicle quick-access

# Select PARKTRONIC.

% Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the engine is started. Adjusting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & parking Adjusting the volume of the warning tones

# Set the desired level under Warning tone vol-

ume. If you have activated the function in the multime dia system, the image from reversing camera 1 Driving and parking 241 is shown in the media display when the reverse gear is engaged. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position. This helps you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when reversing. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nise dangers (/ page 203). Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select from the following views:

R Normal view R Wide-angle view R Trailer view The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror. Vehicles without Active Parking Assist The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

242 Driving and parking 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch Vehicles with Active Parking Assist The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Normal view Wide-angle view 1 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 2 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx imately 1.0 m from the rear area 3 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle

(dynamic) 4 Bumper 5 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid Normal view 1 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle

(dynamic) 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Driving and parking 243 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch System failure 3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area 4 Yellow warning indicator of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance between approximately 0.6 m and 1.0 m 5 Red warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close

(approximately 0.3 m or less) 6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis tance away (between approximately 0.3 m and 0.6 m)

% If the entire system fails, the internal seg ments of the warning display are shown in red and the symbol appears in the mul tifunction display in the instrument cluster. If the system fails at the rear, the rear seg ments are shown in red when reversing and are hidden when driving forwards. When Active Parking Assist is active, lane markings 1 are displayed in green. If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the warning display fades out. Wide-angle view Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid If the vehicle is not operationally ready, a mes sage appears in the multimedia system. System limits The reversing camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:

R The boot lid is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. 244 Driving and parking R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or mis 360 Camera ted up. Observe the notes on cleaning the reversing camera (/ page 465). R The camera or rear of your vehicle is dam aged. In this case, have the camera and its position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

% Do not use the reversing camera in these types of situation. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. The field of vision and other functions of the reversing camera may be restricted due to addi tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. licence plate bracket or bicycle rack).

% The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. Function of the 360 Camera The 360 Camera is a system that consists of four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate vehicle surroundings. The system assists you, e.g. when parking or at exits with reduced visibil ity. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nise dangers (/ page 203). The system evaluates images from the following cameras:

R Reversing camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors Views of the 360 Camera You can select from different views:

1 Wide-angle view, front 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with images from the side cameras in the outside mirrors 4 Wide-angle view, rear 5 Top view with image from the reversing cam 6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a era trailer hitch) Top view Guide lines Driving and parking 245 When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the segments of the warning display are shown in grey.

% If the entire system fails, the segments of the warning display are shown in red and the symbol appears in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. If the system fails at the rear, the display of the segments changes as follows:

R The rear segments are shown in red when reversing. ing forwards. If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the warning display fades out. 1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering wheel angle 2 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance of approximately 1.0 m or less 3 Your vehicle from above If the distance to the object is reduced, the col our of warning display 2 changes:

R From approx. 1.0 m: yellow R From approx. 0.6 m: orange R From approx. 0.3 m: red R The rear segments are hidden when driv 1 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle

(dynamic) 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area 4 Mark at a distance of approx. 1.0 m

% When Active Parking Assist is active, lane markings 1 are displayed in green. 246 Driving and parking The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances apply to road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer hitch. Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch) If you select trailer view and no trailer is coupled to the vehicle, the following display appears:

1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch When the electrical connection is established between the vehicle and the trailer, the display changes to the side camera view. This view supports manoeuvring procedures with a trailer. Side view of the mirror cameras The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view. 1 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions with outside mirrors folded out 2 Marker of the wheel contact points System failure If the vehicle is not operationally ready, the fol lowing message appears in the multimedia sys tem:

their setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Parking Assist Driving and parking 247 Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system which uses ultrasound and is automatically activated during forward travel. The system is operational at speeds below approximately 35 km/h. If all requirements are met, the display appears in the multifunction display. The system then independently locates and measures paral lel and perpendicular parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When Active Parking Assist detects parking spaces, the display appears in the multi function display. The arrows show on which side of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown in the media display. The parking space and, if necessary, the parking direction can be selected as desired. Active Parking Assist calculates a suitable vehicle path, switches on the turn signal indicator and assists you in parking and exiting the parking space.

% Do not use the 360 Camera under such cir cumstances. You could otherwise injure oth ers or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images. The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to addi tional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. licence plate bracket, bicycle rack).

% The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. See the notes on cleaning the 360 Camera

(/ page 465). System limits The 360 Camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:

R The doors are open. R The side mirrors are folded in. R The boot lid is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or mis ted up. R If cameras or vehicle components in which the cameras are fitted are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and 248 Driving and parking Active Parking Assist provides assistance when changing gear, accelerating, braking and steer ing the vehicle. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nise dangers (/ page 203). Active Parking Assist is cancelled if, among other things, one of the following actions is car ried out:

R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. R Active Parking Assist is deactivated. R You begin steering. R You apply the parking brake. R You engage transmission position j. R ESP intervenes. R You open the doors or the boot lid while driv ing. System limits Objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist are not detected when the parking space is being measured. These are also not taken into account when the parking manoeuvre is calculated, e.g. overhang ing loads, overhangs or loading ramps of lorries, or the boundaries of parking spaces. In some cir cumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space prematurely.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise:

R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R Vehicles with automatic transmis sion: The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. This could cause a collision.

# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground. Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations:

R In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain. R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle. R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient. R When snow chains are fitted. Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces which are unsuitable for parking, for example, the following:

R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces. Active Parking Assist will not assist you with parking spaces at right angles to the direction of travel in the following situations:

R If two parking spaces are located immedi ately next to each other. R If the parking space is immediately next to a Parking with Active Parking Assist low obstacle such as a kerb. Active Parking Assist will not assist you with parking spaces parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel in the following situations:

R If the parking space is on a kerb. R If the parking space is bordered by an obsta cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer.

# Press button 1. Driving and parking 249 The media display shows the view of Active Park ing Assist. Area 2 displays detected parking spaces 4 and vehicle path 3.

% Vehicle path 3 shown on the media display may differ from the actual vehicle path.

# If you have driven past a parking space: bring the vehicle to a standstill.

# Select desired parking space 4.

# Where necessary, select the parking direc tion: forwards or reverse. Vehicle path 3 is shown, depending on selected parking space 4 and the parking direction. Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist Requirements:

R The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist. Please note that you are responsible for the vehi cle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure.

# Start the vehicle. 250 Driving and parking

# Confirm selected parking space 4.

% The turn signal indicator is switched on auto matically when the parking procedure begins. The turn signal indicator is switched off automatically when you switch to h. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic condi tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica tor accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.

# Pay attention to objects and other road users.

# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

# If, for example, the Please engage reverse gear (placeholder) message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission position. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space. On completion of the parking procedure, the Parking Assist finished, take control of vehicle

(placeholder) display message appears. Further manoeuvring may still be necessary.

# After completion of the parking procedure, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.

% You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking pro cedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. The parking procedure can then be continued. If no new vehicle path is available, the transmission position will be changed again. If the vehicle has not yet reached the parking space, the parking pro cedure will be cancelled, should a gear be changed. Driving and parking 251

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.

# Pay attention to objects and other road

# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

# If, for example, the Please engage forward gear (placeholder) message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission position. The vehicle moves out of the parking space. The turn signal indicator is switched off auto matically.

# If the vehicle has been parked at right angles users. to the direction of travel: in area 2, select direction of travel 3.

% The vehicle path shown on the media display may differ from the actual vehicle path.

# Confirm direction of exit 3 to drive out of the parking space.

% The turn signal indicator is switched on auto matically when the exiting procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic condi tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica tor accordingly.

# Press button 1. The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist. 252 Driving and parking The image shows an example of a vehicle with a 360 Camera. After the exiting procedure has been completed, the Parking Assist finished, take control of vehi-

cle (placeholder) message appears in the media display. A warning tone and display 4 in the media display prompt you to take control of the vehicle. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again. Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approx. 2 km/h. If a critical situation is detected, the following sym bol appears in the media display:

permits and that it is safe to take eva sive action.

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden tify objects and traffic situations. In such cases, Drive Away Assist might:

R Warn you without reason and limit the R Not warn you or not limit the vehicle vehicle speed. speed.

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec essary, provided the traffic situation Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nise dangers (/ page 203). A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit uations, for example:

R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and brake pedals. R If the wrong gear is selected. Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions:

R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. R Every time the gear is changed to k or h when the vehicle is at a standstill. R If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 1.0 m away. R If the manoeuvring assistant function is acti vated in the multimedia system. System limits The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines. When driving with a trailer, Drive Away Assist is not available. Function of Cross Traffic Alert

% Also read the instructions on Blind Spot Assist (/ page 260). Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: Cross Traffic Alert can warn drivers of any crossing traffic when reversing out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is detected, symbol 1 appears in the media dis play. If the driver does not respond to the warn ing, the vehicle's brakes can be applied automat ically. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. Cross Traffic Alert is active under the following conditions:

R If Blind Spot Assist is activated. R If the vehicle is reversing at walking pace. R If the manoeuvring assistant function is acti vated in the multimedia system. System limits Cross Traffic Alert is not available in the follow ing situations. R on inclines R when towing a trailer Driving and parking 253 ATTENTION ASSIST Function of ATTENTION ASSIST with micro sleep detection ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection assists you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk roads. If indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver are detected, the system suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation. You can choose between two settings:

R Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: increased system sensitivity: the driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by the system is adapted accordingly. If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take 254 Driving and parking a break! warning appears in the multifunction display. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes. The following information is shown in the ATTEN TION ASSIST display:

R The length of the journey since the last R The attention level determined by ATTENTION break. ASSIST:

The more segments 2 of the circle dis played, the higher the detected attention level. Fewer segments 2 are displayed in the circle as the attention level decreases. R Microsleep detection 1 status:

- Deactivated: display 1 is hidden.

Activated but not operational: display 1 is grey. Activated and operational: display 1 is green.

If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System suspended message appears. If the system, which uses the driver camera, detects indicators of microsleep, the ATTEN-

TION ASSIST Microsleep Take a break! warning message appears in the multifunction display and a warning tone sounds simultaneously. This warning message must be confirmed by Touch Control. It is recommended that you take a break immediately. If a warning appears in the multifunction display, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start naviga tion to this rest area. This function can be activa ted and deactivated in the multimedia system. ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection is activated automatically when the engine is restarted. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored. System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range. The microsleep detection function is available at a speed of 20 km/h and above. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all in the following situations:

R If you have been driving for less than approx imately 30 minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes). R If there is a strong side wind. Driving and parking 255 Suggesting a rest area

# Switch Suggest rest area on or off. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity.

# Select the suggested rest area. You are guided to the selected rest area. Suggesting a power nap

# Switch Suggest Power Nap on or off. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor nering speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC is active. R If the clock is set to the incorrect time. R If you change lanes and vary your speed fre quently In active driving situations. Microsleep detection also does not function when the driver camera cannot detect the eyes of the driver, as a result of the following factors, for example:

R The driver's eyes are covered, e.g. due to steering wheel position. R Poor lighting conditions. R Some types of spectacles or sunglasses. R The driver's line of vision is outside the driver camera's field of vision. Also observe any information regarding display messages that can be displayed in the instru ment cluster

(/ page 602, 645, 602, 645, 602, 645, 602). The tiredness or alertness assessment of ATTEN TION ASSIST with microsleep detection is deleted and restarted when continuing the jour ney in the following situations:

R If you switch off the engine. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. changing drivers or taking a break). Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 ATTENTION ASSIST Setting the sensitivity

# Select Setting.

# Select Standard, Sensitive or Off. Activating/deactivating the microsleep warning

# Activate/deactivate Microsleep warning. 256 Driving and parking Traffic Sign Assist Function of Traffic Sign Assist R always look in the direction of travel Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nise dangers (/ page 203). Messages in the Instrument Display can issue a warning when you exceed the maxi mum permissible speed. In some countries, the system can provide further functions such as warning when the vehicle is approaching pedes trian crossings or warning when stop signs, give way signs or red lights are crossed unintention ally. The camera also detects and analyses traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). Traffic Sign Assist only visualises selected signs in the Instrument Display. Actual traffic signs and speed limits always have priority over traffic signs and speed limits shown in the Instrument Display. Always observe the following notes:

R drive carefully, paying attention to the traffic and your immediate surroundings R select a speed adjusted to the traffic, sur rounding and weather conditions R observe actual traffic signs R observe applicable traffic rules and regula tions Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with mul tifunction camera 1 and compares this with information in the digital navigation map. It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the Instrument Display and in the head-up display. The system 1 Permissible speed 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction The system can show up to two signs in the Instrument Display simultaneously. The system always prioritises displaying speed limits. If two speed signs are shown (when speed limits are detected, for example), the value of left-hand speed limit 1 is transmitted to the limiter, cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for adoption. Examples of traffic signs which can be displayed Traffic Sign Assist can detect and display follow ing traffic signs 1:

R speed restrictions R end of the speed limit R no overtaking R play streets R signs showing the start or end of motorways R signs showing the start or end of dual carria geways missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display:

Driving and parking 257 Traffic Sign Assist can detect following addi tional signs 3 and, if necessary, analyse the relevance of the restrictions using other vehicle sensors:

R in wet conditions R on slippery road surfaces R in fog R temporary restrictions R exits R limits for car/trailer combinations Traffic Sign Assist also uses data from the digital street map in the navigation system. Therefore, the display in the Instrument Display can be updated without detecting traffic signs when you leave or enter a minicipality or change roads, e.g. motorway exit or slip road or after you turn at a junction. If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the cur rent maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not sup ported. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries.

% Also observe the information on display mes sages in Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 574). Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can set the warning to be only optical (the speed pictogram flashes three times in the Instrument Display) or that it should also be acoustic with a warning tone. 258 Driving and parking Additional functions of Traffic Sign Assist

(country-specific) In some countries, the system can issue a warn ing in the following situations:

R if you drive onto a section of road in the wrong direction of travel (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) R if you approach pedestrian crossings, provi ded that pedestrians are in the danger zone or are moving towards it R if you unintentionally drive past stop signs, give way signs or red lights, provided that the sign is clearly visible If no clear sign is detected or if multiple signs of traffic lights with different signals are detected, no warning can be issued. You can set the warning to be only optical (a message in the Instrument Display) or that it should also be acoustic with a warning tone. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illu mination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R If there is dirt on the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera or the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured. R If traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow, ice, insufficient lighting or driving too close to the vehicle in front, or because they are covered, faded, damaged, badly positioned or twisted. R Active traffic signs with LED displays may not be detected correctly or at all due to techni cal factors (station frequency). R If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect, incomplete or out of date. R If signs or the road layout is ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs in roadworks, at exits and ramps, in neighbouring lanes or parallel roads. R If signs do not conform to the standard. R If signs or road layouts are specific to the country and deviate from the route guidance in the navigation system, e.g. at or beyond construction sites. R If you turn sharply on tight bends, you may pass traffic signs that are outside the cam era's field of vision. R If the system detects incorrectly. R If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs attached. R When using transport equipment secured to the vehicle by a trailer coupling, e.g. a bicycle rack, restrictions for car/trailer combinations may be considered valid if applicable. Setting Traffic Sign Assist Requirements:

R Only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC must be activated for the automatic adoption of speed limits. Adjusting the type of warning

# Select Warning type.

# Select Visual & audible or Visual. Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist Activating/deactivating automatic adoption of speed limits (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

# Select Adopt limit.

# Activate or deactivate the function. The speed limits detected by Traffic Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.

% If one of the following systems is activated, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit:

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Cruise control R Variable limiter Further information (/ page 221). Adjusting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded.

# Set the desired speed under Warning thresh-

old. Traffic Light Assistant Function of the Traffic Lights Assistant When approaching a junction, traffic lights are detected by the Traffic Lights Assistant and shown in augmented reality in the central dis play. The respective traffic lights must be selec ted by pressing briefly. System limits The Traffic Lights Assistant is only an aid. Always observe the traffic situation. Driving and parking 259 Detection of traffic lights may be restricted in the following cases:

R as a result of dazzling, e.g. through strong sunlight R in the case of pedestrian crossings R in the case of flashing orange traffic lights Switching on display of traffic lights Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Information

# Activate Traffic light assistant. When the camera image opens in the media dis play and traffic lights have been detected, a frame appears around the displayed traffic lights.

# To select the monitored traffic lights: des ignate the respective traffic lights by tapping on the selection symbol. The traffic lights are highlighted. Depending on the selected setting, you receive a message when the traffic lights have changed. 260 Driving and parking

# To select the type of message for the change: select the pen symbol.

# Select Visual or Visual & audible. If Visual is set, the frame of the video image flashes. If Visual & audible is set, a warning tone also sounds. Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use radar sensors to monitor the area up to 40 m behind and 3 m next to your vehicle. The system can detect vehicles travelling from approximately 12 km/h and bicycles travelling from approximately 30 km/h and issue a warn ing if they move into the monitoring range. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nise dangers (/ page 203).

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed. As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation.

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation and maintain a safe dis tance at the side of the vehicle. Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occu pants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary. Display in the "assistance" menu in the multifunc tion display If a vehicle is detected close to the side of your vehicle, the red warning lamp in the correspond ing outside mirror flashes. The lane that the vehicle is detected in is hatched out by the assistance graphic. If you still switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a warning tone sounds once and red radar waves next to your vehicle are displayed in the assistance graphic. If the turn signal indicator remains on, no further warning tone will be sounded for other detected vehicles.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning The exit warning reacts neither to stationary objects nor to vehicles approaching you at a greatly different speed. As a result, the exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations.

# Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clear ance. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi cle occupants. System limits Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations:

R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors R in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or are obscured snow motorbikes If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to flash. This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is activated and up to a maxi mum of three minutes after the ignition has been switched off. The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times. R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or R if the road has very wide or narrow lanes R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor ders. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obsta cles. Driving and parking 261 Warnings may be interrupted when driving along side long vehicles, for example lorries, for a pro longed time. Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are not operational when reverse gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are not operational when a trailer is coupled to the vehicle and the electrical connection has been correctly established. The exit warning may be limited in the following situations:

R when the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces R when people approach the vehicle R in the event of stationary or slowly moving objects Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist)

% The brake application function is only availa ble for vehicles with a Driving Assistance Package. 262 Driving and parking If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor recting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is availa ble in the speed range between approximately 30 km/h and 200 km/h.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision.

# Always steer, brake or accelerate your self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-

correcting brake application.

# Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist Active Blind Spot Assist does not react espe cially in the following situations:

R If you overtake vehicles at a high speed. R If vehicles approach and overtake you at a greatly different speed. As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei ther give warnings nor intervene, especially in such situations.

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation and maintain a safe dis tance at the side of the vehicle. Placeholder If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis play 1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro priate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. System limits Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur especially in the following situa tions:

R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate significantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP or Active Brake Assist. R ESP is deactivated. R A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected. R You are driving with a trailer and the electri cal connection to the trailer hitch has been correctly established. Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Assistance

# Activate/deactivate Blind Spot Assist. or

# Activate/deactivate Active Blind Spot Assist. Active Lane Keeping Assist Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunc tion camera and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. The system can guide you back into your lane through a course-cor recting steering intervention and additionally warns you with vibration pulses in the steering wheel. Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. Driving and parking 263 The system can intervene in the following situa tions:

R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane R One of your front wheels goes over a lane marking. marking. The system does not intervene if you activate the turn signal indicator. If the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, it will intervene regardless of the turn sig nal indicator. If you leave the lane without using the turn sig nal indicator, but an obstacle is detected in your lane, the system will not intervene. 264 Driving and parking Display 1 will appear in the multifunction dis play and a warning tone will sound in the follow ing situations:

R Active Lane Keeping Assist intervenes for longer than approximately ten seconds. R Two or more interventions occur within approximately three minutes without any steering intervention from the driver. In the Active Lane Keeping Assist settings, you can set the sensitivity of the system and set the level of support. Additionally, you can set whether the system should react to broken lane markings or only solid lane markings. The respective setting is also saved even when the vehicle is restarted (/ page 265). Status displays for Active Lane Keeping Assist in the on-board computer R (grey): Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, but not operating. R (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated and operating. If the system is operational on only one side, the status is displayed on the corresponding side. R (red): Active Lane Keeping Assist has guided you back into your lane with a course-

correcting steering intervention. The status display will flash if there is also a haptic warning in the steering wheel. The status dis play is displayed on the corresponding side. R (white): Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. R (yellow): there is a malfunction. Please also observe the display messages. erate. Active Lane Change Assist display in the

"assistance" menu If the front wheel of the vehicle drives over a detected lane marking, this will be highlighted red in the "assistance" menu in the multifunction display. System limits No lane-correcting steering intervention occurs in the following situations:

R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel R A driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of accel eration. R When ESP is deactivated. R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con nection to the trailer has been correctly established. R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections. R If the windscreen in the area of the multi function camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or covered. R If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov ered. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R If the carriageway is very narrow and wind ing. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nise dangers (/ page 203). Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system:

4 5 5 Vehicle quick-access 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist

# Activate or deactivate the function.

% After starting the engine, the settings are country-specific. Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist Setting the sensitivity

# Select .

# Select Medium, Early or Late. Driving and parking 265 The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the engine is started.

% The standard setting for this function is dependent on the country. Activating or deactivating assistance on dis continuous lane markings

# Select Advanced support. The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the engine is started.

% The standard setting for this function is dependent on the country. Trailer hitch Notes on trailer operation Observe the following notes on the tongue weight:

R Do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or falls below the permissible tongue weight R Use a tongue weight as close as possible to the maximum tongue weight Extending/retracting the ball neck fully elec trically removed. R The trailer cables or adapter plugs have been Extending the ball neck fully electrically 266 Driving and parking Do not exceed the following values:

R Permissible towing capacity R Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehi cle R Permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle R Permissible gross mass of the trailer R Maximum permissible speed of the trailer Ensure the following before starting a journey:

R The tyre pressure on the rear axle of the tow ing vehicle is set for a maximum load R The lighting of the connected trailer is opera tional In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/

trailer combination may not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for car/trailer combinations is above 100 km/h.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.

# Make sure that the ball neck securely engages and locks into place.

* NOTE Damage to the all-electric trailer hitch due to additional pressure The all-electric trailer hitch could be mechan ically damaged by applying additional pres sure when the ball neck is being extended or retracted.

# Do not make the ball neck extend/

retract faster by applying additional pressure. Requirements:

R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R The swivel range is clear.

# To extend: pull button 2. Indicator lamp 1 will flash and the display message Trailer coupling in motion will appear on the driver's display. The ball neck will extend fully electrically.

# Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. The ball neck is securely locked in place when indicator lamp 1 is continuously lit. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp 1 will flash and the display message Check trailer hitch lock will appear on the driver's display. Retracting the ball neck fully electrically

# Pull button 2. Indicator lamp 1 will flash and the display message Trailer coupling in motion will appear on the driver's display. The ball neck will retract fully electrically.

# Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. The ball neck will be securely locked in place when indicator lamp 1 goes out. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp 1 will flash and the display message Trailer coupling Check lock will appear on the driver's display. Observe the information about the notifications on the driver's display:

R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 634) R Display messages (/ page 574) Driving and parking 267 Folding the ball neck in/out fully electrically

(multimedia system)

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.

# Always engage the ball neck as descri bed.

* NOTE Damage to the all-electric trailer hitch due to additional pressure The all-electric trailer hitch could be mechan ically damaged by applying additional pres sure when the ball neck is being extended or retracted.

# Do not make the ball neck extend/

retract faster by applying additional pressure. Requirements:

R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R The swivel range is clear. 268 Driving and parking R The trailer cables or adapter plugs have been removed. Multimedia system:

4 5 5 Vehicle quick-access Extending the ball neck fully electrically

# Select . The display message Trailer coupling in motion will appear on the driver's display. The ball neck will extend fully electrically. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the display message Check trailer hitch lock will appear on the driver's display. Retracting the ball neck fully electrically

# Select . The display message Trailer coupling in motion will appear on the driver's display. The ball neck will retract fully electrically.

# Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the display message Trailer coupling Check lock will appear on the driver's display. Observe the information about the displays on the instrument cluster:

R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 634) R Display messages (/ page 574) Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer level being changed Vehicles with level control system: the vehicle level may be changed unintentionally, e.g. by other persons. You may become trap ped if you couple up or uncouple a trailer while the vehicle level is changing. In addi tion, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle. When coupling up or uncoupling a trailer, make sure that:

# The doors or tailgate are not opened or closed.

# You do not initiate the level control sys tem and do not operate the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.

# Do not lock or unlock the vehicle. Requirements:

R The ball neck is extended and engaged in a securely locked position. Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connected to the vehicle with the following adapters:

R Adapter plug R Adapter cable The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehi cle only if the following conditions are met:

R The trailer is connected correctly R The trailer lighting system is in working order The functions of the following systems will be affected by a correctly connected trailer:

R Active Lane Keeping Assist

# Wait until the ball neck has locked in place.

& WARNING Risk of injury from the vehicle R ESP trailer stabilisation R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC R Active Parking Assist R Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist R Drive Away Assist R Cross Traffic Alert R Reversing camera R 360 camera R AIR BODY CONTROL Coupling up a trailer

* NOTE Damage to the starter battery due to full discharge Charging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can damage the starter battery.

# Do not use the vehicle's power supply to charge the trailer battery.

# Remove the cover from the ball head and store it in a safe place (/ page 119).

# Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle.

# Open the socket cap.

# Insert the plug with lug 1 in groove 3 on

# Turn bayonet coupling 2 to the right as far the socket. as it will go.

# Let the cap engage.

# Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties

(only if you are using an adapter cable).

# Make sure that the cable is always slack for ease of movement during cornering. Driving and parking 269 Under the following conditions, a message may appear on the driver's display even if the trailer has been connected correctly:

R LEDs have been installed in the trailer light ing system R The current has fallen below the trailer light ing system's minimum current (50 mA)

% Accessories can be connected to the perma nent power supply up to 180 W and to the power supply that is switched on via the igni tion lock. Uncoupling a trailer

& WARNING Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a trailer When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.

# Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake. 270 Driving and parking

* NOTE Damage when uncoupling in a state of overrun Uncoupling in a state of overrun can damage the vehicle.

# Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when disconnecting the trailer cable Vehicles with level control system: The vehicle may lower when the trailer cable is disconnected. This could result in you or other people becoming trapped if your or their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

# Make sure that nobody is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when you discon nect the trailer cable.

# Secure the trailer against rolling away.

# Disconnect the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer.

# Uncouple the trailer.

# Place the cover cap on the ball head. Bicycle rack function

& WARNING Risk of an accident when using the bicycle rack incorrectly The bicycle rack may become detached from the vehicle in the following cases:

R the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch is exceeded. R the bicycle rack is used incorrectly. R the bicycle rack is secured to the ball neck beneath the ball head. Observe the following for your own safety and that of other road users:

R always adhere to the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch. R only use the bicycle rack to transport bicycles. R always mount the bicycle rack properly by attaching to the ball head and the ball neck guide pin, if possible. R when transporting four bicycles, always use bicycle racks which have additional support on the ball neck guide pin. R only use bicycle racks approved by R always observe the bicycle rack operating Mercedes-Benz. instructions.

* NOTE Damage to, or cracks on, the trailer hitch due to unsuitable bicycle racks or bicycle racks being used incor rectly

# use only bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz. Driving and parking 271 R Always distribute the load on the bicycle rack as evenly as possible across the vehicle's longitudinal axis. Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detachable parts from bicycles (e.g. baskets, child seats, rechargeable batteries) before load ing them onto the bicycle rack. This will improve the aerodynamic resistance and centre of gravity of the bicycle rack. Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from moving around and check them at regular inter vals to ensure that they are secure. Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driv ing characteristics and rear view may be impaired. In addition, aerodynamic resistance and the load on the trailer hitch will increase. R When mounted on the ball head 1 and the guide pin 2, the maximum load capacity is 100 kg. Up to four bicycles can be transpor ted. The load capacity is calculated from the weight of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack load. The vehicle's driving characteristics will change when a bicycle rack is fitted. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Drive carefully and maintain a safe distance. When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure for increased load on the rear axle of the vehicle. Further information on the tyre pressure can be found in the tyre pressure table (/ page 493). Notes on loading The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the ball head, the greater the load on the trailer hitch. Observe the following notes:

R Mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle as possible. Trailer hitch (example with additional guide pin) Depending on the bicycle rack's design, different numbers of bicycles can be transported. The following bicycle rack designs are possible:

R When mounted by attaching to the ball head 1, the maximum load capacity is 75 kg. Up to three bicycles can be transported. guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Comply with the per mitted towing methods (/ page 482) and the instructions for towing with both axles on the ground (/ page 483). 272 Driving and parking Load distribution on the bicycle rack 1 Vertical distance between centre of gravity 2 Horizontal distance between centre of grav 3 The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's and ball head ity and ball head centre axis Observe the following information when loading the bicycle rack:

Loading the bicycle rack 3 bicycles 4 bicycles Up to 75 kg Up to 100 kg 420 mm 420 mm 300 mm 400 mm Total weight of bicycle rack and load Max. distance 1 Max. distance 2 When transporting four bicycles or with a total weight between 75 kg and 100 kg, always use bicycle racks with additional support on the trailer hitch guide pin. Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can lead to damage on the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be Overview of the driver display

& WARNING Risk of accident due to a driver display malfunction If the driver display has failed or malfunc tioned, the function restrictions applying to safety relevant systems are not visible. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. 1 Speedometer 2 Outside temperature 3 Status displays for driver assistance systems 4 Time 5 Rev counter 6 Transmission position 7 Coolant temperature display Instrument Display and on-board computer 273 8 Display range, centre 9 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica tor

% Please note that the status displays of the driver assistance systems vary depending on the status. You can find a selection here:

(/ page 277). The segments on speedometer 1 indicate the status of the following systems:

R Cruise control (/ page 215) R Limiter (/ page 216) R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 219) Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs appear on the upper status display (/ page 256).

* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. 274 Instrument Display and on-board computer

# Do not drive with the engine in the over revving range. Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys tem (EQ Boost technology) Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel The overrevving range is shown in red on rev counter 3. When the overrevving range is reached, the fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the engine. During normal operating conditions, coolant temperature display 7 may rise to 120C.

& WARNING Danger of burns when open ing the bonnet If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine com partment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service. 1 POWER shows the electric drive support 2 CHARGE shows the recuperation power of the electric motor shows the drive system's operational read iness. 1 Control panel for cruise control/limiter or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 217) 2 G Back button, on-board computer 3 Touch Control, on-board computer Swipe (navigate) Press a (confirm) 4 Main menu, on-board computer 5 Activation buttons and DRIVE PILOT readi ness display 6 Main menu, MBUX multimedia system 7 Touch Control, MBUX multimedia system Swipe (navigate) Press (confirm) and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. 8 G Back button, MBUX multimedia system 9 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys tem (/ page 293) Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operat ing the on-board computer. Instrument Display and on-board computer 275 Operating the on-board computer Calling up and operating menus

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road 1 Back button 2 Home button 3 Touch Control You can navigate in menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of Touch Control 3 by using a single-finger swipe. When the on-board computer is being operated, different acoustic signals will sound as operating 276 Instrument Display and on-board computer feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached or when you are scrolling through a list.

# To call up a menu via the menu bar: press home button 2.

# Activate a menu by swiping to the left or right on Touch Control 3.

# Confirm by pressing Touch Control 3.

# To switch between the menus: switch directly from one menu to the next by swip ing to the left or right.

# To call up a submenu: press Touch Control 3.

# To exit a submenu: press back button 1.

# To scroll through displays or lists on the menu or submenu: swipe upwards or down wards on left-hand Touch Control 3.

% Index points that show which menu you are currently in or which menu content has been selected appear at the bottom of the menu bar or within a menu. Resetting values on the on-board computer You can reset the values of the following func tions:

R Trip meter R Trip computer From start and From reset R ECO display (/ page 182) Setting display content as the standard dis play

# Press Touch Control 3. On the Options submenu, the request Use current display as standard display? will appear.

# Select Yes by swiping to the left and confirm by pressing Touch Control 3.

# To call up standard displays: press back button 1 on the upper level of a menu.

% Pressing back button 1 on the standard display calls up the previous screen.

# To call up a submenu: press Touch Control 3.

# To select the function to be reset: swipe on Touch Control 3.

# Press Touch Control 3.

# Select Yes.

# Press Touch Control 3. Selecting display content, centre on the instrument cluster On-board computer:

4 Classic Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can choose between different display content in the centre display range of the Classic and Exclusive menus on the instrument cluster.

% You can select colour settings on the centre display range on the Understated menu.

# To select display content: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control to select the required display content. 1 Display content, centre on the Classic menu

(example) The following display content, for example, can be displayed on the centre display range:

R Navigation R Standard display Instrument Display and on-board computer 277 R ATTENTION ASSIST R ECO display R Accepting or rejecting calls, switching between connected telephones and calling up call lists Specified distance for Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 219) Active Brake Assist (/ page 215) Active Steering Assist You can select further settings for the respective display content on the display range, centre on the Options submenu. Status displays on the driver display Gearshift recommendation Z

(/ page 189) Y Pedestrian detection

/ Active Parking Assist (/ page 249) Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deacti vated (/ page 240) h Cruise control (/ page 215) Limiter (/ page 216) Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

(/ page 219) Active Lane Change Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist Z Active Blind Spot Assist Haptic accelerator pedal ECO start/stop function

(/ page 225)

(/ page 227)

(/ page 263)

(/ page 261)

(/ page 182)

(/ page 181) HOLD function (/ page 232) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

(/ page 148) Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for certain countries only) 278 Instrument Display and on-board computer Active Traffic Jam Assist

(/ page 231) R Tyres:

Active Brake Assist, danger of colli sion with crossing traffic

(/ page 208). Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs (/ page 256). Menus and submenus Adjusting displays on the Service menu of the on-board computer On-board computer:

4 Service You can show/hide different display content on the Service menu.

# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-

hand Touch Control. Different display content will be shown or hidden. Display content on the Service menu:

R AdBlue: AdBlue range and fill level

Check the tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring system

(/ page 494) Restart the tyre pressure monitoring sys tem (/ page 495) R ASSYST PLUS: call up the service due date R Engine oil level: check the engine oil level

(/ page 455)

(/ page 458) The following functions are available on the Options submenu:

R Set display content as the standard display

(/ page 275) R Message memory (/ page 574) R Tyre pressure (/ page 494) Adjusting the assistant display On-board computer:

4 Assistance You can show/hide different display content on the Assistance menu.

# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-

hand Touch Control. Different display content will be shown or hidden. Instrument Display and on-board computer 279 On-board computer:

4 Sport You can show/hide different display content on the Sport menu.

# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-

hand Touch Control.

% There are also navigation instructions on the R Status displays for Active Distance Assist Calling up displays on the Sport menu left-hand display range of the assistant dis play. These navigation instructions as well as the level of detail of the assistant display may vary depending on the display content. Status displays on the assistant display:

R R Green: pedestrian detection active Grey: pedestrian detection enabled R Green radar waves next to vehicle:

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist enabled and ready for operation R Grey radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist ena bled but not ready for operation R Status displays for Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 263) R Further status displays for Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 260) R Status displays for Active Brake Assist

(/ page 208) DISTRONIC (/ page 219) The content on the assistant display is adapted to the following situations:

R Number of detected lanes R Driving style R Current road conditions R Rain R Detected road users

% Please note that the detected obstacles themselves are not displayed on the assis tant display. The following functions are available on the Options submenu:

R Select route R Set display content as the standard display

(/ page 275) 1 Current torque 2 G-meter 3 Digital speedometer 4 Current power output 5 Boost pressure

 

 

280 Instrument Display and on-board computer 6 Engine oil temperature 7 Engine speed Displays 1, 2, 4, 5 and 6 can be shown/

hidden. The following functions are available on the Options submenu:

R Set display content as the standard dis play(/ page 275) Calling up displays on the Trip menu On-board computer:

4 Trip You can show/hide different display content on the Trip menu.

# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-

hand Touch Control. 1 Driving timeFrom reset 2 Driving timeFrom start 3 Average fuel consumptionFrom start 4 Distance to the destination; estimated arrival time 5 Fuel range 6 AdBlue range 7 Distance to the traffic incident; estimated travel time gained or lost due to the traffic incident 8 Total distanceFrom start 9 Total distanceFrom reset A Average fuel consumptionFrom reset

% Displays 4, 5, 6 and 7 are displayed in a situation-specific manner. The following functions are available on the Options submenu:

R Set display content as the standard display

(/ page 275) R Reset From start and From reset values Calling up navigation instructions on the on-

board computer On-board computer:

4 Navigation The following map views are available on the Navigation menu:

R Whole map R 2D direction of travel R 2D north orientation R 3D map

% The level of detail in the navigation instruc tions on the left-hand display range may vary. 1 Distance to the change of direction 2 Road to which the change of direction leads 3 Display of traffic incident 4 Currently selected route 5 Display of vehicle's current position 6 Change-of-direction symbol 7 Recommended lane (white) 8 Lane not recommended (grey) 9 Current lane You can change the map scale of the selected map view on the Navigation menu.

# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-

hand Touch Control. On the Options submenu, you can use other functions in the route and Map settings catego ries. You can use the following functions in the route category:

R Cancel current route guidance. R Call up previous destinations and favourites. You can use the following functions in the Map settings category:

R Activate auto zoom. R Set the map view, satellite view and route overview. The following functions are available on the Options submenu:

R Set display content as the standard display

(/ page 275) Selecting the radio or media source using the on-board computer On-board computer:

4 Entertainment The following display content, for example, can be displayed on the Entertainment menu:

R Radio Instrument Display and on-board computer 281 R Media R Browser R ENERGIZING COMFORT Radio on the Entertainment menu (example) 1 Previous radio station or previous track 2 Frequency range or media source 3 Radio station or current track 4 Name of track and artist 5 Next radio station or next track 282 Instrument Display and on-board computer

# To select the radio or media on the enter tainment menu: press the left-hand Touch Control. The Options submenu will be displayed.

# Select the Radio or Media menu item by swiping upwards or downwards on the left-

hand Touch Control and confirm by pressing the left-hand Touch Control. Changing radio station or track in an active media source

# To select a radio station: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

% When you select a saved radio station in the frequency range, a star will appear next to the radio station name.

# To change tracks in an active media source: swipe left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.

% This is how to select the channel for the TV media source. Changing the frequency band on the Options submenu

# Select the Radio menu item by swiping upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control and confirm by pressing the left-hand Touch Control.

# Swipe left or right on the left-hand Touch Control and select a frequency band by pressing the left-hand Touch Control. Selecting a media source on the Options submenu

# Select the Media menu item by swiping upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control and confirm by pressing the left-hand Touch Control.

# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-

hand Touch Control and select a media source by pressing the left-hand Touch Con trol. The following additional function is available on the Options submenu:

R Set display content as the standard dis play(/ page 275) Configuring displays on the individual menu On-board computer:

4 Individual Up to five different types of display content can be displayed on the Individual menu.

# To expand the display content: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To reduce the display content: swipe downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. The display content is also individually adjusta ble.

# To call up the Options submenu: press the left-hand Touch Control.

# To configure the display content of the individual menu: confirm the Change indi-

vidual request by pressing the left-hand Touch Control. The corresponding menu for the configura tion of the display content will open in the multimedia system. The respective display content of the Individual menu is configured within the multimedia sys R ATTENTION ASSIST display R Information and visualisation from the driver Instrument Display and on-board computer 283 R Information from the menus of the on-board assistance systems computer R Warning messages or notes (symbol) on warning messages on the instrument display Display elements tem. As soon as you confirm the configuration in the multimedia system or by pressing the left-

hand back button on the multifunction steering wheel, the message Configuration completed will appear on the instrument cluster. Display content selection, left and right:

R Standard display R Traffic incidents R Range R Navigation R Consumption R Audio R Weather R Trip computer From start and From reset R ECO display Display content selection, centre:

R G-meter R ECO display R Navigation R Rev counter R Speedometer The following setting options are available on the Options submenu depending on the selected dis play content:

R Set display content as the standard dis play(/ page 275) R Reset From start values R Reset From reset values R Reset Trip meter R Set a route R Change track or media source

% Please note that not all areas for display con tent shown have to be configured. Head-up Display Function of the head-up display The head-up display projects, for example, the following content into the driver's field of vision:

R Information from the navigation system 1 Detected instructions and traffic signs 2 Navigation instructions 3 Navigation instructions (distance to the next route event) 4 Steer Assist status 284 Instrument Display and on-board computer 5 Current speed 6 Set speed in the driver assistance system

(e.g. cruise control) When you receive a call, the message 6 Incoming call will appear on the head-up display. System limits The visibility is influenced by the following condi tions:

R Seat position R Image position setting R Light conditions R Wet road surfaces R Objects on the display cover R Polarisation in sunglasses R Vehicles with (AR) head-up display: the con tent shown depends on the driver camera recording. Adjusting the head-up display on the on-

board computer Selecting display content of the head-up dis play on the menu bar of the driver display

# Press the main menu button on the left

# To select the menu bar of the head-up dis play: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch-

Control.

# To select the display content on the menu bar of the head-up display or to switch between display contents: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch-Con trol to activate the desired content. Switching between display contents on the head-up display

# To select the menu bar of the head-up dis play: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch-

Control.

# To select display content: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch-Control and select a type of content.

# Press and hold the a button. The content has been selected on the head-

up display.

# To switch between types of display con tent: swipe to the left or right on the left-

hand Touch Control.

# To exit the head-up display: press the G or button. Setting the position and brightness

# On the menu bar of the head-up display, select the Settings menu by swiping to the left or right.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control. The current position and brightness settings will be displayed graphically on the head-up display as well as on the driver display.

# To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To adjust the brightness: swipe to the right or left on the left-hand Touch Control.

% The settings made for position and bright ness will be automatically saved and then displayed graphically again. Instrument Display and on-board computer 285 To switch the head-up display on/off On-board computer:

4

# To switch on: swipe upwards on the left-

hand Touch Control. Switch on the HUD will appear.

# Press left-hand Touch Control a.

# To switch off: swipe upwards on the left-

hand Touch Control.

# Select Switch on the HUD? by swiping on the left-hand Touch Control .

# Press left-hand Touch Control a.

% You can also switch the head-up display on/off in the MBUX multimedia system on the assistance menu. R If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be unnecessarily delayed. by voice input, e.g. telephone or navigation. The MBUX Voice Assistant is operational approx imately thirty seconds after the ignition is switched on. 286 MBUX Voice Assistant Notes on operating safety

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. For your own safety, always observe the follow ing points when operating mobile communica tions equipment and especially your voice con trol system:

R Observe the legal requirements for the coun try in which you are driving. R Familiarise yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey.

% The voice control system does not replace the Owner's Manual. The answers from the voice control system do not provide the complete scope of infor mation contained in the Owner's Manual. The voice control system does also not give detailed warning or damage information. You can get the full scope of information about the function and safe operation of the sys tems and components in the vehicle in the Owner's Manual. Operation Overview of operating the multifunction steering wheel Using MBUX Voice Assistant, various areas of the MBUX multimedia system can be operated 1 Pressing up: starts the dialogue 2 Pressing 8: switches the sound off or on

(ends the dialogue) Swiping up/down: increases/decreases the volume 3 Pressing down: ~ rejects/ends a call

(ends the dialogue) Conducting a dialogue For the dialogue with MBUX Voice Assistant, you can use complete sentences of colloquial lan guage as voice commands, such as, for example,

"Please show me the list of the last calls" or

"How warm is it outside?".

% MBUX Voice Assistant can recognise differ ent voices. The system learns from the hab its of the individual user and can thereby make appropriate suggestions.

# To activate or continue dialogue by using a keyword: say "Hey Mercedes" to activate MBUX Voice Assistant. Voice activation must be switched on in the multimedia system

(/ page 288). For this, it is not necessary to press the button upwards on the multi function steering wheel. Voice activation can also be directly com bined with a voice command, e.g. "Hey Mercedes, how fast can I drive?". or

# Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel upwards. You can say a voice command after an acoustic signal.

# To correct an entry: say the "Correction"

voice command.

# To select an entry from the selection list:

say the line number or the contents.

# To browse the selection list: say the "Next"

or "Back" voice command.

# To interrupt the dialogue: say the "Pause"

voice command. The dialogue can be continued with the "Hey Mercedes" voice command or by pressing the button on the multifunction steer ing wheel upwards. MBUX Voice Assistant 287

# To jump to the preceding dialogue: say the

"Back" voice command.

# To jump back to the top dialogue level:

say the "From the beginning again" voice command.

# To cancel the dialogue: say the "Close"

voice command or press the 8 or ~

button on the multifunction steering wheel.

# To interrupt a voice output: speak in the middle of a voice dialogue when the system is still answering. The voice output is shortened and the con clusion is reached more quickly.

% The Voice barge-in option must be switched on in the multimedia system for this

(/ page 288). Overview of the operable functions of MBUX Voice Assistant Using MBUX Voice Assistant you can operate various functions, e.g. navigation, telephone or vehicle functions, depending on the vehicle equipment. 288 MBUX Voice Assistant Calling up vehicle information With the 'Hey Mercedes" voice command you can also call up vehicle-specific information via the voice control system. For example, you can ask questions about the vehicle equipment or about specific operating options. The system is set up for operation with natural speech and independently learns new patterns of formulation. This means, you need not comply with any specified voice commands when oper ating. With targeted questions, you can call up informa tion for various application situations. The fol lowing examples give an overview of how you can interact with the system in order to call up specific information about your vehicle:

R Information about individual items of your vehicle equipment:

- Hey Mercedes, which massage pro grammes do you have?

- Hey Mercedes, do I have Blind Spot Assist?

R Information about functioning of the systems and components installed in the vehicle:

- Hey Mercedes, what is DISTRONIC?

- Hey Mercedes, what do I need ESP for?

set system language is not supported by MBUX Voice Assistant, English will be selected. R Information about operating the systems and components installed in the vehicle:

- Hey Mercedes, how can I turn on the main-beam headlamps?

- Hey Mercedes, how do I stop the ionisa tion function?

R Information about warning and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster:

- Hey Mercedes, what is lit now on my instrument cluster?

Setting functions of MBUX Voice Assistant using the multimedia system Requirements:

R For online voice control: your vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account (/ page 406). R There is an Internet connection

(/ page 414). R For online use of contacts: online voice

- Hey Mercedes, what is that yellow light control is activated. flashing?

R For use of In-Car Office: see (/ page 389) Full functionality of the voice control system is only available for you with activation of online voice control (/ page 288). Notes on the language setting You can change the language of MBUX Voice Assistant via the system language settings. If the

% Online voice control is activated at the fac tory.

# Select Online recognition subscrip.. You will be connected with the Mercedes me Portal.

# Activate online voice control in the Mercedes me Portal. Activating contacts for online use

# Select Contact upload for online recognition. When the function is active, contacts will be found more easily and accurately using voice input. The quality of the enunciation of con tact names by the system will also be improved. Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Voice assistant Switching voice activation of MBUX Voice Assistant on or off

# Select Hey Mercedes. Depending on the previous status, the func tion is activated or deactivated. When the function is active, the "Hey Mercedes" voice command can activate the dialogue. Switching on voice interruption

# Select Voice barge-in. If the function is active, a command can be interjected during voice output of the sys tem. Activating or deactivating online voice con trol

# Select Online recognition. Depending on the previous status, the func tion is activated or deactivated. MBUX Voice Assistant 289 Using MBUX Voice Assistant effectively Functionality of the MBUX Voice Assistant audible support Using the corresponding voice commands you receive the following information and assistance in the following cases:

R Current application: on the multifunction steering wheel, press the button upwards and say the "Help" voice command. You will receive suggestions and information about operation of MBUX Voice Assistant for the current application. R Continued dialogue: say the "Help" voice command during a voice dialogue. For every step of the dialogue you receive matching information. R Specific function: say the voice command for the desired function, e.g. with "Hello Mercedes, I need help with the radio" or after pressing the button on the multifunc tion steering wheel upwards, say the "Help for the telephone" voice command, for exam ple. 290 MBUX Voice Assistant R Digital Owner's Manual: say the "Show me the Owner's Manual" voice command. The full extent of the Digital Owner's Manual is available when the vehicle is stationary. Notes on optimum use of MBUX Voice Assis tant Notes on how to improve recognition:

R Say the voice commands coherently and clearly, but do not exaggerate the words. R Avoid loud noises that cause interference while making a voice command entry, e.g. the entertainment in the rear-passenger compartment. R For telephone or address book entries:

- Only create sensible address book entries in the system/mobile phone, e.g. enter surname and first name in the correct field.

- Do not use any abbreviations, unneces sary spaces or special characters. R For radio and/or TV programme names:

say the "Read out station list" voice com mand and say the desired station name in the way the voice output reads aloud to you. Notes on online voice control Online voice control improves recognition and makes additional results available as a result of external information, e.g. information about POIs and about the weather. We therefore recom mend that you activate online voice control. You will need a Mercedes me user account for this. If you do not yet have a user account you have to create one and connect it with your vehi cle (/ page 406). Then call up your Mercedes me user account. The Mercedes me services are shown and can be activated (/ page 406). In addition, online voice control must be activa ted (/ page 288). Overview and operation Overview of the MBUX multimedia system

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. 1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Expe rience. Operating Touch Control (/ page 293) 2 Central display with touch functionality Home screen overview (/ page 292) Operating the touchscreen (/ page 293) 3 Control panel with fingerprint sensor, switches the MBUX multimedia system on/

off, switches sound off/on and adjusts the volume MBUX multimedia system 291

% Alternatively, the MBUX Voice Assistant allows voice dialogue. Operation with natural speech starts after the wake-up call "Hey Mercedes" (/ page 287). You can start a voice navigation, for example, with the input of a 3 word address from what3words.

% If the vehicle is fitted with the MBUX Interior Assistant, comfort functions and multimedia system functions can be used. The interac tion then follows intelligently, reactively or with movements of the hand or head.

% If the vehicle is fitted with Eye Control, explanations can be given and functions initi ated through Look & Ask and Look &

Answer. Numerous application, online services, services and apps are available for you. These can be called up via the home screen. You can conveniently call up and add your favourites using the button on the steering wheel. Quick-access in the home screen and in the applications serve to select functions more quickly. Home screen overview 292 MBUX multimedia system If you use the learn function of the multimedia system, you will receive suggestions during oper ation of the most probable navigation destina tions, media sources, radio stations and con tacts. The configuration of the suggestions takes place in your profile. You can compile your pro file from various vehicle settings and settings of the multimedia system. You can create a theme for various driving situations. The Notifications Centre collects incoming notifi cations, e.g. about an available software update. Depending on the type of notification it offers various actions. The Message Centre can be called up on the home screen via the Control Center. With the global search in the vehicle you can search on-board across many categories as well as online in the Internet. You can use the global search on the home screen. Anti-theft protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. More detailed informa tion about anti-theft protection can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. 1 Status line 2 Calls up user profile settings and changes user 3 Uses the global search 4 Calls up favourites 5 Calls up the Notifications Centre 6 Calls up applications 7 Quick-access to application If the bar above 3 is pulled down, the control centre appears. The following functions are called up in the con trol centre:

R Multiseat control menu R Vehicle quick-access R Notifications Centre R Favourites R Themes Call up the home screen on the touchscreen by pressing (covered by 7 in the image) or on the Touch Control by pressing the but ton. In the image, the applications are arranged as a carousel. Pressing and holding on arranges the applications in a grid. This presentation is also used by a smartphone, for example. Touch Control Operating Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system) 1 Shows the home screen 2 Touch Control

=9: swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate) a Press (confirm) 3 G Returns to the previous display 4 6 Makes or accepts a call

~ Rejects or ends a call 5 Increase volume: swipe upwards Reduce volume: swipe down 8 Switch off the sound: press 6 Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant Calls up favourites (press briefly) or adds favourites and themes (press and hold) You can navigate through menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of Touch Control 2 using a single-finger swipe, for example:

# To enter a character: select a character using the keyboard.

# Press Touch Control 2.

# To select a menu option: scroll in the lists.

# Press Touch Control 2.

# To move the digital map: swipe in any direction. Setting the sensitivity for the Touch Control Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Text is Missing 5 Touch Control sensitivity

# Select Fast, Medium or Slow. MBUX multimedia system 293 Setting acoustic operating feedback for the Touch Control Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Text is Missing 5 Acoustic operating feedback The function is supported by the selection in a list.

# Set Off, Normal or Loud. If the function is activated you will hear a clicking sound when scrolling in a list. When the beginning or end of the list is reached you will hear another clicking sound. Touchscreen Operating the touchscreen Tapping

# To select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol or an entry.

# To increase the map scale: tap twice quickly with one finger.

# To enter characters with the keypad: tap three fingers in an application. 294 MBUX multimedia system

# To reduce the map scale: tap with two fin gers. on a button. or right. direction. Single-finger swipe

# To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left

# To move the digital map: swipe in any

# To use handwriting to enter characters:

write the character with one finger on the touchscreen. Two-finger swipe

# To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.

# To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two fingers together or apart.

# To turn the map: turn anti-clockwise or clockwise using two fingers. Three-finger swipe

# To call up the home screen: swipe up with Touching, holding and moving

# To move the map: touch the touchscreen and move your finger in any direction.

# To set the volume on a scale: touch the touchscreen and move the finger to the left or right. Touching and holding

# To save the destination in the map: touch the touchscreen and hold until a message is shown.

# To call up a global menu in the applica tions: touch the touchscreen and hold until the Options menu appears. Setting haptic operation for the touchscreen Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Touchscreen

# Switch Haptic operating feedback on or off. When the function is activated, a tactile feed back in the form of a vibration can be felt during operation.

# To set the intensity of the feedback: select

# Select an option. Setting haptic pressure

# Switch Press haptics on or off. The function generates a button to press based on selection of feeling.

# To set the strength of pressure: select

# Select an option. Overview of the fingerprint sensor finger print sensor. Biometric data must be taught in by sensors (/ page 297). User Information on user profiles

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile Selecting a profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the profile. You or other vehicle occu pants could be injured in the process.

# Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of move ment. If there is a risk of someone becoming trap ped, stop the adjustment process immedi ately:

MBUX multimedia system 295

# a) Tap the warning message on the cen tral display. or

# b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped. The driver's seat is equipped with an anti-entrap ment feature. If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile. Overview of user profiles Requirements for use For the vehicle owner:

R You have a Mercedes me account. R The vehicle has been linked to the account. For additional users of the vehicle (without invi tation):

R You have a Mercedes me account. Fingerprint sensor 1 allows you to conveniently access protected MBUX multimedia system functions and services. Compared to protection provided by the Mercedes me PIN, the entry of a four-digit number is not required to activate services and functions with personal content. Depending on the vehicle equipment, further biometric sensors are available in addition to the 296 MBUX multimedia system R The vehicle owner has activated the vehicle for the self-connection process. R You upload your user profile to the vehicle via the QR code. For additional users of the vehicle (with invita tion):

R You have a Mercedes me account. R The vehicle owner has invited you to connect your account on Mercedes me with that of their vehicle. R You have accepted the invitation. User profiles save vehicle settings and settings in the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their pro file without changing the settings of other driv ers. If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX high end Rear Seat Entertainment System, the occu pants in the rear compartment can log in as Mercedes me users from their seats. The Multi seat Profile Management allows three profiles to be used simultaneously. A user profile is seat-

specific and can only be activated in one display. You can set up a user profile in the vehicle via the set-up assistant or the profile options. Some settings, e.g. the Mercedes me PIN and a profile photo are made in the Mercedes me App or in the Mercedes me Portal. User-specific content and applications with per sonal data are protected. Depending on the vehi cle equipment, the Mercedes me PIN and bio metric sensors are used for this purpose. The system indicates which of the taught-in authenti cation steps are necessary in order to achieve the required security level. The PIN provides for the highest level of security. If the vehicle key is linked with the user profile, the user profile is identified and pre-activated when the vehicle is opened. In doing so light, mirror and seat settings are pre-loaded. Authen tication then follows and the user profile is acti vated.

% When a user profile is activated the driver's seat, steering wheel and outside mirrors can be set. If the user profile is activated when driving then the driver's seat position will not be adjusted. User-specific content Depending on the vehicle equipment you can, as a user, save the following settings:

R Driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror set tings R Climate control R Ambient lighting R Radio (including station list) R Themes, suggestions and favourites

% Settings for driver assistance systems can not be saved in the user profile. Adding a user Multimedia system:

4 5 f 5 Changing user

# Select Add user. A QR code is loaded.

# Scan the displayed QR code with the Mercedes me App. The vehicle is linked to the user profile. The user profile is synchronised with the multi media system and downloaded from the Mercedes me Portal. You receive a message when the user profile is available. This procedure may take some minutes. ited navigation destinations, dialled phone numbers and your preferred comfort features and music.

# Select Ja (Yes). The user profile is activated.

# Follow the directions from the set-up assis tant. or

# Select the user options. Selecting user options Multimedia system:

4 5 f

# Select Settings. Making settings for suggestions

# Select Suggestions settings.

# To configure suggestions: select Sugges-

tions.

# Switch the options on or off. If an option is switched on and sufficient data has been gathered, personalised sug gestions based on your user behaviour will be offered to you. These are for example vis

# For intelligent multimodality: select Multi-

modality. If the option is active, the MBUX Voice Assis tant can be activated in certain situations. You can, for example, confirm displayed dis play message by speaking, receive informa tion about display messages or be prompted to provide voice input.

# To switch the learning function off for 24 h: switch on Deactiv. intelligent learning for 24h. About 15 minutes before the activated option ends, you will receive a message that the learning function will begin again shortly. MBUX multimedia system 297 equipment, the Mercedes me PIN, biometric sensors and the vehicle key are available for access protection. Biometric sensors must be taught in. Authentication is carried out using your method of choice. The following user-specific content and applica tions are protected, for example:

R User selection and user profile settings R Suggestions The data and the determination of the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations or contacts are pro tected. R ENERGIZING COACH The recorded health data and their evaluation are protected.

# To delete cumulated suggestions: select R In-Car Office Reset suggestion history.

# Select Ja (Yes). The calendar, the tasks and the e-mails are protected. Protecting user-specific content and applica tions if you add a new user, access protection is already activated. Depending on the vehicle R Parking service The payments are protected. R Mercedes me connect store The purchase of services is protected.

# Facial recognition: look at the driver display

% If your photo is not yet stored in the 298 MBUX multimedia system R The system activations of purchased vehicle functions are protected.

# Activate Protect content. Teaching in, editing and deleting biometric data The biometric data is saved in the sensors in the vehicle. When recognition has been taught in, you can authenticate yourself with the applicable method on the multimedia system.

# Select Biometric data.

# Select Fingerprint, Facial recognition or Voice recognition.

# Finger print: put your finger on the finger print sensor under the touchscreen

(/ page 295). The finger is scanned. If the scanning proce dure is successful, a message appears in the central display. You can unlock your user pro file and protected applications with your fin ger print. for about five seconds. Your face is scanned. A message in the driver display shows whether facial recognition was successful or not. You can unlock your user profile and protected applications with the facial scan.

# Voice recognition: say the sentence shown in the central display and repeat it twice. If the voice recognition was successful, a message appears in the central display. You can unlock your user profile and protected applications with voice recognition.

# To edit biometric data: select Edit.

# Change the biometric data.

# To delete biometric data: select Delete.

# Select Ja (Yes). Editing, deleting or resetting user profiles to the factory settings

# To edit: select Edit.

# Change the name.

# Select OK. Mercedes me Portal you can select a photo from a list.

# Pre-activation of the user profile: select Pre-activate user profile.

# Depending on the vehicle equipment, select Vehicle key or Digital Vehicle Key. The user profile is linked to the selected key. If you open the vehicle with the key, the light, mirror and seat settings for your user profile are pre-activated with the vehicle key which you are currently using to unlock the vehicle. A key can only be saved for one user profile.

# To delete: select Remove.

# Select Ja (Yes).

# To reset to factory settings: select Reset.

# Select Ja (Yes). Selecting a user Multimedia system:

4 5 f

% When you call up your driver profile, the driv er's seat and the steering wheel can be set. You can cancel the setting process with the following actions:

R Tap on the Tap here to cancel. message in the central display. R Press one of the seat operating buttons in the driver's door.

# Selecting a user.

# Press the a button to confirm the mes sage. The user profile is loaded and activated.

% If you select Continue without user selection no specific settings for the user profile are loaded. Synchronising user profiles Requirements:

R You have a Mercedes me Account. R The vehicle is linked with your Mercedes me user account. Multimedia system:

4 5 f 5 Settings 5 Synchronisation

# Activate Synchronise user profiles automati-

cally. When the ignition is switched on or off, the data stored in the vehicle is automatically synchronised with the user-specific content on Mercedes me connect. or

# Select Synchronise user profiles now. After selecting this option, the data stored in the vehicle is synchronised with the user-

specific content on Mercedes me connect.

% During synchronisation the user profile list and the profile functions are blocked.

% Note on data protection: if you do not wish to share your data with Mercedes me, make sure that the automatic synchronisation is switched off and do not select Synchronise user profiles now. MBUX multimedia system 299 Themes Overview of themes You can configure the vehicle settings according to your preferences, save as a theme and call up any time via the home screen. There are prede fined themes, e.g. Journey, Efficiency and Lounge. Example of a theme You can create a theme for a typical driving sit uation, e.g. for a long motorway journey. The following settings can be stored in a theme, for example:

R The navigation map R Current messages in the driver's display R The preferred audio source R The preferred drive program You can make further settings and allocate a name. For the next motorway journey, the theme and the settings you have made are available again. 300 MBUX multimedia system Content of a theme Depending on vehicle equipment the following settings can be saved in a theme:

R Setting of driver's display (/ page 273) R Setting of the Head-up Display (/ page 284) R Setting of the ambient lighting (/ page 151) R Active audio source, e.g. radio or USB R Starting screen for the central display R Design The style depends on the set context in the driver's display, for example Performance. R DYNAMIC SELECT drive program

(/ page 184) R Eco start/stop setting (/ page 182) R Navigation system settings Calling up themes Multimedia system:

4 5

# Select Themes.

# Select a theme. Creating new themes Requirements:

R The settings which are to be saved in the theme are active. For more information on content of themes see (/ page 299). Multimedia system:

4 5

# Select Themes .

# Select W Create new theme . The settings which are saved in the theme are shown.

# Select r.

# Select additional settings, e.g. Navigation which are to be saved in the theme.

# Select r .

# Select an entry screen, e.g. Media.

# Select r.

# Select an image.

# Enter a name for the theme and confirm with a.

# Select Save theme.

% The selection of an image is not possible in all countries. When the maximum number that can be saved is reached:

# Select a from the prompt.

# Select a theme that should be overwritten.

# Proceed as described above. Creating using a button on the steering wheel

# Press and hold the button on the steer ing wheel.

# Select W Create new theme.

# Proceed as described above. Managing themes Multimedia system:

4 5

# Select Themes . The themes are displayed. Moving themes

# Press on a theme until a menu is shown.

# Select Move .

# Move the theme to a new position using drag

& drop. Renaming themes

# Press on a theme until a menu is shown.

# Select Edit theme .

# Select Rename .

# Enter the name.

# Select Save theme . Writing over a theme with new settings

# Press on a theme until a menu is shown.

# Select Overwrite .

# Select Ja (Yes) . Deleting themes Multimedia system:

4 5

# Select Themes .

# Press on a theme until a menu is shown.

# Select Delete .

# Select Ja (Yes) . Resetting themes

# Press on a theme until a menu is shown.

# Select Reset themes to factory settings? .

# Select Yes . Favourites Overview of favourites Favourites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. It is possible to create 20 favourites in total. You can select favourites from categories or you add favourites directly from an application. Calling up favourites Multimedia system:

4

# Touch the status bar with a finger and swipe down. MBUX multimedia system 301

# Select Favoriten (Favourites) in the Control Center. Calling up on the steering wheel

# Press the button. Adding favourites Multimedia system:

4

# Touch the status bar with a finger and swipe

# Select Favoriten (Favourites) in the Control down. Center. Selecting favourites from categories

# Select r.

# Select W Create new favourite.

# Select the category.

# Select a favourite. The favourite is stored at the next available position.

# All positions in the favourites are taken:

confirm the message shown with OK. A list shows all the favourites.

# Select a favourite which should be overwrit

# Select OK.

# Select Ja (Yes). 302 MBUX multimedia system ten. Adding a favourite from an application You can save a contact, for example, or add an ENERGIZING Comfort programme.

# To save a contact as a global favourite:

select a contact (/ page 383).

# Press on a telephone number until a menu is shown.

# Select Save as favourite. The contact is added as a favourite. Renaming favourites Multimedia system:

4

# Touch the status bar with a finger and swipe down. Center.

# Select Favoriten (Favourites) in the Control

# Press on a favourite until a menu is shown.

# Select Rename.

# Enter the name. Moving favourites Multimedia system:

4

# Touch the status bar with a finger and swipe Resetting favourites

# Select Reset all favourites in the menu.

# Select Ja (Yes). down. Center.

# Select Favoriten (Favourites) in the Control

# Press on a favourite until the menu is shown.

# Select Move.

# Move the favourite to the new position.

# Tap on . Deleting favourites Multimedia system:

4

# Touch the status bar with a finger and swipe down. Center.

# Select Favoriten (Favourites) in the Control

# Press on a favourite until a menu is shown.

# Select Delete. Notifications Centre Overview of the Notifications Centre The following communications are collected in the Notifications Centre:

R Communications which are generated by the vehicle or from multimedia system. R Communications which are received through the use of services. The following notification types are available for you:

R Navigable destinations and routes R Messages (text messages) R Calendar entries and reminders, e.g. from In-

Car Office This function is not available in all countries. R System information, e.g. Important software update available. Confirm to start the update. R Other notifications, e.g. from additional online services that can be subscribed to The Notifications Centre is in the Control Center. Newly received messages will be indicated with a blue circle. Notifications are normally briefly shown as they are received. If you take no action, these are stored for future access in the Notifications Centre. The notifications are sorted chronologically. The most recent notifications are at the top. MBUX multimedia system 303 Depending on the type of notification, up to four different actions are available. Examples of actions include:

R Reading aloud R Placing a call R Reply R Calling up a web page R Navigation Some notifications, e.g. a navigation destination, are stored longer. Therefore, it is not necessary to carry out available actions directly upon receipt of the notifications. A route guidance can be started at a later time. You can pin a message so that this is not deleted automatically after a certain time. Calling up notifications Opening the Notifications Centre

# On the touchscreen, touch the bar above Search with a finger and pull down wards. The Control Center opens. Example of a message 1 Date of message received 2 To edit message 3 To call up the settings 4 Time message received 5 Available action 6 q To open up bar (more actions availa ble) r To close bar 7 Device name or name of the application or service and further information 8 Symbol or an image for the application 304 MBUX multimedia system

# Select the Notifications Centre. Selecting a notification

# Tap on the message.

# if several messages are available swipe up or down. Closing the Notifications Centre

# Swipe up with two fingers. Selecting actions for a notification The following options are available:

R Select the action directly after a notification is received and shown. R Select the action later after calling up in the Notifications Centre.

# An action is available: select the action.

# Several actions available: select q.

# Select the action. The notification is still available.

# Close the actions with r. Editing notifications

# Call up the Notifications Centre

(/ page 303). Configuring the settings

# Select Z.

% If no settings can be made, a message appears.

# Select the service.

# Switch the options on or off. The following options are available:

R Allow notifications R Display in notification centre R Show notifications R Acoustic signals R External access The option allows external service access to specific data, e.g. the current vehicle position. With , the detailed, released information can be shown. If Allow notifications is switched off, the options cannot be selected with the excep tion of External access. Pinning a message

# Drag a message to the right on the touchscreen.

# To display pinned messages only: select in the Message Center. Deleting notifications

# Drag a message to the left on the touchscreen and place in E. or

# Select the pen symbol.

# Select E next to a message or E Delete all.

# Select Yes.

# Call up the Message Center with O. Global search Global search overview You can use the global search in the home screen and in the notifications. You can input characters using the keyboard or the handwrit ing recognition. Alternatively, the MBUX Voice Assistant allows voice input. The global search provides search results for the following categories:

R Navigation R Entertainment R Telephone, social media, In-Car Office In-Car Office is not available in all countries. R User interface and Digital Owner's Manual R Internet The global search enables you to search for towns, roads and tourist attractions with the navigation system, for example. The global search makes it possible to enter a 3 word address (/ page 339). When the search field is empty the most proba ble suggestions are shown. The search results in the list are shown, sorted according to category. Next to the category is the number of results. You will be shown the best results from each category. Additional results can be found after selecting the respective category. If you confirm an entry with OK (OK), all catego ries and the number of results will be shown in a summary. Categories include Navigation and Entertainment, for example. After selecting a category you can select the search results within the category. When you select a search result the detailed view opens. In the detailed view you can choose whether and which actions you want to carry out with the respective search result. For example, you can start route guidance or place a call to somebody. The actions are named correspondingly. Using the global search Multimedia system:

4

# Select Search.

# Enter the search term into the search field. The three most likely suggestions are offered during the input. MBUX multimedia system 305 In the list, the top two search results are shown for each category.

% Alternatively, the MBUX Voice Assistant allows voice input via p.

# To accept a suggestion: select the sugges tion. The three most likely suggestions are offered.

# Continue the search or accept a suggestion.

# To accept the second search result: select the search result. An action starts or a list is shown.

# Select a search result or an action in the list.

# To show all categories: select OK (OK).

# To show search results for a category:

select a category.

# To show details: select a search result.

# To start an action: select an action. After selection of an action, a track is played back or the route to a destination is calcula ted, for example. 306 MBUX multimedia system Switching the sound on/off On the steering wheel Traffic and navigation announcements can still be heard in this case. The MBUX Voice Assistant and telephony are also not affec ted.

# To switch on: press button 1 again. or

# Set the volume. or

# The media source changes. In the control panel above the centre console

# To switch off: press button 1. The current audio source is switched off. The 8 symbol appears in the status line of the central display. If you are listening to a radio station, for example, and switch off the sound then all media sources will be muted. Adjusting the volume Setting with the button On the steering wheel (MBUX multimedia sys tem) On the MBUX multimedia system

# Press 1 or q. or

# Swipe across the button. The volume of the current audio source in the foreground is set. MBUX multimedia system 307 The volume can be adjusted using the vol ume control for the following groups:

R Entertainment volume R Ringtone volume R Call volume, for example phone call vol R Voice output volume, for example MBUX R Volume of driving recommendations in ume Voice Assistant the navigation

% If you set the volume of the voice output to

"0" for example, a minimum volume is auto matically set when the MBUX Voice Assis tant is next called up. The entertainment vol ume is automatically adjusted after the mul timedia system is restarted. Setting in the menu

# Press the button on the steering wheel. or

# Select on the touchscreen. The home screen appears.

# Select Settings. 308 MBUX multimedia system

# Select System.

# Select Audio.

# Select a volume setting.

% The volume can be set for all groups except the entertainment volume.

# Set the volume. The following settings can also be made in the menu:

R Activating/deactivating the driving recom mendations in the navigation during a tele phone call. R Reducing the entertainment volume while a driving recommendation is being issued. Entering characters Using the character input function Requirements:

R For the handwriting recognition read-

aloud function: the MBUX multimedia sys tem is equipped with the MBUX Voice Assis tant. R The read-aloud function is available for the selected system language. R The handwriting recognition read-aloud func R If the read aloud function is activated for handwriting recognition then the entered characters are read aloud. Entering characters on the touchscreen Requirements:

R If you wish to have the character input read aloud: the read aloud function of the hand writing recognition is switched on . R An online connection is required for some functions. tion is activated. Enter the characters on the Touch Control or on the touchscreen (central display). Character input can be started with a control element and resumed with another.

# When the keypad is shown, enter the charac ters by swiping and pressing on the Touch Control or by tapping on the touchscreen. or

# If handwriting recognition has been selected, write the characters on the touchscreen. Examples for character input include the global search, entering a navigation destination or the renaming of a favourite, for example. The touchpad supports character input with the following functions:

R Handwriting recognition offers character sug gestions. MBUX multimedia system 309 7 Switches to voice input 8 Sets the written language 9 Switches to digits A Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters

# Example: call up the navigation and enter a destination address (/ page 302).

# Briefly press on a character. The character is entered in input line 1.

# Resume character input.

# To enter an alternative character: press and hold a character.

# Select the character.

# To end character entry: press briefly on G.

% The available editing functions depend on the editing task, the language set and the character level. Example: character input with the keypad 1 Input line with current entry 2 Deletes an entry 3 Puts the search result into the input line and continues entry 4 Deletes the last character entered 5 Accepts an entry 6 Switches to handwriting recognition Entering characters with handwriting recog nition 1 Input line 2 Shows suggestions during input 3 Deletes an entry 4 Pressing briefly deletes the last character entered Pressing and holding deletes the entry 310 MBUX multimedia system 5 Switches to input using the keyboard 6 Enters a space 7 Accepts an entry 8 Writing area If available, the p symbol allows you to change to voice input.

# When the keyboard is displayed, select v.

# Write the character with one finger on the touchscreen. The letters can be written next to each other or above each other. The character is entered in input line 1. Suggestions are shown in 2.

# Select one of the suggestions.

# If available, display additional suggestions with q or r.

# To end character entry: press briefly on G. R For Read out handwriting recognition: the MBUX multimedia system is equipped with the MBUX Voice Assistant. R The read-aloud function is available for the selected system language. Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Keyboards and handwriting

# Select Keyboard languages.

# Select a keyboard language. Handwriting recognition functions

# Activate Read out handwriting recognition. The letter that your write on the touchscreen is read aloud.

# Activate Handwrit. recognition on keyboard. You can write characters directly on the key board. Setting the keyboard and handwriting recog nition for character entry Requirements:

# Select Writing speed r.

# Select an option. Deleting the user dictionary The user dictionary learns from your inputs and offers suggestions during character input. You can reset the user dictionary.

# Select Reset my dictionary.

# Select Ja (Yes). MBUX Interior Assistant Notes on lasers and laser classification

& WARNING Risk of injury due to laser beams from the camera This product uses a class 1 laser system If the housing is opened or damaged, invisible laser beams could damage your retina.

# Do not open the housing.

# Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out by a qualified spe cialist workshop. This device is a class 1 laser product in accord ance with DIN EN 60825-1:2014 Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant The MBUX Interior Assistant monitors the driver and front passenger using 3D cameras in the roof lining. In so doing, it interprets their move ments and their overall body language in order to assist, appropriate to the situation, with auto matically triggered functions in the vehicle inte rior. The Assistant supports vehicle and infotainment functions at three interaction levels:

R INTELLIGENT The Assistant recognises vehicle occupants automatically and carries out functions. R REACTIVE The Assistant recognises the natural body language of a vehicle occupant and carries out functions automatically, appropriate to the situation. R CONTACTLESS The vehicle occupant actively demands a function through a hand movement or a favourites pose (V pose). The Assistant offers functions for the following:

R SAFETY The Assistant supports vehicle occupants with the use of the restraint system. R COMFORT The Assistant enhances comfort by automat ing functions inside the vehicle and support ing natural interaction with the vehicle. R INFOTAINMENT Operating options or information are high lighted and/or shown on the central display as a hand approaches. The vehicle occupants can carry out a favourite function with a V pose. The Assistant recognises driver and front passenger interactions. System limits, display messages and notes for rectification The error messages are shown in the central dis play. MBUX multimedia system 311 The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R The camera is covered or dirty, misted up or scratched. The The Interior Assistant is temporarily not available see Owner's Manual message appears. Clean the outside of the camera lens with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use microfi bre cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning. R A vehicle occupant is very large. Clothing being worn (hat, scarf, colour of clothing) or objects carried on a person, for example a watch with a large face, are affecting the camera view. Or the detection area of the camera is limited. The Availability of the Interior Assistant is limited for the driver. See Owner's Manual message appears. Keep the camera's field of vision clear. R The camera is too hot or is temporarily switched off. 312 MBUX multimedia system The Interior Assistant is temporarily not avail-

able. You will be informed as soon as the function is available again. Wait until the camera has cooled down or is available again. You receive a message when the camera is available again. R The camera or a cable is faulty. The The MBUX Interior Assistant not availa-

ble. Please visit the workshop. message appears. Consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre. The three types of interaction between vehicle and vehicle occupants:

Type of interaction Description Subject area and examples MBUX multimedia system 313 INTELLIGENT REACTIVE CONTACTLESS The Assistant recognises the presence of vehi cle occupants. Depending on the situation, functions are car ried out automatically. The natural body language of a vehicle occu pant, e.g. a hand or head movement, is recog nised and triggers a function implicitly. Safety R Information on fastening the child seat Comfort R Switching the search light on/off Infotainment R Showing the navigation menu on the map The vehicle occupant triggers a function by actively demanding this with a hand movement or a hand pose. Comfort R Switching a reading light on/off Infotainment R Calling up favourites with the V pose 314 MBUX multimedia system Overview of supported interior functions:

Functions (examples) Type of interaction Subject area SAFETY COMFORT Adaptive interior lighting Smart comfort functions INFOTAINMENT Reactive user interface Transporting children in the vehicle more safely Information on fastening the child seat Intelligent Switching a reading light on/off Switching the search light on/off Automatic preselection of the outside mirror Opening and closing the roller sunblind on the rear window Contactless Reactive Reactive Reactive Contactless Calling up favourites with the V pose Calling up favourites with the V pose Animating content on the home screen for driver or front passenger Seat adjustments by the driver or front passenger Showing the navigation menu Reactive Reactive Reactive S02: Emergency call with transmission of number of vehicle occupants (SAFETY/intel ligent) Observe the information on the system limits of Blind Spot and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 260). If the emergency call system triggers an emer gency call, the MBUX Interior Assistant detects the number of adults and children in the vehicle. This data is transmitted to the emergency call centre. Measures for rescue, recovery or towing away can then be initiated more precisely. Further information on the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call system (/ page 407, 412). S04: Anticipatory exit warning (SAFETY/

reactive) Requirements:

R The vehicle is equipped with DRIVE PILOT

[code 200]. Further information about DRIVE PILOT . R The vehicle is equipped with Blind Spot Assist [code 234]. R Blind Spot Assist is activated (/ page 263). R The vehicle is stationary. R The ignition is switched on. The function can warn vehicle occupants about a possible collision with an approaching vehicle or bicycle when they exit the vehicle. The visual exit warning is issued before the door is opened and thus earlier than previously. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow ing warnings are issued:

R The active ambient lighting flashes red or R The ambient lighting flashes red R The warning light in the outside mirror flashes red. When a vehicle occupant holds a hand in the vicinity of the door area, the warning light lights up briefly. R When the door is opened, a warning tone sounds. MBUX multimedia system 315 Notes on fastening the child seat (SAFETY/

intelligent) The MBUX Interior Assistant detects child restraint systems on the front passenger seat. If a child restraint system is not fastened, e.g. a rearward-facing child seat, a message appears in the central display. The function assists you in making sure that a child restraint system is secured with the seat belt on the front passenger seat. It helps you to transport children safely in the vehicle.

% For further information on securing a child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat . S06: Saving the child seat position with the MBUX Interior Assistant (SAFETY/intelligent) The MBUX Interior Assistant detects child restraint systems on the front passenger seat. If a child restraint system is detected and this is fastened on the front passenger seat, a message appears in the media display. The set seat posi 316 MBUX multimedia system tion can be saved via the displayed memory but tons in the media display. The function allows the front passenger seat to be adjusted before a child restraint system is fit ted. It simplifies the use of child seats and helps you to transport babies and small children safely. Further information for adjusting the driver's seat:

R Adjusting the front seat electrically

(/ page 96) R Setting the automatic seat adjustment on the MBUX multimedia system (/ page 106) C07: Pre-setting the driver's seat position with the MBUX Interior Assistant (COM FORT/intelligent) When creating a profile, the MBUX Interior Assis tant detects the size of the driver and can pre-

set the seat position if required. The driver can make additional fine adjustments which are saved in the profile. When the profile is reactivated, the seat position is called up automatically after confirmation. The positions of the head restraints and steering wheel are also adjusted. Switching the reading light on/off (COM FORT/contactless) Requirements:

R The driver's and front passenger's hand movement takes place under the inside rear view mirror. A brief movement of the hand up and down, switches the reading light on or off. Carrying out operation of the reading light for the driver and front passenger

# Move the hand up and down vertically under the reading light. The reading light is switched on or off.

% Further information on switching the reading lamps on and off (/ page 151). Switching the search light on/off (COM FORT/reactive) Requirements:

R The function is available in the vehicle when it is dark. R The front passenger seat is not occupied. R The function is available when it is dark. R The driver's hand movement is carried out in the area of the front passenger seat. The function enhances the comfort in the vehicle interior. Naturally stretching out with the hand over the unoccupied front passenger seat, automatically switches a search light on for the driver when it is dark. Pulling the hand back switches the search light off again. Interaction area for activating the search light

% Not occupied means: nobody is on the front passenger seat or there are no large objects on it. Automatic preselection of the outside mirror

(COMFORT/reactive) Until now, to set the outside mirror the desired mirror had to be selected using a preselection button in the driver's door (/ page 156). With the MBUX Interior Assistant, the mirror to be set is preselected automatically by the natu ral movement of the head to the left or right. The setting of the selected outside mirror is then carried out using the button in the door operat ing unit.

% Preselection of the outside mirror using but tons 2 or 4 is still possible (/ page 156).

% The driver camera is also used for this appli cation. In the process, the camera evaluates the driver's head position. MBUX multimedia system 317 Opening/closing the roller sunblind on the rear window (COMFORT/reactive) Requirements:

R The vehicle is equipped with an electric roller sunblind for the rear window. R Reverse gear is engaged. If the driver glances back over their shoulder in the direction of the rear window, the roller sun blind opens automatically. If the vehicle is parked or before a journey is resumed, the roller sunblind is closed again automatically, if it was closed before reversing. The function facilitates a good view when revers ing, e.g. when parking, and reduces the number of operating steps.

% Further information on opening and closing the roller sunblind on the rear window

(/ page 92). C17: Opening and closing the sliding sunroof and roller sunblind (COMFORT/contactless) Requirements:

Move your outstretched hand in the direction of the windscreen below the overhead con trol panel. The sliding sunroof closes. R The area for detecting the favourites pose (V pose) is in front of the central display. The hand should have a distance of at least 10 cm from the display.

# When the sliding roof is closed, repeat the R The V pose is held for a brief time. The V pose makes it easier to call up favourites. Each vehicle occupant can link their own favour ites with the V pose. Some examples include a navigation destination, a radio station or a mas sage programme for a seat.

% If a favourite has not yet been saved and connected with the MBUX Interior Assistant the multimedia system will assist you. 318 MBUX multimedia system R The vehicle is fitted with a panoramic sliding sunroof. The MBUX Interior Assistant allows contactless operation of the roller sunblind and the sliding roof. The function can be carried out by driver and front passenger. The occupants in the rear can operate the rear roller sunblind. Restriction: do not open the sliding sunroof if a roof rack is fitted. The sliding sunroof will then encounter resistance and subsequently remain in a raised position.

# To open the roller sunblind and sliding roof: the palm of your hand faces your head. Move your outstretched hand away from the windscreen towards the rear below the over head control panel. The roller sunblind opens.

# When the roller sunblind is open, repeat the hand movement. The sliding roof opens.

# To close the sliding roof and roller sun blind: your palm faces away from your head. hand movement. The roller sunblind closes.

# To interrupt the opening and closing proc ess: stop the hand movement and move your hand away from below the overhead control panel. The opening/closing process will be stop ped.

% Further information on opening and closing the sliding roof (/ page 86). Calling up favourites with the V pose (INFO TAINMENT/contactless) Requirements:

R At least one favourite has been saved in the favourites list. R The favourite has been connected with the MBUX Interior Assistant. R One of the following applications appears in the central display:

Seat settings with displays for seats, e.g. Seat comfort (driver's seat and front passenger seat only)

- Home screen

- Map in the navigation with active route R Recognition occurs as the hand approaches to approximately 10 cm of the touchscreen. Carrying out the V pose

# Position your hand above the centre console in the direction of the central display. The back of the hand is facing upwards. In doing so the index and middle finger are spread to form a V with the other fingers bent inwards. The favourite is called up. Operating functions by moving a hand towards the touchscreen (INFOTAINMENT/

reactive) Requirements:

Hand approaching the touchscreen MBUX multimedia system 319 Seat adjustments by the driver or front passenger In the seat settings menu, the MBUX Interior Assistant detects proximity to various control elements of the multimedia system. In addition, the MBUX Interior Assistant detects from which seat the action emanates.

# With the seat setting display active, move the hand towards the touchscreen. The seat of the operator is enlarged in the display.

# Depending on the function, the vehicle occu pant can make settings for the seat function. Animating content in the home screen The MBUX Interior Assistant detects in which area the hand is in front of the touchscreen. The display of objects shown is animated to improve orientation.

# Move your hand towards the touchscreen. The contents in the home screen turn to the driver or front passenger.

# Continue operation, e.g. select a quick-

access application. 320 MBUX multimedia system

% Further information about the home screen

(/ page 292). Showing the navigation menu on the map If there is an active route, the MBUX Interior Assistant displays the navigation menu.

# Move your hand towards the touchscreen. The navigation menu is shown.

# Continue operation and select a symbol.

# As your hand is moved away from the touchscreen, the central display hides the navigation menu.

% Further information on the navigation menu

(/ page 335). Settings for the MBUX Interior Assistant Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 MBUX interior assistant

# Select On or Off. Switching individual functions on or off

# Activate D or deactivate E the switch.

% If Basic functions is switched on, all safety functions are activated. Driver camera Overview of the driver camera The driver camera is in the driver's display or in the 3D driver display. It detects the head posi tion, the viewing direction and the eyelid closure characteristics of the driver. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R The camera is covered or dirty, misted up or scratched. R The camera or a cable is damaged. R The driver's face and/or eyes are covered. R The driver is wearing glasses that block infra If the Assistant is activated, full functionality is used. red. Assistants, operating and display systems as well as typical applications that are supported by the driver camera:

Assistant or operation and display system Observe the following information:

MBUX multimedia system 321 MBUX augmented reality Head-up Display Display elements DRIVE PILOT Driver display ATTENTION ASSIST Personalisation Multimodality Eye Control Function of DRIVE PILOT and system limits Overview of driver's display Function of ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection Facial recognition MBUX Voice Assistant MBUX Interior Assistant, automatic pre-selection of the outside mirror Display messages In the following situations display messages may be shown:

R If the driver camera is not functioning

(/ page 602). The camera or the cable is faulty. R If the steering wheel position is impairing the view of the driver's face. R If the driver camera has a limited view Switching the driver camera on/off

(/ page 602). Notes on care Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 466). Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Driver camera

# Select On or Off. When the driver camera is switched off, the fol lowing functions are not available or limited:

R DRIVE PILOT 322 MBUX multimedia system R 3D driver display R MBUX augmented reality Head-up Display R The microsleep detection of ATTENTION Setting day/night design

# Select Day/night design.

# Select Automatic, Day design or Night ASSIST R Facial recognition (authentication) R Multimodality The MBUX Voice Assistant is activated to confirm a display message by speaking, for example. System settings Display Configuring display settings Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Display Adjusting the brightness

# Select Display brightness.

# Set the brightness of the central display, the instrument cluster or the front passenger dis play. design. Switching the display surround lighting on/off

# Select Illuminate display indirectly. The indirect lighting is switched on or off. Switching 3D display of the instrument clus ter on/off

# Select 3D Driver Display. The 3D display of the instrument cluster is switched on or off. Switching the Head-up Display on/off

# Select Head-up display. The Head-up Display is activated or deactiva ted. Time and date Setting the time zone Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Time and date

# Select Time zone. The list of countries is displayed.

% If there are several time zones available in a country, these will be shown after the coun try is selected.

# Select a country and, if required, a time zone. The time zone set is displayed after Time zone. or

# Select the Automatic time zone entry from the country list. The time zone will be set automatically according to the vehicle location.

% The Automatic time zone option is available for vehicles with satellite reception. Setting the time and date format Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Time and date 5 Set format

# Select a time and date format. Setting the time and date manually Requirements:

R The vehicle does not have satellite reception. Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Time and date Setting the time

# Select Set time.

# Set a time.

# Press OK (OK) to confirm. Setting the date

# Select Set date.

# Select a date.

# Press OK (OK) to confirm.

% On vehicles with satellite reception, the time and date settings are determined automati cally based on the vehicle location and can not be set manually. Adjusting the time

# Select Adjust time.

# Set a value.

# Press OK (OK) to confirm.

% The function is only available in vehicles with satellite reception. Switching voice amplification to the rear on/off (vehicles with long wheelbase) Requirements:

R Your vehicle is equipped with the Burmester 3D surround sound system or the Burmester high-end 4D surround sound sys tem. R The ignition is switched on. R Doors, side windows and the panorama slid ing sunroof are closed. MBUX multimedia system 323 R At least one seat belt is fastened on the rear bench seat. Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio 5 Further settings 5 Voice amplification Voice amplification supports communication between the driver/front passenger with pas sengers in the rear compartment. When voice amplification to rear is activated, the signals picked up by the microphone are amplified and played back over the speakers in the rear com partment, depending upon vehicle noise levels. An automatic adjustment occurs based on speaker volume and ambient noise in order to improve speech intelligibility and maintain the naturalness of speech.

# Switch voice amplification on or off. Setting the intensity of the voice amplifica tion

# Set the desired intensity on the control. Depending on the intensity set, the voice amplification to the rear is increased or reduced. 324 MBUX multimedia system Data protection Bluetooth Switching transmission of the vehicle posi tion on/off Requirements:

R A Mercedes me account is available. R At least one service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal which has access to the transmitted position data.

% The function is country-dependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Data protection 5 Transmit vehicle position

# Activate or deactivate the function. Information about Bluetooth Bluetooth technology is a standard for short-

range wireless data transfer up to approximately 10 m. You can use Bluetooth to connect your mobile phone to the multimedia system and use the fol lowing functions, for example:

R Hands-free system with access to the follow ing options:

- Contacts (/ page 382)

- Call lists (/ page 386)

Text messages (/ page 387) R Internet connection (/ page 414) Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.

% Internet connection via Bluetooth is not available in all countries. Activating/deactivating Bluetooth Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth

# Switch Bluetooth on or off. Near Field Communication (NFC) Information on Near Field Communication

(NFC) NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer or connection of a mobile phone with the multi media system. Further information can be found at: https://

www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

Switching near-field communication on/off Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth

# Switch NFC on or off. Wi-Fi

% The use of the vehicle data tariff by external R WPS PIN Information on Wi-Fi connections You can use Wi-Fi to set up a connection to the Internet or to external network devices.

% The availability of the function is dependent on the country. Generally, two types of Wi-Fi connection are available:

R To use the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot (/ page 326) The multimedia system serves as Wi-Fi hot spot for mobile communication devices, such as smartphone or tablet PC, for example. The data volume of the vehicle or an already connected tethering device is used for the data connection. To use the vehicle data volume, the Allow connected devices to use the Internet option must be activated in the hotspot setting. devices is not available in all countries. R To use a mobile communication device as Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering) (/ page 416) An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the Internet connection of the multimedia sys tem. The data tariff of the mobile communi cation device is used for the data connec tion. Options for setting up a connection The following options are available for setting up a connection:

R QR code The connection is set up by scanning the QR code shown on the multimedia system. R NFC The connection is set up by placing the mobile communication device in the NFC interface of the vehicle. The connection is set up by keypress on the device to be connected.

% Data volumes must be purchased via the R WPS PBC Mercedes me Portal. MBUX multimedia system 325 The connection is set up by entering an eight digit PIN. Switching Wi-Fi on or off Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth

# Select Wi-Fi. The controller is to the right: Wi-Fi is switched on. When Wi-Fi is switched on, you can connect the multimedia system with external hotspots or make it available as a hotspot for external devi ces. When Wi-Fi is switched off, it is not possible to establish a hotspot connection.

% The availability of the function is dependent on the country. 326 MBUX multimedia system Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hot spot Requirements:

R Wi-Fi is activated on the multimedia system and the device to be connected

(/ page 325). R The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described. The connection types shown depend on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.

% Some functions may first need to be activa ted on the device being connected. More detailed information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions.

% The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries. Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth

# Select Vehicle hotspot.

# Select one of the following connection options. Connecting using a QR code Requirement: an app for scanning the QR code is installed on the device being connected. Alternatively: the device being connected has an integrated QR code scanner (see manufacturer's operating instructions).

# Scan the QR code shown. The Wi-Fi connection is established. Connecting using NFC

# Select NFC.

# Activate NFC on the device being connected.

# Position the device being connected in the NFC interface of the vehicle. The Wi-Fi connection is established. Connecting using a button

# Select Connect via WPS PBC.

# Press the push button on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

# Select Weiter (Continue). The Wi-Fi connection is established. Connecting using WPS PIN entry

# Select Connect via WPS PIN.

# Enter the PIN that is shown on the external device's display on the multimedia system. After correct entry of the PIN: The Wi-Fi con nection is established. Managing MBUX authorised devices Requirements:

R The MBUX Remote Control app is installed on an external device (e.g. tablet or smart phone). R Wi-Fi is activated (/ page 325) and the mul timedia system is configured as a Wi-Fi Hot spot (/ page 326). Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 MBUX Remote Control Connecting and authorising a new device

# Select Authorise a new device.

# Select Add new device to the list.

# Enter the security key in the external device. The Please start MBUX Remote Control on your device and follow the instructions. mes sage appears.

# Select Continue.

# The connection request from the device Accept.

# Enter the PIN shown on the external device. The device is authorised. Authorising a connected device

# Select Authorise a new device.

# Authorise device from list The Please start MBUX Remote Control on your device and follow the instructions. mes sage appears.

# Select Continue.

# The connection request from the device Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for external devices MBUX multimedia system 327 Accept.

# Enter the PIN shown on the external device. The device is authorised. De-authorising the device

# Select Deauthorise device.

# Select an authorised device from the list. A prompt will appear asking whether you really would like to de-authorise the selected device.

# Select Yes. The device is de-authorised. Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Parental control Switching the child safety lock on/off (rear display)

# Select Rear left or Rear right.

# Select Lock. The controller is positioned on the right: the lock is active. The rear display is locked and cannot be operated. The controller is positioned on the left: the lock is released. The rear display is unlocked and can be operated. or

# Select Display off. The controller is positioned to the right: the rear display switches off. The controller is positioned to the left: the rear display switches on. 328 MBUX multimedia system Activating/deactivating the child safety lock

(MBUX-authorised devices)

# Select MBUX authorised devices. A list of the devices authorised via MBUX Remote Control appears.

# Select Lock. The controller is positioned on the right: the lock is active. The authorised device cannot be used to operate the MBUX multimedia system. The controller is positioned on the left: the lock is released. The authorised device can be used to operate the MBUX multimedia system. System language Notes on the system language This function allows you to determine the lan guage for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all lan guages. If a language is not available, the naviga tion announcements will be in English. Setting the language Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Language Setting the system language

# Select System language. A list of the available system languages is shown.

# Select a language. The system language is switched to the selected language. Setting the distance unit Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System

% This function is not available in all countries.

# Select Units.

# Select a unit for the distance.

# Switch Additional speedometer on for an additional display in the instrument cluster's multifunction display. Software updates Information on software updates Software updates keep your vehicle and the rela ted systems up-to-date and prevent security flaws. The navigation maps are updated via updates from external storage media (e.g. USB stick). Software updates are available online for vehicle components such as control units, convenience systems, locking and safety systems, driver assistance systems, suspension and drive sys tems as well as for the MBUX multimedia sys tem. Software updates are available via the com munication module or a Wi-Fi connection to an external hotspot. Install available software updates regularly. Oth erwise the security of your MBUX multimedia system and individual vehicle components can not be ensured. Information about installation Software updates are installed automatically after they are downloaded. As soon as a soft ware update is completed, a message appears in the media display. It may be necessary to restart the MBUX multimedia system. Some software updates require a safe vehicle status for the installation to be completed. They can only be carried out in a safely parked vehicle with the ignition switched off. When the last installation step is reached, a message appears in the media display after the ignition is switched off. Follow the step-by-step instructions in the media display to complete the installation. The vehicle cannot be used while these software updates are being installed. All entries in the vehicle fault memory are overwritten. Further information about software updates can be found at https://me.secure.mercedes-

benz.com. Carrying out software updates Requirements:

R For software updates via the communica tion module:

There is an Internet connection via the com munication module (/ page 414). Your vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me account (/ page 406). R For software updates via Wi-Fi:

There is a connection to an external Wi-Fi hotspot (/ page 326). Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Software update Starting the software update via the commu nication module If the Automatic online update option is active, available software updates are downloaded and installed automatically. Activate the option in order to always keep your vehicle up-to-date and avoid security flaws. If the option is deactivated, you will be informed of new software updates once. The updates are available for downloading for a limited period of time.

# Select an update from the list of available updates. MBUX multimedia system 329

# Start the update. The update is downloaded and installed auto matically. For software updates with a safe vehicle status: when the last installation step is reached, a message appears in the media display after the ignition is switched off. Fol low the step-by-step instructions in the media display to complete the installation. Starting a software update via Wi-Fi Some software updates require an additional connection to a Wi-Fi hotspot. The connection to an external hotspot can be established when the software update is started.

# Select an update from the list of available updates.

# Start the update.

# Establish the connection to a Wi-Fi hotspot. The update is downloaded and installed auto matically. For software updates with a safe vehicle status: when the last installation step is reached, a message appears in the media 330 MBUX multimedia system display after the ignition is switched off. Fol low the step-by-step instructions in the media display to complete the installation. Starting a map update from an external stor age medium

# Connect the storage medium with the vehicle via a media interface. A message about an available map update appears in the media display.

# Select the message.

# Select Update. The map update is started. Error during installation of the software update In rare cases, an error can occur during the installation. The multimedia system automati cally attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possi ble, one of the following display messages appears on the Instrument Display:

Further information about software updates can be found at https://me.secure.mercedes-

benz.com. Resetting the multimedia system (reset func tion) Requirements:

R Some settings can only be reset when the vehicle is stationary. Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset When resetting the system, personal data and settings are deleted, for example:

R Themes R Connected devices R Individual user profiles

# Select Reset. A query appears asking if the system should really be reset. Failure of the media display:

If the media display has failed, several systems such as the reversing camera, Parktronic or cli mate control are no longer available. Drive on carefully and consult a specialist workshop as soon as possible. Failure of the Instrument Display:

If the Instrument Display has failed, you cannot recognise function restrictions applying to safety relevant systems. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired. Have the vehicle checked by a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# Select Ja (Yes). The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. The data used and saved by the driver assistance systems is deleted. The multimedia system is restarted after the sys tem reset.

% Due to data protection, as well as the func tion of individual driving systems and driving safety systems, it is a requirement to carry out a complete system reset before selling the vehicle or transferring it to a third party, or after use as a hire car. Fit & Healthy Setting ENERGIZING seat kinetics Requirements:

% These functions are available only for fully electric seats with a memory function. Multimedia system:

4 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort

# Select Seat kinetics. ENERGIZING seat kinetics can support back health by changing the seat position during a journey. The muscles and joints are repeatedly stressed and relieved by means of minor move ments of the cushion and backrest. Starting seat kinetics

# Select short distance, Medium dist. or long distance for the desired seat.

# The program will run for the set duration. Configuring seat kinetics

# Select Z for the desired seat.

# Select Backrest, Backrest and seat surface or Seat surface for the desired seat. Vehicles with a multicontour seat:

In addition to the seat backrest and seat cush ion, the lumbar region can be activated for the function.

# Switch Including lumbar on or off. MBUX multimedia system 331 ENERGIZING COMFORT Overview of the ENERGIZING COMFORT pro gramme

% Please note that the available programmes and the associated functions depend on your vehicle equipment. Depending on your equipment, fewer functions may be availa ble. Programme overview R Refresh: Can have a refreshing effect with short, cool puffs of air. The seat is ventilated, the vehicle interior is illuminated with cool colours and the programme is completed with appropriate sound. In addition, the vibration massage in the cushions can loosen the muscles. R Warmth: Can increase the comfort level of the vehicle occupants. Seat, surface and steering wheel heating, in combination with the heated neck cushion in the rear passenger compartment, provide comforting warmth. The programme is completed with unobtrusive sound and warm colours. 332 MBUX multimedia system R Vitality: Can counteract diminishing atten tiveness in monotonous driving situations. The activating stimulation of the vehicle occupants is carried out with invigorating sound, activating light and a vitalising mas sage. R Pleasure: Can promote a positive mood in the vehicle occupants as well as mental regeneration. This results from the activation of a massage programme, friendly sound and illumination with suitable colours. Combina tion with the 4D sound system can boost the regenerating effect. R Comfort: Can help relax the vehicle occu pants. Relaxation is achieved using a hot stone massage, friendly light and relaxing sound. R Power Nap: The programme consists of three phases.

Falling asleep phase: relaxing music is played and the vehicle is darkened. Sleeping phase: the active functions are deactivated or restricted as much as pos sible.

- Waking phase: slightly stimulating music is played, and the air is purified with ioni sation and scented. R Training: Can counteract the onset of mus cle tension, limbs falling asleep or stress with targeted relaxation or stimulation exercises. The exercises are demonstrated in short vid eos. The training consists of audio content and a brief animation. The audio content is con ceived so that it can also be played back when you are driving. Animations are only shown when the vehicle is stationary. Always observe the traffic conditions if you are train ing when driving. R Tips: The system gives auditory tips for pos sible exercises or measures for improving the comfort level of the vehicle occupants. By selecting the desired area of the body you can receive targeted tips for the comfort level of this area. If a programme has been started for one seat, this can also be adopted for other seats at the same time. Starting the ENERGIZING COMFORT pro gramme

& WARNING Increased risk of accident when using the ENERGIZING COMFORT programmes Tips and Training The ENERGIZING COMFORT programmes Tips and Training can distract you when driv ing.

# Only carry out exercises when the traf fic conditions allow.

# When listening to the tips, make sure that you are always aware of the traffic conditions around you. Requirements:

R The ignition is switched on. To start Power Nap for the driver's seat:

R The engine is switched off. R The doors are closed. R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R The charging state of the high-voltage battery is sufficient for the use of the auxiliary cli mate control.

# Select Settings.

# Select the desired duration. Multimedia system:

4 5 Comfort 5 ENERGIZING COMFORT Starting the programme

# Select a programme.

# Select Start for the desired seat.

% If, during an active programme, a function requirement is no longer met, a correspond ing message appears. The active programme is cancelled. Configuring the programme

# Select a programme.

# Select Settings.

# Switch the functions included in the pro gramme on or off. Setting the running time

# Select a programme. Starting a Power Nap

# Select Power Nap.

# Select Start. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out when Power Nap is star ted:

R The roller sunblinds are extended. R The doors are locked. R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed. R The seats are moved into the fully reclined position. R The parking brake is applied if necessary.

% The programme is also available for the rear seats while the vehicle is in motion. The above-mentioned functions may only have limited availability. Starting the training programme

# Select Training. MBUX multimedia system 333

# Select a programme.

# To activate fragrancing for training: select Air freshener.

% The animations demonstrating the exercises are faded out when the vehicle is in motion and you only hear the instructions. Starting tips

# Select Tips.

# Select a region of the body.

# Select to stop playback of the tip. ENERGIZING COACH Function of the ENERGIZING COACH Requirements:

R The ENERGIZING COACH service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal or the Mercedes me app. With ENERGIZING COACH you can evaluate the driving and driver situation. Depending on the situation, it offers recommendations for the start 334 MBUX multimedia system of an appropriate ENERGIZING COMFORT pro gramme. The following programs could be suggested:

R Vitality As an activating programme in monotonous driving situations or for long journey times, for example. Information on the vitality program see

(/ page 331). R Pleasure As a balancing program in demanding driving situations. Information on the pleasure program see

(/ page 331). R Refresh As a refreshing programme when tempera tures rise. Information on the Refresh programme; see

(/ page 331). R Warmth As a warming programme when tempera tures drop. Information on the Warmth programme; see

(/ page 331). By connecting a GARMIN fitness tracker, for example the GARMIN vvoactive 3, additional information can be entered into the evaluation for the recommendation of an ENERGIZING COMFORT programme. The additional informa tion includes the stress level, that is calculated by the fitness tracker. The stress level is based primarily on the pulse rate. Requirements for the integration of additional information via a GARMIN fitness tracker:

R Your fitness tracker is connected with your GARMIN account. R Your GARMIN account is connected with your Mercedes me account. If you wear your GARMIN fitness tracker at night also, the sleep data is included in the evaluation of the ENERGIZING COACH. Requirement for the integration of the sleep data:

R The GARMIN fitness tracker is synchronised with the GARMIN account before the begin ning of the journey.

% If ATTENTION ASSIST determines an exces sive lack of attention, ENERGIZING COACH makes no further suggestions. Further infor mation about ATTENTION ASSIST

(/ page 255). Calling up the ENERGIZING COACH display Multimedia system:

4 5 Comfort

# Select ENERGIZING COACH. Your current pulse as well as an evaluation of your pulse for the last 30 minutes driving time are shown. A corresponding error message is shown if there is no mobile phone connected or no pulse can be sent to the system for an exten ded period.

% Only pulse values in the range of 30150 bpm are shown on the central dis play. The pulse values have no medical valid ity but are only informative in nature and are therefore also not required to be accurate.

# In the event of an error message make sure that the following requirements are fulfilled:

R The fitness tracker is connected with your GARMIN account. R Your GARMIN account is connected with your Mercedes me account on your mobile phone. R The mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system (/ page 373). Navigation and traffic Switching navigation on Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation

# Alternatively, activate the MBUX Voice Assis tant (/ page 286).

# Switch to navigation. The map appears. Navigation overview Digital map MBUX multimedia system 335 Showing/hiding the navigation menu 4 5 Navigation The navigation menu is shown if route guidance is not active. The navigation menu is hidden if route guidance is active.

# To show: tap on the touchscreen.

# To hide: the navigation menu is hidden auto matically. 1 Display of the traffic reports provider 2 Status line with information 3 Shows parking options in the vicinity of the current vehicle position 4 Sets the map orientation 336 MBUX multimedia system 5 Current vehicle position 6 Navigation menu Navigation menu 1 Enters a POI or address and additional desti nation entries is active) 2 Interrupts route guidance (if route guidance 3 Repeats a navigation announcement and switch navigation announcements on or off 4 Calls up a menu Showing the route overview, entering intermediate destinations, selecting alterna tive routes Entering intermediate destinations Displaying traffic incidents and local area reports 5 Makes settings for View, Messages and Route

% The options are not available in all countries.

% You can enter a destination as a 3 word address from what3words (/ page 339). This option is not available in all countries. Destination entry Notes on destination entry

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating integrated communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Entering a POI or address Requirements:

Observe the notes on destination entry

(/ page 336). R For the online search: Mercedes me con nect is available. R You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle has been activated for use of Mercedes me connect and you have accep ted the terms and conditions for the service. Further information can be found at: http://

www.mercedes.me R The service has been activated. 3 Puts the search result into the input line and R If searching for a POI in London, for example, Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

continues entry 4 Deletes the last character entered 5 Accepts an entry 6 Switches to handwriting recognition 7 Switches to MBUX Voice Assistant

(/ page 308)

(/ page 287) 8 Sets the written language 9 Switches to digits A Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters

# Enter a destination. The entries can be made in any order. The search results are displayed in a list.

% Further information on character input

(/ page 308).

% Online search results are provided by online map services. This online function is not available in all countries. Example of quick address entry:

R If searching for "Knigstrae" in "Stuttgart", for example, enter STUT and KN. MBUX multimedia system 337 enter THE SHARD. The following entries can be made, for example in 1:

R Town, street, house number or street, town R Postcode R POI name or POI category, e.g. Filling station R Town, POI name R Phone number or contact name (if available) R Geo-coordinates (/ page 339) R 3 word address (/ page 339)

# Select a search result. The route is calculated. or

# Confirm the entry with a.

# Select the destination in the list. The route is calculated. Selecting a destination suggestion Requirements:

Example: entering a POI or address 1 Input line with current entry 2 Deletes an entry 338 MBUX multimedia system R The Allow destination suggestions option is

% You can save a destination as a favourite switched on (/ page 297).

(/ page 355). Setting a search filter

# When the search results are displayed, select R The multimedia system has gathered suffi cient data in order to show destination sug gestions. Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

# Select a destination suggestion. The route is calculated.

% Managing destination suggestions

(/ page 355). Selecting previous destinations Requirements:

R Previous destinations (destinations or routes) are saved. Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

5 a 5 Previous destinations

# Select the destination. The route is calculated. Selecting a POI Requirements:

R For use of personal POIs: a USB device is connected with the multimedia system. R Personal POIs with the GPS Exchange format

(.gpx) have been saved in the "PersonalPOI"

folder on the USB device. Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

# Select a POI symbol, for example j. or

# Enter a POI name or a POI category in the entry line. The search results are displayed, sorted by distance in ascending order. For POIs, online content, e.g. rating and prices, can be shown.

# Select the POI. The route is calculated. Filter.

# Select the search position for example In the vicinity, or the distance from the POI (remain ing travelling time).

# Select Search results. Selecting from all categories or personal POIs

# Select .

# Select a category. or

# Select All categories or Personal POIs.

# Select the category.

# If there are intermediate destinations and Near destination has been selected, select the destination for which a search is to be made.

# Select the POI. The route is calculated. Configuring categories for quick-access

# Select .

# Select f or for a category. f adds the category. removes the category. or

# Select All categories.

# Select the category.

# Select f or .

% If all available quick-access positions are full, select the category to be replaced. Selecting a contact for destination entry Requirements:

R A mobile phone is connected to the multime dia system (/ page 373). R The contacts from the mobile phone have been downloaded (/ page 383). R The contact has a navigable address. R The contact data matches the map data in the digital map. Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

5 a 5 Contacts

# Select a suggestion or a contact. or

# Enter a name or telephone number into the search field.

# Select the contact.

# Select the address. Entering geo-coordinates Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

# Enter the geocoordinates as latitude and lon gitude.

# Confirm the entry with a.

# Calculate the route (/ page 341). Entering the destination as a 3 word address Requirements:

R An active Internet connection is shown in the status line of the central display with a dou ble arrow symbol. MBUX multimedia system 339 Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

# Enter the destination as a 3 word address from what3words. Separate each of the words with a full stop (example). The search results are displayed.

# Select the destination in the list. The destination address is shown.

% Searching for a destination using 3 word addresses is not possible in all countries and in all languages. Alternatively, use the following entry options:

R Entry in the global search (/ page 305) R Voice navigation (/ page 287) Example: during a telephone call you are given a 3 word address. After activation of the MBUX Voice Assistant, say the "Navigate to what three words" voice command and then say the 3 word address without sepa rating full stops. 340 MBUX multimedia system 3 word addresses from what3words are an alter native addressing system for multilingual geore ferencing of global locations with a resolution of three metres. Using this grid, locations on the Earth's surface are included which do not have a building address such as a street and house number, for example. The Brandenburg Gate has this language dependent 3 word address:

R German: tapfer.gebude.verliehen R English: that.lands.winning R French: posteaux.bobineur.ombrant

% 3 word addresses are unique, easy to remember and suffice for most routine appli cations. You can convert addresses to 3 word addresses and back again:

R At the website https://what3words.com R In the what3words apps Selecting a destination on the map Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation

# Move the map (/ page 361).

# Press and hold the touchscreen. Available destinations are displayed.

# Select the destination in the list. The route is calculated.

% You can use further options, for example select Near POIs or the destination Share. Selecting a destination from favourites Requirements:

R Destinations are saved as favourites. Save a previous destination or a destination suggestion as a favourite (/ page 355). Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

5 a 5 Favourites

# Select a favourite. The route can be calculated. Editing favourites

# To save addresses for home and work:

select Home or Work.

# Confirm the prompt with Yes.

# Enter the address (/ page 336).

# To save a favourite: select Add favourite.

# Enter the address (/ page 336).

% If all the favourites are occupied, select the favourite to be overwritten. Follow the instructions provided.

# To delete the favourite: select the pen sym

# Delete the selected favourites or all favour bol. ites. Selecting received destinations Requirements:

R There is an Internet connection for receiving external destinations. R A destination has been sent to the vehicle. R Destinations have been shared from another seat in the vehicle. Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

5 Received destinations The vehicle can receive destinations from serv ices or apps or a destination can be shared from another seat. You will be informed when a desti nation is received.

# Select a destination. The route is calculated.

% You can save a received destination in the favourites (/ page 355).

# To delete received destinations: select the

# Delete the selected destination or all destina pen symbol. tions. Route Calculates a route After selection of a destination the route is be calculated. The map shows the route. Depending on the selected destination, various options are available to you in the displayed menu.

# To share a destination: select Share. The option allows a destination to be sent to a rear seat or the displayed QR code to be scanned.

# To call the destination: if a telephone num ber is available, select Call.

# To call up an internet address: if an inter net address is available, select Website. Adding an intermediate destination to the existing route or starting a new route guid ance If a route already exists, an additional destina tion is set as an intermediate destination or as a new destination. MBUX multimedia system 341

# Select Add. The selected destination address is set as the next intermediate destination. Route guidance begins. If there are already four intermediate destina tions, confirm the prompt with Yes.

# In the route overview, select an intermediate destination that is to be written over with the new intermediate destination. or

# Select . The selected destination address is set as a new destination. Route guidance begins. Selecting parking spaces nearby

# Select Parking nearby. Starting route guidance

# Select . Saving a destination as a favourite

# Select f Favourites.

# Select an option. 342 MBUX multimedia system Searching for POIs in the vicinity of the des tination shown

# Select Near POIs.

# Search using categories, enter a search entry or search for a personal POI (/ page 338). Selecting a route type Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route The route is calculated as a fast route with a short journey time. The trailer mode can be used if a trailer has been coupled with the vehicle. You can select online routes.

# To use online routes: switch on Online route.

# To use trailer mode: select Trailer. A prompt is shown in the multimedia system. Confirm the prompt. The route is optimised for trailer operation with a maximum speed of 80 km/h. Taking traffic information into account

# Select Dynamic route guidance r.

# Select one of the options. Explanation of the options:

R Automatic Traffic messages via Live Traffic Information or FM RDS-TMC are taken into account

(/ page 355). Live Traffic Information and FM RDS-TMC are not available in all countries. R After asking A prompt appears when a new route is detec ted with a shorter journey time based on traf fic reports. You can continue to use the cur rent route or use the dynamic route instead

(/ page 342). R Off No traffic reports are taken into account for the route. Calculating alternative routes Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route

# Select Route type.

# Activate Alternative Routen berechnen (Cal culate alternative routes). Alternative routes are calculated for every route. Accepting a detour recommendation after a prompt Requirements:

R After asking is switched on (/ page 342) in the DYNAMIC ROUTE GUIDANCE menu. R Route guidance is active. R There are traffic reports for the current route. If a new route with a shorter driving time is determined, the current and new routes will be shown. The notification is shown in another application. Confirm the notification.

# To accept the new route: select Accept rec-

# To maintain the current route: select Keep ommended detour. to current route.

# Switch Avoid all on or off.

# Switch a country off or on in the list. Selecting route options Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route Avoiding or using route sections, e.g. motor ways or ferries

# Select Avoid options.

# Activate or deactivate the avoid option. Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids motorways, for example. Use: the option is deactivated. The route takes motorways into consideration, for example.

% The selected route options cannot always be taken into account. Therefore, a route may include a ferry, for instance, even though the Ferries avoid option is enabled. A message then appears and you will hear a corre sponding message. Avoiding or using toll roads The use of toll roads requires a usage fee (toll).

# Select Toll roads. If the option is activated, the route avoids toll roads. If the option is deactivated, the route takes toll roads into account. or

# Select an option for Payment by cash or card or Electronic billing. Avoid: the route avoids toll roads with the selected method of payment. Use: the route takes into account roads that require a toll corresponding with the pay ment type selected. Avoiding or using roads requiring a special toll sticker A vignette allows for the use of a route network for a limited time period.

# Select Avoid options.

# Select Vignette roads.

# Switch Avoid all on or off. or MBUX multimedia system 343 Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids roads requiring a special toll sticker in the selected countries. Use: the option is deactivated. The route takes into account roads in the selected country which require you to pay a time-

based fee (vignette).

% These route options are not available in every country. Avoiding areas

# Select Avoid options.

# Select Avoid areas (/ page 363). Selecting notifications for the route Requirements:

R For an audible indication when approach ing a personal POI: the USB device contains personal POIs. R The USB device is connected with the multi media system. R The category in which the personal POI belongs is activated. 344 MBUX multimedia system Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Messages Switching announcements of driving recom mendations on/off

# Select Driving recommendation.

# Select an option. The following options are available:

R Acoustic signal only In place of the spoken driving instruction you hear a gong. The gong signals an upcoming driving manoeuvre and also sounds during the driving manoeuvre. R Reduced R Detailed If a driving instruction is available, you hear a brief announcement, e.g. "turn right". If a driving instruction is available and there is a complex driving situation, you hear a complete announcement, e.g. "In 200 m turn right and continue to follow the major road".

# Activate Announce street names. The name of the street into which the vehicle should turn is announced. This option is not available in all countries and languages. Switching traffic announcements on/off

# Select Alerts.

# Under Traffic switch the options on or off. The following options are available:

R Traffic incidents Traffic incidents are announced, e.g. road works and road blocks. This option is not available in all countries and languages. R Announce traffic warnings Traffic warnings are announced, e.g. before the end of traffic jams that pose a risk (if available). This option is not available in all countries and languages. Audible indication when approaching a per sonal POI

# Select Alerts.

# Select Personal POIs.

# Activate a category. When approaching a personal POI in the selected category an audible indication will be issued. Displaying a route overview Requirements:

R A destination is entered. Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Example: route overview 1 Destination information 2 Plans routes(/ page 345) 3 Selects an alternative route(/ page 346) When route guidance is active, the destination and entered intermediate destinations are shown. The following destination information 1 is dis played:

R Name, destination address R Remaining driving distance R Symbol for intermediate destination, destina tion R Time of arrival R Phone number (if available) R Web address (if available) The route can include up to four intermediate destinations. If no route has been selected, the three most probable navigation destinations for destination input are suggested.

# Select a destination suggestion. The route is calculated. MBUX multimedia system 345 Planning routes Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5

# Select f Add destination .

# Enter a destination (/ page 336). After entering the destination and new calcu lation of the route, the route overview is shown again. The route contains a new inter mediate destination.

% If there are already four intermediate desti nations, delete an intermediate destination

(/ page 345). Editing a route with intermediate destina tions Requirements:

R The destination and at least one intermediate destination have been entered. Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5

# Press and hold on the chequered flag. A menu is shown. 346 MBUX multimedia system

# To change the order of the destinations:

select Move. is highlighted. Displaying the route list Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation

# Move the destination with = or .

# Tap on .

# To delete a destination: select Delete. The route sections are displayed in the naviga tion window. The route list is updated during the journey.

# To display route sections: open up the route list with s and close it with 4.

# Swipe up or down in the navigation window. Calculating alternative routes Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route

# Select Route type.

# Activate Alternative Routen berechnen (Cal culate alternative routes). Alternative routes are calculated for every route. Selects an alternative route Requirements:

R A route has already been created. R The Alternative Routen berechnen (Calculate alternative routes) option is switched on . Example: route list 1 Route section with turning arrow, distance to change of direction and road number 2 Current vehicle position Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 5 Alternate routes Example: alternative routes 1 Original route 2 Alternative routes The following route information is displayed:

R Time of arrival R Driving time R Distance to the destination R Driving time saved or lost compared with the original route R Avoid options based on the set route options

# When the alternative routes have been calcu lated, display the route in the navigation win dow by swiping to the right or left.

# To avoid or use route options: select Filter.

# Switch the route options on or off

(/ page 343).

# Confirm the settings.

# To start route guidance to the alternative route: select Start. Activating a commuter route Requirements:

R You have created a profile (/ page 296). R The Allow destination suggestions option is switched on (/ page 297). MBUX multimedia system 347 R The Activate commuter route option is switched on. R The multimedia system has gathered suffi cient data in order to show destination sug gestions. R Routes have been learned for these destina tion suggestions.

% This commuter route is not available in all countries. Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route

# Select Route type.

# Activate Activate commuter route. The navigation system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. It automatically starts a route guidance without spoken driving instructions. For the daily commuter route, traffic inci dents on the route are also reported when driving without active route guidance. 348 MBUX multimedia system Switching the automatic filling station search on/off Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle

# Select Energy functions.

# Switch Automatic filling station search on or off. When the fuel reserve level is reached, and the option is switched on, a message appears to start searching for filling stations. Starting an automatic filling station search Requirements:

R The automatic filling station search is activa ted (/ page 348) . Driving situation The fuel level in the fuel tank reaches the reserve fuel level. The following notification is shown in the central display Reserve fuelTap here to search for filling stations.

# Confirm the notification. The automatic filling station search begins. The available filling stations along the route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current posi tion are displayed.

# Select a filling station.

# Calculate the route with filling station as an intermediate destination or as a destination (/ page 341).

# If there are already four intermediate des tinations: select Yes in the prompt. The filling station is entered in the route overview. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route guidance begins. Starting the automatic service station search Requirements:

R ATTENTION ASSIST and the Suggest rest area function are activated (/ page 255). R There are service stations along the route section ahead. Driving situation The following notification is shown in the central display ATTENTION ASSISTTap here to search for rest areas.

# Confirm the notification. The service station search starts. The availa ble service stations along the route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position are displayed.

# Select a service station.

# Calculate the route with service station as an intermediate destination or as a destination (/ page 341). The service station is set as the destination or the next intermediate destination.

# If there are already four intermediate des tinations: select Ja (Yes) in the prompt. The service station is entered in the route overview. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route guidance begins. Showing a stored route on the map Requirements:

R A USB device with stored routes is connec ted with the multimedia system

(/ page 425). R The route is stored in the "Routes" folder with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx). Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

5 a 5 Stored routes

# Select a route.

# Move the map (/ page 361). Starting a saved route Requirements:

R A USB device with stored routes is connec ted with the multimedia system

(/ page 425). R The route is stored in the "Routes" folder with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx). Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

5 a 5 Stored routes

# Select a route.

# Select Start route guidance from beginning or Start route guid. from curr. location. Route guidance starts. Recording a route Requirements:

R A USB device is connected with the multime dia system (/ page 425). Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

5 a 5 Stored routes

# To start recording: select Start recording. A red recording symbol is shown. The route is stored on the USB device.

# To stop recording: select End recording. Saving a recorded route Requirements:

R A USB device is connected with the multime dia system (/ page 425). Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

5 a 5 Stored routes

# Select a route.

# Select f Favourites.

# Select a storage option. The route is stored in the favourites. MBUX multimedia system 349 Editing a stored route Requirements:

R A USB device with stored routes is connec ted with the multimedia system

(/ page 425). Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

5 a 5 Stored routes

# To rename a route: press on a route until a menu is shown.

# Select Change name.

# Enter the name.

# Select OK. or

# When the name has been changed, press the G button.

# Select Yes.

# To delete a route: select Delete.

# Select Yes. 350 MBUX multimedia system Route guidance Notes on route guidance

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating integrated communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Route guidance begins once a route has been calculated. The road and traffic rules and regula tions always have priority over multimedia sys tem driving instructions. Driving instructions are navigation announcements, route guidance dis plays and lane recommendations. If you do not follow the driving instructions or if you leave the calculated route, a new route is calculated automatically. If, for example, the route is diverted or the direc tion of a one-way road has been reversed, driv ing instructions may deviate from the actual traf fic situation. For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey as well as the prevailing traffic condi tions. The route can differ from the ideal route, for example in the event of roadworks or incomplete digital map data. Notes on satellite reception The correct function of the navigation system depends amongst other things on reception of the satellite system used. In certain situations satellite reception can be impaired, malfunction or even not possible, e.g. in tunnels or in multi-

storey car parks. Changing direction overview Changes of direction are shown in the following displays:

R Detailed image of the junction The display appears when you drive into a junction. R 3D image The display appears when driving on junc tion-free, multi-lane roads, for example on motorway exits and motorway interchanges. MBUX multimedia system 351 If there is enough time between the changes of direction, the multimedia system prepares you for the upcoming change of direction. A navigation announcement is issued, e.g.

"Prepare to turn right". The map appears in full-screen mode. The status line shows: the direction informa tion or the name of the road which is to be turned into and the distance to the change of direction. R Announcement phase The multimedia system announces the upcoming change of direction, e.g. by announcing "Turn right in 100 m". The display is split into two parts. The map is displayed on the left; on the right, there is a detailed image of the junction or a 3D image of the upcoming change of direction. R Change-of-direction phase The multimedia system announces the immi nent change of direction, e.g. by announcing

"Now turn right". The display is split into two parts. Example: detailed image of the crossing with upcoming changes of direction Example: 3D image of the upcoming change of direction 1 Current distance to the change of direction 2 Manoeuvre point 3 Current vehicle position 1 Manoeuvre point 2 Driving manoeuvre 3 Current distance to the change of direction 4 Current vehicle position There are three phases when changing direction:

R Preparation phase 352 MBUX multimedia system 3-D image of the upcoming change of direc tion: The change of direction takes place when the distance to manoeuvre point 1 is shown with 0 m and the symbol for vehicle position 4 has reached manoeuvre point 1.

% Changes of direction are also shown in the driver's display. Lane recommendations overview Lane recommendations can be shown in the nav igation window if the digital map contains the relevant data. Explanation of the displayed lanes:

R Recommended lane In this lane, you will be able to complete both the next change of direction and the one after that. R Possible lane In this lane, you will only be able to complete the next change of direction. R Non-recommended lane In this lane, you will not be able to complete the next change of direction without chang ing lane. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Bus lanes are also shown.

% Lane recommendations can also be dis played in the driver's display and in the Head-up Display. Example: lane recommendations 1 Lane not recommended (grey arrow) 2 Possible lane (white arrow) 3 Recommended lane (white arrow, blue back ground) This display appears for multi-lane roads. Using motorway information When driving on the motorway, upcoming motor way facilities and available service facilities are shown in the navigation window. These include car parks, service stations and motorway exits, for example. The entries are sorted according to increasing distance from the current vehicle position.

# Select an entry.

# If several service facilities are available, select a service facility from the list. The destination address and the map posi tion are shown.

# Calculate the route (/ page 341). or

# Search for a POI in the vicinity. or

# Use other functions, e.g. save the destination address of the service facility. Destination reached Once the destination is reached, you will see the chequered flag. Route guidance will now be complete The navigation menu is shown. When an intermediate destination has been reached, you will see the intermediate destina tion flag with the number of your inter mediate destination. Route guidance is contin ued. Switching navigation announcements on/off

# To switch off: press button 1 on the steer ing wheel or on the MBUX multimedia system during a navigation announcement

(/ page 306). The Spoken driving recommendations have been deactivated. message appears. or

# Show the navigation menu (/ page 335).

# Select !. The symbol changes to #.

# To activate: select #. The current navigation announcement is played. The symbol changes to !.

% This function can be added and called up from the favourites within the navigation cat egory. MBUX multimedia system 353 Switching navigation announcements on or off during a phone call

# Press the button on the steering wheel. or

# Tap on in the central display.

# Select Settings.

# Select System.

# Select Audio.

# Select Navigation and traffic announce-

ments.

# Switch Driving recomm. during call on or off. When the option is switched on, the display button is activated.

# To leave the menu: select q. Adjusting the volume of navigation announcements Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio 5 Navigation and traffic announcements

# Select Driving recommendation vol..

# Set the volume. 354 MBUX multimedia system

# To leave the menu: select q. Route guidance is active

# Set the volume during a navigation announcement on the steering wheel or under the touchscreen (/ page 307). Switching audio fadeout on or off during nav igation announcements

# Press the button on the steering wheel. or

# Tap on in the central display.

# Select Settings.

# Select System.

# Select Audio.

# Switch Audio fadeout on or off.

# To leave the menu: select q. Repeating navigation announcements Requirements:

R A route has already been created. R Route guidance is active. Multimedia system:

4 Navigation

# Select !.

# Select #. The current navigation announcement is repeated.

% This function can be added and called up from the favourites within the navigation cat egory. Cancelling route guidance Requirements:

R A route has already been created. R Route guidance is active.

# Show the navigation menu (/ page 335).

# Select in the navigation menu

(/ page 335). Overview of off-road status during route guidance Due to roadworks, for example, there may be dif ferences between the data on the digital map and the actual course of the road. In such cases, the multimedia system will temporarily be unable to locate the vehicle's current position on the digital map. The vehicle is off-road. Route guidance may be restricted. When the vehicle is back on a road known to the multimedia system, route guidance continues as normal. Destination Saving or sharing the current vehicle posi tion Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation

# When the map is shown, tap on the current vehicle position.

# Select Store position. The current vehicle position is saved to the

"Last destinations" memory. or

# Select Share current position.

# Send the current vehicle position using avail able apps.

# To save as a favourite: select Save as A menu appears. Editing the previous destinations Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Previous destinations Saving the last destination as a favourite

# Press and hold on one of the previous desti nations. A menu appears. favourite . as "Home" .

"Work" .

# To save as "Home" address: select Save

# To save as "Work" address: select Save as Deleting a previous destination

# Select Z.

# Select the pen symbol.

# Select Delete or Delete all.

# Select Yes. Managing destination suggestions Requirements:

R The Allow destination suggestions option is switched on (/ page 297). R For the display of destination suggestions:

the multimedia system has gathered suffi cient data. Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?

# Press and hold on a destination suggestion.

# To stop displaying a destination sugges tion: select one of the display options.

# To save a destination suggestion as a favourite: select one of the options for sav ing.

% Deleting a destination suggestion from the favourites (/ page 340). Route guidance with current traffic reports Traffic information overview Current traffic reports are received with the Live Traffic Information subscription service. If the MBUX multimedia system 355 subscription has expired, then FM RDS-TMC is available in selected countries.

% Live Traffic Information is not available in all countries. The service must be registered in the Mercedes me Portal (/ page 356). This secures the free-

of-charge period of three years. Information from the service provider can be shown (/ page 356). The service updates the traffic situation via the Internet connection at short, regular intervals. Information on the vehicle's position is regularly sent to Daimler AG. The data is immediately ren dered anonymous by Daimler AG and forwarded to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traf fic reports relevant to the vehicle's position are sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor for the flow of traffic and helps to improve the quality of the traffic reports. If you do not want to transmit the vehicle posi tion, you have the following options:

R You deactivate the service in the Mercedes me Portal. 356 MBUX multimedia system R You have the service deactivated at a R You have a user account on the Mercedes Mercedes-Benz service centre. me website.

% Hazard warnings can be received using the

# Create a user account at Mercedes me at:

Car-to-X service (/ page 358). Showing information from the service pro vider for Live Traffic Information Requirements:

R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information. Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Live Traffic Information

# Select Provider information. The logo of the service provider is shown. When the subscription for Live Traffic Infor mation has expired then in selected coun tries FM RDS-TMC is available. Registering Live Traffic Information Requirements:

R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information. http://www.mercedes.me. A valid email address is required for this.

# Register the vehicle using the vehicle identifi cation number (VIN).

# Connect the vehicle with your Mercedes me user account in the Mercedes me Portal. A code is sent to the multimedia system.

# Enter the code into the multimedia system.

# Accept the general and specific terms of use.

% Alternatively, you can have the connection completed at a Mercedes-Benz service cen ter. Extending a Live Traffic Information sub scription Requirements:

R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic R You have a user account on the Mercedes Information. me website.

# Call up the Mercedes me website.

# Call up the Mercedes me user account.

# Switch to the Mercedes me connect online store via the linked vehicle.

# Select Live Traffic Information.

# Select the renewal period.

# Add the product to the shopping basket.

# Accept the general and specific terms of use. Live Traffic Information remains activated for the selected extension period. Activation begins on the date of extension. Displaying traffic information on the map Requirements:

R The Traffic display is switched on

(/ page 358). R Traffic incidents, Free-flowing traffic and Delay are switched on (/ page 358). Multimedia system:

4

# Select Navigation. The map shows the following traffic information:

R Traffic incidents These are roadworks, road blocks and hazard warnings, for example. When route guidance is active, the symbols for traffic incidents will be shown in colour on the route. Off the route they are grey. R Warning message symbols d symbols and traffic safety information, e.g. people on the carriageway If the vehicle approaches a danger area, a warning message is displayed on the map. In addition, an announcement can alert you to a hazard warning.

R Traffic flow information:

traffic jam (red line) slow-moving traffic (orange line) heavy traffic (yellow line) free-flowing traffic (green line)

R Display for traffic delays on the route lasting at least one minute Displaying traffic incidents Requirements:

R The Traffic incidents display is switched on

(/ page 358). Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 5 Map symbols If there are traffic incidents on the route, these are shown on the route overview. If available, the following information is dis played:

R Road number/road name, road section and direction R Traffic incident symbol ( roadworks) Coloured on the route R Distance from the current vehicle position R Cause R Delay R Detailed information (if available) MBUX multimedia system 357

# Tap on a symbol. Swipe to the right or left to see the complete route. The detail information is displayed. Showing traffic incidents in the vicinity of the map

# Tap on a traffic incident symbol. The detail information is displayed. 358 MBUX multimedia system Switching the traffic information display on Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z

# Activate Map symbols. The display button is activated.

# Select Advanced.

# Select View.

# Select Map symbols.

# Switch on Area with traffic restrictions, Traf-

fic incidents, Free-flowing traffic and Delay. Current traffic restrictions and traffic inci dents, for example roadworks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages, are shown. The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration. Car-to-X-Communication Car-to-X-Communication overview The following requirements apply for the Car-to-

X-Communication service:

R The vehicle is equipped with a multimedia system featuring navigation and a communi cation module with an activated, integrated SIM card. R There is a subscription for the Live Traffic Information service. R The Car-to-X-Communication service is acti vated in the Mercedes me portal.

% Car-to-X-Communication is available in selected countries. The communication module automatically estab lishes an Internet connection once the ignition is switched on. If there are any hazard warnings, they will be provided shortly thereafter. Depend ing on the mobile phone connection, the provi sion takes place from within a second up to about a minute. Benefits of Car-to-X-Communication:

R Dangers are automatically detected by the vehicle or can be reported by the driver. These are then sent to vehicles with Car-to-X-

Communication in the immediate vicinity. R If available, current details relating to hazard spots near the vehicle's current position are received. This gives you sufficient time to adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. The use of Car-to-X-Communication requires the regular transmission of vehicle data to Mercedes-Benz AG. The data is then immediately pseudonymised by Mercedes-Benz AG. The vehi cle data is deleted after an appropriate amount of time has elapsed (several weeks) and is not stored permanently.

% Data which serves as identification is replaced during the pseudonymisation proc ess. In this way, your identity is protected against access by unauthorised third parties. Displaying hazard warnings Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic incidents option.

# Set the option via Z(/ page 358). If the option is activated, all of the symbols are shown. If the option is deactivated, the symbols are only shown when there is a hazard warning. The following hazards are shown on the map, for example:

R Accidents and breakdowns R Fog and ice R People on a motorway carriageway R Vehicle driving on a road in the wrong direc tion R Hazards reported manually R Hazard warning lights R Mobile roadworks If the vehicle is approaching a hazard spot at a minimum speed, a voice message is issued.

% For weather hazards there is no voice out put. Sending hazard warnings Automatically detected hazard warnings are sent by the vehicle.

# To report a hazard manually: when the map is shown, tap on the current vehicle position . The Position menu is shown.

# Select Report traffic incident. A prompt is shown.

# Select Yes. The Thank you for supporting accident pre-

vention! message appears.

# To report hazards with the MBUX Voice Assistant: say the "Hey Mercedes, hazard on the road" voice command.

# Confirm the hazard warning. The Thank you for supporting accident pre-

vention! message appears. MBUX multimedia system 359 The following hazards can be reported:

R Broken-down vehicles R Accidents R Hazards R People R Animals R Objects R Potholes R Aquaplaning R Slippery roads Route guidance with augmented reality Overview of route guidance with augmented reality

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depic tion or wrong interpretation of the dis play The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving. 360 MBUX multimedia system

# Always keep an eye on the actual traffic

# Avoid extended observation of the cam situation. era image. During route guidance with augmented reality a camera image with the real traffic scene is shown in the central display before a turning manoeuvre. 1 Street name 2 House number 3 Change of direction arrow Route guidance with augmented reality may not be available in some situations, e.g. in the event of poor satellite reception or roads which have not been digitised. Route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all countries. The camera image can contain the following additional information:

R Change of direction arrow R Street names R House numbers Activating route guidance with augmented reality

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to inaccurate positioning of the addi tional information The additional information from the augmen ted reality display cannot replace observa tion of the actual driving situation.

# Keep the actual driving situation contin uously in view during all driving manoeuvres. Requirements:

R Route guidance is active. Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation

# Tap on . The indicator lamp lights up blue. The camera's video image is shown in the central display before a turning manoeuvre. The video image includes additional informa tion.

# To return to the navigation map: tap on again. The indicator lamp is not lit. Showing property information for route guid ance with augmented reality Requirements:

R Augmented reality is activated

(/ page 360). Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z

# Select View.

# Select Augmented Reality.

# Activate Street names and House numbers. During route guidance, the activated options are shown as additional information in the camera image. Map and compass Setting the map scale Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation Zooming in

# When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with one finger on the central display. or

# Move two fingers apart on the central dis play. Zooming out

# Tap with two fingers on the central display. or

# Move two fingers together on the central dis play.

% You can set the unit of measurement of the map scale (/ page 328). Moving the map Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation

# When the map is shown, touch the media display and move a finger in any direction. The map moves in the opposite direction. The following functions are available:

R Select a destination on the map

(/ page 340). R Select a POI (/ page 338). R Show traffic incidents on the map

(/ page 357).

# To reset the map to the current vehicle position: select \ Centre. MBUX multimedia system 361 Selecting the map orientation Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z

# Select View.

# Select Map orientation.

# Select an option. The # dot indicates the current setting. The following options are available:

R 2D heading up option: the 2D map view is aligned to the direction of travel. R 2D north up option: the 2D map view is displayed so that north is always at the top. R 3D option: the 3D map view is aligned to the direction of travel. or

# To use quick-access: repeatedly tap or press on the compass symbol on the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D heading up to 2D north up. 362 MBUX multimedia system If the map is moved, it can switch between 3D and 2D north up. Selecting POI symbols for the map display Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z POIs include restaurants and hotels, for exam ple. These can be displayed as symbols on the map. Not all POIs are available in all countries. Personal POIs are destinations which you have saved on a USB device, for example.

% The display of POI symbols on the map can be activated or deactivated as a favourite.

# Select View.

# Select Map symbols.

# Select POI symbols r.

# Switch Display POIs on or off. The POI symbols for the selected categories are shown on the map. Switching display of categories for quick-

access on/off

# Switch a category on or off in the menu. Selecting categories

# Select r in the All categories menu.

# Switch Show all on or off. When the option is switched on, the POI sym bols for all categories are shown on the map. or

# Select r the categories.

# Activate or deactivate the categories. The POI symbols for the selected categories are shown on the map. Selecting personal POI categories

# Select r in the Personal POIs menu.

# Select r a category.

# Switch Display on the map on or off. When the display is switched on and the vehicle approaches a personal POI in this category, a visual and audible notification can be issued.

# Indication when approaching: switch Acoustic notification and Visual warning on or off. Resetting the POI symbol display

# Select Reset POIs in the menu. The settings are reset to the standard set tings. Selecting the display of text information in the map Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z

# Select View.

# Select Text information.

# Switch an option on or off. The current road is displayed in the naviga tion window. The scale and the elevation appear on the map. Displaying the next intersecting street Requirements:

R Route guidance is not active. Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z

# Select View.

# Select Text information.

# Activate Next junction. If the option is switched on and the journey continues without route guidance, the name of the next intersecting street will be dis played in the navigation window. Displaying the map version Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z

# Select View.

# Select Map data version. The detail information is displayed.

% The online map update service from Mercedes me connect can be used to update the map data (/ page 364). A message is shown in the central display when a new map version is available.

% Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Overview of avoiding an area for the route You can define areas along a route that you would like to avoid. Motorways or multi-lane expressways, which are routed through an area to be avoided are taken into account for the route. Avoiding a new area for the route Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route 5 Avoid options 5 Avoid areas

# Select Avoid new area.

# To start in the map: select Using map. A red rectangle appears. This designates the area that should be avoided.

# Move the map (/ page 361).

# Set the map scale (/ page 361).

# Select a. The area is entered into the list.

# To start via destination search: select Via address entry.

# Enter the address (/ page 336).

# Select the destination in the list or accept with a. The map appears. The area is saved. MBUX multimedia system 363 Changing an area to be avoided Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route 5 Avoid options 5 Avoid areas

# Select an area in the list.

# Select Edit.

# To move an area on the map: swipe in any direction on the central display.

# To change the size of the area: tap on the central display.

# Select a. The area is entered into the list.

# To take account of an area for the route:

select an area from the list.

# Activate Avoid area. If route guidance is active, a new route is cal culated. If there is no route yet, the setting is carried over to the next route guidance. 364 MBUX multimedia system The route can include an area that is to be avoided in the following cases:

R the destination is located in an area that is to be avoided. R the route includes motorways or multi-

lane expressways which pass through an area to be avoided. R there is no sensible alternative route. Deleting an area Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z 5 Route 5 Avoid options 5 Avoid areas

# To delete an area: select an area in the list.

# Select Delete.

# Confirm the prompt with Yes.

# To delete all areas: if at least two areas to avoid are set, select Delete all.

# Confirm the prompt with Yes. Map data update overview The digital maps generated by the map software become outdated in the same way as conven tional road maps. Optimal route guidance can only be provided by the navigation system in conjunction with up-to-date map data. The following options are available for the update:

R Online map update R Update at a Mercedes-Benz service centre Additional costs can be incurred in this proc ess. Online map update Requirements:

R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have a user account for the Mercedes me Portal. R The service is available. R The service has been activated.

% The online map update service is not availa ble in all countries. The following options are available:

R Automatic map update for Europe The update is carried out based on the vehi cle position. If a route goes through several countries, for example, all available map updates for the route are downloaded. A restart of the navigation system is required to use the downloaded map data. You will receive a message for this, which you can confirm. R Manual map update for several or all regions The map data will first be downloaded onto a storage medium and then updated on the multimedia system. You can find more information here:

R At any Mercedes-Benz service centre R Under: https://www.mercedes.me Further information on updates can be found at:

https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/

baix/cars/connectme/en_GB/#emotions/

Startseite.html. Overview of map data Your vehicle is supplied with map data at the fac tory. Depending on the country, map data for your region is either pre-installed or the map data is supplied on a data storage medium. If the map data on your vehicle has been instal led at the factory and you wish to reinstall it, you do not need to enter the activation code. For map data that you have purchased in the form of a data storage medium, you must enter the accompanying activation code.

% If you save the map data on a data storage medium with the online map update service, no entry is required. The activation code is stored on the data storage medium during the downloading process. Observe the following when entering the activa tion code:

R The activation code can be used for one vehi cle R The activation code is not transferable R The activation code has six digits In the event of the following problems, please contact a Mercedes-Benz service centre:

R The multimedia system does not accept the activation code R You have lost the activation code Displaying the compass Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation

# When the map is shown, press on the current vehicle position until the Position menu is shown.

# Select Compass. The compass display shows the following information:

R the current direction of travel with bear ing (360 format) and compass direction R longitude and latitude coordinates in degrees, minutes and seconds R number of satellites from which a signal can be received The information is not available in every country. MBUX multimedia system 365 Displaying Qibla Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation

# When the map is shown, press on the current vehicle position until the Position menu is shown.

# Select Qibla. The arrow on the compass shows the direc tion to Mecca in relation to the current direc tion of travel. The number of satellites received is shown.

% This function is not available in all countries. Setting the map scale automatically Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z

# Select View.

# Select Map orientation.

# Activate Auto zoom. The display button is activated. The map scale is set automatically depending on your driving speed and the type of road. 366 MBUX multimedia system

% The automatically selected map scale can be changed manually. After a few seconds, this is automatically reset. Displaying the satellite map Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z

# Select View.

# Select Map symbols.

# Switch Satellite map on or off. If the display button is activated, satellite maps are displayed in map scales from 2 km. If the display button is deactivated, satellite maps are not displayed in map scales from 2 km to 20 km.

% The satellite maps for these map scales are not available in all countries. Displaying the range Requirements:

R The multimedia system supports the func tion. Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z

# Select View.

# Select Map symbols.

# Activate Range. The range is shown on the map with the follow ing displays:

R For petrol and diesel vehicles: green display When the lower reserve capacity is reached then the range display on the map is switched off.

% The range display on the map is not available in all countries. Displaying weather information and other online map contents Requirements:

R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have a user account for the Mercedes me Portal. R The service is available. R The service has been activated. Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z

# Select View.

# Select Map symbols.

# Switch on an online service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover. The service information is not shown in all map scales, e.g. weather sym bols. Further information about available services and about displaying information in the map scales can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me

% Weather information is not available in all countries. Parking service Selecting parking options

* NOTE Before selecting the parking option The data is based on information provided by the respective service provider. Mercedes Benz accepts no liability for the accuracy of the information provided relating to the multi-storey car park/parking area.

# Always observe the local Information and conditions. Requirements:

R The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. R The parking service is within the scope of the navigation service. R Parking is activated (/ page 367). Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation

# Tap on j in the map.

# Select a parking option. The map shows the parking options in the vicinity. The following information is displayed (if available):

R Destination address, distance from cur rent vehicle position and arrival time R Information on the multi-storey car park/car park For example, opening times, parking charges, current occupancy, maximum parking time, maximum access height. The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not replace the need for observation of the actual cir cumstances. R Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards) R Details on parking tariffs MBUX multimedia system 367 R Number of available parking spaces R Payment method (e.g. at the parking machine) R Services/facilities at the parking option R Telephone number

# Calculate the route (/ page 341). The following functions can also be selected (if available):

R Search for POIs in the vicinity. R Save the destination. R Place a call at the destination. R Share the destination using NFC or QR code. R Call up the web address. R Show the destination on the map. Displaying parking options on the map Requirements:

R The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. R The parking service is within the scope of the navigation service. 368 MBUX multimedia system Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation 5 Z

# Activate Parking. The parking options within the vicinity of the current vehicle position are shown. Paying parking charges Requirements:

R The navigation services option is available and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. The parking service is within the scope of the navigation service. R You have registered with your payment details for the payment of parking in the Mercedes me Portal with Mercedes Pay and the respective contract partner. R Parking is activated (/ page 367). Multimedia system:

4 5 Navigation This option is not available in all countries.

# Select a parking option on the map.

# If a car park that can be paid for has been selected, scroll down in the parking details.

# Select Pay. or

# Once the vehicle has reached a parking posi tion with payment function and the ignition is switched off, a message appears. Using this message you can pay from the vehicle and start the payment process.

# To start the payment process: confirm the message.

# Please note the maximum parking period dis played and any existing additional limitations. If required, a message will inform you about the necessity of displaying information con firming the online payment for the parking space.

# Select Start the payment process.

# If required, enter the personalised PIN.

# Press a to confirm. The successful start of your parking transac tion is shown.

# Complete the booking with OK.

# To cancel the booking: select Cancel when you receive the confirmation message. Minimum charges may be incurred.

# To end the booking: stop the active transac tion via the Mercedes Me app. You receive a summary of the procedure and the costs. If an active parking procedure for your vehi cle is detected when you continue driving, a message appears asking if you wish to end this parking procedure.

# Acknowledge the message. When the parking procedure is stopped suc cessfully, another message appears with the details about your completed parking proce dure. Dashcam Notes on the dashcam

* NOTE Before using the dashcam Before using any or all functions of the Dash cam, please read this Disclaimer carefully. If you do not accept, agree to or understand this Disclaimer, please do not use the Dash cam. By using the Dashcam, you are deemed to have accepted and agreed to the contents of this Disclaimer. As manufacturer of the vehicle, we provide you with the device and associated software system of the Dashcam to provide you with the functionalities that we consider you may wish to have while using the Dashcam. We are unable to predict or verify whether any image(s) or geographic information captured or recorded during your use of the Dashcam is legitimate. As such, we are unable to take responsibility for any adverse consequences that may arise from the actual image(s) or geographic information captured or recorded during use of the Dashcam. Warning: please comply with all applicable laws and regulations when you use the Dash cam. For example, please do not capture or record image(s) or geographic information which may be considered as state secret sensitive information (e.g. military areas). In case of any violations of the relevant laws and regulations, the actual user will be liable for the corresponding responsibilities and we will not take responsibility for any misuse of the Dashcam.

# Observe the country-specific regula tions. Selecting a USB device for a video recording with the dashcam Requirements:

R At least one USB device is connected with the multimedia system (/ page 425). Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam

# Select the USB symbol. MBUX multimedia system 369

# Select the USB device. Starting/stopping video recording with the dashcam Requirements:

R A USB device is connected with the multime dia system (/ page 425). R The ignition is switched on. Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam

# If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select the USB device (/ page 369). If no USB device is selected, a selection is made automatically when recording starts.

# To select a recording mode: select Loop recording or Individual recording. Loop recording records several short video files. When the memory is full, the oldest video file is deleted and the recording contin ues automatically. 370 MBUX multimedia system Individual recording stops recording when the memory limit is reached. An individual recording is automatically protected against being overwritten.

# To start: select Start recording. The length of the recording is shown. The Please do not remove the storage medium. message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device.

# To end: select End recording. A report may appear in the following cases:

R Individual recording: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped imminently. Change the USB device or delete a video file. R The camera is not functional, the Camera unavailable message appears. Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-

Benz service centre. R If the country border indication has been switched on (/ page 370). Deleting a dashcam video recording Requirements:

R A USB device with video recordings is con nected with the multimedia system

(/ page 425). Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam

# Select p. The Recordings menu appears. Deleting individual video files Select

# Select Delete.

# Select Yes.

Select

# Select Write protection. Switching write protection on or off Deleting all video files

# In the status line select Recordings.

# Select Delete all entries. Configuring dashcam settings Requirements:

R A USB device is connected with the multime dia system (/ page 425). Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Dashcam

# Select Z.

# To show messages after passing a national border: switch on National border alert . A message is shown if video is being recor ded and the vehicle passes a border.

% This function is not available in all countries.

# To start automatic video recording: select Automatic video recording. MBUX multimedia system 371

# Activate Automatic video recording. When the vehicle is started, video recording starts automatically.

% This function is not available in all countries. Telephone Telephony Notes on telephony

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating integrated communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

& WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

# As the driver, only operate mobile com munications devices when the vehicle is stationary.

# As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects so that they can not be thrown around in such situa tions.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment. 372 MBUX multimedia system Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly:

R Loading the vehicle (/ page 119) Further information can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https://

www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

Telephone menu overview 4 Messages 5 Numerical pad 6 Jumps to the telephone contents: e.g. call lists, contact lists, favourites 7 Contact search Bluetooth profile overview Bluetooth profile of the mobile phone Function PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Contacts are auto matically displayed in the multimedia sys tem MAP (Message Access Profile) Message functions can be used 1 Bluetooth device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone 2 Bluetooth device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode) 3 Options Bluetooth profile of the mobile phone Function HFP (Hands Free Profile) SAP (SIM Access Profile) Wireless telephony is available The auto-telephone has access to the SIM card data and dials into the mobile phone network via the exte rior aerial Telephony operating modes overview Depending on your equipment, the following tel ephony operating modes are available:

R A mobile phone is connected to the multime dia system via Bluetooth (/ page 373). R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth (two phone mode) (/ page 374).

You can use all the functions of the multi media system with both mobile phones. R Car telephony is set up (/ page 377).

% Irrespective of this, Bluetooth audio func tionality can by used with any mobile phone

(/ page 426). Information on telephony The following situations can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion:

R there is insufficient network coverage in the area R you move from one transmission/reception station to another and no communication channels are free R the SIM card used is not compatible with the network available R a mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice for improved speech quality. A require ment for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice . MBUX multimedia system 373 Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate. Connecting a mobile phone Requirements:

R Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone

(see the manufacturer's operating instruc tions). R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia system (/ page 324). Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone Searching for a mobile phone

# Select Connect device. Authorising a mobile phone

# Select a mobile phone.

# A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

# If the codes match: confirm the code on the mobile phone. 374 MBUX multimedia system

% For older mobile phone models, enter a one to sixteen-digit number code on the mobile phone and on the multimedia system for authorisation.

% Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorised on the multimedia system. Authorised mobile phones are reconnected automatically.

% The connected mobile phone can also be used as Bluetooth audio equipment

(/ page 426). Connecting a second mobile phone (two phone mode) Requirements:

R At least one mobile phone is already connec ted to the multimedia system via Bluetooth. Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Device manager 5 My devices

# Select Connect new device.

# Select the mobile phone.

# In some cases, if the query appears, confirm the selection of the mobile phone pair with the Device name 1 + Device name 2 option. The selected mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system. Interchanging mobile phones (two phone mode) Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone Both mobile phones are shown individually in separate tabs.

# Select the tab with the desired mobile phone. Selecting the tab of a specific mobile phone displays the associated telephone contents. Selecting the other tab switches the view to the other telephone. The submenus in the telephone menu (e.g. contacts, call lists, messages) relate to the currently selected mobile phone with the exception of the telephone settings. In the telephone settings, settings can be made for both mobile phones. Changing the function of a mobile phone Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Device manager 5 My devices Activating a function

# Select a grey symbol in the line of a mobile phone. The corresponding function is activated. Deactivating a function

# One function is active: select the coloured symbol in the line of a mobile phone. The mobile phone is disconnected from the multimedia system.

# Several functions are active: de-select an active function in the line of one of the mobile phones. The corresponding function is deactivated. Replacing mobile phones Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Device manager

# No authorised mobile phone available:

select Connect new device.

# Select a mobile phone.

# Newly authorised mobile phone: confirm the number code on the mobile phone. Using in single telephone mode

# Select Device name. A newly authorised mobile phone is connec ted in single telephone mode. If the mobile phone has already been author ised and connected in single telephone mode, it is connected again in single tele phone mode. If a mobile phone is already authorised and has been connected in two phone mode with another mobile phone, a query may come, whether the mobile phone should in future be operated in single telephone mode or con nected with another mobile phone in two phone mode.

# If required, confirm the query about operat ing mode (single telephone or two phone mode) by confirming the Device name option. Using in two phone mode

# Select Device name 1 + Device name 2. A newly authorised mobile phone is connec ted with the selected mobile phone in two phone mode. If the mobile phone has already been author ised and connected in single telephone mode, it will be connected in future with the selected mobile phone in two phone mode. If the mobile phone was previously connec ted with another mobile phone, this connec tion is cancelled. MBUX multimedia system 375 Disconnecting/deleting a mobile phone Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Device manager 5 My devices

# Select in the line of the mobile phone.

# To disconnect: select Disconnect. If applicable, the mobile phone will be auto matically reconnected when the vehicle is next started.

# To delete: select Delete device. The mobile phone is deleted from the sys tem. Information on Near Field Communication

(NFC) NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer or (re)connection of a mobile phone with the multimedia system. Further information can be obtained at: https://

www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

Using a mobile phone with Near Field Com munication (NFC) Requirements:

376 MBUX multimedia system R NFC is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions) R The mobile phone's screen is switched on and unlocked (see the manufacturer's oper ating instructions)

# To connect a mobile phone: place the NFC area of the mobile phone (see manufactur er's operating instructions) on NFC touch point 1.

# Follow the additional prompts on the central display to connect the mobile phone. Con nect the mobile phone in single telephone mode (/ page 373). Connect the mobile phone in two phone mode (/ page 374).

# To replace a mobile phone: hold the NFC area of the mobile phone (see manufactur er's operating instructions) on mat 1 or place the mobile phone on it.

# Follow the additional prompts on the central display to replace the mobile phone in one or two phone mode (/ page 374).

# If required, confirm the prompts on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper ating instructions).

% If your mobile phone supports wireless charging , it can be charged automatically on the mat (/ page 140). Further information can be found at: https://

www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

Setting the reception and transmission vol ume Requirements:

R A mobile phone is connected (/ page 373). Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Z 5 <device name>

This function ensures optimal language quality.

% Please note that the respective mobile phone must be selected for adjustment of the reception and transmission volume.

# Select Volume.

# Set the reception and transmission volume using Reception volume and Transmission volume. Further information on the recommended recep tion and transmission volume: https://

www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

MBUX multimedia system 377 R Using SIM card in combination with a spe cific mobile phone This operating mode is mainly intended for those using multiple SIM cards. As soon as the mobile phone associated with the SIM card is connected with the multimedia sys tem in the vehicle, the SIM card is automati cally activated for car telephony. The associa tion of the SIM card with the set mobile phone prevents automatic activation of car telephony via the SIM card if the vehicle is borrowed by other persons, for example

(/ page 379). Setting the ringtone Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Z 5 <device name>

# Select Ringtones.

# Set the ringtone.

% If the mobile phone supports the transfer of the ringtone, you will hear the ringtone of the mobile phone instead of that of the vehi cle. Starting/stopping mobile phone voice recog nition Requirements:

R At least one mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system (/ page 373). R The tab with the mobile phone for which voice recognition should be started is selec ted (/ page 374). Starting mobile phone voice recognition

# Press and hold the button on the multi function steering wheel for more than one second. Voice recognition is started for the currently selected mobile phone. Stopping mobile phone voice recognition

# Press the 8 or ~ button on the multi function steering wheel.

% If a mobile phone is connected via Smart phone Integration, the voice recognition of this mobile phone is always started or stop ped. Car telephony Overview of car telephony operating modes Car telephony offers you the following operating modes:

R Using a mobile phone with Bluetooth profile SAP (SIM Access Profile) (/ page 378) R Using SIM card (/ page 379) 378 MBUX multimedia system Symbols of car telephony 1 Mobile phone is only used in combination with SIM Card 2 Car phone connected 3 Car telephony malfunctioning (check the sta tus of the SIM card PIN (/ page 379)) Setting up car telephony with a mobile phone via Bluetooth SAP Requirements:

R Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone

(see the manufacturer's operating instruc tions). R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia system (/ page 324). R The mobile phone supports the Bluetooth profile SAP (SIM Access Profile). Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone

# Select Connect device.

# Select a mobile phone with the SAP Blue tooth profile.

# Connect the mobile phone with the multime dia system via Secure Simple Pairing or the passkey (/ page 373).

# Enter the SIM card PIN and confirm.

% If the mobile phone is connected as a car phone, calls cannot be made on the mobile phone, since its SIM card is being used by the vehicle.

% Connect the mobile phone to the vehicle hot spot for data reception . Changing between Bluetooth telephony and car telephony via the SAP Bluetooth profile

# To change to Bluetoothtelephony: select the symbol in the line of the mobile phone in the device manager.

# Select Use as Bluetooth phone. The mobile phone is no longer connected via the Bluetooth SAP profile but via the Blue tooth HFP profile (Hands Free Profile).

# To change to car telephony via the Blue toothSAP profile : select the symbol in the line of the mobile phone in the device manager.

# Select Use as car phone. The mobile phone is connected using the SAP Bluetooth profile.

% This option is only shown if the mobile phone supports the Bluetooth SAP profile. Setting up car telephony via SIM card

# To use the nano SIM card: place nano SIM card 4 in corresponding card holder 5. The active side of the SIM card holder has the contacts facing upwards.

# If required, confirm that mobile phones already connected should be disconnected.

# If required enter and confirm the SIM card PIN.

# To always use a SIM card: answer the SIM card connected Do you want to use this SIM card with only one specific device? query with No. Incoming and outgoing calls are available in the vehicle's multimedia system using the SIM card.

% Every time the vehicle is started, the SIM card is automatically connected and logged into the radio cell.

% In addition to the SIM card another mobile phone can be connected in two phone mode

(/ page 374).

# To use the SIM card only in combination with a specific mobile phone: answer the SIM card connected Do you want to use this MBUX multimedia system 379 SIM card with only one specific device?

query with Yes.

# Select a mobile phone that has been author ised or connect a new mobile phone. Incoming and outgoing calls are available in the vehicle's multimedia system using the SIM card.

% The SIM card only logs into the radio cell when the associated mobile phone is con nected. The associated mobile phone can be changed in the settings for the SIM card

(/ page 380). Checking the status of the SIM card PIN Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Device manager 5 My devices The symbol for car telephony appears with an exclamation mark if re-entering the PIN is required.

# Select the name of the mobile phone or the SIM card.

# Enter the SIM card PIN and confirm.

# Open SIM card holder loading drawer 1 in the glove compartment .

# To use the mini SIM card: place mini SIM card 2 in corresponding card slot 3. The active side of the SIM card holder has the contacts facing upwards. or 380 MBUX multimedia system Calling up the car telephony settings Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Car phone 5 Z

# Select the desired settings. The following settings are available:

R SIM card (/ page 380) R Withhold phone number (/ page 380) R Call waiting (/ page 380) R Select network provider (/ page 381) R Call forwarding (/ page 381) R Data usage, voice (/ page 381) Setting the SIM card Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Car phone 5 Z 5 SIM card The following options are available:

Saving the PIN

# Activate the display button. The SIM card PIN is saved. Entering the PIN again

# Enter the PIN. Combining the SIM card with a specific mobile phone

# Activate the Activation only with device option. Use of the SIM card with a specific mobile phone is activated. The name of the associ ated mobile phone is shown. Always using a SIM card

# Deactivate the Activation only with device option. Use of the SIM card with a specific mobile phone is deactivated. Changing the combined mobile phone

# If the Activation only with device option is activated, first deactivate this and then acti vate again.

# Answer the SIM card connected Do you want to use this SIM card with only one spe-

cific device? query with Yes.

# Select a mobile phone that has been author ised or connect a new mobile phone. Setting telephone number transmission Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Car phone 5 Z 5 Withhold phone number The following options are available:

# Withhold own number

# Show own number

# Network standard Setting the call waiting function Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Car phone 5 Z 5 Call waiting

# To switch on call waiting: activate the

# To switch off call waiting: deactivate the option. option. Selecting a network provider Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Car phone 5 Z 5 Select network provider Automatically

# Activate the Auto. select network provider option. option. Manually

# Deactivate the Auto. select network provider

# Select Call up network status. Available network providers are shown.

# Select a network provider. Setting call forwarding Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Car phone 5 Z 5 Call forwarding

# Select New call forwarding rule.

# Select an arrangement.

# Enter a telephone number. Setting the data use language Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Car phone 5 Z 5 Data usage, voice You have the following options when selecting the transmission standard:

# Automatic

# Automatic (without LTE)

# 3G

# 2G

# 4G

# VoLTE Activate or deactivate Calls Telephone operation:

Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone Making a call by entering the numbers

# Select _.

# Enter a number. MBUX multimedia system 381

# Select R. The call is made. Accepting a call

# Select R Accept. Rejecting a call

# Select k Reject. Answering a call with a message

# Answer with message Noting an incoming call in In-Car Office

# If In-Car Office is available: select Reminder

(/ page 390). Ending a call

# Select k. Activating functions during a call The following functions are available during a call:

R k End call R m Microphone off 382 MBUX multimedia system R _ Numerical keypad (show to send DTMF tones) R W Add call R Hands-free mode (The call can be transferred to the front or rear compartment, for exam ple) R Private mode (The call can be transferred to the telephone or headphones, for example)

# Select a function.

% Please observe that the functions and sym bols can vary depending on the vehicle equipment. Conducting calls with several participants Requirements:

R There is an active call (/ page 381). R Another call is being made. Switching between calls

# Select the contact. The selected call is active. The other call is on hold. Activating a call on hold

# Select the contact of the call on hold. Conducting a conference call

# Select i Create conf. call. The new participant is included in the confer ence call. Ending an active call

# Select k End call.

% On some mobile phones, the call on hold is activated as soon as the active call is ended. Accepting/rejecting a waiting call Requirements:

R There is an active call (/ page 381). If you receive a call while already in a call, a message is displayed. Depending on the mobile phone and mobile net work operator you will hear a call-waiting sound. Alternatively, in two phone mode you will hear an acoustic signal when the call goes through to the other (not yet active) mobile phone.

# Select R Accept. The incoming call is active. If only one mobile phone is connected with the multimedia system, the previous call will be put on hold. If during a call you accept a call with the other mobile phone when in two phone mode then the existing call is ended.

# Answer with message or

# Select k Reject.

% This function and behaviour depends on your mobile phone network provider and the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper ating instructions). Contacts Information about the contacts menu The contacts menu contains all contacts from existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone or data storage medium. Depending on the data source, it is possible to save/load the following number of contacts:

R Permanently saved contacts: 3,000 entries R Contacts loaded from the mobile phone:

5,000 entries per mobile phone From the contacts menu, you can perform the following actions:

R Make a call, for example call a contact

(/ page 384) R Navigation (/ page 339) R Compose messages (/ page 387) R Additional options (/ page 384) If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system (/ page 373) and automatic calling up

(/ page 383) is activated, the mobile phone's contacts are displayed in the address book. The multimedia system can show suggestions based on frequently used contacts as well as incoming and outgoing calls . These are shown at the top of the contact list. Downloading mobile phone contacts Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 <device name>

5 Z

# Select Contacts. Automatically

# If the Synchronise automatically function is not active: activate the function. Manually

# If the Synchronise automatically function is active: deactivate the function.

# Select Text is Missing. You can see from the status of controller to the right of the Synchronise automatically display text whether the function is active. Calling up contacts Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 g Contacts The following options can be used to search for contacts:

R searching by initials MBUX multimedia system 383 R searching by name R searching by phone number

# Enter characters into the search field.

# Select the contact. A contact can contain the following details:

R phone numbers R navigation addresses R Internet address R e-mail addresses R voice tag (if set) R relation (if set) Editing the format of a contact's name Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Z

# Select General.

# Select Name format.

# Select an option. 384 MBUX multimedia system Overview of importing contacts Contacts from various sources Source Requirements:

USB device

\ Bluetooth con nection The USB device is connected with the USB port. Bluetooth is activa ted in the multimedia system and on the respective device

(see the manufactur er's operating instruc tions).

% If the sending of vCards via Bluetooth is supported, vCards can be received on mobile phones or netbooks, for example. Importing contacts into the contacts menu Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Z 5 General 5 Contacts 5 Import contacts

# Select a mobile phone <device name>, from which the contacts should be imported.

# Select an option. Saving a mobile phone contact Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Contacts

# Select r in the line of the mobile

# Enter characters into the search field.

# Select the contact.

# Select the telephone number. The number is dialled. Selecting further options in the contacts menu Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Contacts

# Select r in the line of the contact.

# Select .

# Select an option. phone contact.

# Select .

# Select Save.

# Select Yes. The contact saved in the multimedia system is identified by the MBUX symbol. Calling a contact Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Contacts

# Select Search contacts. Selecting options for suggestions in the con tacts menu Requirements:

R A profile has been created (/ page 296). R The Allow contact suggestions setting is switched on . Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 +

# Select Contacts.

# Select in the line of a suggested con tact. The following options are available:

R Save as favourite The suggestions are saved as global favourites and do not appear in the favourites of the telephone application. R Do not suggest now

# Select an option.

# Select Delete contacts.

# Select an option. Deleting a contact

# Select Contacts.

# Select r in the line of the contact.

# Select .

# Select Delete contact.

# Select Yes. Deleting contacts Requirements:

R The contacts are saved in the vehicle. R To delete an individual contact, this has been imported manually into the vehicle. Saving a contact as a favourite Requirements:

R Your mobile phone does not support auto matic downloading of contacts which are saved on the mobile phone as favourites. Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone Deleting all contacts

# Select Z.

# Select General.

# Select Contacts.

% If your mobile phone supports automatic downloading of favourites, no new favourites can be saved manually. Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 f Add favourite

# Select a contact.

# Select r in the line of the contact. MBUX multimedia system 385

# Select the telephone number. The contact is stored as a favourite in the telephone menu overview. Deleting favourites in the telephone menu overview Multimedia system:

4

# Select a favourite in the telephone menu overview (/ page 385).

# Press and hold the favourite.

# Select Delete.

# Select Yes. Deleting all favourites

# Tap on in the central display.

# Select Phone.

# Select Z.

# Select the connected telephone <device name>.

# Select Contacts.

# Select Delete all favourites. The prompt Delete all favourites? appears. 386 MBUX multimedia system

# Select Ja (Yes). Call list Overview of the call list Depending on whether your mobile phone sup ports the PBAP Bluetooth profile or not, this can have different effects on the presentation and functions of the call list. If the PBAP Bluetooth profile is supported, the effects are as follows:

R The call lists from the mobile phone are dis played in the multimedia system. R When connecting the mobile phone, you may have to confirm the connection for the PBAP Bluetooth profile. If the PBAP Bluetooth profile is not supported, the effects are as follows:

R The multimedia system generates a call list independently as soon as calls are made in the vehicle. R The call list is not synchronised with the call lists in the mobile phone. The multimedia system can show suggestions based on frequently used contacts as well as incoming and outgoing calls . These are shown at the top of the call list. Making a call from the call list Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone

Select Call list.

# Select an entry. The call is made. Calling up additional options in the call list Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Q Call list

# For contacts that are in the address book:

select options. The contact details are called up.

# For contacts where only one number is shown (not in the address book): select l. Selecting options for suggestions in the call list Requirements:

R A profile has been created (/ page 296). R The Allow contact suggestions setting is switched on . Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone

# Select + Call list.

# Select in the line of a suggested entry.

# Select an option. Deleting the call list Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 <device name>

5 Z

# Select Contacts.

# Select Delete call list.

# Select Yes.

% This function is only available if your mobile does not support the PBAP Bluetooth pro file. Text messages Overview of message functions In the messages menu you can receive and send text messages. If the connected mobile phone supports the Bluetooth MAP profile, the message function can be used on the multimedia system. You can obtain further information about set tings and supported functions of Bluetooth-

capable mobile phones at a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https://www.mercedes-

benz-mobile.com/

Some mobile phones require further settings after being connected to the multimedia system to activate the messaging functionality (see manufacturer's operating instructions). Setting message displays Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 <device name>

5 Z

# Select Message display.

# Select On or Off. Reading messages Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 <device name>

5 l Using the read-aloud function

# Select a contact.

# Select to read aloud. The message is read aloud. Dictating and sending a new message Requirements:

R There is an Internet connection. Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 <device name>

5 l

# Select a new message using r. Adding a recipient

# Select f.

# Select a contact. MBUX multimedia system 387 Dictating text

# Select p. The dictating function is started.

# Say the message. After the voice message has been processed, it is shown as text. Sending a message

# Select Send.

% When the vehicle is stationary you can use the keyboard to write a message. No Inter net connection is required to use the key board. Replying to a message in the messaging his tory Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 <device name>

5 l A message list is shown.

# Select r next to a contact. The messaging history with this contact is shown. 388 MBUX multimedia system

# Select p. The dictating function is started.

# Say the message. After the voice message has been processed, it is shown as text.

# Select Send. Using message templates Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 <device name>

5 l Using a template as a new message

# Select r to write a new message.

# Add a recipient using f.

# Select a 0 template. Answering a message with a template

# Select a message sequence with a contact.

# Select templates.

# Select a 0 template. Forwarding a message Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 <device name>

5 l A message list is shown.

# Select r next to a contact. The messaging history with this contact is shown.

# Press and hold on a message.

# To forward a message: select Forward. Calling a message sender Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 <device name>

5 l A message list is shown.

# Select r next to a contact. The messaging history with this contact is shown.

# Select .

# Select Call. Using telephone numbers, URLs or emails from a text message Requirements:

R An Internet connection is available to call up a URL. Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 <device name>

5 l A message list is shown.

# Select r next to a contact. The messaging history with this contact is shown.

# Select a telephone number or a URL in the message. If a URL is selected the web browser opens. If a telephone number is selected the follow ing options are available:

R Call R New message or

# If In-Car Office and the email function are available: select an email address. When the email address is selected, In-Car Office opens.

% The availability of In-Car Office is country-

dependent.

# Select an option. Deleting a message Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 <device name>

5 l

# Select a contact.

# Press and hold on a message.

# To delete the message: select Delete. In-Car Office In-Car Office functions Using In-Car Office, you can connect your online services with the multimedia system. The following functions are available:

R Calendar Showing appointments and triggering actions, e.g. reading aloud, placing a call, navigating R E-mail Reading e-mails, reading aloud and answer ing R Tasks and calls Managing tasks and prebooked calls R Video conference Participation in a video conference is carried out by selecting a calendar entry in In-Car Office. The calendar entry must contain an invitation with a link to a video conference from a supported provider.

% Please note that certain functions are only available when the vehicle is stationary. Calling up In-Car Office Requirements:

R A mobile phone is connected as the main phone to the multimedia system. MBUX multimedia system 389 R You have a user account in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-

benz.com R The In-Car Office service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal. R You have a user account with an online service, e.g. with Office 365, and have con nected this with In-Car Office via the Mercedes me Portal. In this way, appointments, e-mails and tasks can be synchronised and facilitated. Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps

# Select In-Car Office. An overview shows the appointments for the current day. Appointments can be all-day or have a dura tion, e.g. a two-hour appointment with infor mation for the start and finish. 390 MBUX multimedia system Selecting calendar functions in In-Car Office. Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 Calendar

# Select an appointment.

# Select a function. Selecting functions of Tasks & Calls in "In Car Office"

Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 Tasks & calls

# Select a function for an entry. The following functions are available:

. Read aloud R Call Z Navigate E Delete

% Functions are available if corresponding appointment information is saved. Examples of this are:

R If a telephone number has been saved for the appointment, Call is available. R If a navigable address has been saved in the Online Account for the appointment, Navigate is available. The following functions are available:

R Reading aloud . R Placing a call R This task function requires a telephone number. R Marking as completed O In the current editing, the tick can be removed and the entry marked as open. R Deleting E R Displaying details r Marking an entry as completed in Tasks &

Calls Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 Tasks & calls

# Select Tasks & calls. An overview appears.

# Select O. Noting an incoming call When you receive an incoming call a prompt appears asking whether the call should be accepted, rejected or noted with a reminder of the call.

# Select Reminder. The call is declined and added to the In-Car Office Tasks & calls automatically. Managing e-mails Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 E-mail Showing/reading e-mail

# Select an e-mail. The e-mail is opened. Additional functions are available:

R Creating e-mail.(/ page 391) R Answering e-mail (/ page 391) R Forwarding e-mail(/ page 392) Writing new e-mail Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 E-mail Using the keyboard

# Select W Create e-mail.

# Add recipients using f.

# Enter the subject and text of the e-mail in the corresponding fields with the keypad.

# Select Send. Using the dictation function

% The dictation function is not available every where nor without limitation. For initial acti vation of the function it may be necessary to select the terms of use in the Mercedes me Portal.

# Select p. The dictating function is started.

# Dictate the subject and text of the e-mail. After the voice entry has been processed, it is shown as text.

# Select Send. Using voice control

# Use the "Write an e-mail" MBUX Voice Assis tant voice command. You are guided by the dialogue.

% Further information on operating the MBUX MBUX multimedia system 391 Answering e-mail Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 E-mail Using the keyboard

# Select an e-mail.

# Select Reply.

# Enter the e-mail text in the corresponding field.

# Select Send. Using the dictation function

% The dictation function is not available every where nor without limitation. For initial acti vation of the function it may be necessary to select the terms of use in the Mercedes me Portal.

# Select an e-mail.

# Select Reply.

# Select p. The dictating function is started.

% Contacts can be used from the linked online Voice Assistant (/ page 287). service such as Office 365. 392 MBUX multimedia system

# Dictate the text of the e-mail. After the voice entry has been processed, it is shown as text.

# To forward without attachment: select Forward without attachment.

# Enter the e-mail text in the corresponding

# Select Send. Using voice control

# Use the "Answer e-mail" MBUX Voice Assis tant voice command. You are guided by the dialogue.

% Further information on operating the MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 287). Forwarding e-mail Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 In-Car Office 5 E-mail Using the keyboard

# Select an e-mail.

# Select Forward.

# To forward with attachment: select Forward with attachment.

% Contacts can be used from the linked online service such as Office 365. field using the keypad.

# Select Send. Using voice control

# Use the "Forward e-mail" MBUX Voice Assis tant voice command. Dictate the text of the e-mail.

% Further information on operating the MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 287). Video conference overview The function makes it possible to participate in a video conference when in the vehicle. For this, the camera, the media display, microphone and additional equipment are used. Participation in a video conference is carried out by selecting a calendar entry in In-Car Office. The calendar entry must contain an invitation with a link to a video conference from a suppor ted provider. During the video conference, the videos of the participants as well as your own video content can be shown on the media display. In addition, participant content can be shared for the display, e.g. for presentations.

% No content can be shared from the vehicle. The following are requirements for a video con ference:

R Equipment with MBUX high-end Rear Seat Entertainment System R In-Car Office with calendar and e-mail func tion as well as support of the Multiseat-Pro file-Management R Access to the video conference and the link ing of authorisations with the Mercedes me Account R Internet connection The Internet connection requires data vol umes that are booked via the mobile phone. Alternatively, it can be made available with the "Internet in the car" additional data pack age. R An invitation to a video conference with a R Audio status of participants (sound off/

Mercedes-Benz link linked calendar entry sound on) Overview of Mercedes-Benz Link R Duration of the meeting R Audio using headphones (Bluetooth or cor ded) R Accepting a call and pausing the current video conference An incoming call can be accepted with a con nected mobile phone. The video conference remains connected, the name of the partici pant continues to be shown. Audio and video playback are deactivated. When the call is finished, participation in the video confer ence is continued. R Switching off transmitted video content and changing to audio playback The video conference offers you the following functions:

R Participating in a video conference by selec tion of a linked calendar entry R Audio playback via headphones R Adjusting the volume R Switching sound off and on (output and input) R Switching off your own video content R Ending a video conference The following information can be displayed dur ing a video conference:

R Information about the active speaker R Name of the participant in the video stream

(if video is supported) R Preview of the camera image before and dur R Display of video content from other partici ing participation pants MBUX multimedia system 393

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. With Mercedes-Benz Link you can use mobile phone functions via the multimedia system. It is operated using the touchscreen or the voice-

394 MBUX multimedia system operated control system. You can activate the voice-operated control system by pressing and holding the button on the multifunction steering wheel. When using Mercedes-Benz Link via the voice-

operated control system, the multimedia system can still be operated using the MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 286). The Mercedes-Benz Link control box supplemen tary equipment is required for this. This is availa ble at a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec ted via Mercedes-Benz Link to the multimedia system. If a mobile phone is connected with Mercedes-

Benz Link, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth with the multi media system when in two phone mode.

% The Mercedes-Benz Link control box uses the Android operating system.

% The service provider is responsible for the apps as well as the services and content connected to it. Notes on Mercedes-Benz Link Only one route guidance can be active at a time. If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys tem, it is closed when route guidance is started on the mobile phone. Connecting Mercedes-Benz Link with the multimedia system Requirements:

R The vehicle is fitted with the Mercedes-Benz R The Mercedes-Benz Link app is installed on Link control box. the mobile phone. R The mobile phone is switched on.

% The first activation of Mercedes-Benz Link on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary for safety reasons.

# Connect Mercedes-Benz Link with the USB port on the multimedia system using a suita ble cable (/ page 425). The Mercedes symbol appears in the status line.

# Select the Mercedes symbol. Mercedes-Benz Link starts. When the application is connected for the first time, a message relating to terms of use appears.

# Select Accept & start if the application should be started. or

# If two telephones are connected with the multimedia system: start Mercedes-Benz Link using the device manager

(/ page 374). Quitting Mercedes-Benz Link

# Select . or

# Press the button on the Touch Control

(MBUX multimedia system).

% If Mercedes-Benz Link was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Mercedes-Benz Link using the main menu. You can find more information in the Mercedes-

Benz Link control box operating instructions. Apple CarPlay Overview of Apple CarPlay Calling up Mercedes-Benz Link sound set tings Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio

# Select the sound settings. Ending Mercedes-Benz Link

# Disconnect the connecting cable between Mercedes-Benz Link and the multimedia sys tem. or

# Select the Mercedes symbol next to the device name for Mercedes-Benz Link in the device manager.

% Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. iPhone functions can be used via the multime dia system using Apple CarPlay. They are oper ated using the touchscreen, Touch Control or the MBUX multimedia system 395 Siri voice-operated control system. You can activate the voice-operated control system by pressing and holding the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

% By briefly pressing the button on the multi function steering wheel you can continue to operate the multimedia system using the MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 286). Only one iPhone at a time can be connected via Apple CarPlay with the multimedia system. Also for use of Apple CarPlay with two phone mode, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Apple CarPlay is only available with an Internet connection. The availability of Apple CarPlay may vary according to the country. The service provider is responsible for this appli cation and the services and content connected to it. Apple CarPlay is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. 396 MBUX multimedia system Information on Apple CarPlay The CarPlay symbol in the status line switches within Apple CarPlay to the last active display. If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys tem, it is closed when route guidance is started on the mobile phone. Connecting an iPhone via Apple CarPlay

(cable) Requirements:

The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

# Connect the iPhone to a USB port on the multimedia system using a suitable cable

(/ page 425). When the application is connected for the first time, a message about data protection regulations appears.

# If the application should be started, select Accept & start. or

# Connect the desired iPhone with the multi media system via the device manager

(/ page 374).

# Start Apple CarPlay using the relevant sym bol next to the device name.

% If applicable, a message about data protec tion regulations appears. Exiting Apple CarPlay

# Select . or

# Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel (MBUX multimedia system).

% If Apple CarPlay was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the appli cation starts in the background when recon nected. You can call up Apple CarPlay using the CarPlay symbol in the status line. Connecting an iPhone via Apple CarPlay

(wireless) Requirements:

R The current version of your device's operat ing system is being used (see the manufac turer's operating instructions). R Bluetooth is activated on the device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). R The device is "visible" for other devices. Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Settings 5 Device manager 5 Connect new device

# Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth

(/ page 373). When the application is connected for the first time, a message about data protection regulations appears.

# If the application should be started, select Accept & Start Apple Car Play.

# If required confirm the use of Apple CarPlay on your iPhone.

% The first activation of Apple CarPlay on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary for safety rea sons.

% It is possible at any time to switch between connection via Bluetooth or Apple CarPlay

(wireless) in the device list.

% If you have already connected a mobile phone via Bluetooth, you can connect another iPhone via Bluetooth to use Apple CarPlay via the device manager. Exiting Apple CarPlay

# Select . or

# Press the button on the Touch Control

(MBUX multimedia system).

% If Apple CarPlay was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the appli cation starts in the background when recon nected. You can call up Apple CarPlay using the CarPlay symbol in the status bar. Calling up Apple CarPlay sound settings Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio

# Select the sound settings. Ending Apple CarPlay

# Select the CarPlay symbol in the device manager (telephone, media) that is next to the device name of the iPhone.

% Select the CarPlay symbol in the device manager in the telephone or media applica tions if CarPlay should be restarted.

% If CarPlay was not displayed in the fore ground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background the next time it is started automatically. You can call up Car Play using the relevant symbol in the status line. Android Auto Android Auto overview

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle MBUX multimedia system 397 when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Mobile phone functions can be used with Android Auto using the Android operating sys tem on the multimedia system. It is operated using the touchscreen or the voice-operated control system. You can activate the voice-oper ated control system by pressing and holding the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

% By briefly pressing the button on the multi function steering wheel you can continue to operate the multimedia system using the MBUX Voice Assistant (/ page 286). 398 MBUX multimedia system Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec ted via Android Auto with the multimedia sys tem. Also for use of Android Auto with two phone mode, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Android Auto is only possible with an Internet connection. The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto apps may vary according to the country. The service provider is responsible for this appli cation and the services and content connected to it. Information on Android Auto The Android Auto symbol in the status line switches within Android Auto to the last active display. If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys tem, it is closed when route guidance is started on the mobile phone. Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto Requirements:

R The mobile phone supports Android Auto

# Start Android Auto using the relevant symbol from Android 5.0. next to the device name. R The current version of the Android Auto app

% The first activation of Android Auto on the is installed on the mobile phone. R In order to use the telephone functions, the mobile phone must be connected to the mul timedia system via Bluetooth (/ page 373). If there was no prior Internet connection, this is established with the use of the mobile phone with Android Auto.

# Connect the mobile phone to a USB port on the multimedia system using a suitable cable

(/ page 425). When the application is connected for the first time, a message about data protection regulations appears.

# If the application should be started, select Accept & start. or

# Connect the desired mobile phone with the multimedia system via the device man ager(/ page 374). multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary for safety rea sons. Exiting Android Auto

# Select . or

# Press the button on the Touch Control

(MBUX multimedia system).

% If Android Auto was not displayed in the fore ground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Android Auto using the Android Auto symbol in the status bar. Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto

(wireless) Requirements:

R The current version of your device's operat ing system is being used (see the manufac turer's operating instructions). R The device supports the Android Auto wire

% The first activation of Android Auto on the less function. R Bluetooth is activated on the device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). R The device is "visible" for other devices. Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 Settings 5 Device manager 5 Connect new device

# Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth

(/ page 373).

% Depending on the device configuration, the query whether Android Auto should be star ted appears in the media display after con necting the mobile phone via Bluetooth. In this case, the query must be answered with Yes.

# Select Start Android Auto . When the application is connected for the first time, a message about data protection regulations appears.

# Select Accept & start. multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary for safety rea sons.

% It is possible at any time to switch between connection via Bluetooth or Android Auto

(wireless) in the device list.

% If you have already connected a mobile phone via Bluetooth, you can connect another mobile phone via Bluetooth to use Android Auto via the device manager. Exiting Android Auto

# Select . or

# Press the button on the Touch Control

(MBUX multimedia system).

% If Android Auto was not displayed in the fore ground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Android Auto using the Android Auto symbol in the status bar. MBUX multimedia system 399 Calling up the Android Auto sound settings Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Audio

# Select the sound settings. Ending Android Auto

# Select the Android Auto symbol in the device manager (telephone, media) that is next to the device name of the mobile phone.

% Select the Android Auto symbol in the device manager if Android Auto should be restarted.

% If Android Auto was not displayed in the fore ground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background the next time it is started automatically. You can call up Android Auto using the Android Auto symbol in the status line. Transferred vehicle data with Android Auto and Apple CarPlay Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected 400 MBUX multimedia system mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted:

R Software release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymised) The transfer of this data is used to optimise communication between the vehicle and the mobile phone. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly generated. This has no connection to the vehicle identifica tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi media system is reset (/ page 330). The following driving status data is transmitted:

R Transmission position engaged R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving R Day/night mode of the instrument cluster The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted:

R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel). Mercedes me calls Making a call via the overhead control panel

% Mercedes me calls are not possible in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are availa ble in your country. 1 me button for service, concierge (if available) or information calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system)

# To make a Mercedes me call: press me button 1.

# To make an emergency call: press SOS button cover 2 briefly to open.

# Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least R Other products and services from Mercedes-

% In some countries, or if the Concierge one second. Benz If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls. Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has been initiated via the me button in the over head control panel or the multimedia system

(/ page 400). Using the voice dialogue system you access the desired service:

R Concierge Service (if the service is available and activated) R Accident and Breakdown Management R Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general information about the vehicle You can find information on the following topics:

R Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle R Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre (/ page 403). Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system Requirements:

R Access to a GSM network is available. R The contract partner's GSM network cover age is available in the respective region. R The ignition must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automati cally. Multimedia system:

4 5 Phone 5 g

# Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the central display. Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. MBUX multimedia system 401 Service is active, you will be connected directly with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

% The Concierge Service is not available in all countries. More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://

me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre after automatic accident or breakdown detection Requirements:

R The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation. R The vehicle is stationary. R The hazard warning lights are switched on.

% This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances. In the event an accident or breakdown is detec ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. 402 MBUX multimedia system After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

# Select Call. R After your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Accident and Break down Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically

(/ page 405). R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre takes your call and organises the break down and accident assistance. You may be charged for these services.

% Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency call can be initi ated. This has priority over all other active calls.

% In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined.

% If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre with Call later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again. Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance manage ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You will then receive individual recom mendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multi media system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment.

# To arrange a service appointment: select Call. After your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the customer centre takes your preferred appointment date. The infor mation is then sent to your desired service outlet. This will contact you to confirm the appoint ment and if necessary consult about the details.

% If you select Call later after the service mes sage appears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time. Giving consent to data transfer during a Mercedes me call Requirements:

R There is an active Mercedes me call via the multimedia system or the me button in the overhead control panel .

% The prompt to confirm data transfer does not appear in all countries. If the accident and breakdown service and Mercedes me connect Concierge Service (if available) are not activated on Mercedes me, the Do you want to transmit vehicle data and the vehicle's position to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-

tomer Centre in order to improve the process-

ing of your request? message appears.

# Select Yes. Relevant identification data is transmitted automatically. More information on Mercedes me: http://

www.mercedes.me Transferred data during a Mercedes me call If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me, data is transferred to enable targeted advice and an efficient service. The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data:

R The ignition is switched on. R The required data transfer technology is sup ported by the mobile service operator. R The quality of the mobile connection is suffi cient. Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors:

R Reason for the initiation of the call R The available mobile phone transmission R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set multimedia systems R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle MBUX multimedia system 403 R The activated Mercedes me connect serv R The service selected in the voice control sys technology. ices. tem.

% A prompt for consent to the data transmis sion only occurs if the corresponding Mercedes me connect service is not activa ted. Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv ices are not activated If no Mercedes me connect services are activa ted and the data protection prompt has been confirmed the following data is transmitted:

R Vehicle identification number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R Confirmation of the data protection prompt If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted:

R Current mileage and maintenance data If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia sys tem, the following data is also transmitted:

R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system and no service has been activated, but the data protec tion query has been confirmed, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre:

R Current vehicle location 404 MBUX multimedia system If the data protection prompt has been rejected, the following data is transmitted to enable targe ted advice and an efficient service:

R Reason for the initiation of the call R Rejection of the data protection prompt R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set language for the multimedia system R Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv ices are activated Only if the respective service is activated will additional incident-specific data be transmitted in the second stage to enable an optimal service. An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://

me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Data processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and, if required to process the incident, forwar ded to the service partner authorised by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page at https://

www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

% The recorded message is not available in every country. Mercedes me connect Information on Mercedes me connect

% Mercedes me connect or individual Mercedes me connect services are not avail able in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these func tions are available in your country. Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv ices. Depending on whether the services are activated and on the vehicle equipment, you can use the following services via the multimedia system and the overhead control panel, for example:

R Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system) R Concierge Service (me button) R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto matic emergency call and SOS button) Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management, the Mercedes me connect Con cierge Service (if service is available and activa ted) and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre are available for you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel

(/ page 400). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system

(/ page 401). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, initially call the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys tem (/ page 409). Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://

me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Further information about Mercedes me con nect, the provided service scope and operation:

https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/

baix/cars/connectme/en_GB/#emotions/

Startseite.html Information on Mercedes me connect Acci dent and Breakdown Management The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions:

R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call system (/ page 409) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre for wards the call to Mercedes me connect breakdown and accident management. For warding the call is however not possible in all countries. R Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehi cle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre You may be charged for these services. matic accident or breakdown detection

(/ page 401) In the event of a breakdown or accident, fur ther data about the status of the vehicle is sent which enables optimal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and the authorised service partner or breakdown assistance. R Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through MBUX multimedia system 405 the monitoring of components that are sub ject to diagnostics. Should vehicle conditions indicate a break down or an impending breakdown, after stopping the vehicle you could receive a request via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre in order to receive assistance. restrictions such as the mobile phone cover age, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia sys tem. More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Data transferred during Mercedes me con nect call services The data transferred during a Mercedes me con nect call depends on the reason the call was ini tiated, which service is selected in the voice R Addition to the emergency guide after auto

% These services are subject to technical 406 MBUX multimedia system control system and which Mercedes me connect services are activated. Which data is transferred for the services can be taken from the currently valid terms of use. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me por tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Mercedes me and apps Information about Mercedes me When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. Availability is country-dependent. For more information consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre or visit the Mercedes me Portal:

http://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

% Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me apps updated. Calling up the Mercedes me user account Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps Your vehicle is linked to the user account

# Select Mercedes me. Information about the connected user account appears. Your vehicle is not yet connected with a user account

% If you do not yet have a Mercedes me user account, you can set up a user account via the Mercedes me Portal or using the Mercedes me app with your mobile phone.

# Select Mercedes me.

# Follow the instructions on the central display to link the user account with the vehicle.

% If the Mercedes me app is available on a mobile phone, the vehicle connection can be accomplished using the QR code shown. Calling up the Mercedes me services Requirements:

R The vehicle is connected with the user account. Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps

# Select My services. You can see the Mercedes me services in alphabetical order that you have already pur chased and also those still available to pur chase. To activate or deactivate the services, log in to your user account in the Mercedes me Portal or in the Mercedes me app using your mobile phone. Deleting a connection between a user account and the vehicle Requirements:

R The (vehicle) profile of the user account that was first connected with the vehicle is selec ted. R The profile is synchronised (/ page 299). R A PIN has been set. MBUX multimedia system 407 R Both emergency call systems only function in areas in which the wireless service providers offer mobile phone coverage. For both systems, insufficient network cover age from the wireless service providers can result in an emergency call not being trans mitted. Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 Mercedes me

# Select My Mercedes me Account.

# Select Delete vehicle connection.

# Enter the PIN of the connected user account.

% Only the user, whose user account was first connected with the vehicle can delete the connection between all user accounts and the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on available emergency call sys tems Two types of emergency call system are availa ble to you in the vehicle:

R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system R 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is not available in all countries. You can find more information on the regional availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

extra/ecall/

The following applies for both emergency call systems:

R The transfer of specific data is required for the intended function of both emergency call systems. This will be explained in the "Data transfer" section (/ page 410). R Both emergency call systems are included as standard equipment in your vehicle and are activated at the factory. R The use of both emergency call systems is exempt from charges. 408 MBUX multimedia system Differences between the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system and the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to the mobile phone network. R Automatic and manual Mercedes-Benz emergency calls are transmit ted to a Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. In the event that the emergency call centre of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system cannot be reached (e.g. due to a lack of net work coverage), the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically. R If you decide on the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) only, then the system only logs in to the mobile phone network after the trigger ing of a manual or automatic emergency call. R The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) transmits automatic and manual emergency calls directly to public coordination centres.

% The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) in your vehicle meets the delegated regulation EU 2017/79. Proper and full functionality of the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) depends on circumstances beyond the influ ence of Daimler AG. This includes mobile network coverage and the technical infra structure of the public reception centres in the respective countries.

% Please observe that in the event of a repair genuine Mercedes-Benz batteries must be used which have been certified pursuant to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79

(Appendix I). Other manufacturers are also permitted provided their batteries are certi fied according to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79. There is the option of deactivating the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system and using only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall). Contact address for carrying out deacti vation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys tem are the local dealers. Mercedes-Benz recommends the activation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for the following reasons:

R In emergency situations when abroad, you can also get support in a language you speak. R Several transmission technologies are used to accelerate the transfer of the accident data and improve reliability of the transmis sion. R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to the mobile phone network, which ensures faster placement of the emergency call and faster transfer of the accident data. Measures for rescue, recovery or towing away can then be initiated in quickly. R With a Mercedes-Benz emergency call, the accident data is only transferred to the pub lic coordination centre with the approval of the customer. In the event of an automatically triggered emergency call in which there is no voice contact, the accident data is transmitted immediately to the public emergency call centre. R Should the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre not be available, the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically. Overview of emergency call systems Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. They help locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. Both emergency call systems can initiate an emergency call automatically (/ page 409) or manually . Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar sit uation. Messages on the display The following messages appear in the display of both emergency call systems:

R SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or eCall is not available. This does not necessa rily indicate complete failure of the emer gency call system. Emergency calls call still be transmitted. The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of the availability of mobile phone networks and the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call centre. The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can be seen when MBUX multimedia system 409 the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the ignition is switched on. R G: The icon appears in the display during an active emergency call.

% If there is an emergency call system mal function (e.g. a fault in the loudspeaker, microphone, airbag, SOS button) a relevant message appears in the driver display of the instrument cluster. Triggering an automatic emergency call Requirements:

R The ignition is switched on. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) automatically initiate an emergency call in the following situations:

R After activation of the restraint systems such as airbags or seat belt tensioners after an accident. R After an automatically initiated emergency stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist. 410 MBUX multimedia system The emergency call has been made:

R A voice connection is established with the emergency call centre. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call centre. The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the display.

# Dial the 112 emergency number or an appro priate local emergency call number on your mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated:

R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer gency call centre. rescue teams and/or the police to the acci dent site. rescue teams and the police to the accident site. R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu R A message with accident data is transmitted lance is sent to the vehicle immediately. to the emergency call centre. Triggering a manual emergency call

# To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS button at least one second long . or

# To use the voice control: use the voice commands of the MBUX Voice Assistant . The emergency call has been made:

R A voice connection is established with an emergency call centre. R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer gency call centre. If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the central display.

# Dial the 112 emergency number or an appro priate local emergency call number on your mobile phone. Emergency call system data transmission For both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys tem as well as the 112 emergency call system

(EU eCall) data is transferred to the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call centre or the public emer gency services call centre. Depending on the emergency call system

(/ page 407) activated different data is trans mitted to the appropriate emergency call centre. R On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is necessary to call R On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is necessary to call MBUX multimedia system 411 Transmitted data according to activated emergency call system:

Mercedes-Benz emergency call 112 emergency call R Position data of the vehicle R Position data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identification number R Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or R Position data of the vehicle R Position data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identification number R Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen) hydrogen) R Number of people determined to be in the vehicle R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R Time of the accident R Number of people determined to be in the vehicle R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system R Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not This is a requirement for the option of forwarding the call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre if necessary.

% If only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) is activated in the vehicle, the acci dent data is transmitted directly to the pub lic emergency call centre. 412 MBUX multimedia system For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated:

R The current vehicle position can be deter mined. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established. R Emergency call data can be called up.

% For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving traffic information, cannot be performed for up to two hours after sending an emergency call. Function of the emergency call system self-

diagnosis (Russia) Your car verifies the operability of the emer gency call system each time the ignition is ON. In case of system failure, you will be informed with text message on the instrument cluster and with red indicator SOS NOT READY on the dis play. Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds after switching ignition ON the red indicator SOS NOT READY in the upper right corner of display is switched OFF, this means the emergency call system passed diagnostics successfully. Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode

(Russia) Requirements:

R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. R The ignition is switched on. R The vehicle has been stationary for at least one minute.

# To start the test mode: press and hold the

~ button on the multifunction steering wheel for at least five seconds. The test mode is started and automatically ends after the language test has been per formed.

# To end the test mode manually: switch off the ignition. The test mode is ended. Information on data processing Processing of personal data via the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system All processing of personal data via the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system corre sponds with the specifications in the EU Regula tion 2016/679 "on the protection of individuals with regard to the processing of personal data

(GDPR)". The data is solely used by the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for rescue and recovery in the event of an accident. The owner of a vehicle, that is equipped with a Mercedes-Benz emergency call system in addi tion to the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), has the right to use the 112 emergency call sys tem instead of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system. Contact address for carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the local dealers. Processing of personal data via the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) All processing of personal data via the 112 emer gency call system (EU eCall) corresponds with the specifications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the protection of individuals with regard to the processing of personal data

(GDPR)" and is based particularly on the neces sity of upholding the vital interests of the affec ted person in accordance with Article 6, Clause 1, Letter d of the GDPR. The processing of this type of data is strictly limited to the purpose of operating the emer gency calls to the standard European emergency call number 112. Data recipient The recipients of data that is processed using the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) are the relevant emergency call inquiry terminals that are specified to first receive and handle emer gency calls to the standard European emergency call number 112 by the respective country authorities in whose territory you are located. Arrangements for data processing Both emergency call systems are designed so that the following requirements are fulfilled:

R The data contained in the system memory is not accessible outside the system prior to the initiation of an emergency call. R Both emergency call systems cannot be traced and there is no continuous tracking in normal operation. R The data in the system's internal memory is automatically and continuously deleted. R The location data of the vehicle is continu ously overwritten in the system's internal memory, so that no more than the last three current locations required for the normal function of the system are available. R The record of the activity data of both emer gency call systems is only kept for as long as is required to fulfil the purpose of handling the emergency call, and under no circum stances for more than 13 hours after the time that an emergency call is initiated. MBUX multimedia system 413 Rights of persons affected by the data pro cessing The person affected by the data processing (the vehicle owner) has the right to access the data and if applicable can demand the correction, deletion or barring of data that affects him or her and that the processing of which does not correspond with the GDPR regulations. Each cor rection, deletion or barring carried out according to this regulation must be shared with the third party to which the data has been transmitted, provided this does not prove to be infeasible and does not incur disproportionate expenditure. The person affected by the data processing has the right to complain to the appropriate data protection authority should they be of the opin ion that their rights have been infringed by the processing of their personal data. Responsible contact point for the processing of access rights: Konzernbeauftragter fr den Datenschutz, Daimler AG, HPC G353, D-70546 Stuttgart, Germany 414 MBUX multimedia system Online and Internet functions Internet connection Information on connecting to the Internet

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

# As the driver, only operate mobile com munications devices when the vehicle is stationary.

# As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. Depending on the vehicle's equipment and avail ability in the country, you can establish an Inter net connection in the following ways:

R Vehicles with a communication module:

- Using the communication module includ ing data roaming

- Using Bluetooth or Wi-Fi with a data-

enabled mobile phone R Vehicles without a communication mod ule:

- Using Bluetooth with a data-enabled

- Using Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile mobile phone phone R Vehicles with "car telephony' equipment:

using the data-enabled car phone or the data-enabled SIM card (/ page 417) The Internet functions can only be used to a limi ted degree whilst driving. Setting up an Internet connection using the communication module Requirements:

R The vehicle is equipped with a permanently installed communication module. R A Mercedes me account is available. Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth 5 Internet

# Select Establishing Internet connection Mercedes me connect in the Internet device manager. For most Mercedes me connect services, data volume is available when purchasing the serv ices. To use some functions, e.g. web browser, Inter net Radio or Wi-Fi hotspot, additional data vol ume is required. If the data volume limit is reached, the availabil ity of Mercedes me connect services is limited. The data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal.

% Visit a Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out whether it is possible to purchase data volume in your country directly from a mobile phone network provider.

% Alternatively, and if available, you can utilise the tethering function of a mobile phone via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth to use the web browser, Internet radio or Wi-Fi hotspot. Automatic Internet connection via communi cation module Requirements:

R Wi-Fi - or Bluetooth tethering or car teleph ony are available in the vehicle. Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth 5 Internet

# Select Establishing Internet connection Mercedes me connect.

# Select settings S in the line of Establish-

ing Internet connection Mercedes me con-

nect.

# To always connect automatically: activate the Connect automatically option. The communication module is always used for the Internet connection. The data volume that has been purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal is used. MBUX multimedia system 415

% If other Wi-Fi - or Bluetooth devices are lis ted for selection in the Internet device man ager, these can be selected manually for Internet use regardless of the activated set ting Connect automatically. Please note that despite the activated set ting Connect automatically, a previously con nected Wi-Fi - or Bluetooth device can be connected automatically as this has been prioritised by the system.

# To connect manually: deactivate the Con-

nect automatically option. The communication module is shown in the Internet device manager as an available option for Internet use but it is not connec ted automatically. Other devices, if available, will be listed higher for selection as hotspot in the Internet device manager. The deactiva ted option allows the use of purchased data volume to be limited.

% If you wish to select the communication R mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile 416 MBUX multimedia system module for a single Internet sitting, you can tap on the hotspot Establishing Internet con-

nection Mercedes me connect in the Inter net device manager without activating the Connect automatically setting.

% If the Internet connection in the vehicle is only supported using the communication module, the Connect automatically option is not available. Setting up an Internet connection via Wi-Fi Requirements:

R the Wi-Fi function is activated on the multi media system (/ page 325). R the Wi-Fi function is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). R Internet access via Wi-Fi is activated (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Internet connection via Wi-Fi is restricted or does not function if:

R the mobile phone is switched off phone media system mobile phone R the Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the multi R the Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the R Internet access via Wi-Fi is deactivated on the mobile phone Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth 5 Set up 5 Internet 5 Search hotspots

# The mobile phone is listed in the Internet device manager: select the mobile phone with the Wi-Fi symbol.

# The mobile phone is not listed in the Internet device manager: select Search hotspots.

# Select the network.

# Log in to the Wi-Fi network (/ page 325). Setting up an Internet connection via Blue tooth Requirements:

R The mobile phone supports the Bluetooth profile PAN (Personal Area Network). R The mobile phone is connected to the multi media system via Bluetooth (/ page 373). Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth 5 Set up 5 Internet

# The mobile phone is listed in the Internet device manager: select the mobile phone with the Bluetooth symbol \.

# The mobile phone is not listed in the Internet device manager: select Search hotspots.

# Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth .

% If a new mobile phone is connected using Bluetooth, this is also used for the tele phone application. The Internet connection via Bluetooth is restric ted or does not function in the following cases:

R the mobile phone is switched off R the mobile phone network coverage is insuf ficient phone R mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile R the Bluetooth function on the multimedia system is switched off and the mobile phone is to be connected via Bluetooth R the Bluetooth function is switched off on the mobile phone and the mobile phone is to be connected via Bluetooth R neither the mobile phone network nor the mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a telephone and an Internet connection R the mobile phone has not been enabled for Internet access via Bluetooth Setting up an Internet connection using car telephony Requirements:

R For use with a mobile phone:

The mobile phone supports the Blue tooth SAP profile (SIM Access Profile)

(see manufacturer's operating instruc tions). The mobile phone is switched on. The mobile phone is only connected as an SAP telephone and not in the Hands-Free Profile. R Using a SIM card:

A SIM card is inserted in the card slot in the telephone module . The SIM card PIN is entered in the multi media system. Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth 5 Internet 5 Known hotspots:

# Select the car telephone from the list of the Internet device manager. Changing the configuration of the car tele phone for the Internet connection Requirements:

MBUX multimedia system 417 R For use with a mobile phone:

The mobile phone supports the Blue tooth SAP profile (SIM Access Profile)

(see manufacturer's operating instruc tions). The mobile phone is switched on. The mobile phone is only connected as an SAP telephone and not in the Hands-Free Profile. R For use with a SIM card:

A SIM card is inserted in the card slot in the telephone module . The SIM card PIN is entered in the multi media system. Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth 5 Internet 5 Known hotspots:

# Select Options S for the car telephone.

# Select Change configuration.

# To select the predefined access data of

% Only for connections using the Bluetooth

# Select Ja (Yes). 418 MBUX multimedia system the mobile phone network provider: select Change provider settings.

# Check the access data in the overview. If the mobile phone network provider is rec ognised correctly, the correct settings are already entered. If the settings cannot be fil led automatically, a list appears for manual selection of a mobile phone network pro vider.

# To manually set the access data of the mobile phone network provider: select the desired mobile phone network provider from the list.

% If no mobile phone network providers are recognised, empty fields appear for setting options which you should fill manually.

# Confirm the saving of the changes.

% To avoid possible additional costs, set the access data in the configuration settings, e.g. the Roaming permitted option, accord ing to your data tariff. You can contact your mobile phone network provider to obtain the precise access data. SAP profile: if you use a mobile phone to provide the mobile hotspot for the vehicle, this telephone will no longer have any teleph ony and Internet functions and it cannot receive any more mobile phone data. To con tinue to use Internet functions on the mobile phone, you can connect it with the vehicle hotspot. In this way, the mobile phone accesses its own mobile phone data again, albeit using Wi-Fi. For this reason, to avoid possible additional costs, switch off the automatic download of software updates via Wi-Fi on your mobile phone. Establishing an Internet connection Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps

# For example, select z Browser.

% The multimedia system usually establishes the Internet connection automatically. If the multimedia system is not connected to the Internet, the Internet connection is estab lished when an Internet application is used.

% The availability of web browsers is country-

dependent. Cancelling Internet access permission for a mobile phone Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth 5 Set up 5 Internet

# Select options S next to the name of the mobile phone. Connection status Connection status overview Depending on the connection status, the follow ing symbols can appear on the central display in the status line:

R : a Wi-Fi device is selected as hotspot. R \: a Bluetooth device is selected as hot

# Select Delete configuration. spot. R 4G + double arrow symbol: the communica Web browser tion module is selected as hotspot. R Reception field strength symbol: reception field strength of the communication module or the device selected as hotspot Displaying the connection status Multimedia system:

4 5 Settings 5 System

# Select Internet and Bluetooth. The status information appears in the upper graphic area of the central display. R When connected via Wi-Fi, a Bluetooth device or a car telephone, the device name and the approximate data volume transmit ted is displayed. The exact values can be requested from your mobile phone network provider. R In the case of a connection via the communi cation module the following status informa tion can be shown:

Type of network

Status (online, offline, data volumes avail able or used, limited service)

Calling up a web page

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. MBUX multimedia system 419 Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 z Calling up a new web page

# Select .

# Entering a web address

# Select .

% The function is country-dependent.

% Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion. Calling up a website from the browser his tory

# To call up the previous or next page from the history: select X or Y. 420 MBUX multimedia system Web browser overview 1 Search 2 Previous website 3 Options 4 Bookmarks 5 To refresh/stop Calling up web browser options Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 z Browser 5 Z The following functions are available:

R Bookmarks R Options with the settings:

Browser settings

- Delete browser data

# Select an option.

# Change the settings. Calling up the web browser settings Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 z Browser 5 Z 5 Browser settings

# To switch one of the displayed functions on: activate the display button.

# To switch one of the displayed functions off: deactivate the display button. Deleting Internet history Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 z Browser 5 Z 5 Browser data

# Select one of the options shown. Managing bookmarks Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 z Browser

# Select ?. Selecting a bookmark

# Select an entry. Creating a bookmark

# Select Add current page to bookmarks. The bookmark is created. Editing a bookmark

# Select the pen symbol in top, right-hand cor

# Select the pen symbol behind a bookmark ner. again.

# Enter the name.

# Select a on the input keyboard. R A fast Internet connection for data transmis Internet Radio overview sion free of interference. Deleting a bookmark

# Select the recycle bin symbol behind a book

% The functions and services are country-

dependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre. MBUX multimedia system 421 Multimedia system:

4 5 Radio

# Select TuneIn Radio. The Internet Radio menu appears. The last station set starts playing.

% The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception. mark.

# Select Yes. Closing the browser Multimedia system:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 z Browser

# Select . TuneIn radio Calling up Internet Radio Requirements:

R There is an account on https://

www.mercedes.me. R The Internet Radio service is activated. R The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. 1 Additional information on the current station 2 Internet Radio provider 3 Options 4 Favourites 5 Full screen 6 Controls playback 422 MBUX multimedia system 7 Channel list 8 Search Selecting and connecting Internet Radio sta tions Multimedia system:

4 5 Radio 5 TuneIn Radio

# Select =.

# Select a category.

# Select a station. The connection is established automatically. or

# Select the search field.

# Enter a station name.

% A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using Internet Radio. Saving/deleting an Internet Radio station as a favourite Multimedia system:

4 5 Radio 5 TuneIn Radio Saving favourites

# Select a station.

# Press f. Deleting favourites

# Select a station.

# Press . Setting Internet Radio options Multimedia system:

4 5 Radio 5 TuneIn Radio 5 Z 5 TuneIn The following options are available:

R Select stream: select the stream quality R Login to TuneIn account: log in to your TuneIn user account R Log out of account: log out of your TuneIn user account

# Select an option. Showing the station list for the last category selected Multimedia system:

4 5 Radio 5 TuneIn Radio

# Press the cover of the current station. Depending on how the station was selected, a station list is shown. Media Information about media mode Information about supported formats and data storage media

& WARNING Risk of accident as a result of distraction There is a risk of being distracted.

# To avoid dangers, observe the warning notes in the 'Important safety notes"

section. See . The multimedia system supports the follow ing formats and data media:

FAT32, exFAT, NTFS Permissible file systems Permissible data carriers USB devices, iPod/iPhone, MTP devices, Bluetooth audio equipment Supported audio formats MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, FLAC, ALAC Supported video formats MPEG, AVI, DivX, MKV, MP4, M4V, WMV

% Observe the following notes:

R The multimedia system supports a total of up to 50,000 files. R Data storage media up to 2 TB are sup ported (32bit address space). R Due to the large variety of available music and video files regarding encod ers, sampling rates and data transfer rates, playback cannot be guaranteed. R Due to the wide range of USB devices available on the market, playback cannot be guaranteed for all USB devices. R Videos up to FullHD (1920x1080) are supported. R Copy-protected music and video files or DRM (Digital Rights Management) encrypted files cannot be played back. R MP3 players must support Media Trans fer Protocol (MTP). Information on copyright protection and trademarks Audio files which you create yourself (e.g. copies of data storage media you make yourself) are generally subject to copyright protection. In many countries, reproductions are not permitted without the prior consent of the copyright holder, even for private use. Make sure that you know about the applicable copyright regulations and that you comply with these. MBUX multimedia system 423 Manufactured under licence from Dolby Labora tories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and the double-D sym bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 424 MBUX multimedia system For DTS Patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under licence from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Tru Volume is a trademark of DTS, Inc.. DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype,

"Powered by Gracenote", MusicID and Playlist Plus are either registered trademarks or trade marks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. TIDAL and TIDAL logo are registered trademark of Aspiro AB in the European Union and other countries. Overview of the media menu 7 Full screen 8 Previous or next track and fast rewind or fast MBUX multimedia system 425 forward 9 Controls playback A Categories B Music search C Random playback D Timeline Connecting the data storage medium to the multimedia system Connecting USB devices

* NOTE Damage caused by high tempera tures High temperatures can damage USB devices.

# Remove the USB device after use and take it out of the vehicle. 1 Album cover 2 Active media source 3 Active data storage device and current track number/track in playback list 4 Repeat 5 Track and artist 6 Settings Vehicles with cup holders (example) The multimedia connection unit is found in the centre console stowage compartment and has two type C USB ports. Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are two more USB ports in the stowage compartment under the armrest. The charging capacity of the USB ports is at least 5 V (3 A) and, depending on the vehicle equip ment, a maximum of 20 V (5 A). 426 MBUX multimedia system

# Connect the USB device to the USB port.

% When connecting several Apple devices Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Bluetooth simultaneously, pay attention to the order in which the devices are connected. The multi media system only connects with the device that is connected first. Additional Apple devices that are connected at the same time are only supplied with power. Searching for and authorising a Bluetooth audio device Requirements:

R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia system and audio equipment. R The audio equipment supports the Blue tooth audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP. R The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices. Authorising a new Bluetooth audio device

# Select Connect new device. Detected equipment is displayed in the device list.

# Select an audio device. Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

# If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment.

# Select Only as Bluetooth audio device. The Bluetooth audio equipment is connec ted with the multimedia system. Connecting previously authorised Bluetooth audio equipment

# Select a Bluetooth audio device from the list. The connection is being established. Starting media playback Requirements:

R A data storage medium is connected to the multimedia system. Multimedia system:

4 5 Media

# Select USB or Bluetooth as the media source. Controlling media playback Multimedia system:

4 5 Media

# To pause playback: select 8.

# To continue playback: select 6.

# To repeat a track: select :. For the repeat function there are the follow ing settings:

R Select once: the active playlist is repea ted. R Select twice: the current track is repea ted. Additional options for setting media play back R Select three times: the repeat function is deactivated.

# To play back tracks in random order:

select 9.

# To wind a track forwards or backwards:

tap on the desired point on the timeline.

# To select the next track: select .

# To select the previous track: select .

# To scroll through tracks quickly: press and

# To show the current track list: select the hold or . track image shown. Multimedia system:

4 5 Media Calling up additional options

# Select . The additional options are shown.

# Select an option. Music online Calling up music online Requirements:

R There is an account for the music streaming service. R A subscription for the music streaming service has been obtained. R The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. MBUX multimedia system 427

% The functions and services are country-

dependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Multimedia system:

4 5 Media

# Select Online music. With Online music you can listen to music via a streaming service. Music playback can be controlled with the Touch Control or by using the media application. Searching for music in online music Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Online music Searching for categories in online music The media content of the streaming provider can be scanned through in the category search. The available categories and the symbol for the cate gory search depend on the streaming provider.

# Select 5. The list of available categories appears. R A fast Internet connection for data transmis

# Select a category. sion free of interference. 428 MBUX multimedia system Keyword search in online music You can look for content using the keyword search with free text input.

# Select . A keyboard for character entry appears.

# Enter the term searched for.

% The more characters entered when using the keyword search, the more concrete the search results are.

# Select the desired entry from the result list. If the selected result is an album, song or a playback list then playback is started. If the selected result is a new category then this is opened in the search. Configuring online music settings Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Online music

# During media playback, press Z in the Media menu.

# Select a setting. Media search Notes about the search function in catego ries Under 5 you can search through all available media files. There are several categories availa ble for selection. The categories shown depend on the connected device and data format.

% The categories are available as soon as the entire media content has been read in and analysed. Starting a search in categories Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 5

# Select a category.

# Select and enter a search term. Using the keyword search Multimedia system:

4 5 Media You can look for content using the keyword search with free text input.

# Select . A keyboard for character entry appears.

# Enter the term searched for.

% The search begins with the first character entered. The more characters entered the more concrete the search results become.

# Select the desired entry from the result list. If the selected result is an album, song or a playback list then playback is started. If the selected result is a new category then this is opened in the search. Searching for a track according to mood Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 5 By searching in categories, you can find music tracks suitable for a mood.

# Select Mood. A grid with the various moods appears.

# Pull the controller to the desired position. The system searches for tracks that are suit able for the mood entered. Radio overview Setting the frequency band Radio Switching on the radio Multimedia system:

4 5 Radio

# Start the application on the multimedia sys tem home screen. The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last frequency band selected. MBUX multimedia system 429 Multimedia system:

4 5 Radio

# Select a frequency band or a favourite. Selecting a radio station Multimedia system:

4 5 Radio

# Swipe to the left or right on the control ele ment or select a radio station. Calling up the radio station list Multimedia system:

4 5 Radio

# Select 4. The station list appears.

# Swipe the station list up or down.

# Select a station. 1 Active frequency band 2 Station name or set frequency 3 Options 4 Full screen/DAB slideshow 5 Switching traffic announcements on/off 6 Station list 7 Search 430 MBUX multimedia system Searching for radio stations using station names or frequency entry Multimedia system:

4 5 Radio

# Select .

# Enter a station name or frequency.

# Select a station. Storing radio stations Multimedia system:

4 5 Radio

# Select a radio station.

# Select f. Editing favourites

# Press the station picture on the central dis Multimedia system:

4 5 Radio 5 Favourites play. The image is enlarged. Moving stations

Press The list of favourites appears.

# Press next to the station name.

# Select Move.

# Move the station to the new position. Calling up a slide show (FM/DAB radio mode) Multimedia system:

4 5 Radio The slide show displays additional information provided by the station as an image. This can include logos, album covers, music tracks, pro grammes, news or service information, for exam ple. Activating/deactivating the frequency fix function Multimedia system:

4 5 Radio 5 Z 5 General

# Switch Frequency fix on or off. If the function is activated, the set frequency is kept even if the reception is poor. Activating/deactivating traffic announce ments Multimedia system:

4 5 Radio

# Select .. The traffic information service is switched on

% When the traffic information service is switched on, . is blue. Setting the traffic information service vol ume increase Multimedia system:

4 5 Radio 5 Z 5 Sound

# Select Navigation and traffic announce-

ments.

# Set a value for Traffic announc. vol. increase. TV Switching to TV mode Multimedia system:

4 5 Media

# Select TV. Displaying radio text Multimedia system:

4 5 Radio 5 Z 5 General

# Switch Radio text information on or off. The TV picture appears. If available, the channel and programme information is dis played. If the vehicle is travelling faster than 5 km/h the television picture is hidden from the driver. If available, the channel and pro gramme information is continuously dis played.

# To show a TV programme on a full screen: tap on the preview picture. MBUX multimedia system 431 TV mode overview 1 Preview image 2 Features of the TV channel and the current programme 3 Start and finish times of the current pro gramme, graphic showing the remaining broadcast time 4 Channel name 432 MBUX multimedia system 5 Options 6 Shows the electronic programme preview

(EPG) 7 Selects the previous or next TV channel from 3 Audio languages available 4 Subtitles available 5 TV channel is encrypted the channel list 8 Full screen 9 Channel list A Searches for a TV channel B Programme information Overview of symbols 1 TV standard 2 Channel fix active Open lock: TV channel can be decrypted with the currently connected CI+ module Showing or hiding full screen

# To show: press the preview picture.

# To hide: press G in the central display. The TV menu appears. Selecting TV channels Selecting TV channels from the menu Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 TV

# Press or on the central display. The TV tuner sets the previous/next channel from the channel list. Selecting TV channels from the channel list Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 TV

# Select in the 4 menu.

# Select a TV channel. The TV tuner selects the channel from the channel list.

# Press the preview picture.

# To search for a TV channel: select the search bar next to (/ page 431).

# Enter the first characters.

# Select the TV channel from the channel list.

% Further information on the search bar

(/ page 434). Selecting a TV channel from the favourites Requirements:

R The TV channel is stored. Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 TV

# Select 4 in the menu (/ page 431).

# Select Presets.

# Select the TV channel. Selecting TV channels in the background Requirements:

R The navigation system is active, for example R TV mode is switched on in the background and the sound from the selected TV channel can be heard

# Press or on the central display. The TV tuner sets the previous/next channel from the channel list. Displaying current programme information for the selected channel (EPG) Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 TV 5 EPG displays the following information (if availa ble):

R Broadcast times R Names of the current and upcoming pro grammes

# Select a programme name with r. The programme information is displayed.

# To scroll: swipe up or down.

# To leave the programme information dis play: select q. Function of the channel fix setting Channel fix is switched on The channel is not changed. This is useful if, for example, you drive the vehicle through reception regions that overlap. It prevents frequent switch ing back and forth between channels. The FIX indicator is displayed after the name of the TV channel. Channel fix is switched off Depending on reception quality, the TV tuner automatically switches to an alternative channel with the same programme content but better reception. Using this function, the best possible television picture can be found, regardless of the reception quality. MBUX multimedia system 433 Activating/deactivating channel fix Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 TV 5 Z 5 General

# Select General settings.

# Switch Station fix on or off. When the option is switched on, the display button is activated. Switching the country-specific character set for the TV channel on/off Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 TV 5 Z 5 General

# Select General settings.

# Switch Country-specific character set on or off. When the option is switched on, a country-

specific character set is used for the display. When the option is switched off, the charac ter set transmitted by the currently set TV channel is used for the display. 434 MBUX multimedia system The respective TV channel is responsible for the transmission of the channel-dependent character set. Favourites Channel list overview The TV tuner shows the current programme on the digital TV channels or radio stations with adequate reception in its own channel list. The order of the channel lists is alphabetical or country-specific. The TV tuner requires a short amount of time to update the information. The channel lists show the following information:

R receivable channel names R programme title The information is shown under the following conditions:

R it is broadcast by the digital channel R the reception conditions are adequate Overview of TV programmes (favourites) You can create up to 100 digital TV channels in the presets. For quick-access you can save TV channels as favourites. Storing TV channels Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 TV Adding a TV channel to favourites

# Select a TV channel.

# Select f. Moving a TV station within favourites

Press The list of favourites appears.

# Press next to the station name.

# Select Move.

# Move the station to the new position. Removing a TV channel from favourites

# Select a TV channel.

# Select . TV programme Setting the TV audio language Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 TV 5 Z 5 General

# Select Audio/subtitles.

# Select one of the available audio languages r under the Audio language category.

# Select one of the available options for the selected audio language. The selected audio language, e.g. French, will be kept until the multimedia system is switched off. When you switch on the multimedia system again, the system language is loaded as the audio language. If this is not available, the audio language that appears at the beginning of the list is loaded. Setting the TV subtitles Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 TV 5 Z 5 General

# Select Audio/subtitles.

# Select the available languages r under the Subtitles category.

# Select one of the available options for the selected language. The selected language, e.g. French, will be kept until the multimedia system is switched off. When you switch on the multimedia system again, the system language is loaded as the language. If this is not available, the language that appears at the beginning of the list is loaded.

# To show no subtitles: switch Activate off. Teletext Teletext overview Teletext pages are located between page 100 and page 899. A dynamic teletext page consists of several sub pages. Information on MHEG-5 digital teletext:

R Digital teletext is only available in some countries, e.g. the UK and New Zealand R Interactive multimedia applications such as weather forecasts, news reports and sport results are available R It may take some time before all the pages load Showing teletext Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 TV 5 Z 5 General 5 Teletext

# To switch to page selection: switch between number entry and selection using the arrow button with and 123.

# To call up a side: enter the numbers in quick succession. or

# Select the arrow buttons.

# To return to the TV programme: select TV. MBUX multimedia system 435 MHEG-5 digital teletext Apart from the functions described above, addi tional options can be used.

# To call up data content using colours:

select a colour.

# To move back a level: select a list symbol. Picture settings Selecting picture settings for the TV Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 TV 5 Z 5 General 5 Video settings

# To set the picture format: activate one of the Automatic, 4:3, 8:3, 16:9, 21:9 or Zoom display buttons. The brightness is automatically set. 436 MBUX multimedia system HD programmes Receiving encrypted HD programmes

* NOTE Damage to the CI+ module and Smart Card The CI+ module is designed for use in the home. The CI+ module can overheat and be damaged by continuous exposure to high outside temperatures.

# Make sure that the CI+ module is not subject to high temperatures for exten ded periods of time. If the CI+ module is damaged, no encrypted channels can be received. A CI+ module (Common Interface Module), which is not included in the scope of delivery, is used to decrypt HD programmes according to the CI+ standard. In some countries, an additional smart card is required, which is inserted into the CI+ module

(see the manufacturer's operating manual). The CI+ module is connected in the CI+ box in the glove compartment.

# To insert the smart card in the CI+ mod ule: if required (country-dependent), insert the smart card into the CI+ module slot. Encrypted HD programmes can be received according to the CI+ standard.

% The CI+ box is designed for operation at temperatures between 0 C and 65 C. At operating temperatures that are higher or too low a message appears in the multime dia system and the CI+ module is switched off automatically. If the CI+ module is switched off, no encrypted channels can be received.

% If a CI+ module is connected, Card status reminder is switched on (/ page 436)and the ignition is switched off, the Alert: CI+

card is still in the vehicle. message appears in the central display. Calling up the CI+ module menu Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 TV Switching the reminder of a connected CI+

module on or off

# Select Z.

# Select General settings.

# Switch the Card status reminder option on or off.

% You need the subscription menu to extend the subscription, for example. Further information can be found in the man ufacturer's operating instructions. Calling up the CI+ menu

# Select CI+ module.

# Select Open menu. The subscription number can be shown in the menu, for example. The content of the menu depends on the manufacturer of the CI

+ module.

# To show the version number: select Ver-

sion info..

# To reset the TV tuner: select Reset TV.

# To restart the CI+ module: if playback is experiencing interference you can try and resolve the problem using Restart CI+. Sound Tone settings Information about the sound system The sound system has a total output of 125 W and is equipped with nine speakers. It is availa ble for all functions in the radio and media modes. Calling up the sound menu Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound

# Select one of the functions shown to make settings. Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set tings Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound

# Set Treble, Mid or Bass. Activating/deactivating loudness adjust ment Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound The loudness adjustment compensates for dif fering degrees of loudness when changing between audio sources and within an audio source. The degree of adjustment can be selected from several levels. The adjustment function can also be deactivated.

# Switch on Loudness and select an available level or switch off Loudness. MBUX multimedia system 437 Adjusting the balance/fader Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Z 5 Sound Adjusting the balance

# Move the volume distribution between the right and left sides of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speak ers on the left and right sides in the vehicle. Adjusting the fader

# Move the volume distribution between the front and rear of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speak ers in the front and rear of the vehicle. Burmester 3D-surround sound system Information about the Burmester 3D-sur round sound system The Burmester surround sound system has a total output of 710 W and is equipped with 15 438 MBUX multimedia system speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. Calling up the sound menu in the Burmester 3D-surround sound system Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Z 5 Burmester

# Select one of the functions shown to make settings. Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settings on the Burmester 3D-surround sound sys tem Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Z 5 Burmester 5 Equaliser

# Set Treble, Mid or Bass. Activating/deactivating loudness adjust ment in the Burmester 3D-surround sound system Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Z 5 Burmester The loudness adjustment compensates for dif fering degrees of loudness when changing between audio sources and within an audio source. The degree of adjustment can be selected from several levels. The adjustment function can also be deactivated.

# Switch on Loudness and select an available level or switch off Loudness. Adjusting the balance/fader in the Burmester 3D-surround sound system Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Z 5 Burmester 5 Balance and Fader Adjusting the balance

# Move the volume distribution between the right and left sides of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speak ers on the left and right sides in the vehicle. Adjusting the fader

# Move the volume distribution between the front and rear of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speak ers in the front and rear of the vehicle. Selecting a sound profile in the Burmester 3D-surround sound system Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Z 5 Burmester

# Select a sound profile. Adjusting the sound focus in the Burmester 3D-surround sound system Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Z 5 Burmester

# Select a position for the sound focus or All seats. Burmester high-end 4D surround sound system Information on the Burmester high-end 4D surround sound system The Burmester high-end 4D surround sound system has a total output of 1750 watts and is equipped with 31 speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. Calling up the sound menu in the Burmester high-end 4D surround sound system Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Z 5 Burmester Adjusting sound settings

# Select one of the functions shown to make settings. Adjusting the intensity of bass vibrations

# In the 4D sound menu, slide the control to set the intensity of bass vibrations Adjusting the treble, mid-range and bass set tings on the Burmester high-end 4D sur round sound system Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Z 5 Burmester 5 Equaliser

# Set Treble, Mid or Bass. Activating/deactivating loudness adjust ment in the Burmester high-end 4D sur round sound system Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Z 5 Burmester The loudness adjustment compensates for dif fering degrees of loudness when changing between audio sources and within an audio source. The degree of adjustment can be selected from several levels. The adjustment function can also be deactivated.

# Switch on Loudness and select an available level or switch off Loudness. MBUX multimedia system 439 Adjusting the balance/fader in the Burmester high-end 4D surround sound system Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Z 5 Burmester 5 Balance and Fader Adjusting the balance

# Move the volume distribution between the right and left sides of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speak ers on the left and right sides in the vehicle. Adjusting the fader

# Move the volume distribution between the front and rear of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speak ers in the front and rear of the vehicle. 440 MBUX multimedia system Adjusting the seat-based sound optimisation in the Burmester high-end 4D surround sound system Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Z 5 Burmester 5 VIP seat

# Select a seat for sound optimisation. or

# Select All seats. Selecting the sound profile in the Burmester high-end 4D surround sound system Multimedia system:

4 5 Media 5 Burmester 5 Sound profiles

# Select a sound profile. MBUX high-end Rear Seat Entertainment System Operating safety

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects such as headphones/headsets or external audio/video sources are not secured in the vehicle interior, they can be flung around and hit vehicle occupants.

# Always stow these items or similar objects carefully so that they cannot be flung around, for example in a lockable vehicle stowage compartment. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

% Ventilation must not be impeded by covering the ventilation openings with items (such as newspaper, table-cloths, clothes, curtains, etc).

% No naked flame sources (such as lighted candles), shall be placed on apparatus. Rear Seat Entertainment System overview The high-end Rear Seat Entertainment System includes:

R Two rear displays 1 behind the head restraints of the front seats R A connection jack each for corded head phones R Two USB ports for charging USB devices

(/ page 135), Bluetooth headphones, for example. R Two ports for HDMI mini Rear displays Overview of the rear displays Vehicle equipped with passenger bench seat:

in the electronics compartment in the rear-

compartment centre console Vehicle equipped with electrically adjusted outer rear seats: in the stowage compart ment in the rear armrest You can operate the high-end Rear Seat Enter tainment System using the rear display or the MBUX Voice Assistant. Depending on the equipment you can operate the high-end Rear Seat Entertainment System:

R on the rear displays R with the MBUX rear tablet R with the MBUX Remote app R via the MBUX Voice Assistant MBUX multimedia system 441 The rear displays are fitted with touchscreens. Further information on operating touchscreens

(/ page 293). When the rear door is opened, the welcome screen appears. Nearly all MBUX multimedia system functions are also supported on the Rear Seat Entertain ment System. Settings for the driver or driving assistance systems as well as some system set tings are however not possible. External user interfaces, e.g. Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot be used on the rear displays. Contents of the Digital Owner's Manual can only be called up on the MBUX multimedia system. Switching a rear display on/off

# Touch the touch sensor on the rear display. The rear display is switched on or off. 1 Port for corded headphones with stereo jack, 3.5 mm stereo (3-pin) or for headset with microphone (4-pin) The rear compartment displays are located behind the head restraints of the front seats. 442 MBUX multimedia system Home screen overview (rear display) 5 Displays the status line, e.g. connection sta R Corded headphones via a 3-pin stereo jack, R A headset with microphone via a 4-pin stereo 3.5 mm jack

% The headphones are not in the scope of delivery for the Rear Seat Entertainment System. You can obtain headphones from Mercedes-

Benz Customer Solutions or in a specialist shop (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

% The function of wireless headphones can be impaired by other radio-based electronic devices, such as mobile phones, for exam ple. tus, time 6 Sets climate control, e.g. on the right 7 Calls up the home screen 8 Opens application, including Quick-access 9 Audio playback display A Adjusts the volume Headphones Headphones overview (Rear Seat Entertain ment System)

& WARNING Risk of injury due to high vol ume from headphones High volumes may damage your hearing.

# Make sure that the volume is set at a pleasant level. The following external headphones can be con nected to each rear display:

R Bluetooth headphones Example user 1 Calls up user profile settings and changes 2 Uses the global search 3 Calls up the multiseat control menu (pull down) 4 Calls up favourites MBUX multimedia system 443 Function of the LED displays (handset) Example: connection of corded headphones with a 3-pin stereo jack, 3.5 mm 1 Audio L (audio signal for left channel) 2 Audio R (audio signal for right channel) 3 Earth Handset Overview of the handset The handset is only available in the rear com partment of vehicles with the Business teleph ony equipment. 1 LED displays 2 Keypad 3 Volume settings 4 Micro USB port 5 Headphone jack 444 MBUX multimedia system The LED displays on the handset have the following meanings:

Display Meaning 5 6

"Battery discharged" display

"Battery charge status" display Handset functions Display Meaning 1 2 The handset is operational. The display flashes:

R Connecting call R Incoming call R Active call on the multimedia system The call can also be transferred to the handset. The display lights up continuously:

R Active call on the handset. 3 is lit up The handset is muted. No acoustic signal sounds for incoming calls. 4 is lit up The handset microphone is switched off. The buttons on the handset have the follow ing functions:

Button Function 1 R Answers an incoming call R Transfers an existing call to the R Press briefly twice: redials handset number R Press briefly: switches the handset between a call on hold and an active call R Press and hold: switches to a conference call with the call on hold and an active call 2 R Rejects an incoming call R Ends an existing call Button Function 3 4 R Mutes the handset when there R Activates voice recognition of the connected mobile phone

(with Hands-Free Profile) R During an active call on the handset: activates hands-free mode is no active call R Switches off the microphone when a call is active No private information is displayed in the multimedia system:

R Incoming calls and messages are made anonymous R Contacts and messages in the connected mobile phone/SIM card are not shown 5 MBUX multimedia system 445 Charging the handset Switching the handset on/off

# To switch on: press and hold the 6 but ton until the LED displays light up

(/ page 443).

# To switch off: press and hold the ~ but ton until the LED displays go out

(/ page 443).

% The handset is switched on and off automati cally when it is in the bracket. Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats

# Fold down the rear armrest.

# Press release catch 1 and swing the cover of the armrest upwards.

# Place the handset in the drawer. 446 MBUX multimedia system

# Press drawer back until it engages. The handset is charged.

% The handset can also be charged using the micro USB port.

% You cannot replace the rechargeable battery yourself. Please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to do this. Rear seats Adjusting the rear seats on the Rear Seat Entertainment System Rear Seat Entertainment System:

4 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort Positioning seats

# Select Seat positioning.

# Position the seat and, for example, adjust the inclination of the seat backrest and the height of the head restraints.

# To save settings: select M.

# Select one of the preset position buttons 1 or 2. Adjusting the air cushions.

# In the corresponding menu, adjust the air cushions for Lumbar or Side bolsters. Setting the seat heating

# Select Seat climate control.

# Press Seat heating repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off. Setting the seat heating balance

# Select Seat climate control.

# Select Seat heating balance.

# Adjust the heat distribution for the desired seat. Activating/deactivating the panel heating For this function, the seat heating must be switched on.

# Select Seat climate control.

# Select Panel heating.

# Switch the function for the desired seat on or off. When panel heating is switched on, the armr ests, the centre panels on the doors and the centre console are heated. Adjusting the neck warmer For this function, the seat heating must be switched on.

# Select Seat climate control.

# Switch Neck warmers on or off.

# Adjust the neck warmer for the desired seat. Selecting the massage programme for the rear seats Rear Seat Entertainment System:

4 5 Comfort 5 Massage

# Select a massage programme.

% To the overview of massage programmes

(/ page 107).

# To start a massage: select for the required rear seat.

# To set the massage intensity: switch High intensity on or off .

# Select to start the massage.

Resetting rear seat settings Rear Seat Entertainment System:

4 5 Comfort 5 Seat comfort

# Select Reset.

# Select Z for the desired seat. The settings for the selected seat are reset. Setting climate control for the rear passenger compartment (Rear Seat Enter tainment System) Sets the airflow

# Select the temperature display at the lower edge of the rear display.

# Set the airflow. Sets the temperature

# Select the temperature display at the lower edge of the rear display.

# Set the temperature. Setting the air distribution

# Select the temperature display at the lower edge of the rear display.

# Select P or O for the left or right seat. P The air is routed through the centre and side air vents. O The air is routed through the footwell and side air vents. Controlling the rear climate control automat ically

# Select AUTO. Rear climate control is controlled automati cally. Deactivating rear climate control

# Select REAR OFF. Rear climate control is deactivated. MBUX multimedia system 447 If available other climate control functions are available:

R Air quality R Stationary heater R Pre-entry climate control Starting ENERGIZING comfort in the rear compartment Requirements:

R The ignition is switched on. Rear Seat Entertainment System:

4 5 Comfort 5 ENERGIZING COMFORT Starting the programme

# Select a programme.

# Select Start for the desired rear seat.

% If, during an active programme, a function requirement is no longer met, a correspond ing message appears. The active programme is cancelled. 448 MBUX multimedia system

% Additional information on the programmes

(/ page 331).

# Select a region of the body.

# Select to stop playback of the tip. Configuring a programme

# Select a programme.

# Select Settings.

# Switch the functions included in the pro gramme on or off. Setting the running time

# Select a programme.

# Select Settings.

# Select the desired duration. Starting the training programme

# Select Training.

# Select a programme. The programme starts.

# To activate fragrancing for training: select Air freshener. Starting tips

# Select Tips. Adjusting the ambient lighting in the rear compartment Rear Seat Entertainment System:

4 5 Comfort 5 Ambient lighting Setting the colour

# Select Colour.

# Set the desired colour or colour combination.

% There are 64 colours and different colour combinations available. Adjusting the brightness

# Select Brightness.

# Adjust the brightness. Activating the brightness for zones

# Select Brightness.

# Activate Brightness zones. The Emphasis, Ambient and Impression zones can be set separately.

% The Silhouette zone can also be set in vehi cles with active ambient lighting. Activating effects

# Select Effects.

# Activate the desired effect.

% Further information on effects (/ page 151) Configuring the adaptive rear compartment light Rear Seat Entertainment System:

4 5 Comfort 5 Adaptive rear lighting Displaying information on lighting modes

# Select Info. Selecting lighting mode You can activate one option for the left and right rear seats respectively or for the whole rear passenger compartment.

# Select Light modes.

# Activate a light mode, e.g. Reading light. Configuring light mode The following options are available:

R Work light: the grab handle lighting and rear interior lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will go on. R Reading light: the grab handle lighting will go on. The size and position of the light cone can be adjusted individually. R Two zone light: the grab handle lighting is shared between two zones. Spot and back ground lighting can be adjusted. R Interior light: the grab handle lighting and rear interior lamps on both sides of the vehi cle will go on. R Lounge light: the grab handle lighting on both sides of the vehicle will go on.

# Select the pen symbol.

# For all lighting modes: set the colour tem perature and the brightness.

# For the reading light: also set the size of the light cone and move the light cone.

# For two-zone lighting: also select the Light cone or Background options.

# For the Light cone option, also set the size of the light cone and move the light cone.

# For interior lighting and lounge light: also activate the Biodynamic light option. The biodynamic light controls the colour tem perature. The colour temperature will be adjusted automatically over the course of the day. Saving a lighting mode as a favourite

# Select Store on rear favourites button. For the Interior light and Lounge light light modes, the prompt also appears asking whether the left or right rear seat should be selected. Resetting lighting mode settings

# Select Reset.

% Brightness and colour temperature of the grab handle lighting and rear lighting can be adjusted individually via the MBUX rear tab let and the app. MBUX multimedia system 449 If the vehicle is fitted with the MBUX Interior Assistant, adaptive rear interior lighting can be controlled with gestures. With a gesture towards an empty neighbouring seat, for example, the grab handle lighting on the cor responding side of the vehicle will go on. Selecting system settings in the rear com partment Rear Seat Entertainment System:

4 5 Settings 5 System Adjusting the brightness

# Select Display brightness.

# Adjust the brightness. Connecting a device in the device manager

# Select Device manager.

# Select a device that is to be connected. Headphones and headsets are connected with the rear display. Mobile phones and other devices are con nected with the multimedia system. 450 MBUX multimedia system Setting the sensitivity for the rear display

# Select Touch Sensitivity.

# Select an option. Showing system information

# Select System information. Navigation Switching on navigation in the rear compart ment Rear Seat Entertainment System:

4 5 Navigation The map appears and shows the current vehicle position.

# Select an option in the navigation menu

(/ page 335). In principle, you can use the multimedia system functions on the Rear Seat Entertainment Sys tem also. The following options are available on the rear display, for example:

R Enter the destination as a POI or address, for example (/ page 336). R The destination can be adopted by the multi media system or shared with another seat. R Set the map scale (/ page 361). R Calculate the route (/ page 341). Route settings and route options, e.g. toll roads, can be selected for the route. You can add and manage intermediate desti nations for the route planning (/ page 345). Alternative routes are available. R Route and destination information is shown during route guidance. R The Live Traffic Information service shows traffic incidents, traffic flow information and warning message symbols. This option is not available in all countries. Overview of telephone functions in the rear compartment If the vehicle is equipped with the telephony fea ture in the rear compartment the functions of the multimedia system are, in principle, available on the Rear Seat Entertainment System. The following functions are available on the rear display:

R Telephone operation (/ page 381) R Conducting calls with several participants

(/ page 382) R Calling up Contacts (/ page 383) Contact search using initials, names or telephone numbers

- Displaying contact details

- Using the keypad R Calling up the Call list and making a call

(/ page 386) R Text message Reading messages and using the read-

aloud function (/ page 387) Calling a message sender (/ page 388)

- Deleting a message (/ page 389) R Alternatively, the Internet connection can be Services and web browsers Web browser overview (Rear Seat Entertain ment System) Depending on the country and the vehicle equip ment, a web browser can be called up on the rear display. The Internet connection can be established using the communication module, Bluetooth or Wi-Fi. For further information on setting up an Internet connection:

R Via communication module (/ page 414) R Via Wi-Fi (/ page 416) R Via Bluetooth (/ page 416) Calling up the web browser (Rear Seat Enter tainment System) Requirements:

R The vehicle is equipped with a permanently installed communication module . set up and established using Wi-Fi

(/ page 416). Rear Seat Entertainment System:

4 5 Mercedes me & Apps 5 z Browser

# Call up a page.

# To stop the web browser: select . The following functions are available:

R Calling up the web browser settings

(/ page 420) R Deleting browser data (/ page 420) R Managing bookmarks Media Information about media mode in the rear compartment The Rear Seat Entertainment System has two HDMI mini connections which can be used by both rear displays. Additional information on the connections (/ page 440). MBUX multimedia system 451 There are two USB ports for charging USB devi ces (/ page 135), Bluetooth headphones, for example. Data storage media for playing back content on the Rear Seat Entertainment System are connec ted via the USB ports for the multimedia system in the stowage compartment in the centre con sole (/ page 425). Data storage media supported by the Rear Seat Entertainment System:

R USB devices R iPhone or iPod Apple CarPlay is not supported. R MTP devices R Android devices that are used as MTP devi ces Android Auto is not supported. R Bluetooth audio equipment Authorisation of a Bluetooth audio device is carried out on the multimedia system

(/ page 426) or on the Rear Seat Entertain ment System. 452 MBUX multimedia system The Rear Seat Entertainment System can access the files on the multimedia system. Further information about media mode

(/ page 422). The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multi media Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trade marks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licens ing LLC in the United States and other countries. Switching on media mode in the rear passenger compartment Requirements:

R A data storage medium is connected to the multimedia system. R A Bluetooth audio device is connected with the multimedia system. Rear Seat Entertainment System:

4 5 Media

# Select USB or Bluetooth.

% A possible audio source is Online music. To availability and pre-requirements

(/ page 427). The following functions are available:

R Controlling media playback (/ page 452) R Using the music search (/ page 428) R Using online search (/ page 427) R 5 Searching for media files using catego ries (/ page 428) R Calling up options (/ page 427) R Z Calling up the settings Controlling media playback in the Rear Seat Entertainment System Rear Seat Entertainment System:

4 5 Media

# To pause or continue playback: select or ;.

# To select the next or previous track:

select or .

# To scroll through tracks quickly: press and hold or .

# To wind a track forwards or backwards:

tap on the desired point on the timeline.

# To play back tracks in random order:

select 9.

# To repeat a track: select :. For the repeat function there are the follow ing options:

R Tap once: the active playlist is repeated. R Tap twice: the current track is repeated. R Tap three times: the repeat function is deactivated.

# To display a full screen: select the cover. Radio Radio text information R Z Setting options:

Switching to radio in the rear passenger compartment Rear Seat Entertainment System:

4 5 Radio

# Swipe left or right on the rear display. or

# Select a station with or .

% If the channel is changed on the multimedia system it changes also on the rear display.

# To set a frequency band: select a frequency band. The following functions are available:

R Searching for radio stations

(/ page 430) R Selecting from the station list (/ page 429) R Storing radio stations (/ page 430) R Calling up a slide show (/ page 430) R Switching options on or off using Z:

Frequency fix Traffic announcements TV mode Switching to TV mode in the rear passenger compartment Rear Seat Entertainment System:

4 5 Media 5 TV

# Select a channel with or .

% If the channel is changed on the multimedia system it changes also on the rear display.

# To show full screen: tap on the preview pic ture.

# To show the TV menu: select G. The following functions are available:

R Searching for a TV chan nel(/ page 432) for the selected TV channel (EPG)

(/ page 433) R Storing and managing TV channels

(/ page 434) R Showing current programme information

(/ page 438) MBUX multimedia system 453 Setting Audio language Setting Subtitles Switching Station fix on or off Displaying Teletext Selecting Video settings. Sound Overview of sound settings in the rear com partment The sound settings depend on which sound sys tem is available. Depending on the equipment installed, one of the following systems is supported:

R Sound system (/ page 437) R Burmester surround sound system R Burmester high-end 3D surround sound sys tem (/ page 439) Using the MBUX Voice Assistant R Activating online functionality on the multi media system R Using audible help functions 454 MBUX multimedia system Selecting sound settings in the rear compart ment Rear Seat Entertainment System:

4 5 Settings 5 System

# Select Sound.

# Select the sound settings. Switching Cabin Audio on/off and setting volumes Cabin Audio facilitates audio playback in the vehicle interior.

# Select .

# Select Media.

# Select USB or My USB.

# Switch the display button with the speaker symbol on or off.

# To set the volumes: move the control knob to the left or right on one of the scales and hold it until the desired volume is set. Requirements:

R The Voice Assistant wake-up call "Hey Mercedes" is switched on in the MBUX multi media system settings (/ page 288). R Online functionality offers the full range of functions. Using the MBUX Voice Assistant you can operate the MBUX Rear Seat Entertainment System using voice input. You can use vernacular sen tences for this. The Voice Assistant recognises different voices, learns and can thereby offer suitable suggestions.

# To activate the Voice Assistant: say the wake-up call "Hey Mercedes".

# Say a voice command, e.g. set station.

% You can activate and deactivate the Voice Assistant from different seats. Further information on the Voice Assistant:

R Conducting a dialogue (/ page 287) R Information on online functionality

(/ page 290) ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the driver display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service display using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases:

R mainly short-distance driving R when the engine is often left idling for long periods R in the event of frequent cold start phases R vehicles with a diesel particulate filter: in the event of frequently interrupted regenera tion of the diesel particulate filter Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions. You can obtain information concerning the serv icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Displaying the service due date On-board computer:

4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed.

# To exit the display: press the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic:

R Operating the on-board computer

(/ page 275). Maintenance and care 455 Information on regular maintenance work

* NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates Service work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle.

# Always observe the prescribed service intervals.

# Always have the prescribed service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on nor mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work will need to be performed more often if the vehi cle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsi bility as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more often than speci Battery disconnection periods Resetting the active bonnet

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain components in the engine compart ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.

# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. 456 Maintenance and care fied based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads. Examples of arduous operating conditions:

R regular city driving with frequent intermedi ate stops R mainly short-distance driving R frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces R when the engine is often left idling for long periods R operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. The tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur ther information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected.

# Display the service due date on the driver display and note it down before disconnect ing the battery (/ page 455). Engine compartment Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Operation of the active bonnet (pedestrian protection) In certain accident situations, the risk of injury to pedestrians can be reduced by the actuation of the active bonnet. The rear area of the engine bonnet is raised by approximately 80 mm. For the drive to the workshop, reset the actuated active bonnet yourself (/ page 456). After the active bonnet has been actuated, pedestrian protection may be limited. A qualified specialist workshop must re-instate the full functionality of the active bonnet.

# With your hand flat, push down active bonnet 1 in the area around the hinges on both sides (arrows). The engine bonnet must engage in position.

# If the active bonnet can be raised slightly at the rear in the area of the hinges, repeat the step until it engages correctly. Opening/closing the bonnet

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driv ing with the bonnet unlocked The bonnet may open and block your view.

# Never release the bonnet when driving.

# Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the bonnet The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the bon net's range of movement.

# Open or close the bonnet only when there is nobody in the bonnet's range of movement.

& WARNING Danger of burns when open ing the bonnet If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine com partment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service. Maintenance and care 457

& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts Components in the engine compartment may continue running or start up suddenly, even if the ignition is switched off. Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment:

# Switch the ignition off.

# Never reach into the danger zone sur rounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.

# Remove jewellery and watches.

# Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

& WARNING Risk of injury from touching components under voltage The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. Opens the bonnet 458 Maintenance and care

# Never touch components of the ignition system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain components in the engine compart ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.

# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers while the engine bon net is open When the engine bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage.

# Always switch off the windscreen wip ers and ignition before opening the engine bonnet.

# Pull on handle 1 twice. The bonnet is released and opens slightly. Closing the bonnet

* NOTE Damage to the bonnet If the bonnet is closed manually, there is a risk of dents.

# Do not close the bonnet manually.

# Lower the bonnet to a height of around 20 cm and then allow it to fall, applying a lit tle force as you let it go.

# If the bonnet can still be lifted slightly, open the bonnet again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly. Engine oil Checking the engine oil level using the on-

board computer Requirements:

R The engine has been warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed. The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style. Maintenance and care 459 On-board computer:

4 Service 5 Engine oil level One of the following messages will appear on the driver's display:

R Messung luft: measurement of the oil level is not yet possible.

# Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving. R OK and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the driver's display is green and is between "min" and "max": the oil level is cor rect. R Motorl nachfllen and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the driver's display is orange and is below "min":

# Add 1 l of engine oil. R Motorlstand reduzieren and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the driver's dis play is orange and is above "max":

# Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop. R For engine oil level switch on ignition:

# Switch on the ignition to check the engine oil level.

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart ment, it may ignite.

# Make sure that no engine oil is spilled R Engine oil level System inoperative: the sen next to the filler opening. sor is defective or not connected.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. R Engine oil level currently inoperative:

# Close the bonnet. Topping up engine oil

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain components in the engine compart ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.

# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

# Allow the engine to cool off and thor oughly clean the engine oil from compo nent parts before starting the vehicle.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi tives

# Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.

# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.

# Do not use additives. 460 Maintenance and care

# Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change.

* NOTE Damage caused by topping up too much engine oil Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter.

# Have excess engine oil removed at a qualified specialist workshop.

% Depending on the engine, the cap may be installed in the engine compartment in dif ferent locations. Checking the coolant level

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain components in the engine compart ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.

# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot If you open the cap, you could be scalded.

# Let the motor cool down before opening

# When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety glasses.

# Open the cap slowly to release pres coolant the cap. sure.

# Only have coolant checked or refilled at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Turn cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.

# Top up the engine oil.

# Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it engages.

# Check the oil level again (/ page 458). Topping up the windscreen washer system

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain components in the engine compart ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.

# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

& WARNING Danger of burns when open ing the bonnet If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine com partment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service. Maintenance and care 461

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

# Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

# Remove cap 1 by the tab, place on the edge of the filler opening and engage in place.

# Top up the washer fluid. Keeping the air-water duct free

# Keep the area between the bonnet and the windscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves. 462 Maintenance and care Cleaning and care Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power after washing the vehicle Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle.

# After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.

* NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer tain situations:

R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit uations:

# During towing

# In a car wash

* NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash

# Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions.

# Ensure there is sufficient ground clear ance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.

# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient. To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand:

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the HOLD function are deactivated. R the 360 Camera or the reversing camera is switched off. R the side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed. R the blower for the ventilation/heating is R the windscreen wiper switch is in position switched off. g. R the key is at a distance of at least 3 m away from the vehicle, otherwise the boot lid could open unintentionally. R in car washes with a conveyor system: neu tral i is engaged.

% In car washes with a conveyor system: if you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make sure the key is located in the vehicle. The park position j is other wise automatically engaged. Information on using a high-pressure cleaner R maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the

% If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.

& WARNING Risk of an accident when using high-pressure cleaners with round-

spray nozzles The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unex pectedly fail.

# Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with round-spray nozzles.

# Have damaged tyres or chassis parts replaced immediately. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol lowing when using a high-pressure cleaner:

R keep the key at least 3 m away from the vehi cle. Otherwise the boot lid could open unin tentionally. vehicle. R vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water tempera ture of the high-pressure cleaner must not exceed 60C. R observe the information on the correct dis tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper ating instructions. R do not point the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner directly at sensitive parts such as tyres, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sources and ventilation slots. Maintenance and care 463 Washing the vehicle by hand Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays.

# Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.

# Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.

# Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois. Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the bonnet. Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care Observe the notes on cleaning and care to avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driver assistance systems. Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. 464 Maintenance and care R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off R Only use car washes that correspond to the afterwards. latest engineering standards. R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by R Do not use car wash programmes with a final rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro leum ether or lighter fluid. hot wax treatment. R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polish R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp ing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax. cloth and clean water. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate rials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible. Matt finish R Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate rials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop. R Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels. In the event of paintwork damage:

R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. R Make sure the radar sensors function

(/ page 204). Notes on cleaning decorative foils Observe the notes on matt finish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matt finish paint work care" (/ page 463). They also apply to matt decorative foils. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage. Cleaning R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably. R If there is dirt on the finish or if the decora tive foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recom mended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash. Avoiding damage to the decorative foil R The service life and colouring of decorative foils are impaired by:

sunlight temperature, e.g. hot air blower

- weather conditions

stone chippings and dirt chemical cleaning agents oily products R Do not use polish on matt decorative foil. Polishing will have the effect of shining the foil-wrapped surface. R Do not treat matt or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif ferences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil after removing a decorative foil.

% Have work or repairs to decorative foils car ried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. in a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Notes on care of car parts

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windscreen wipers are switched on while the windscreen is being cleaned If the windscreen wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

# Always switch off the windscreen wip ers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades.

& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail pipe and tailpipe trims The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.

# Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. Maintenance and care 465

# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them. Observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehicle parts to avoid damage. Wheels/rims R Use water and acid-free wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and brake pads warm up and dry out. Windows R Clean windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-

based cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows. 466 Maintenance and care Wiper blades R Fold out the wiper blades and clean them using a damp cloth. R Do not clean the wiper blades too often. Exterior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Tailpipes R Clean with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and after washing the vehicle. R Do not use acidic cleaning agents. Trailer hitch R Remove traces of rust on the ball, e.g. with a wire brush. R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth. R After cleaning, oil or grease the ball head Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear lightly. bumper and in the radiator grille with a soft cloth and car shampoo. R Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch manufacturer's operating instructions. R When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain R Do not clean the ball neck with a high-pres a minimum distance of 30 cm. sure cleaner or solvent. Reversing camera and 360 Camera R Switch on the power supply or the ignition to open the front camera cover. R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens. R Do not use a high-pressure cleaner. Notes on care of the interior

& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol vent-based care products Care and cleaning products containing sol vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away.

# Do not use any care or cleaning prod ucts containing solvents to clean the cockpit.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from bleached seat belts Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident.

# Never bleach or dye seat belts. Observe the notes on cleaning and care to avoid vehicle damage. R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp R Do not use a microfibre cloth. Maintenance and care 467 Cloth seat covers R Clean with a damp microfibre cloth and 1%

soap solution and allow to dry. EASY-PACK boot box R Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use any alcohol-based thinners, petrol or abrasive cleaning agents. 80 C or exposing them to direct sunlight. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry seat belts by heating them to over Display R Switch off the display and let it cool down. R Clean the surface carefully with a microfibre cloth and a suitable display care product

(TFT/LCD). R Do not use any other agents. Plastic trim R Clean with a damp microfibre cloth. R For heavy soiling: use a care product recom mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate rials. R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come in contact with the plas tic trim. Real wood/trim elements R Clean with a microfibre cloth. cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: use a care product recom mended for Mercedes-Benz. polishes or waxes. Roof lining R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo. Carpet R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent rec ommended for Mercedes-Benz. Genuine leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth. R Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. R Do not use a microfibre cloth. DINAMICA seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth. 468 Breakdown assistance Emergency Removing the safety vest The safety vests are located in stowage spaces in the front door. Replace the safety vest in the following cases:

R the reflective strips are damaged or dirt on the reflective strips can no longer be removed R the maximum number of washes is exceeded R the fluorescence has faded

# Take the safety vest bag out of stowage

# Open the safety vest bag and pull out the space 1. safety vest.

% Safety vests can also be stored in the rear door stowage spaces. 1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature 3 Do not bleach 4 Do not iron 5 Do not tumble dry 6 Do not dry clean 7 This is a class 2 vest The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled in the following cases:

R if the safety vest is the correct size R the safety vest is fully closed whilst being worn Warning triangle Setting up the warning triangle Removing the warning triangle Breakdown assistance 469

# Fold side reflectors 1 upwards to form a tri angle and attach at the top using upper press-stud 2.

# Fold legs 3 down and out to the side. First-aid kit (soft sided)

# Push both sides of warning triangle holder 1 in the direction of the arrow and open it.

# Remove warning triangle 2. First-aid kit (soft sided) 1 is located on the right-hand side of the boot and is secured with Velcro strip 2.

 

 

470 Breakdown assistance Removing the fire extinguisher

# Remove the fire extinguisher from the stow age compartment. Flat tyre Notes on flat tyres

& WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tyre A flat tyre severely affects the driving charac teristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tyres without run-flat characteristics:

# Do not drive with a flat tyre.

# Change the flat tyre immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tyres with run-flat characteristics:

# Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres). In the event of a flat tyre, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equip ment:

R Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is pos sible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)

(/ page 471). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the tyre so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 472). R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 400). R All vehicles: change the wheel

(/ page 500).

* NOTE Damage to the stowage compart ment

# Keep the stowage compartment closed while the vehicle is moving.

# Pull handle 1 up and fold the cover for wards in the direction of the arrow. Notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)

& WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode Driving in emergency mode impairs the han dling characteristics of the vehicle.

# Do not exceed the permissible maxi mum speed of the MOExtended tyres.

# Avoid any abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres as well as driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle.

# Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice:

R banging noise R vehicle vibration R smoke which smells like rubber R continuous ESP intervention R cracks in the tyre sidewalls

# After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified special ist workshop with regard to their further use. Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning:

# The defective tyre must be replaced in Load condition Driving distance pos sible in emergency every case. Breakdown assistance 471 With MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. How ever, the tyre affected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tyre. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring sys tem: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure mon itoring system. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the driver's display, proceed as follows:

R Check the tyre for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes. Partially laden Fully laden mode 80 km 30 km The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h. If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, you can use a stand ard tyre as a temporary measure. TIREFIT kit storage location Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the stor age bag for the TIREFIT kit is located in the lug gage compartment or on the left side of the stowage net. Comply with the loading guidelines

(/ page 119). 472 Breakdown assistance

% You can find information on the power cate gory (LK) and/or electrical data on the back of the tyre inflation compressor:

R LK2 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perfora tion damage of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -20 C. At a distance of approximately 1 m to the tyre inflation compressor and approximately 1.6 m above the ground, the following sound pressure levels apply:

R Emissions sound pressure level LPA 83 dB (A) R Sound power level LWA 91 dB (A) The tyre inflation compressor is mainte nance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Using the TIREFIT kit Requirements:

R Tyre sealant bottle and tyre inflation com pressor (/ page 471). R TIREFIT sticker R Gloves (depending on the vehicle equipment)

& WARNING Risk of accident when using tyre sealant The tyre sealant may be unable to seal the tyre properly, especially in the following cases:

R there are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than damage previously men tioned. R the wheel rim is damaged. R you have driven at very low tyre pres sures or on a flat tyre.

# Do not drive on.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tyre sealant Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and cau ses irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep the tyre sealant away from children. Observe the following if you come into con tact with the tyre sealant:

# Rinse off the tyre sealant from your skin using water immediately.

# If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thor oughly rinse them using clean water immediately.

# If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thoroughly rinse out your mouth imme diately and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.

# Change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant immedi ately.

# If an allergic reaction occurs, seek med ical attention immediately.

* NOTE Overheating due to the tyre infla tion compressor running too long

# Do not run the tyre inflation compres sor for longer than ten minutes without interruption. Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor. Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a quali fied specialist workshop every five years.

# Do not remove any foreign objects which have entered the tyre.

# Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.

# Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. Breakdown assistance 473

# Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out of the tyre inflation compressor housing.

# Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 6 of tyre sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages.

# Place tyre sealant bottle 1 head downwards into recess 2 of the tyre inflation compres sor. 474 Breakdown assistance

# Remove the cap from valve 7 on the faulty

# Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7.

# Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your tyre. vehicle.

# Switch on the ignition.

# Switch on the tyre inflation compressor using the On/Off switch 3. The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pum ped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tyre inflation compres sor during this phase!

# Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a

# Pump up the tyre again. maximum of ten minutes. The tyre should then have attained a tyre pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/

29 psi). If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera ble to use clean water. If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy lene. If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained:

# Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.

# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose.

# Drive forwards or reverse very slowly for approximately 10 m. After a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/

29 psi).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being attained If the minimum tyre pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.

# Do not continue driving.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained:

# Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.

# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.

& WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tyres A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds.

# Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.

# Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant.

# Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant 80 km/h.

* NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant After use, excess tyre sealant may leak out from the filling hose.

# Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre sponsible disposal Tyre sealant contains pollutants.

# Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

# Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre inflation compressor and the warning triangle.

# Pull away immediately.

# Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure using the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being attained If the specified tyre pressure is not reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre seal ant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Breakdown assistance 475 The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.

# Do not continue driving.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Countries that have Mercedes-Benz Service24h: you will find a sticker with the tele phone number, e.g. on the Bpillar on the driver's side.

# Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pres sure table on the fuel filler flap for values.

# To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor. 476 Breakdown assistance

# To reduce the tyre pressure: press pres sure release button 1 next to manometer 2.

# When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tyre.

# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre.

# Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filling hose stays on the tyre sealant bot tle.

# Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work shop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there. Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat tery Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety sys tems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

R when braking R in the event of abrupt steering manoeu vres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions

# In the event of a short circuit or a simi lar incident, contact a qualified special ist workshop immediately.

# Do not drive on.

# Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. R Further information on ABS (/ page 205) R Further information on ESP (/ page 205) For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tes ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-

Benz. All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-

ion battery

& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec trostatic charge Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery.

# To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal All vehicles Risk of explosion. Breakdown assistance 477 vehicle body before handling the bat tery. The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance.

& WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid Battery acid is caustic.

# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.

# Do not lean over the battery.

# Do not inhale battery gases.

# Keep children away from the battery.

# Immediately rinse battery acid off thor oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat teries Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con tact a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corro sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear safety glasses. Keep children away. 478 Breakdown assistance Observe this Owner's Manual. Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time:

R Activate standby mode. R Alternatively: connect the battery to a bat tery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery. Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec tion point in the engine compartment.

* NOTE Damaging the battery through

& WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro overvoltage gen gas igniting When using a battery charger without a maxi mum charging voltage, the battery or the vehicle electronics may be damaged.

# Only use battery chargers with a maxi mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. All other vehicles When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec tion point in the engine compartment.

* NOTE Damaging the battery through overvoltage When using a battery charger without a maxi mum charging voltage, the battery or the vehicle electronics may be damaged.

# Only use battery chargers with a maxi mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. There is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when charging the battery if there is a short circuit or sparks start to form.

# Make sure that the positive terminal of the connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.

# Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.

# The described order of the battery clamps must be observed when con necting and disconnecting the battery.

# When giving starting assistance, always make sure that you only connect bat tery terminals with identical polarity.

# During starting assistance, you must observe the described order for con necting and disconnecting the jump lead.

# Do not connect or disconnect the bat tery clamps while the engine is running.

& WARNING Risk of explosion during charging process and starting assistance During the charging process and starting assistance, the battery may release an explo sive gas mixture.

# Avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking.

# Make sure there is sufficient ventila tion.

# Do not lean over a battery.

& WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro zen battery A discharged battery may freeze at tempera tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charg ing, battery gas can be released.

# Always allow a battery to thaw before charging it or performing starting assis tance. If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has fro zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, espe cially at low temperatures. It is recommended that you have a thawed bat tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. All vehicles Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel.

# Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine. Breakdown assistance 479 Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery:

R Only use undamaged jump lead/charging cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump lead/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start connec tion point. R The jump lead/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running. R Keep away from fire and naked flames. R Do not lean over the battery. Observe the additional following points when charging the battery:

R Only use battery chargers tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger's operating instruc tions before charging the battery.

* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine R Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. Starting assistance

# Open cover 1 of the positive contact. 480 Breakdown assistance Observe the additional following points during starting assistance:

R Starting assistance may only be provided using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Vehicles with a petrol engine: jump-start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold. Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery Preparing starting assistance/the charging process

# Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.

# Select transmission position j.

# Switch off the ignition and all electrical con sumers.

# Open the bonnet.

# Connect the positive contacts of the vehicles with the jump lead. Start with your own vehi cle first.

# Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.

# Connect negative terminal 2 of the donor battery to the earth point of your vehicle using the jump lead. Start with the donor vehicle first.

# Start the engine of your own vehicle.

# Let the engines run for several minutes.

# Before disconnecting the jump leads, switch on an electrical consumer in your own vehi cle, e.g. the rear window heater or the light ing. Charging the 12 V battery

# Connect the positive contacts of the vehicle and the charger with the charging cable. Start with the vehicle first.

# Connect the negative contact of the charger and earth point 2 on the vehicle with the charging cable. Start with the charger first.

# Start the charging process. When starting assistance has finished:

# First remove the jump lead from the earth point of your own vehicle and the negative pole of the donor battery, then remove the jump lead from the positive contacts of both vehicles. Always start with your own vehicle first.

# Close cover 1 of the positive contact. Further information can be obtained at a quali fied specialist workshop. When the charging process is complete:

# Remove the charging cable from earth point 2 on the vehicle and the negative contact of the charger first and then from the posi tive contacts on the vehicle and charger. Always start with the vehicle first.

# Close cover 1 of the positive contact. Replacing the 12 V battery

# Observe the notes on the 12 V battery

(/ page 476). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist Breakdown assistance 481 workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself:

R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery which meets the specific vehicle require ments. The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lith ium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lith ium-ion battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow fittings or terminal covers from the battery being replaced. R Make sure that the vent hose is always con nected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Fit any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape.

* NOTE Damage from automatic braking

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow 482 Breakdown assistance R Make sure that detachable parts are recon nected in the same way. Tow-starting or towing away Permitted towing methods If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer tain situations:

R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit uations:

# During towing

# In a car wash Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar systems

(/ page 272). Permitted towing methods Vehicles with automatic transmission Both axles on the ground Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h ing away incorrectly

# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away. Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the centre position with a steering wheel lock Towing with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company. 4MATIC vehicles Both axles on the ground Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Front axle raised Rear axle raised Front axle raised Rear axle raised No No No Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground

# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 482).

# Make sure that the battery is connected and charged. When the battery is discharged, the following actions cannot be performed:

R the engine cannot be started R the electric parking brake cannot be released or applied R the automatic transmission cannot be shifted to position i or j

% If the automatic transmission cannot be shif ted to position i or the driver's display in the instrument cluster does not show any thing, have the vehicle transported away

(/ page 484). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transporta tion.

* NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis tances The drivetrain could be damaged when tow ing at excessively high speeds or over long distances.

# A towing speed of 50 km/h must not

# A towing distance of 50 km must not be be exceeded. exceeded.

& WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy If the vehicle being tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass, the following situations can occur:

R the towing eye may become detached. R the car/trailer combination may swerve or even overturn.

# If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed Breakdown assistance 483 the permissible gross mass of your own vehicle. If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.

# Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden tification plate (/ page 562).

# Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door, otherwise the automatic transmission automatically shifts to position j.

# Fit the towing eye (/ page 485).

# Fasten the tow bar.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec tion of the tow bar

# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.

% You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer hitch.

# Release the electric parking brake.

* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive 484 Breakdown assistance

# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism

(/ page 74).

# Do not activate the HOLD function.

# Deactivate tow-away protection

(/ page 95).

# Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 215).

# Shift the automatic transmission to position i.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi ted safety-related functions during the towing process Safety-related functions are limited or no lon ger available in the following situations:

R the ignition is switched off. R the brake system or power steering sys tem is malfunctioning. R the energy supply or the on-board electri cal system is malfunctioning. When your vehicle is then towed away, signif icantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required.

# Use a tow bar.

# Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely, before towing the vehicle away. power If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged.

# Pull away slowly and smoothly. Loading the vehicle for transport

# Observe the notes on towing away

(/ page 483).

# Connect the tow bar to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle.

% You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer

# Shift the automatic transmission to position hitch. i.

% The automatic transmission may be locked in position j in the event of damage to the electrics. To shift to i, provide the on-

board electrical system with power

(/ page 480).

# Raise the vehicle in order to achieve greater ground clearance .

# Load the vehicle onto the transporter.

# Shift the automatic transmission to position j.

# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# Only secure the vehicle by the wheels. 4MATIC vehicles Towing eye storage location Installing the towing eye Breakdown assistance 485

# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle. Towing eye 1 is located with the vehicle tool kit under the boot floor.

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to incorrect positioning

# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi cle.

# Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and remove.

# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten. Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a rear bracket for the bumper when you remove the towing eye.

# Do not tow-start the vehicle. 486 Breakdown assistance towing eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch.

% Make sure that cover 1 engages in the

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc ess.

# Only use the towing eye to tow away or tow start the vehicle. Tow-starting the vehicle (emergency engine start)

* NOTE Damage to the automatic trans mission due to tow-starting The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow-starting vehicles with automatic transmission.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloa ded. This could result in a fire.

# Always replace faulty fuses with speci fied new fuses containing the correct amperage.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their func tionality may be significantly impaired.

# Only use fuses that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the col our and fuse rating. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: in the vehicle docu ment wallet.

* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction.

# When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box.

# When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned cor rectly on the fuse box. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified special ist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:

R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R All electrical consumers are switched off. R The ignition is switched off. The electrical fuses are located in the following fuse boxes:

R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the driver's side (/ page 487) R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell

(/ page 489)

(/ page 489) R Fuse box in the boot on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 490) Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment Requirements:

R Observe the notes on electrical fuses

(/ page 486). R Have the following tools readily available:

a dry cloth a screwdriver Opening

% Depending on the vehicle equipment, access to the fuse box may be limited. Mercedes-

Benz recommends consulting a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Breakdown assistance 487

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers while the engine bon net is open When the engine bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage.

# Always switch off the windscreen wip ers and ignition before opening the engine bonnet.

# Release the rotary catches on cover 1 and pull the cover up and out.

# Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. 488 Breakdown assistance

# If present, release hoses 4 from the retain ing clips on the fuse box and vehicle body.

# Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be an electrical component 2 on the fuse box lid. If present, unscrew screw 3 and put the component to the side without disconnecting the electrical connection.

# If present, release hoses 5 from the retain ing clips in the engine compartment and vehicle body.

# Unscrew screws 6 and fold out bar 7.

# If present, engage hoses 5 in the retaining clips in the engine compartment and vehicle body.

# If present, engage hoses 4 in the retaining clips on the fuse box and vehicle body.

# If present, insert electrical component 2 into the holder on the fuse box lid and tighten screws 3.

# Insert cover 1 and engage the rotary catches. Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit Requirements:

R Observe the notes on electrical fuses

(/ page 486). Breakdown assistance 489

# Open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it. Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell Requirements:

R Observe the notes on electrical fuses

(/ page 486).

# Unscrew screws 8 and remove fuse box lid 9 to the side. Closing

# Check whether the seal is positioned cor

# Place lid 9 on the fuse box and tighten rectly in lid 9. screws 8.

# Fold back bar 7 and tighten screws 6. 490 Breakdown assistance

# Open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove it. Opening and closing the fuse box in the boot Requirements:

R Observe the notes on electrical fuses

(/ page 486).

# Fold cover 1 down in the direction of the arrow. Notes on noise or unusual handling charac teristics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehi cle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. Hidden tyre dam age could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately and have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist work shop. Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres

& WARNING Risk of injury through dam aged tyres Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.

# Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately.

& WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip. The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet roads, especially when the speed of the vehi cle is not adapted to suit the conditions.

# Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tyre contact surface across the entire width of all tyres. Minimum tread depth for:

R Summer tyres: 3 mm R M+S tyres: 4 mm

# For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached. Wheels and tyres 491 Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg ularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving off-

road:

R Check the tyre pressure (/ page 492). R Visually inspect wheels and tyres for dam age. R Check the valve caps. R Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm. Notes on snow chains

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect snow chain fitting If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, the snow chains may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. 492 Wheels and tyres

# Never fit snow chains on the front

# Only fit snow chains on the rear wheels wheels. in pairs. Observe the following notes when using snow chains:

R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R If snow chains are fitted, the maximum per missible speed is 50 km/h. R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted. R Vehicles with level control: if snow chains are fitted, only drive at raised vehicle level . R Vehicles with rear axle steering: if snow chains are fitted, only drive with snow chain mode active (/ page 492). Tyre pressure Notes on tyre pressure

% You can permanently limit the maximum vehicle speed for driving with winter tyres

(/ page 219).

% You can deactivate ESP to pull away

(/ page 207). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force. Activating or deactivating snow chain mode Multimedia system:

4 5 5 Vehicle quick-access

# Activate or deactivate Snow chain mode. When the function is active, the vehicle behaves as if snow chains are mounted. For example, the maximum steering movement of the rear wheels is limited.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf ficient or excessive tyre pressure Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks:

R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.

# Comply with the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all tyres including the spare wheel regu larly:

R at least once a month R when the load changes Wheels and tyres 493 Notes on trailer operation Always inflate the rear axle tyres to the recom mended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure table for increased load. Tyre pressure table The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. R before embarking on a longer journey R if operating conditions change, e.g. off-

road driving

# Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary. Tyre pressure which is too high or too low can:

R Shorten the service life of the tyres. R Cause increased tyre damage. R Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning.

& WARNING Risk of accident from repea ted tyre pressure drop If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Insufficient tyre pressure can cause the tyres to burst.

# Inspect the tyre for signs of foreign

# Check whether the wheel or valve has a objects. leak.

# If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Information on the recommended tyre pressure for the vehicle's factory-fitted tyres can be found on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (/ page 493). Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. Conditions for cold tyres:

R The vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km. The vehicle's tyres heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tyres increases, so too does the tyre pressure. Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring sys tem: you can also check the tyre pressure using the on-board computer. Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring system Requirements:

R The ignition is switched on. On-board computer:

4 5 Reifendruck One of the following displays appears:

R Current tyre pressure of each wheel:

494 Wheels and tyres If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pres sure, the following tyre pressure information is only valid for those tyre sizes and their respec tive load condition. If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by the + symbol, the tyre pressure information following shows alternative tyre pressures. Fuel consumption may then increase slightly. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different num bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this. Tyre pressure monitoring system Function of the tyre pressure monitoring sys tem The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature appear in the multifunction display

(/ page 494). If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tyre temperature is excessive, you will be warned in the following ways:

R via display messages (/ page 626) R via the h warning lamp in the instrument cluster (/ page 649) The tyre pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring sys tem will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val ues by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 495). System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R the tyre pressure has been set incorrectly R there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for example, by a foreign object penetrating the tyre R there is a malfunction caused by another minutes of driving radio signal source R Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few R Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tyre pressures are already being moni tored.

# Compare the tyre pressure with the recom mended tyre pressure for the current operat ing condition (/ page 493). Observe the notes on tyre temperature (/ page 492).

% The values displayed in the multifunction dis play may deviate from those of the tyre pres sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressure. Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic:

R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 492) Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring sys tem Requirements:

R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on each of the four wheels (/ page 492). Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in the following situations:

R The tyre pressure has changed. R The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly fitted. On-board computer:

4 5 Tyre pressure

# Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Use current tyre pressures as new refer-

ence values? message is shown in the multi function display.

# Press a to confirm the restart. The Tyre pressure monitor restarted mes sage is shown in the multifunction display. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow h warning lamp goes out. After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the cur rent tyre pressures are within the specified range. The current tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. Wheels and tyres 495 Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic:

R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 492) Wheel change Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect dimensions of wheels and tyres If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or wheel suspension components may become damaged.

# Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct:

R Designation R Type 496 Wheels and tyres When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the correct:

R Designation R Manufacturer R Type

& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed ing the specified tyre load-bearing capa city or the permissible speed rating Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the tyres can lead to tyre damage and could cause the tyres to explode.

# Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model.

# Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

* NOTE Vehicle and tyre damage through tyre types and sizes that have not been approved Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz. For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tyres are specially adapted to the con trol systems, such as ABS, ESP and 4MATIC, and marked as follows:

R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

(run-flat tyres only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer tain AMG tyres) Certain characteristics, such as handling, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. may otherwise be adversely affected. Fur thermore, other tyre sizes could result in the tyres rubbing against the body and axle com ponents when loaded. This could result in damage to the tyre or the vehicle.

* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea ded tyres Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor rec ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ ous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. For this reason driving safety cannot be guar anteed.

# Do not use used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage.

* NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tyres when driving over obstacles Large wheels have a lower tyre section width. The lower the tyre section width, the greater is the risk of damage to wheels or tyres when driving over obstacles.

# Avoid obstacles or drive particularly carefully.

* NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage when parking on kerbs or in potholes Parking on kerbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tyres.

# If possible, park only on flat surfaces.

# Avoid kerbs and potholes when parking.

* NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tyre-fitting tools Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve. The tools could damage the electronic com ponent parts.

# Have the tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop only.

* NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low ambient temperatures At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tyres, caus ing permanent damage to the tyre.

# At temperatures below 7 C, use M+S tyres. Accessory parts that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about:

R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations

& WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tyres There is an increased risk of skidding and aquaplaning when using sport tyres on wet roads. Wheels and tyres 497 In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tyre running temperature.

# Activate ESP and adapt your driving style accordingly.

# Use M+S tyres at outside temperatures

# Only use the tyres for their intended below 10 C. purpose. Observe the following when selecting, fitting and replacing tyres:

R Country-specific requirements for tyre approval that define a specific tyre type for your vehicle. R Only use tyres and wheels of the same type

(summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) and the same make. R Only fit wheels of the same size on one axle

(left and right). It is only permissible to fit a different wheel size in the event of a flat tyre in order to drive to the specialist workshop. 498 Wheels and tyres R Do not make any modifications to the brake system, the wheels or the tyres. The use of shims or brake dust shields is not permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. R Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tyre pres sure monitoring system. R At temperatures below 7 C, use winter tyres or all-season tyres marked M+S for all wheels. Winter tyres bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro vide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. R For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same tread. R Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres fitted. If the tyre's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision. R Notes on the emergency spare wheel

(/ page 505) R Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km. R Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. R When replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteris tics, e.g. winter tyres.

% You can permanently limit the maximum vehicle speed for driving with winter tyres

(/ page 219). For more information on wheels and tyres, con tact a qualified specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 492) R Tyre pressure table (/ page 493) Notes on interchanging wheels

& WARNING Risk of injury through differ ent wheel sizes Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions may severely impair the driving characteris tics. The disk brakes or wheel suspension compo nents may also be damaged.

# Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions. Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. R Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease or fuel. The tyre-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1 on the boot floor. Wheels and tyres 499 The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ:

R Front wheels wear more on the shoulder of R Rear wheels wear more in the centre of the the tyre tyre Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel size, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for the wheels. Observe the instructions and safety notes on

"Changing a wheel" when doing so

(/ page 500). Notes on storing wheels When storing wheels, observe the following notes:

R After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Overview of the tyre-change tool kit Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi cles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit. For more information on which tyre-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Required tyre-change tools may include, for example:

R Jack R Chock R Wheel wrench

% The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg. The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the sticker affixed to the jack. The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified spe cialist workshop. Tool bag contains:

R Jack R Gloves R Wheel wrench R Centring pin R Folding chock R Ratchet for jack 500 Wheels and tyres Setting up the folding chock R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change

(/ page 500). Plastic hub cap

# To remove: turn the centre cover of the hub cap anti-clockwise and remove the hub cap.

# To fit: make sure that the centre cover of the hub cap is turned anti-clockwise.

# Position the hub cap and turn the centre cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly. Aluminium hub cap ground. position.

# Apply the electric parking brake manually.

# Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead

# Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift into position j.

# Vehicles with level control system: set the normal vehicle level (/ page 234).

# Switch off the engine.

# Make sure that the engine cannot be started.

# Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diago nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

# Remove the hub caps if necessary

(/ page 500).

# Raise the vehicle (/ page 501). Removing and fitting hub caps Requirement:

Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change Requirements:

R The required tyre-change tool kit is available. If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre-

change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools.

# To remove: position socket 2 on hub cap 1. tool kit.

% The socket can be found in the tyre-change

# Position wheel spanner 3 on socket 2.

# Using wheel spanner 3, turn hub cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.

# To fit: follow the instructions above in reverse order.

% Specified tightening torque: 25 Nm. Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel Requirements:

R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change (/ page 500). R The hub caps have been removed

(/ page 500). Important notes on using the jack:

R Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for mainte nance work under the vehicle. R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. R The foot of the jack must be positioned verti cally under the jack support point. Wheels and tyres 501 Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:

R Never place your hands or feet under the vehicle. R Never lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the engine and do not release the electric parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the boot lid.

# Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. 502 Wheels and tyres Position of jack support points

& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.

# Only position the jack at the appropri ate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.

* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi cle raised.

# The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup port points.

# Take the ratchet ring spanner out of the tyre-

change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.

# Position jack 2 at jack support point 1.

# Turn ratchet ring spanner 3 clockwise until jack 2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

# Continue to turn ratchet ring spanner 3 until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm off the ground.

# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 503). Removing a wheel Requirements:

R The vehicle is raised (/ page 501). When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, since this could impair the level of comfort when braking.

* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on

# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on wheel bolts a dirty surface. pletely.

# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com pletely.

# Screw centring pin 1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.

# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com

# Remove the wheel.

# Fit the new wheel (/ page 503). Wheels and tyres 503 Fitting a new wheel

& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel Oiled or greased wheel bolts can cause the wheel bolts to come loose, as too can dam aged wheel bolts or wheel hub threads.

# Never oil or grease the threads.

# In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam aged hub threads replaced.

# Do not continue driving.

# Observe the information on the choice of tyres (/ page 495). For tyres with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when fitting.

# Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cen Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change Requirements:

R The new wheel has been fitted

(/ page 503).

# To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the let ters "AB" are visible and turn the ratchet of the jack to the left. 504 Wheels and tyres tring pin and push it on.

& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.

# Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.

# Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel"

(/ page 495).

# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes-

Benz and for the wheel in question.

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight.

# Unscrew and remove the centring pin.

# Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-

tight.

# Lower the vehicle (/ page 504).

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with a maximum of 80 Nm.

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 the specified tightening torque of 150 Nm.

& WARNING Risk of injury through incor rect tightening torque The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.

# Ensure that the wheel bolts or nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.

# If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening tor que checked immediately.

# Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust it if necessary.

# Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: restart the tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 495). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel. Wheels and tyres 505 Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteris tics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations:

# Drive carefully.

# Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size.

# Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel briefly.

# Do not deactivate ESP.

# Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions. Check the tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel fitted. Correct the pressure as necessary. The maximum permissible speed with an emer gency spare wheel fitted is 80 km/h. Do not fit the emergency spare wheel with snow chains. Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.

% Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: if an emergency spare wheel is fit ted the tyre pressure monitoring system can not function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the sys tem may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

R Notes on tyre pressure (/ page 492) R Tyre pressure table (/ page 493) R Notes on fitting tyres (/ page 495) 506 Technical data Notes on technical data The technical data was determined in accord ance with EU Directives. The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-

Benz Service Centre. Only for certain countries: you can find vehi cle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents

(CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These docu ments are delivered with your vehicle.

# Always have work on the engine elec tronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Increased wear and tear or dam age caused by measures undertaken to increase performance Engine management measures undertaken to increase performance can lead to increased wear and tear or damage to the drive system.

# Do not undertake engine management measures to increase performance. On-board electronics Notes on tampering with the engine elec tronics Two-way radios

* NOTE Premature wear through improper Notes on fitting two-way radios maintenance Improper maintenance may cause vehicle components to wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalida ted.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios The electromagnetic radiation from two-way radios can interfere with the on-board elec tronics if RF transmitters are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident from incor rect operation of two-way radios If you operate two-way radios incorrectly in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation could interfere with the on-board electronics, e.g.:

R if the two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial R if the exterior aerial is not correctly mounted or is not of low reflection This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

# Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop.

# When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior aerial.

* NOTE Invalidation of the operating per mit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed.

# Only use approved frequency bands.

# Observe the maximum permissible out put power in these frequency bands.

# Only use approved aerial positions. Technical data 507 On the rear wings, it is recommended that you fit the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest to the centre of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles "EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and aerial con nectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when fitting. Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the values in the following table:

1 Front roof area 2 Rear roof area 3 Rear wings 4 Boot lid On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, fit ting an aerial to the front or rear roof area is not permitted. 508 Technical data Frequency band and maximum transmission output Frequency band Maximum transmis sion output 100 W Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 4 m frequency band 74 - 78 MHz 2 m frequency band 144 - 174 MHz Trunked radio sys tem/Tetra 380 - 460 MHz 70 cm frequency band 400 - 460 MHz Two-way radio

(2G/3G/4G) 30 W 50 W 10 W 35 W 10 W The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions:

R RF transmitters with a maximum transmis sion output of up to 100 mW R RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W

(trunked radio system/Tetra) R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for some wavebands. This applies to the following wavebands:

R Trunked radio system/Tetra R 70 cm frequency band R 2G/3G/4G Radio equipment approvals for the vehicle components Overview of manufacturers Manufacturer's abbreviated desig nation ADC Manufacturer infor mation ADC Automotive Dis tance Control Sys tems GmbH, Peter-

Dornier-Strasse 10, 88131 Lindau, Ger many Gentex Corporation, 600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI 49464, USA HELLA KGaA Hueck &

Co., Rixbecker Strae 75, 59552 Lippstadt, Germany Gentex HELLA Manufacturer's abbreviated desig nation Hirschmann Manufacturer's abbreviated desig nation LEOPOLD KOSTAL Manufacturer's abbreviated desig nation Bosch Manufacturer infor mation LEOPOLD KOSTAL GmbH & Co. KG, Hauert 11, 44227 Dortmund, Germany MARQUARDT GmbH, Schlostrae 16, 78604 Rietheim-Weil heim, Germany Meta System S.P.A., Via T. Galimbreti 5, 42124 Reggio Emilia, Italy MARQUARDT Schrader Meta System Manufacturer infor mation Hirschmann Car Com munication GmbH, Stuttgarter Str. 45-51, 72654 Neckartenzlin gen, Germany Huf Baolong Electron ics Bretten GmbH, Gewerbestrasse 40, 75015 Bretten, Ger many HUF Hlsbeck & Frst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Strae 17, 42551 Velbert, Ger many KATHREIN Automo tive GmbH & Co. KG, Rmerring 1, 31137 Hildesheim, Germany Huf Baolong HUF KATHREIN Technical data 509 Manufacturer infor mation Robert Bosch GmbH, Daimlerstrasse 6, 71229 Leonberg, Ger many Schrader Electronics Ltd., 11 Technology Park, Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland, Uni ted Kingdom 510 Technical data Argentina Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Bosch Bosch ADC ADC MRR1Rear (radar sen sor) MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) ARS4-A (radar sen sor) ARS4-B (radar sen sor) Huf Bao long TSSRE4A (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Radio equip ment approval number C-21798 C-17908 H-20027 Schrader C-20030 Schrader C-18005 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) GG4T (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) DG6W2D4 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT DC12A (locking sys tem) DC12B (locking sys tem) Radio equip ment approval number H-4788 H-20495 H-20959 H-17689 H-21034 MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT Radio equip ment approval number H-21035 DC12K (locking sys tem) MS2 (locking system) H-17598 MK1 (locking system) H-17213 MK2 (locking system) H-17212 3350.38 (locking sys tem) H-23166 HELLA DM4 (locking system) H-17845 Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Radio equip ment approval number H-15695 H-15475 Hirsch mann 920287B (locking system) KATHREI N RKE213E1 (locking system) Radio equip ment approval number H-17929 H-15541 HELLA MARSKEYLESS (lock ing system) HUF HUF LEOPOLD KOSTAL HUF14632 (locking system) HUF4761 (locking sys tem) H-11545 KK1 (locking system) H-16874 Hirsch mann 920287A (locking system) H-15694 Technical data 511 Australia Manu facturer Model designation Radio equip ment approval number Huf Bao long TSSRE4A (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Huf Bao long TSSSG4G6 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Huf Bao long TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) 512 Technical data Botswana Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Radio equip ment approval number Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen sor) ADC ADC ARS4-A (radar sen sor) ARS4-B (radar sen sor) Huf Bao long TSSRE4A (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Radio equip ment approval number BOCRA/T A/

2017/37 88 BOCRA/T A/

2018/20 26 BOCRA/T A/

2019/45 82 No. 20233 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) MAR QUARDT DC12A (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT DC12B (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT DC12K (locking sys tem) Radio equip ment approval number No. 1967 BOCRA/T A/

2019/43 89 BOCRA/T A/

2019/43 88 BOCRA/T A/

2019/43 90 Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Technical data 513 Brunei Darussalam MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MS2 (locking system) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) Manu facturer Model designation MK1 (locking system) Hirsch mann 920287A (locking system) Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) MK2 (locking system) Hirsch mann 920287B (locking system) HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem) KATHREI N RKE213E1 (locking system) Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen sor) Radio equip ment approval number DRQ-D-

MAJU-02-

2011-111 083-

LPD-3182 0 DRQ-

DMAJU-0 2-2011-11 108 3-

LPD-3150 4 Radio equip ment approval number BOCRA/T A/

2019/42 61 BOCRA/T A/

2019/43 59 BOCRA/T A/

2019/43 60 BOCRA/T A/

2019/46 64 Radio equip ment approval number BOCRA/T A/

2019/45 93 BOCRA/T A/

2019/47 24 BOCRA/T A/

2019/47 23 BOCRA/T A/

2019/43 87 514 Technical data Radio equip ment approval number DTA-0007 93 DTA No. 000310 DTA No. 000311 Bosch Huf Bao long Huf Bao long Huf Bao long MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) TSSRE4A (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) TSSSG4G6 (Steuer gert) (control unit)

(tyre pressure moni toring sensor) TSSSG4G6b (Steuer gert) (control unit)

(tyre pressure moni toring sensor) Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Radio equip ment approval number DRQ-D-

QAF AUTO-05-

2003-108 9 4-

LPD-295 59 DRQDJATI

-07-2000-

8916LPD-

29665 DTA-0015 14 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) MAR QUARDT DC12A (locking sys tem) DTA No. 003757 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) MAR QUARDT DC12B (locking sys tem) Radio equip ment approval number DTA No. 003893 DRQ-

DJATI-07-

2000-891 6-

LPD-389 37 DRQ-

DJATI-07-

2000-109 00 0 Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation MAR QUARDT DC12K (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT MK1 (locking system) DRQ-

MAR QUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT MS2 (locking system) DRQ-

MAR QUARDT MK2 (locking system) DRQ-

HELLA DM4 (locking system) DRQ-

Radio equip ment approval number DRQ-

DJATI-07-

2000-109 00 0 DJATI-07-

2000-891 6-

LPD-388 90 Radio equip ment approval number DJATI-07-

2000-891 6-

LPD-335 67 DJATI-07-

2000-891 6-

LPD-335 68 Technical data 515 Radio equip ment approval number DRQ-

DJATI-07-

2000-109 00 0 DTA-003 662 DJATI-07-

2000-109 00 0 DTA-000 351 516 Technical data Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation HELLA MARSKEYLESS (lock ing system) HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem) Hirsch mann 920287A (locking system) Radio equip ment approval number DRQ-

DJATI-07-

2000-109 00 0 DTA-0016 61 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) Radio equip ment approval number DRQ-

DJATI-07-

2000-109 00 0 DTA-000 615 DRQ-

DMAJU-0 2-2011-11 108 3-

LPD-3041 9 Radio equip ment approval number DRQ-

DMAJU-0 2-2011-11 108 3-

LPD-390 04 DRQ-

DJATI-07-

2000-891 6-

LPD-3001 2 Ghana Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation ADC ARS4-B (radar sen sor) MAR QUARDT DC12A (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MK1 (locking system) MK2 (locking system) MAR QUARDT DC12B (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys tem) Technical data 517 Radio equip ment approval number ZRO-

M8-7E3-

X4A ZRO-

M8-7E3-

X4C ZRO-

M8-7E3-

X3C Radio equip ment approval number 1R3-1M-

7E1-160 ZRO-

M8-7E3-

X50 ZRO-

M8-7E3-

X51 ZRO-

M8-7E3-

X52 BR3-1M-

GE-129 KATHREI N RKE213E1 (locking system) MAR QUARDT DC12K (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT MS2 (locking system) HELLA HELLA HUF DM4 (locking system) BR3-1M-

GE2-157 MARSKEYLESS (lock ing system) BR3-1M-

GE2-16A HUF4761 (locking sys tem) EX6-6M-

GE2-16C Manu facturer Model designation Hirsch mann 920287B (locking system) Radio equip ment approval number DRQ-

DMAJU-0 2-2011-11 108 3 DTA-0007 94 DRQ-

DJATI-07-

2000-891 6-

LPD-303 60 518 Technical data Manu facturer Model designation Hirsch mann 920287A (locking system) Hirsch mann 920287B (locking system) KATHREI N RKE213E1 (locking system) Radio equip ment approval number ZRO-

M8-7E3-

X49 ZRO-

M8-7E3-

X45 ZRO-

M8-7E3-

X47 ZRO-

M8-7E3-

X53 Indonesia Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) ADC ARS4-B (radar sen sor) Radio equip ment approval number 40556/

SDPPI/

2018 34538/

SDPPI/

2017 53078/

SDPPI/

2017 PLG3612 36010/

SDPPI/

2017 2130 Bosch Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen sor) MRRe14FCR radar sensor ADC ARS4-A (radar sen sor) Huf Bao long TSSRE4A (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Schrader AG5SP4-D (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Radio equip ment approval number 38132/

SDPPI/

2017 2130 52166/

SDPPI/

2017 3533 38892/

SDPPI/

2018 3612 54083/

SDPPI/

2017 PLG3612 Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) MAR QUARDT DC12A (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT DC12B (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT DC12K (locking sys tem) HELLA DM4 (locking system) MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MS2 (locking system) HELLA MARSKEYLESS (lock ing system) MK1 (locking system) MK2 (locking system) HUF HUF HUF14632 (locking system) HUF4761 (locking sys tem) Radio equip ment approval number 57058/

SDPPI/

2018 PLG3612 25626/

SDPPI/

2015 PLG3612 50064/

SDPPI/

2017 2208 59840/

SDPPI/

2019 7163 Radio equip ment approval number 59838/

SDPPI/

2019 7163 50154/

SDPPI/

2017 2208 40283/

SDPPI/

2015 2208 40282/

SDPPI/

2015 2208 Technical data 519 Radio equip ment approval number 52221/

SDPPI/

2017 6051 51484/

SDPPI/

2017 2181 41618/

SDPPI/

2018 3533 26742/

SDPPI/

2015 520 Technical data Manu facturer Model designation Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Jordan Manu facturer LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) ADC ARS4-B (radar sen sor) Hirsch mann 920287A (locking system) Hirsch mann 920287B (locking system) KATHREI N RKE213E1 (locking system) Bosch Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen sor) MRRe14FCR radar sensor ADC ARS4-A (radar sen sor) Huf Bao long TSSRE4A (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Huf Bao long TSSSG4G6 (control unit) (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Huf Bao long TSSSG4G6b (control unit) (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Radio equip ment approval number TRC/LPD

2009/15 TRC/LPD

2014/73 TRC/LPD

2017/25 4 TRC/LPD

2014/12 6 Radio equip ment approval number 41121/

SDPPI/

2018 5125 29510/

SDPPI/

2016 3159 28238/

SDPPI/

2016 3159 41771/

SDPPI/

2018 5205 Radio equip ment approval number TRC/LPD

2014/24 8 TRC/LPD

2017/42 1 TRC/

LPD/

2017/42 2 TRC/LPD

2017/17 5 Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Schrader AG5SP4-D (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) MAR QUARDT DC12A (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT DC12B (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MS2 (locking system) MK1 (locking system) MK2 (locking system) Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) MAR QUARDT DC12K (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys tem) Radio equip ment approval number TRC/LPD

2011/15 8 TRC/LPD

2017/17 5 TRC/LPD

2011/16 0 TRC/LPD

2011/161 Radio equip ment approval number TRC/LPD

2019/21 TRC/LPD

2019/18 4 TRC/LPD

2017/45 6 TRC/LPD

2018/13 9 Technical data 521 Radio equip ment approval number TRC/LPD

2017/116 TRC/LPD

2015/16 6 TRC/LPD

2015/16 7 TRC/LPD

2019/10 6 522 Technical data Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation HELLA DM4 (locking system) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) Gentex EUROII (locking sys tem) HELLA MARSKEYLESS (lock ing system) Hirsch mann 920287A (locking system) Gentex MUAHL 5 (locking system) HUF14632 (locking system) Hirsch mann 920287B (locking system) KATHREI N RKE213E1 (antenna amplifier) HUF HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem) KATHREI N RKE213E1 (locking system) Radio equip ment approval number TRC/LPD

2015/10 2 TRC/LPD

2011/14 9 TRC/LPD

2012/53 TRC/LPD

2015/23 6 Radio equip ment approval number TRC/LPD

2017/39 9 TRC/LPD

2017/18 3 TRC/LPD

2015/17 9 TRC/LPD

2012/14 4 Radio equip ment approval number TRC/LPD

2014/25 8 TRC/LPD

2015/29 9 TRC/LPD

2015/23 6 Malaysia Technical data 523 Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Radio equip ment approval number RALM/3 5A/

0716/

S(16-232 4) RALM/6 6A/

0618/

S(18-246 8) Bosch LRR3 (radar sensors) Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensors) Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen sors) Huf Bao long Huf Bao long TSSRE4A (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sors) TSSSG4G6 (control unit) (tyre pressure monitoring sensors) Radio equip ment approval number RCDD/0 3A/

0615/

S(19-209 4) RAQP/62 A/

0419/S

(19-1694) Schrader AG5SP4-D (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sors) Schrader MFR (control unit)

(tyre pressure moni toring sensors) Radio equip ment approval number RALM/4 5A/

0517/

S(17-157 6) CIDF170 00184 RAQP/57 A/0817/

S(17-242 4) 524 Technical data Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation MAR QUARDT DC12A (locking sys tems) MAR QUARDT DC12K (locking sys tems) MAR QUARDT MK2 (locking sys tems) MAR QUARDT DC12B (locking sys tems) MAR QUARDT MS2 (locking sys tems) MAR QUARDT MK1 (locking sys tems) HELLA DM4 (locking sys tems) HELLA MARSKEYLESS (lock ing systems) Radio equip ment approval number RDDK/3 3A/

0317/

S(17-066 9) RAUU/6 2A/

0311/

S(11-026 3) Radio equip ment approval number RAUU/6 2A/

0311/

S(11-026 4) RDDK/31 A/0217/

S(17-040 5) RAAU/14 C/0615/

S(15-105 7) Radio equip ment approval number RAAU/12 C/0515/

S(15-105 9) RDDK/41 A/0717/

S(17-226 9) RAAU/51 C/0417/

S(17-103 4) HUF14632 (locking systems) Hirsch mann 920287A (locking systems) KATHREI N RKE213E1 (locking systems) Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation HUF HUF LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking sys tems) Radio equip ment approval number RAYN/25 A/0715/

S(15-238 5) RAAU/16 B/1112/

S(12-205 3) RAUU/27 C/0815/

S(15-295 3) HUF4761 (locking sys tems) Hirsch mann 920287B (locking systems) Radio equip ment approval number RAUU/6 3A/

0311/

S(11-043 2) RAUU/2 2C/

0615/

S(15-186 4) Meta Meta ITS/TPS (interior pro tection) MUW II (interior pro tection) Technical data 525 Radio equip ment approval number RAUU/2 8C/

0915/

S(15-270 3) RAVG/18 Q/0212/

S(11-206 8) RAVG/17 Q/0212/

S(11-206 7) 526 Technical data Morocco Manufac turer Model desig nation Radio equip ment approval number LRR3 (radar sensors) MRR1Rear

(radar sen sors) MRRe14FCR

(radar sen sors) ARS4-A

(radar sen sors) ARS4-B

(radar sen sors) MR 5371 ANRT 2010-02-02 MR 9186 ANRT 2014-04-22 MR 13900 ANRT 2017-05-04 MR 9490 ANRT 2014-07-23 MR 9778 ANRT 2014-11-11 Bosch Bosch Bosch ADC ADC Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Huf Baolong(

Schrader Radio equip ment approval number MR 14320 ANRT 2017-07-07 MR 14319 ANRT 2017-07-07 MR 19561 ANRT 2019-04-26 TSSRE4A

(tyre pressure sensor) (tyre pressure monitoring sensors) TSSSG4G6

(control unit)

(tyre pressure monitoring sensors) TSSSG4G6b

(control unit)

(tyre pressure monitoring sensors) Huf Baolong Schrader Huf Baolong Schrader Radio equip ment approval number MR 10216 ANRT 2015-03-18 MR 19527 ANRT 2019-04-30 MR 14777 ANRT 2017-09-20 AG5SP4-D

(tyre pressure sensor) (tyre pressure monitoring sensors) MFR (control unit) (tyre pressure monitoring sensors) GG4T (tyre pressure monitoring sensors) Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Schrader Schrader DG6W2D4

(tyre pressure monitoring sensors) MC34MA4

(tyre pressure monitoring sensors) MARQUARDT DC12A (lock ing systems) MARQUARDT DC12B (lock ing systems) MARQUARDT DC12K (lock ing systems) Radio equip ment approval number MR 16355 ANRT 2018-04-19 MR 6706 ANRT 2011-11-17 MR 13429 ANTR 2017-03-03 MR 6698 ANTR 2011-11-16 MR 6699 ANTR 2011-11-16 Technical data 527 Radio equip ment approval number MARSKEY LESS (locking systems) MR 13681 ANTR 2017-04-04 HELLA HUF HUF HUF14632

(locking sys tems) HUF4761

(locking sys tems) LEPOLD KOS TAL KK1 (locking systems) Hirschmann 920287A

(locking sys tems) MR 10506 ANTR 2015-06-22 MR 7829 ANTR 2013-02-14 MR 10697 ANTR 2015-08-05 MR 6700 ANTR 2011-11-16 Radio equip ment approval number MR 13300 ANTR 2017-02-15 MR 10645 ANTR 2015-07-21 MR 10987 ANTR 2015-10-22 MR 18817 ANTR 2019-02-12 MR 14426 ANTR 2017-07-28 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking systems) MARQUARDT MK1 (locking systems) MARQUARDT MK2 (locking systems) MARQUARDT HELLA 3350.38

(locking sys tems) DM4 (locking systems) 528 Technical data Manufac turer Model desig nation Hirschmann KATHREIN 920287B

(locking sys tems) RKE213E1

(locking sys tems) Radio equip ment approval number MR 7260 ANTR 2012-06-13 MR 10631 ANTR 2015-07-16 Mexico Bosch Bosch Bosch ADC Manufac turer Model desig nation Radio equip ment approval number IFETEL:

RCPBOLR09-

0828 IFETEL:

RCPBOMR14-

0922 IFETEL:

RCPBOMR17-

0598 IFETEL:

RCPCOAR14-

1191 LRR3 (radar sensors) MRR1Rear

(radar sen sors) MRRe14FCR

(radar sen sors) ARS4-A

(radar sen sors) Manufac turer Model desig nation ADC Huf Baolong Schrader ARS4-B

(radar sen sors) TSSRE4A

(tyre pressure monitoring sensors) AG5SP4-D

(tyre pressure monitoring sensors) Radio equip ment approval number IFETEL:

RLVCOAR15-

0008 IFETEL:

RLVHUTS17-0 806 IFETEL:

RCPSCAG15-

0627 Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Radio equip ment approval number IFETEL:

RLVSCMF15-

0959 IFETEL:

RLVSCGG17-

1665 Schrader Schrader Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitoring sensors) GG4T (tyre pressure monitoring sensors) Schrader MC34MA4

(tyre pressure monitoring sensors) MARQUARDT DC12K (inte rior protec tion) MARQUARDT DC12A (lock ing systems) MARQUARDT MS2 (locking systems) DG6W2D4

(tyre pressure monitoring sensors) IFETEL:

RLVSCDG18-

04 MARQUARDT DC12B (lock ing systems) MARQUARDT MK1 (locking systems) Radio equip ment approval number IFETEL:

RCPSCMR14-

062 IFETEL:

IFT/223/UC S/DG-AUSE/

0452/2018 IFETEL:

CFT/D03/US I/DGB/

4653/2013 Technical data 529 Radio equip ment approval number IFETEL:

CFT/D03/US I/DGB/

4653/2013 IFETEL:

IFT/223/UC S/DG-AUSE/

0717/2018 IFETEL:

IFT/223/UC S/DG-AUSE/

3130/2016 530 Technical data Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation MARQUARDT MK2 (locking systems) MARQUARDT 3350.38

(locking sys tems) HELLA DM4 (locking systems) Radio equip ment approval number IFETEL:

IFT/223/UC S/DG-AUSE/

3043/2016 IFETEL:

IFT/223/UC S/DG-AUSE/

1589/2019 IFETEL:

IFT/223/UC S/DG-AUSE/

3937/2018 HELLA HUF HUF Radio equip ment approval number IFETEL:

IFT/223/UC S/DG-AUSE/

5487/2018 IFETEL:

IFT/223/UC S/DG-AUSE/

2565/2016 IFETEL:

CFT/D03/US I/DGB/

5888/2013 MARSKEY LESS (locking systems) HUF14632

(locking sys tems) HUF4761

(locking sys tems) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking systems) Hirschmann Hirschmann 920287A

(locking sys tems) 920287B

(locking sys tems) Radio equip ment approval number IFETEL:

IFT/223/UC S/DG-AUSE/

3010/2018 IFETEL:

CFT/D03/US I/DGB/

2401/2012 IFETEL:

CFT/D03/US I/DGB/

4865/2013 Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation KATHREIN RKE213E1

(locking sys tems) Gentex EURO II (lock ing systems) Gentex MUAHL 5

(locking sys tems) Radio equip ment approval number IFETEL:

IFT/223/UC S/DG-AUSE/

4856/2016 IFETEL:

IFT/223/UC S/DG-AUSE/

1456/2014 IFETEL:

IFT/223/UC S/DG-AUSE/

0035/2016 Meta Meta ITS/TPS

(interior pro tection) MUW II (inte rior protec tion) Technical data 531 Moldova Bosch Bosch Bosch Radio equip ment approval number IFETEL:

IFT/223/UC S/DG-AUSE/

4871/2016 IFETEL:

IFT/223/UC S/DG-AUSE/

5064/2016 LRR3 (radar sensors) MRR1Rear

(radar sen sors) MRRe14FCR

(radar sen sors) Radio equip ment approval number MD OC TIP 024 A6227-18 MD OC TIP 024 A5957-17 MD OC TIP 024 A6004-18 MD OC TIP 024 A5820-17 MARQUARDT DC12A (lock ing systems) 532 Technical data Radio equip ment approval number MD OC TIP 024 A6253-18 MD OC TIP 024 A6252-18 MD OC TIP 024 A6444-19 MD OC TIP 024 A6398-19 MARQUARDT DC12B (lock ing systems) MARQUARDT DC12K (lock ing systems) MARQUARDT MS2 (locking systems) MARQUARDT 3350.38

(locking sys tems) Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Radio equip ment approval number Radio equip ment approval number MD OC TIP 024 A5660-16 MD OC TIP 024 A5485-16 Hirschmann Hirschmann 920287A

(locking sys tems) 920287B

(locking sys tems) HELLA HELLA HUF DM4 (locking systems) MARSKEY LESS (locking systems) HUF4761

(locking sys tems) MD OC TIP 024 A5884-17 MD OC TIP 024 A5876-17 MD OC TIP 024 A5433-16 Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation MARQUARDT MK2 (locking systems) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking systems) MARQUARDT KATHREIN Technical data 533 Radio equip ment approval number 037/

ARCEP/DG/

19 029/

ARCEP/DG/

19 RKE213E1

(locking sys tems) Niger Manufac turer Model desig nation MARQUARDT DC12A (lock ing systems) MARQUARDT DC12B (lock ing systems) MARQUARDT DC12K (lock ing systems) MARQUARDT MS2 (locking systems) MARQUARDT MK1 (locking systems) Radio equip ment approval number 010/

ARCEP/DG/

19 008/

ARCEP/DG/

19 009/

ARCEP/DG/

19 017/

ARCEP/DG/

19 034/

ARCEP/DG/

19 HELLA HELLA HUF Radio equip ment approval number 035/

ARCEP/DG/

19 015/

ARCEP/DG/

19 082/

ARCEP/DG/

19 3350.38

(locking sys tems) DM4 (locking systems) MARSKEY LESS (locking systems) 083/

ARCEP/DG/

19 HUF4761

(locking sys tems) 053/

ARCEP/DG/

19 534 Technical data Nigeria Manufac turer Model desig nation Bosch Bosch ADC ADC Radio equip ment approval number NCC/

TSNI/WN/TA

/CERT/

2089/2018 NCC/

TSNI/WN/TA

/CERT/

2042/2018 NCC/

TSNI/WN/TA

/CERT/

AB00388/20 15 NCC/

TSNI/WN/TA

/CERT/

2062/2018 MRR1Rear

(radar sen sors) MRRe14FCR

(radar sen sors) ARS4-A

(radar sen sors) ARS4-B

(radar sen sors) Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation MARQUARDT DC12A (lock ing systems) MARQUARDT MK1 (locking systems) MARQUARDT DC12B (lock ing systems) MARQUARDT MK2 (locking systems) MARQUARDT DC12K (lock ing systems) MARQUARDT 3350.38

(locking sys tems) MARQUARDT MS2 (locking systems) HELLA DM4 (locking systems) Radio equip ment approval number NCC/

TSNI/WN/TA

/CERT/

1714/2017 NCC/

TSNI/WN/TA

/CERT/

2627/2019 NCC/

TSNI/WN/TA

/CERT/

2626/2019 NCC/

TSNI/WN/TA

/CERT/

1667/2017 Radio equip ment approval number NCC/

TSNI/WN/TA

/CERT/

0739/2015 NCC/

TSNI/WN/TA

/CERT/

0740/2015 NCC/

TSNI/WN/TA

/CERT/

2882/2019 NCC/

TSNI/WN/TA

/CERT/

1830/2017 Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Pakistan HELLA HUF HUF Radio equip ment approval number NCC/

TSNI/WN/TA

/CERT/

1670/2017 NCC/

TSNI/WN/TA

/CERT/

0829/2015 NCC/

TSNI/WN/TA

/CERT/

2884/2019 MARSKEY LESS (locking systems) HUF14632

(locking sys tems) HUF4761

(locking sys tems) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking systems) KATHREIN RKE213E1

(locking sys tems) Radio equip ment approval number NCC/

TSNI/WN/TA

/CERT/

0823/2015 NCC/

TSNI/WN/TA

/CERT/

0865/2015 Technical data 535 Manufac turer Model desig nation ADC ADC ARS4-A

(radar sen sors) ARS4-B

(radar sen sors) Radio equip ment approval number 9.9014/2019 9.1048/2018 MARQUARDT DC12A (lock ing systems) 9.131/2017 MARQUARDT DC12B (lock ing systems) 9.829/2013 MARQUARDT DC12K (lock ing systems) 9.830/2013 536 Technical data Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Radio equip ment approval number Radio equip ment approval number MARQUARDT MS2 (locking 9.133/2017 HUF 9.598/2015 Hirschmann Radio equip ment approval number 9.846/2013 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking 9.486/2015 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking 9.497/2015 systems) systems) systems) DM4 (locking systems) MARSKEY LESS (locking systems) HELLA HELLA 9.409/2017 9.213/2017 LEOPOLD KOSTAL Hirschmann 9.118/2016 9.845/2013 HUF14632

(locking sys tems) HUF4761

(locking sys tems) KK1 (locking systems) 920287A

(locking sys tems) 920287B

(locking sys tems) RKE213E1

(locking sys tems) HUF 9.790/2013 KATHREIN 9.142/2016 Paraguay Technical data 537 Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Radio equip ment approval number 2017-06-

I-000016 2 Bosch Bosch ADC ADC MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) MRR1Rear (radar sen sor) 2019-05-

I-000236 ARS4-A (radar sen sor) ARS4-B (radar sen sor) 2019-05-

I-0271 2019-07-

I-0353 Radio equip ment approval number 2017-09-

I-000032 8 2015-04-

I-000015 0 2017-07-

I-000019 9 Huf Bao long Schrader TSSRE4A (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) AG5SP4-D (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) MAR QUARDT DC12A (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT DC12B (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT DC12K (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT MS2 (locking system) Radio equip ment approval number 2016-5-

I-000144 y 2011-06-

I-0067 2016-5-

I-000143 y 2011-06-

I-0068 2017-04-

I-000010 1 538 Technical data Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MK1 (locking system) HELLA MARSKEYLESS (lock ing system) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) MK2 (locking system) HUF14632 (locking system) Hirsch mann 920287A (locking system) MAR QUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys tem) 2019-04-

I-000216 HUF4761 (locking sys tem) HELLA DM4 (locking system) Radio equip ment approval number 2015-07-

I-000020 0 2015-07-

I-000020 1 2017-08-

I_000026 1 HUF HUF Radio equip ment approval number 2017-05-

I-000013 6 2015-08-

I-000022 6 2017-12-

I-000040 9 y 2012-10-

I-0178 Radio equip ment approval number 2015-06-

I-000018 1 2016-5-

I-000134 y 2011-06-

I-0059 Philippines Technical data 539 Manu facturer Model designation Manufac turer Model desig nation Radio equip ment approval number 2017-04-

I-000011 9 y 2012-05-

I-0096 2016-02-

I-000003 8 Hirsch mann 920287B (locking system) KATHREI N RKE213E1 (locking system) Bosch Bosch ADC ADC MRR1Rear

(radar sen sor) MRRe14FCR

(radar sen sor) ARS4-A

(radar sen sor) ARS4-B

(radar sen sor) Radio equip ment approval number ESD-1408917 C Manufac turer Model desig nation Huf Baolong TSSRE4A

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) AG5SP4-D

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) ESD-1716172 C Schrader ESD-1409466 C MARQUARDT DC12A (lock ing system) ESD-140983 4C MARQUARDT DC12B (lock ing system) Radio equip ment approval number ESD-1715393 C ESD-1510376 C ESD-1714489 C ESD-1105216 C 540 Technical data Radio equip ment approval number ESD-1105215 C ESD-1715652 C ESD-1510644 C ESD-1510645 C ESD-1919198 C MARQUARDT DC12K (lock ing system) MARQUARDT MS2 (locking MARQUARDT MK1 (locking MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) system) system) 3350.38

(locking sys tem) MARQUARDT Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Radio equip ment approval number Radio equip ment approval number ESD-1105246 C ESD-120604 4C ESD-1511856 C HELLA HELLA HUF HUF DM4 (locking system) ESD-1715539 C Hirschmann MARSKEY LESS (locking system) HUF14632

(locking sys tem) HUF4761

(locking sys tem) ESD-1714865 C Hirschmann ESD-1511236 C KATHREIN ESD-1206521 C 920287A

(locking sys tem) 920287B

(locking sys tem) RKE213E1

(locking sys tem) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) ESD-1510698 C Russia Zambia Technical data 541 Manufac turer Model desig nation Radio equip ment approval number Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Radio equip ment approval number Huf Baolong Huf Baolong TSSRE4A

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) TSSSG4G6

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Huf Baolong Schrader TSSSG4G6b

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) AG5SP4-D

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) MARQUARDT DC12A (lock ing system) MARQUARDT DC12B (lock ing system) MARQUARDT DC12K (lock ing system) MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) Radio equip ment approval number ZMB/

ZICTA/TA/

2019/5/16 ZMB/

ZICTA/TA/

2019/5/17 ZMB/

ZICTA/TA/

2019/5/18 ZMB/

ZICTA/TA/

2018/9/30 542 Technical data Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation MARQUARDT MK1 (locking MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) system) MARQUARDT HELLA 3350.38

(locking sys tem) DM4 (locking system) Radio equip ment approval number ZMB/

ZICTA/TA/

2019/3/20 ZMB/

ZICTA/TA/

2019/3/21 ZMB/

ZICTA/TA/

2019/3/6 ZMB/

ZICTA/TA/

2019/3/4 Radio equip ment approval number HELLA HUF LEOPOLD KOSTAL Hirschmann MARSKEY LESS (locking system) ZMB/

ZICTA/TA/

2019/3/3 HUF4761

(locking sys tem) KK1 (locking system) 920287A

(locking sys tem) ZMB/

ZICTA/TA/

2018/12/18 ZMB/

ZICTA/TA/

2019/3/48 ZMB/

ZICTA/TA/

2019/7/12 Radio equip ment approval number ZMB/

ZICTA/TA/

2019/7/11 ZMB/

ZICTA/TA/

2019/3/11 Hirschmann KATHREIN 920287B

(locking sys tem) RKE213E1

(locking sys tem) Technical data 543 Radio equip ment approval number Singapore Manufac turer Model desig nation Radio equip ment approval number N0380-15 N0871-19 N1699-17 DA103365 DA103365 LRR3 (radar sensor) MRR1Rear

(radar sen sor) MRRe14FCR

(radar sen sor) ARS4-A

(radar sen sor) ARS4-B

(radar sen sor) Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Radio equip ment approval number HUF Baolong DA103787 MARQUARDT DC12A (lock HUF Baolong DA103787 HUF Baolong DA28467 Schrader DA105282 TSSRE4A

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) TSSSG4G6

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) TSSSG4G6b

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) AG5SP4-D

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) ing system) MARQUARDT DC12B (lock ing system) MARQUARDT DC12K (lock ing system) MARQUARDT MS2 (locking MARQUARDT MK1 (locking MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) system) system) N1138-17 DA103787 N0793-16 DA103787 N0726-16 DA103787 N1067-17 DA103787 N2522-15 DA103787 N2523-15 DA103787 Bosch Bosch Bosch ADC ADC 544 Technical data Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation MARQUARDT Hirschmann Serbia Radio equip ment approval number N0812-11 Radio equip ment approval number N0506-19 DA103787 N3010-17 DA 103365 N1298-17 DA103365 N2147-15 DA103787 N2797-12 DA103365 N2292-15 3350.38

(locking sys tem) DM4 (locking system) MARSKEY LESS (locking system) HUF14632

(locking sys tem) HUF4761

(locking sys tem) KK1 (locking system) HELLA HELLA HUF HUF LEOPOLD KOSTAL 920287A

(locking sys tem) 920287B

(locking sys tem) RKE213E1

(locking sys tem)

(interior pro tection) Hirschmann N1231-12 KATHREIN N2225-15 Meta System ITS/TPS N2215-11 Meta System MUW II N2216-11 LRR3 (radar sensor) 1-06-3454-19 0/09 Manufac turer Model desig nation Bosch Bosch Bosch ADC MRR1Rear

(radar sen sor) MRRe14FCR

(radar sen sor) ADC ARS4-

A (radar sen sor) Radio equip ment approval number 34540-840/

17-3 P1617068100 011 14 Technical data 545 Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Radio equip ment approval number Radio equip ment approval number ADC 011 14 Huf Baolong 005 19 Schrader Radio equip ment approval number 005 17 Huf Baolong 005 17 Huf Baolong 005 17 ADC ARS4-

B (radar sen sor) TSSRE4A

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) TSSSG4G6

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) TSSSG4G6b

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) AG5SP4-D

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) MFR (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Schrader 005 15 Schrader 005 18 Schrader 005 19 Schrader 011 11 GG4T (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) DG6W2D4

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) MC34MA4

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) 546 Technical data Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Radio equip ment approval number 005 17 P161704520 0 MARQUARDT DC12A (lock ing system) HELLA MARQUARDT DC12B (lock 011 11 HUF MARQUARDT DC12K (lock 011 11 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking 011 17 ing system) ing system) system) HELLA DM4 (locking system) 005 17 P1617108200 HUF LEOPOLD KOSTAL MARSKEY LESS (locking system) HUF14632

(locking sys tem) HUF4761

(locking sys tem) KK1 (locking system) Radio equip ment approval number 005 17 P161705260 0 005 18 P1618104600 005 18 P1618156300 005 18 P161808020 0 Radio equip ment approval number 005 18 P161808450 0 005 18 P161808440 0 005 18 P1618107600 Hirschmann Hirschmann KATHREIN 920287A

(locking sys tem) 920287B

(locking sys tem) RKE213E1

(locking sys tem) South Africa Technical data 547 Manufac turer Model desig nation Gentex EURO II (lock ing system) Meta System MUW II (inte rior protec tion) Radio equip ment approval number 005 14 P161408520 0 011 19 P161904550 0 Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Radio equip ment approval number TA-2014/212 TA-2017/201 3 MRR1Rear

(radar sen sor) MRRe14FCR

(radar sen sor) ADC Huf Baolong LRR3 (radar sensor) 1965/00700 9/07 Huf Baolong ARS4-A

(radar sen sor) TA-2014/163 7 Radio equip ment approval number TA-2014/178 3 TA-2017/139 3 TA-2017/139 1 ARS4-B

(radar sen sor) TSSRE4A

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) TSSSG4G6

(control unit)

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Bosch Bosch Bosch ADC 548 Technical data Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Radio equip ment approval number TA-2019/144 0 Huf Baolong Schrader TSSSG4G6b

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) AG5SP4-D

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) MFR (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Schrader Schrader TA-2015/072 Approved Schrader TA-2019/273 Approved Schrader Radio equip ment approval number TA-2017/388 4 Approved TA-2017/293 3 Approved TA-2011/137 0 Approved Radio equip ment approval number MARQUARDT DC12B (lock TA-2011/370 ing system) MARQUARDT DC12K (lock ing system) MARQUARDT MS2 (locking TA-2012/154 2 TA-2016/331 4 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking TA-2015/179 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking TA-2015/180 system) system) system) GG4T (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) DG6W2D4

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) MC34MA4

(tyre pressure monitoring sensor) ing system) MARQUARDT DC12A (lock TA-2017/312 Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation Manufac turer Model desig nation HUF KATHREIN Radio equip ment approval number TA-2012/154 3 DM4 (locking system) TA-2017/251 8 LEOPOLD KOSTAL TA-2015/595 Gentex Hirschmann TA-2011/374 Gentex Radio equip ment approval number TA-2018/398 5 MARQUARDT 3 350.38

(locking sys tem) HELLA HELLA HUF MARSKEY LESS (locking system) HUF14632

(locking sys tem) TA-2016/350 0 TA-2015/107 7 HUF4761

(locking sys tem) KK1 (locking system) 920287A

(locking sys tem) 920287B

(locking sys tem) Hirschmann Meta System ITS Master TA-2013/126 2 Technical data 549 Radio equip ment approval number TA-2015/143 8 TA-2005/614 TA-2015/138 6 TA-2011/163 6 RKE213E1

(locking sys tem) EURO II (lock ing system) MUAHL 5

(locking sys tem)

(interior pro tection) 550 Technical data Manufac turer Model desig nation Meta System ITS Sensor Radio equip ment approval number TA-2011/122 7 Meta System MUW II (inte TA-2019/261

(interior pro tection) rior protec tion) Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Oman Manu facturer Bosch LRR3 Bosch Bosch ADC ADC MRR1Rear (radar sen sor) MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) ARS4-A (radar sen sor) ARS4-B (radar sen sor) Radio equip ment approval number TRA/TA-

R/

1049/09 TRA/TA-

R/

1849/14 TRA/TA-

R/

4353/17 R/

2016/14 D080134 R/

2210/14 D080134 Radio equip ment approval number TRA R/

4516/17 D100428 TRA R/

4515/17 D100428 TRA R/

7506/19 D100428 TRA R/

2380/15 D080134 TRA R/

7464/19 D090258 Huf Bao long Huf Bao long Huf Bao long Schrader TSSRE4A (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) TSSSG4G6 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) AG5SP4-D (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Radio equip ment approval number TRA TA-

R/

4686/17 D080134 TRA TA-

R/

5511/18 D172249 TRA/TA-

RD10042 8 TRA/TA-

R/

0227/11 TRA/TA-

R/

0228/11 Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) MAR QUARDT DC12A (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT DC12B (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT DC12K (locking sys tem) Radio equip ment approval number TRA/TA-

R/

4136/17 TRA/TA-

R/

2848/15 TRA/TA-

R/

2900/15 TRA/TA-

R/

7051/19 TRA/TA-

R/

4548/17 MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MS2 (locking system) HELLA MK1 (locking system) MK2 (locking system) HUF HUF MARSKEYLESS (lock ing system) HUF14632 (locking system) HUF4761 (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT 3 350.38 (locking system) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) HELLA DM4 (locking system) Hirsch mann 920287A (locking system) Technical data 551 Radio equip ment approval number TRA/TA-

R/

4158/17 TRA/TA-

R/

2665/15 TRA/TA-

R/

0920/12 TRA/TA-

R/

3129/16 TRA/TA-

R/

0210/11 552 Technical data Manu facturer Model designation Thailand Radio equip ment approval number TRA/TA-

R/

0655/12 TRA/TA-

R/

2715/15 Hirsch mann 920287B (locking system) Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation KATHREI N RKE213E1 (locking system) Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) Meta Sys tem ITS/TPS (interior pro tection) Radio equip ment approval number A57006-

15 Bosch Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen sor) A57005-

14 MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) A57003-

17 Radio equip ment approval number RF test report:

166683T RFWL EMC test report:

166683 TRF EMC Safety report:

149852T RFSAF Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Meta Sys tem MUW II (interior pro tection) Radio equip ment approval number RF test report:

149852-2 R1TRFEM C EMC test report:

149852-1 R1TRFEM C Safety report:

Togo Manu facturer Model designation MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT DC12A (locking sys tem) DC12B (locking sys tem) Technical data 553 Manu facturer Model designation Radio equip ment approval number 008/19 021/19 020/19 039/19 No. 040/19 Radio equip ment approval number 149852T RFSAF Radio equip ment approval number No. 055/19 No. 057/19 MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT HELLA HUF DC12K (locking sys tem) No. 056/19 MS2 (locking system) No. MK1 (locking system) No. MK2 (locking system) No. HELLA DM4 (locking system) No. MARSKEYLESS (lock ing system) HUF4761 (locking sys tem) No. 041/19 554 Technical data Manu facturer Model designation Ukraine Radio equip ment approval number No. 060/19 No. 024/19 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) KATHREI N RKE213E1 (locking system) Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Radio equip ment approval number UA.TR. 109.R. 0031-19 UA.TR. 109.R. 0598-18 UA.TR. 109.R. 0030-19 UA RF:

1CONT00 04 Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) Bosch Bosch ADC MRR1Rear (radar sen sor) MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) ARS4-A (radar sen sor) Radio equip ment approval number UA RF:

1CONT00 01 UA 1.001.018 568-19-

TE UA 1.001.018 586-19-

TE ADC ARS4-B (radar sen sor) Huf Bao long TSSRE4A (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Huf Bao long TSSSG4G6 (control unit) (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Huf Bao long TSSSG4G6b (control unit) (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) MAR QUARDT DC12A (locking sys tem) Radio equip ment approval number UA 1.001.019 289-19-

TE UA.TR. 028 UA1O094

. 004789-1 7 Radio equip ment approval number UA.R.TR. 052.308-

19 UA.R.TR. 052.309-

19 MAR QUARDT DC12B (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT MK2 (locking system) UA1.001. 019234-1 9-TE MAR QUARDT DC12K (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT 3 350.38 (locking system) MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MS2 (locking system) UA1.001. 019129-1 9-TE MK1 (locking system) UA1.001. 019233-1 9-TE HELLA DM4 (locking system) UA.TR. 109.R. 0325-18 HELLA MARSKEYLESS (lock ing system) RTS.UKR. 355-34/

18 Technical data 555 Radio equip ment approval number UA1.001. 018888-1 9-TE Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation KATHREI N RKE213E1 (locking system) Gentex EURO II (locking sys tem) 556 Technical data Radio equip ment approval number 1O094.0 04959-17 UA1.001. 018653-1 9-TE 1O094.0 06682-19 1O094.0 05751-17 1O094.0 04974-17 HUF HUF LEOPOLD KOSTAL Hirsch mann Hirsch mann HUF14632 (locking system) HUF4761 (locking sys tem) KK1 (locking system) 920287A (locking system) 920287B (locking system) United Arab Emirates Radio equip ment approval number 1O094.0 05308-17 UA1.001. 008806-

15 Manu facturer Model designation ADC ADC ARS4-A (radar sen sor) ARS4-B (radar sen sor) Radio equip ment approval number TRA ER58296

/17, DA40068 TRA ER61136

/18, DA40068 Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Huf Bao long TSSRE4A (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Huf Bao long TSSSG4G6b (control unit) (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Huf Bao long TSSSG4G6 (control unit) (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Schrader AG5SP4-D (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Radio equip ment approval number TRA ER7307/

19, DA00862 37/12 TRA ER37156

/15, DA00470 74/10 Radio equip ment approval number TRA ER57806

/17, DA36976

/14 TRA ER57807

/17, DA36976

/14 Technical data 557 Radio equip ment approval number TRA ER57985

/17, DA00470 74/10 TRA ER96052 8/18, DA00470 74/10 558 Technical data Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) MAR QUARDT DC12B (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT MS2 (locking system) MAR QUARDT DC12A (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT DC12K (locking sys tem) MAR QUARDT MK1 (locking system) Radio equip ment approval number TRA ER37066

/15, DA00470 74/10 TRA ER53465

/17, DA00189 94/09 Radio equip ment approval number TRA ER00678 28/11, DA00189 94/09 TRA ER00678 29/11, DA00189 94/09 Radio equip ment approval number TRA ER52668

/17, DA00189 94/09 TRA ER40046

/15, DA00189 94/09 Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation MAR QUARDT MK2 (locking system) HELLA DM4 (locking system) HUF HUF14632 (locking system) MAR QUARDT 3350.38 (locking sys tem) HELLA MARSKEYLESS (lock ing system) HUF HUF4761 (locking sys tem) Radio equip ment approval number TRA ER56616

/15, DA44932

/15 TRA ER56005

/15, DA44932

/15 Radio equip ment approval number TRA ER40047

/15, DA00189 94/09 TRA ER69280

/19, 0018994

/09 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) Technical data 559 Radio equip ment approval number TRA ER63716

/18, DA36976

/14 TRA ER55496

/17, DA36976

/14 ER62622

/18 560 Technical data Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Hirsch mann 920287A (locking system) KATHREI N RKE213E1 (locking system) Hirsch mann 920287B (locking system) Gentex MUAHL 5 (locking system) Radio equip ment approval number TRA ER52213

/17, DA35219

/14 TRA ER42011

/5, DA35219

/14 Vietnam Radio equip ment approval number TRA ER64693

/18, DA36975

/14 TRA ER41849

/15, DA35176

/14 Manu facturer Model designation Huf Bao long Schrader TSSRE4A (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) AG5SP4 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure monitoring sensor) Radio equip ment approval number C011220 0717AF0 4A2 C000205 0119AF0 42A C0170191 017AF04 A2 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pres sure monitoring sen sor) C007807 0518AF0 4A2 Technical data 561 Radio equip ment approval number The Eurasian Economic Union Manu facturer Model designation Radio equip ment approval number Bosch Bosch Bosch ADC ADC LRR3 (radar sensor) MRR1Rear (radar sen sor) MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) ARS4-A (radar sen sor) ARS4-B (radar sen sor) Manu facturer Model designation Manu facturer Model designation Radio equip ment approval number MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT DC12A (locking sys tem) DC12B (locking sys tem) DC12K (locking sys tem) MS2 (locking system) MK1 (locking system) MAR QUARDT MAR QUARDT HELLA HELLA HUF HUF MK2 (locking system) 3350.38 (locking sys tem) DM4 (locking system) MARSKEYLESS (lock ing system) HUF4761 (locking sys tem) HUF14632 (locking system) Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview Vehicle identification plate 562 Technical data Manu facturer Model designation Radio equip ment approval number LEOPOLD KOSTAL Hirsch mann Hirsch mann KK1 (locking system) 920287A (locking system) 920287B (locking system) KATHREI N RKE213E1 (locking system) Vehicle identification plate (example: Kuwait) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 Place of manufacture 3 Manufacturing date 4 Paint code 5 VIN Technical data 563 VIN in front of the front seat 5 Permissible gross mass of vehicle combina tion (kg) (for certain countries only, optional) 6 Maximum permissible front axle load (kg) 7 Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg) 8 Paint code

% The data shown in the illustration is example data. Vehicle identification plate (example: all other countries) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 EU general operating permit number (only for certain countries) 3 VIN (vehicle identification number) 4 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight

(kg) 1 VIN (vehicle identification number) 564 Technical data VIN at the lower edge of the windscreen 1 VIN (vehicle identification number) The VIN at the lower edge of the windscreen is only available in some countries. Engine number The engine number is stamped into the crank case.

% Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Operating fluids Notes on operating fluids

& WARNING Risk of injury from operating fluids harmful to your health Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm ful to your health.

# Observe the text on the original con tainers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids.

# Always store operating fluids sealed in their original containers.

# Always keep children away from operat ing fluids. fuel

& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from Fuels are highly flammable.

# Fire, naked flames, smoking and crea tion of sparks must be avoided.

# Switch off the ignition and, if available, the stationary heater, before and while refuelling the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.

# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

# Do not inhale fuel vapour.

# Keep children away from fuel.

# Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.

# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten tion immediately. Do not induce vomit ing.

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre sponsible disposal

# Dispose of operating fluids in an envi ronmentally responsible manner. Operating fluids include the following:

R fuels R exhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. DeNOx agent AdBlue, diesel exhaust fluid R lubricants R coolant R brake fluid R windscreen washer fluid R climate control system refrigerant Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. You can identify operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container:

R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Further information on approved operating flu ids:

R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids at http://bevo.mercedes-

benz.com (by entering the designation) R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app (by entering the designation) R at a qualified specialist workshop Technical data 565 Fuel Information on fuel grades for vehicles with petrol engines Observe the notes on operating fluids

(/ page 564).

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

# Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free fuel that conforms to European EN 228, or an equivalent specification. Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suita ble for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

R diesel R regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON 566 Technical data R petrol with more than 10% ethanol by vol ume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100 R petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30 R petrol with additives containing metal If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

# do not switch on the ignition.

# consult a qualified specialist workshop. According to European standard EN 16942 you can find the following compatibility indications for fuel:

R on the instruction label on the fuel filler flap of your vehicle R on the fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe can also refuel using premium grade petrol with at least 95 RON. All models: as a temporary measure, if the rec ommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with an octane num ber of at least 91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using petrol with a lower RON. Further information on fuel can be found:

R at a filling station R at a qualified specialist workshop Information on additives in petrol Observe the notes on operating fluids

(/ page 564).

* NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring.

# Only add cleaning additives recommen ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel. 1 For petrol with maximum 5% ethanol by vol 2 For petrol with maximum 10% ethanol by vol ume ume If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul phur, this can produce unpleasant odours. Recommended fuel: the recommended octane number for your vehicle can be found in the instruction label in the fuel filler flap

(/ page 190). All models: if you wish to achieve maximum engine output, refuel using only super unleaded petrol with at least 98 RON. Alternatively, you

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The following compatibility indication for fuel applies to your vehicle:

Technical data 567 Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands that have additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz service centre, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-

Benz. Be sure to observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Information on fuel grades for vehicles with a diesel engine General notes Observe the notes on operating fluids

(/ page 564).

& WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.

# Never refuel using petrol in diesel engines.

# Never mix petrol with diesel fuel. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

# Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel that conforms to European stand ard EN 590, or an equivalent specifica tion. In countries without sulphur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur content less than 50 ppm. Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

R petrol R marine diesel R heating oil R pure bio-diesel fuel or vegetable oil R paraffin or kerosene If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

# Do not switch the ignition on. 1 For diesel fuel with a maximum of 7% by vol ume bio-diesel (fatty acid methyl ester) According to European standard EN 16942 you can find the compatibility indications at the fol lowing locations:

R on the vehicle on the information label in the fuel filler flap (/ page 190) R on the fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe 568 Technical data Information on low outside temperatures Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel fuel as possible at the beginning of winter. Before changing over to winter diesel fuel, the fuel tank should be empty, if possible. When first refuelling with winter diesel fuel, only refuel using a small amount, e.g. to reserve level. The fuel tank can be filled as usual when next refuel ling. Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified specialist workshop. Tank content and fuel reserve Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment. Model All models All models Total capacity of which reserve fuel AdBlue Notes on AdBlue Observe the notes on operating fluids

(/ page 564). AdBlue is a water-soluble fluid for the NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It may be improper or punishable in some coun tries to operate a vehicle that uses no AdBlue or one that does not comply with the specifica tions of these operating instructions.

* NOTE Malfunctions due to the dilution of AdBlue or the use of additive-enhanced AdBlue The function of the NOx exhaust gas after treatment can be impaired by the use of unsuitable denoxification agents.

# Only use AdBlue in accordance with ISO 22241.

# Do not dilute AdBlue with water.

# Do not use additive-enhanced AdBlue.

* NOTE Damage and malfunctions due to impurities in AdBlue Consequences of impurities in AdBlue:

R increased emission values R damage to the catalytic converter R NOx exhaust gas aftertreatment malfunc tions

# Avoid impurities in AdBlue. AdBlue residues crystallise after a period of time, and contaminate the surfaces with which they come into contact. Clean the dirty surfaces with water as soon as possible. When you open the AdBlue tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may escape. Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be released. Only fill the AdBlue tank in well-venti lated areas. AdBlue capacity Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. Technical data 569 therefore deviate from the range currently dis played in the on-board computer. The informa tion supplied in the Owner's Manual regarding the reserve quantity at the first display warning and on the minimum top-up quantity when the tank is empty is also to be understood as guide values. Display the AdBlue range and level

(/ page 278). Display the AdBlue fill level and range (see vehicle Owner's Manual). Engine oil Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids

(/ page 564). Total capacity of AdBlue tank Model Total capacity All models AdBlue consumption The average AdBlue consumption is between 1% and 5% of fuel consumption. Like fuel con sumption, AdBlue consumption is highly dependent upon driving style and operating con ditions. For this reason, your vehicle's actual consumption figures under day-to-day operating conditions may differ from the consumption fig ures calculated. The frequency at which you will have to top up AdBlue will also vary. Have the AdBlue supply checked at a qualified specialist workshop before making journeys outside of Europe. Before a longer stay outside of Europe, consult a qualified specialist workshop. AdBlue range and fill level The AdBlue fill level and range can be displayed via the on-board computer. The AdBlue range shown depends strongly on the driving style and operating conditions. The actual range can

* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi tives

# Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.

# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.

# Do not use additives.

# Have the engine oil renewed at regular intervals. 570 Technical data Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use engine oils approved by Mercedes-

Benz. Petrol engines: for certain countries, different engine oils can be used in conjunction with reduced maintenance intervals.

% Further information on different engine oils can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Quality and capacity of engine oil Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval (petrol engines) Engine oil specifica tions Model All models MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval (diesel engines) Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. Engine oil specifica tions Replacement amount Model All models

* recommended for lowest possible fuel con sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes) To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifi cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed. If the engine oils listed in the table are not avail able, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre of the following engine oils once only:

R petrol engines: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval R diesel engines: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter. Model All models Replacement amount Notes on brake fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids

(/ page 564).

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapour pockets forming in the brake sys tem The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake sys tem when the brakes are applied hard. This impairs the braking effect.

# Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use a brake fluid approved by Mercedes-

Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0. Coolant Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids

(/ page 564).

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart ment, it may ignite.

# Allow the engine to cool down before you top up the antifreeze.

# Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler opening.

# Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool ant

# Only add coolant that has been pre mixed with the required antifreeze pro tection. Information on coolant is available at the fol lowing locations:

R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids 310.1

at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo App

Technical data 571 tected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures.

# Always use coolant approved by Mercedes-Benz.

# Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper ating Fluids 310.1. Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. The proportion of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system should be:

R a minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to approximately -37 C) R a maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection R at a qualified specialist workshop down to -45 C)

* NOTE Overheating at high outside tem Notes on windscreen washer fluid peratures If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro Observe the notes on operating fluids

(/ page 564).

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury due to

* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by windscreen washer concentrate mixing windscreen washer fluids R condition of the suspension R optional equipment 572 Technical data Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

# Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen washer fluid Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting.

# Only use windscreen washer fluids which are also suitable for use on plas tic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.

# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win terFit with other windscreen washer flu ids. Do not use distilled or de-ionised water as the fill level sensor may be triggered erroneously. Recommended windscreen washer fluid:

R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa tion on the antifreeze container. Mix the washer fluid with the windscreen washer fluid all year round. Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions The heights specified may vary as a result of:

R tyres R load Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. Technical data 573 Further information can be obtained at a quali fied specialist workshop. 1 Height when opened Height when opened Model All models Vehicle dimensions All models Vehicle length Vehicle width including out side mirrors Vehicle width excluding out side mirrors Wheelbase Vehicle height Model All models Weights and loads Please note that for the specified vehicle data:

R Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the payload. R Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate

(/ page 562). Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. Roof load All models Maximum roof load Trailer hitch General notes on the trailer hitch Modifications to the engine cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle model. The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissi ble if a towing capacity is specified in your vehi cle documents. 574 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Introduction Information about display messages Display messages appear on the driver display. Display messages with graphic symbols are sim plified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols on the driver display. The driver display shows high-priority display mes sages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display mes sages and follow the additional notes in the Owner's Manual. For some display messages, a symbol will also be shown:

R Further information R Hide display message You can select the desired symbol by swiping left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. Press the symbol to show further information on the driver display. Press the symbol to hide the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the G button or the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be saved in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hid den. The driver display will show these display messages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified. Calling up saved display messages On-board computer:

4 Service 5 Message memory: XX If there are no display messages, Keine Meldun-

gen vorhanden will appear on the driver display.

# Scroll through the display messages by swip ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To exit the message memory: press the G button. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 575 Occupant safety 6 6 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36). Restraint system malfunc-

tion Consult workshop Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Front left malfunction Con-

sult workshop (example) Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. 6 Left windowbag malfunc-

tion Consult work-

shop (example)

* The corresponding window airbag is malfunctioning (/ page 36).

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident.

# Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. 576 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Push rear left seat belt extender back manually See Owner's Manual (exam ple)

* The corresponding seat belt extender is malfunctioning.

# Slide the seat belt extender back into its original position manually.

# If the malfunction occurs again, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Front passenger airbag dis-

abled See Owner's Manual

* The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person with an adult stature is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.

& WARNING Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, espe cially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.

# Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 47).

# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The front passenger airbag is enabled while the vehicle is in motion:

R even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat Front passenger airbag ena-

bled See Owner's Manual Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions R even when the front passenger seat is not occupied Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 577 The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag may deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag.

# Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child can occur.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 47).

# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual

* The PRESAFE functions are malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 578 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The PRESAFE Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual Key Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Replace key See Owner's Manual

* Vehicles with a digital vehicle key : only a few or no authorisations remain for starting the engine.

# Make sure that the internet connection is not restricted by certain mobile phone settings.

# Open Mercedes me connect https://www.mercedes.me and call up the Digital Vehicle Key service.

# Deactivate the service first and then activate it again.

# If the display message still appears, contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (CAC).

* Vehicles with a digital vehicle key sticker: only a few or no authorisations remain for starting the engine.

# Order a new digital vehicle key sticker from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or at the https://www.mercedes-

Replace key benz-mobile.com/.

* The key needs to be replaced.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The key battery is discharged.

# Replace the battery (/ page 69). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 579 Change key batteries Key not detected (white dis play message) Key not detected (red dis play message)

* The key is currently undetected.

# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

# If the key is still not recognised, place it in the slot for starting with the key (/ page 175).

* The key cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine:

R You can no longer start the engine. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.

# Ensure that the key is in the vehicle. If the key detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source:

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 175). 580 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual

* Key detection is malfunctioning.

# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

# Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 175). Lights

Left dipped beam (example)

Malfunction See Owner's Manual Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The corresponding light source is defective.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

% LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes in the light are faulty.

* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Check the fuses and replace them if necessary (/ page 486). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The light sensor is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 581

Automatic driving lights inoperative

Active Light System inoper-

ative

Switch on headlamps

Switch off lights

* The active headlamps are malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* You are driving without low-beam headlamps.

# Turn the light switch to the L or position.

* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.

# Turn the light switch to the position.

* The DIGITAL LIGHT system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to function without the functions of

* The MULTIBEAM LED system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to function without the functions 582 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DIGITAL LIGHT Functions limited MULTIBEAM LED Functions limited the DIGITAL LIGHT system.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. of the MULTIBEAM LED system.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 148).

# Drive on. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative Hazard warning lamp sys-

tem Malfunction

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus available again display message will appear. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 583 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning.

# When the vehicle is stationary on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the stationary heater, waiting several minutes between each attempt.

# If the stationary heater does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low. The stationary heater has switched itself off.

# Drive an extended distance until the battery has reached a sufficient charge level again.

* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on.

# Refuel the vehicle. Climate control

inoperative See Owner's Man.

inoperative Battery low

Inoperative Refuel vehicle 584 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. d Vehicle is operational Switch off ignition before exiting Operation only possible in transmission position P Trailer coupling in motion

# When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the key with you.

# If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only with the aid of a second battery

(starting assistance).

* The ball neck will not swivel because transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Engage park position j.

* The ball neck will retract/extend. Do not attempt to speed up, slow down or initiate the swivel movement using your hand, foot or other aids. During the swivel movement, do not couple a trailer. When the ball neck has reached an operational position, the display message will disappear. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 585 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.

& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked Check trailer hitch lock (white display mes sage) The trailer may become detached.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivel movement and do not re-couple the trailer until the warning/indicator lamp goes out.

# Initiate a new swivel movement and, at the same time, pull and hold the button on the boot lid until the ball neck engages beneath the bumper (/ page 266).

# When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on. If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.

# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The trailer hitch will not be operational when the vehicle is stationary.

# Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away. 586 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# If the ball neck is retracted: initiate a new swivel movement and, at the same time, pull and hold the button on the boot lid until the ball neck engages vertically in the locked position and then engages beneath the bumper (/ page 266).

# If the ball neck is extended: pull and hold the button on the boot lid until the ball neck engages beneath the bumper. If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.

# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the

* An electric power steering malfunction has occurred. Steering characteristics may be restricted as a result. unlocked ball neck.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Steering malfunction Drive carefully Visit workshop Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 587 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning. Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual Rear axle steering cur-

rently malfunctioning

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.

# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.

# Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The rear axle steering is temporarily unavailable. The turning circle may become wider.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. If the display message does not disappear:

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 588 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. The rear axle has no steering capability. The steering wheel may be tilted when you drive in a straight line.

# Adapt your speed and drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Rear axle steering Malfunc-

tion Visit workshop Rear axle steering Malfunc-

tion Stop immediately

* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. The rear axle has no steering capability. The steering wheel may tilt considerably when you drive in a straight line. Depending on the steering wheel's tilting position, the steering wheel will also vibrate and a continuous warning tone will sound.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# When stopping, bear the enlarged vehicle width in mind. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Snow chain mode Maxi-

mum speed exceeded Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's Manual

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The maximum permissible speed for snow chain mode has been exceeded.

# Drive more slowly.

* The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 589 C * At least one door is open. M * The bonnet is open.

# Close all doors.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked The bonnet may open and block your view.

# Never release the bonnet when driving.

# Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Close the bonnet. 590 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions N * The boot lid is open.

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

# Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid.

# Never drive with the boot lid open.

# Close the boot lid.

* The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged.

# Fold the seat backrest back until it engages. _ Rear left seat backrest not locked (example) Anti-theft alarm system Malfunction

* The anti-theft alarm system is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.

# Top up the washer fluid (/ page 461). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 591

* Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: intensive cleaning of the windscreen has been activated (/ page 152). Display messages Top up washer fluid Intensive cleaning activa-

ted for 30 s Engine To switch off the engine, press the Start/Stop but-

ton for at least 3 seconds or 3 times. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion.

# Information about switching off the engine while driving (/ page 174). 592 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The coolant level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.

Top up coolant See Own-

ers Manual Coolant Stop vehicle Switch engine off

# Add coolant (/ page 460).

# Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

* The coolant is too hot.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine.

& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the bonnet If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

# Wait until the engine has cooled down.

# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120 C. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 593 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The fan motor is defective. 8

# Refuel.

* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120 C. Reserve fuel level

Clean the fuel filter Replace air cleaner

* Vehicles with diesel engines: the fuel filter is dirty or the water in the fuel filter needs to be drained.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Vehicles with diesel engines: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 594 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Transmission Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only select P when vehicle is stationary Apply brake to deselect P position Apply brake and start engine to shift out of P or N

* Park position j can be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary.

# To stop, depress the brake pedal.

# Shift the transmission to park position j while the vehicle is stationary.

* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.

* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission Apply brake to select D or R

* You have attempted to select transmission position h or k. Apply brake to select R

* You have attempted to select transmission position k. position.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Change the transmission position.

# Start the engine.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Select transmission position h or k.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Select transmission position k. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 595 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* A malfunction has occurred in the emergency power supply to park position j.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the engine.

# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected.

# Select park position j when switching off the vehicle. Apply parking brake to park Visit workshop Risk of vehicle rolling away Driver's door open Trans-

mission not in P Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply parking brake to park Risk of vehicle rolling away N activated manually No automatic switch to P or the ignition switched on.

* The transmission is malfunctioning. Park position j cannot be selected.

# Park the vehicle safely.

# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.

* While the vehicle was at a standstill or driving at very low speed, neutral i was engaged with the engine running

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away When the ignition is being switched off or the driver's door opened, automatic engagement of park position j is deactivated. The vehicle may roll away. 596 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Be ready to brake.

# Do not leave the vehicle unattended. N automatically activated Please select transmission position again Reversing not poss. Con-

sult workshop Transmission Malfunction Stop

# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle is stationary.

# Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.

# To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k.

* Neutral i was automatically engaged when the vehicle was rolling or driving.

# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle is stationary.

# Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.

# To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k.

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position k cannot be selected.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral i automatically.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Engage park position j.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 597 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Consult workshop without changing the transmission position

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be changed.

# If transmission position h is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmis sion position.

# For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Stop vehicle Leave engine running Wait Transmission cooling

* The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Leave the engine running.

# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Auxiliary battery malfunc-

tion

* There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the engine.

# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 598 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Brakes

Parking brake See Owner's Manual

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply:

# Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.

# Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 201). If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. ing. To release:

# Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.

# Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 201). or

# Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 201). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:

# Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunction Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is mal Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 599 functioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.

# Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. To apply:

# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 201). To release:

# Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually. If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red ! indicator lamp continues to flash:

# Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the charge level is too low:

# Charge the 12 V battery. To apply:

600 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Apply the electric parking brake manually. If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. To release:

# If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 201). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:

# Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The red ! indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:

R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 201). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 201).

# Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake.

# Release the electric parking brake manually.

Release parking brake Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The red ! indicator lamp is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off.

# Switch on the ignition. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 601

Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake J Brake immediately J Check brake fluid level

* A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated. A horn may also sound at regular intervals. You cannot start the engine.

# Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the display message disappears. You can restart the engine.

* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.

# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv ing.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Do not top up the brake fluid. 602 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The brakepads have reached the wear limit.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Check brake pads See Owner's Manual Driving systems ATTENTION ASSIST inoper-

ative ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!

* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver

(/ page 253).

# If necessary, take a break. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected indicators of microsleep (/ page 253).

# It is recommended that you take a break immediately.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 603 P ATTENTION ASSIST Micro-

sleep Take a break!

Driver camera view cur-

rently restricted See Own-

er's Manual Change steering wheel/

seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen

* The view of the driver camera is reduced. Possible causes:

R Objects or stickers project into the driver cameras field of vision R The driver camera is dirty

# Keep the driver cameras field of vision free.

# Clean the driver camera if necessary.

* The driver camera cannot capture your line of sight.

# Change the steering wheel and seat position until six dots are visible on the top edge of the screen. Driver camera inoperative See Owner's Manual

* The driver camera is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 604 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Emergency Stop Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

* Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Emergency Stop Assist inoperative

* Active Emergency Stop Assist is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Beginning emergency stop

* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is initiated (/ page 230).

# Put your hands back on the steering wheel. You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions:

R Steering R Braking or accelerating R Pressing a steering-wheel button R Operating Touch Control R Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Limited availability of Active Parking Assist manoeuvring assistant See Owner's Manual

* Active Parking Assists collision avoidance is temporarily unavailable or only partially available.

# Clean all sensors of the parking and camera system (/ page 465).

# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, the rear Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is unavailable.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 605 PARKTRONIC and manoeu-

vring assistant not availa-

ble at rear when towing a trailer PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual

* Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.

# Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. or

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.

# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h

* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

* NOTE The tyres on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements

# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.

# If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.

# Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 80 km/h.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 606 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Function limited See Own-

er's Manual

* At least one main function of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system is malfunctioning. The system is outside the operating temperature range or the on-board electrical system voltage is too low.

* NOTE The vehicle's suspension and damping behaviour is restricted. The vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side during cornering.

# Drive on carefully.

# Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.

# Avoid sudden steering movements.

# Drive on carefully.

# Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.

# Avoid sudden steering movements. Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.

* At least one main function of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system is malfunctioning. The system is deactivated.

* NOTE The vehicle's suspension and damping behaviour has changed significantly, the vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side during cornering.

# Reduce vehicle speed. Drive on carefully. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 607 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Reduce the vehicle speed considerably before taking a curve.

# Avoid sudden steering movements. Fault Stop

# Continue driving carefully and do not exceed 80 km/h.

# If possible, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the ignition off and on again.

# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* There is a serious malfunction affecting the hydraulics of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system. The system is deactivated.

* NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics have changed significantly.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. STOP Vehicle level too low

# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIRMATIC is malfunctioning:

608 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE The tyres on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements

# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.

# If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.

# Set a higher vehicle level (/ page 234). Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised.

* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.

# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

* Due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the compressor first needs to cool down in order to set the selected vehicle level.

# Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance. When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle will continue rising to the selected vehicle level. Vehicle rising Please wait Compressor is cooling Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 609 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Steering Assist cur-

rently unavailable See Own-

er's Manual

* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 225).

# Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.

# If necessary, clean the windscreen in the camera's field of vision.

# Check the tyre pressure if necessary. Active Steering Assist inop-

erative

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.

* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits(/ page 225). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time.

# Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions. Active Steering Assist cur-

rently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.

# Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. Active Steering Assist is available once more.

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 263). 610 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently unavailable see Owner's Manual Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative See Owner's Manual

* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 231).

# Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.

* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning. Active Stop-and-Go Assist is deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 260).

# Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. or Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 611 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. Blind Spot Assist inopera-

tive

* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist not availa-

ble when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist is unavailable.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.

* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 260).

# Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. or

# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative

* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 612 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist is unavailable.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message. Active Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Man-

ual Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Traffic Sign Assist inopera-

tive

* Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.

# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.

# Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.

* Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.

# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes:

R dirt on the sensors R heavy rain or snow R extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 613 Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear:

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Clean all sensors (/ page 465).

# Restart the engine. Currently unavailable Radar dirty 614 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The camera view is restricted. Possible causes:

R Dirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Mist on the windscreen in front of the camera _ Off currently unavailable Cam-

era dirty

% Mist detected on the windscreen will be automatically removed using a built-in heater within approximately 12 minutes. Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear:

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Clean the windscreen if necessary.

* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled.

# Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 232). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.

# Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 221). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 615

* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 219).

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 221).

- - - km/h suspended Off Active Distance Assist cur-

rently unavailable See Own-

er's Manual

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 219).

# Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. Active Distance Assist inop-

erative

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. 616 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again and can be activated (/ page 221).

* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.

# Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 217). Cruise control inoperative

* Cruise control is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise control and Limiter inoperative

* Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise control off

* Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 215).

* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown), the limiter will be switched to pas sive mode (/ page 217). Active Distance Assist available again

- - - km/h passive Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The limiter cannot be activated as not all activation conditions have been fulfilled.

# Observe the activation conditions of the limiter (/ page 217). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 617 Limiter inoperative

* The limiter is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* You have reached the maximum permissible stored speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.

* You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only).

# Drive more slowly.

- - - km/h Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h Maximum speed exceeded 618 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* ABS and ESP are temporarily unavailable. Driving safety systems

currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa tion.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ABS and ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.

# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 619 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* ABS and ESP are malfunctioning.

inoperative See Owner's Manual currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa tion.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ABS and ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

* ESP is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully. 620 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop. inoperative See Owner's Manual

# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.

# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.

* ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. the BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa tion.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 621 T

inoperative See Owner's Manual Active Brake Assist Func-

tions currently limited See Owner's Manual

& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 208).

# Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. 622 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Brake Assist Func-

tions limited See Owner's Manual

* Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE PLUS is malfunctioning. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes me connect Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Device detected at diagnos-

tics connection See Own-

er's Manual

* The vehicle functions for fault detection are restricted. At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning.

# Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 29).

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. G Inoperative

* At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 623 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The 12 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Battery

12 V on-board electrical system Visit workshop

* The battery is no longer being charged and the charge level is too low.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Switch off the engine.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 624 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Switch on the engine to charge the 12 V battery

Stop the vehicle Leave the engine running to charge the 12 V battery Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual

* The engine is off and the charge level of the 12 V battery is too low.

# Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. To charge the 12 V battery:

# Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance.

* The battery charge level is too low.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Leave the engine running.

# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The 48 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Switch off the engine.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions. Convenience functions may be restricted.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 625 48 V battery See Owner's Manual Please wait 48 V battery charging

* The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the ignition while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance. The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. After a few minutes, the driver's display will show the display message Motor can be started again.

# Start the engine.

# Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting the charger from the vehicle. If the Motor can be started again display message does not appear after a few minutes:

# Try to start the engine again.

# If the engine does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Cannot start engine See Owner's Manual

* The charge level of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the engine.

# Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. 626 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connec tion point of the 12 V battery (/ page 480). The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle. Motor can be started again

* The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter.

# Start the engine and drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre pressure monitor Tyre press. monitor cur-

rently unavailable

* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are being received. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily unavailable.

# Drive on. The tyre pressure monitor will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. Tyre press. monitor inoper-

ative

* The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres. Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 627 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre press. monitor inoper-

ative No wheel sensors h Wheel sensor(s) missing h Check tyre(s)

# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

* The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is deactivated.

# Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.

* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the affected tyre.

# Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position will be displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure R The tyres can burst. R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.

# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. 628 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Check the tyre pressure (/ page 492) and the tyres. h Rectify tyre pressure h Warning tyre defect

* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the difference in tyre pressure between the individual wheels is too great.

# Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.

# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitoring system (/ page 495).

* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tyre R The tyres can overheat and cause a fire. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Do not drive on with a flat tyre.

# Observe the notes on flat tyres. Notes on flat tyres (/ page 470).

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Check the tyres. Tyre(s) overheated

* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres Overheated tyres can burst.

# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down. Reduce speed

* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 629

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres Overheated tyres can burst.

# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down. Exhaust gas aftertreatment Display messages Refill AdBlue See Owners Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The AdBlue level has fallen below the reserve range.

# Top up AdBlue immediately (/ page 194). 630 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The low AdBlue level will lead to limited performance after the remaining distance displayed has been driven.

# Top up AdBlue immediately (/ page 194). Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual XX,X l Top up AdBlue Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km XX,X l Top up AdBlue Switch on ignition, wait 60 sec. or eng. start not poss.

* The low AdBlue level will lead to limited performance starting from the speed displayed. After the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the engine.

# Add at least the amount of AdBlue displayed (/ page 194).

* The AdBlue tank is empty. You can no longer start the engine.

# Add at least the amount of AdBlue displayed (/ page 194).

# Switch on the ignition and wait for approximately 60 seconds.

# Start the engine. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The AdBlue system is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 631

* The AdBlue system is malfunctioning. Performance will be reduced once the remaining distance displayed has been covered.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* Power restriction due to the AdBlue system fault. After the distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the engine.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages AdBlue system fault See Owner's Manual AdBlue system malfunction Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual AdBlue system malfunction Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km 632 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The AdBlue system is malfunctioning. You can no longer start the engine.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. AdBlue system fault Engine start not possible Engine oil 5 Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* Display message only for certain engines:

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# When next refuelling, add 1 litre of engine oil (/ page 459). Notes on engine oil (/ page 569). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* Display message only for certain engines:

The engine oil level is too high. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 633 5 Engine oil level Reduce oil level 5 Engine oil level Stop vehi-

cle Switch engine off

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.

* Display message only for certain engines:

The engine oil level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Switch off the engine.

# Add 1 l of engine oil (/ page 459).

# Check the engine oil level. Notes on engine oil (/ page 569). 634 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* Display message only for certain engines:

The oil pressure is too low. 5 Engine oil pressure Stop Switch off engine 5 Engine oil level cannot be measured

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure

# Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps Overview of indicator and warning lamps Some systems will perform a self-test when the ignition is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behaviour is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the engine has been star ted or during a journey. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 635 L Low beam (/ page 143) K High beam (/ page 145)

#! Turn signal lights (/ page 145) R Rear fog light (/ page 143) Driver's display Indicator and warning lamps:

6 Restraint system (/ page 636) Seat belt (/ page 636) Trailer hitch (/ page 637) Electric power steering (yellow) Electric power steering (red) Rear axle steering (yellow) Rear axle steering (red)

(/ page 637)

(/ page 637)

(/ page 637)

(/ page 637) Coolant temperature (/ page 640)

; Engine diagnostics (/ page 640)

% Preglow

# Electrical fault (/ page 640) 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap loca tion indicator (/ page 640)

! Electric parking brake (red)

! Electric parking brake (yellow)

(/ page 643)

(/ page 643) J Brakes (yellow) (/ page 643) J Brakes (red) (/ page 643) L Distance warning (/ page 645) AIRMATIC / E-ACTIVE BODY CON TROL (/ page 645)

! ABS (/ page 646) ESP(/ page 646) ESP OFF (/ page 646) h Tyre pressure monitor (/ page 649) T Standing lights (/ page 143) 636 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Occupant safety 6 Restraint system warning lamp Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

*The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Note the messages on the driver's display.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 7 Seat belt warning lamp flashes The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.

* The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.

# Fasten your seat belt(/ page 40).

* There are objects on the front passenger seat.

# Remove the objects from the front passenger seat. Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 7 Seat belt warning lamp lights up The red seat belt warning lamp will light up once the engine has started. In addition, a warning tone may sound.

*The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.

# Fasten your seat belt (/ page 40). If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the seat belt warning lamp may remain lit. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 637 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red trailer hitch warning lamp is lit.

*The trailer hitch is not operational or is swivelling. Vehicle Trailer tow hitch warning lamp

& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked The trailer may become detached.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivel movement and do not re-couple the trailer until the warning/indicator lamp goes out.

# Note the messages on the driver's display. 638 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the trailer hitch is swivelling:

# Wait until the ball neck has reached the operational position. The yellow electric power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

* The power-assisted steering or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

# Note the messages on the driver's display. The red electric power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

*The power-assisted steering or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired Warning lamp for electric power steering Warning lamp for electric power steering If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Note the messages on the driver's display. Rear axle steering warning lamp Rear axle steering warning lamp Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.

# Note the messages on the driver's display. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 639 The red rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

*The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Note the messages on the driver's display. 640 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Engine Coolant warning lamp The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

*Possible causes:

R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120 C.

& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the bonnet If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving.

# Note the messages on the driver's display. If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 641

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. or

# Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down.

# Check the coolant level (/ page 460).

# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120 C. The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

*A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.

# Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

*Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank may have been run dry.

# Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. If the yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked.

Engine diagnosis warning lamp 642 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.

* There is a fault in the electrics.

# Note the messages on the driver's display.

Electrical fault warning lamp 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.

* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.

# Refuel. Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp also lights up in the event of a malfunction.

* # Note the messages on the driver's display. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 643 Brakes

Electric parking brake indi cator lamp (red)

The electric parking brake

(yellow) indicator lamp J Brake system warning lamp

(yellow) The yellow brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

* & WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.

# If the driver display shows a display message, observe it. 644 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. J Brake system warning lamp

(red) The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

*Possible causes:

R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

# Note the messages on the driver's display.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.

# Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.

# Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driv ing.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 645 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Do not top up the brake fluid. Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Driving systems L Warning lamp for distance warning function Suspension warning lamp The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.

* The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.

# Be prepared to brake immediately.

# Increase the distance. Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 208). The yellow AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit.

* A fault has occurred in the AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL.

# Note the messages on the driver's display. 646 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL warning lamp is on.

*There is a fault in the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL. Suspension warning lamp

* NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics have changed significantly.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Note the messages on the driver's display.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems

ABS warning lamp Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

*ABS is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.

# Note the messages on the driver's display. Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 647

& WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. ESP warning lamp flashes ESP warning lamp lights up The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.

* One or more wheels has reached its grip limit (/ page 205).

# Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. The yellow ESP warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

*ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

# Note the messages on the driver's display.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. 648 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ESP OFF warning lamp The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

*ESP is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.

& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP deactivated ESP does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.

# Drive on carefully.

# Deactivate ESP only for as long as the situation requires. If ESP cannot be activated, ESP is malfunctioning.

# Have ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP (/ page 205). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 649 Tyre pressure monitor h Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.

*The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres. Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.

# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. h Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.

*The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure R The tyres can burst. R The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Observe the recommended tyre pressures. 650 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Check the tyre pressure and the tyres. 1, 2, 3 ... 4MATIC ..................................................... 190 Function .............................................. 190 12 V battery see Battery (vehicle) 48 V on-board electrical system Operating safety .................................... 22 230 V socket see Socket (230 V) 360 Camera ........................................... 244 Care .................................................... 465 Function .............................................. 244 A A/C function Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul timedia system) ................................... 162 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ............. 205 Acceleration see Kickdown Access data Setting (Bluetooth) ............................. 416 Setting (business telephony) ................ 417 Accident and breakdown manage ment Mercedes me connect ......................... 405 Acoustic locking verification signal Activating/deactivating ......................... 68 Activating/deactivating loudness adjustment Burmester 3D-surround sound sys tem ...................................................... 438 Active Blind Spot Assist ......................... 260 Activating/deactivating ....................... 263 Brake application ................................. 261 Function .............................................. 260 System limitations ............................... 260 Trailer operation .................................. 261 Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) .. 456 Operation ............................................ 456 Resetting ............................................. 456 Active Brake Assist Function/notes ................................... 208 Setting ................................................. 215 Index 651 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ......... 219 Active Emergency Stop Assist ............. 230 Active Lane Change Assist .................. 227 Calling up a speed ............................... 221 Function ............................................... 219 Increasing/decreasing speed .............. 221 Requirements: ..................................... 221 Route-based speed adaptation ............ 224 Selecting ............................................. 221 Steering wheel buttons ........................ 221 Storing a speed ................................... 221 Switching off/deactivating .................. 221 Switching on/activating ...................... 221 System limitations ............................... 219 Active Emergency Stop Assist ............... 230 Active headlamps .................................... 146 Active Lane Change Assist ..................... 227 Activating/deactivating ....................... 230 Function .............................................. 227 Active Lane Keeping Assist .................... 263 Activating/deactivating ....................... 265 Activating/deactivating the warning ... 265 Function .............................................. 263 Setting the sensitivity .......................... 265 652 Index System limits ....................................... 263 Trailer operation .................................. 263 Active Parking Assist .............................. 247 Cross Traffic Alert ............................... 253 Drive Away Assist ................................ 252 Exiting a parking space ....................... 250 Function .............................................. 247 Parking ................................................ 249 System limitations ............................... 247 Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS Active Speed Limit Assist ....................... 223 Display ................................................ 223 Function .............................................. 223 Active Steering Assist ............................. 225 Activating/deactivating ....................... 227 Active Emergency Stop Assist ............. 230 Active Lane Change Assist .................. 227 Function .............................................. 225 System limits ....................................... 225 Active Traffic Jam Assist Activating/deactivating ....................... 232 Function .............................................. 231 Adaptive brake lights .............................. 215 Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Function .............................................. 148 Switching on/off ................................. 150 Adaptive rear compartment light Configuring ......................................... 448 AdBlue .................................................... 568 Additives ............................................. 568 Capacity .............................................. 568 Fill level ............................................... 278 Notes ................................................... 193 Purity ................................................... 568 Range .................................................. 278 Topping up ........................................... 194 Additional door lock .................................. 71 Additives .................................................. 569 AdBlue ............................................... 568 Engine oil ............................................ 569 Fuel ..................................................... 566 Additives (AdBlue) see AdBlue Additives (engine oil) see Additives Additives (fuel) see Fuel Address book see Contacts Adjusting the balance/fader Burmester high-end 4D surround sound system ...................................... 439 Burmester 3D-surround sound sys tem ...................................................... 438 Adjusting the bass, mid-range and treble Burmester high-end 4D surround sound system ...................................... 439 Burmester 3D-surround sound sys tem ...................................................... 438 Adjusting the mid-range, treble and bass Burmester high-end 4D surround sound system ...................................... 439 Burmester 3D-surround sound sys tem ...................................................... 438 Adjusting the sound focus Burmester 3D-surround sound sys tem ...................................................... 438 Adjusting the sound optimisation Air inlet see Air-water duct Air pressure see Tyre pressure Burmester high-end 4D surround sound system ...................................... 440 Air suspension see AIRMATIC Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings Burmester high-end 4D surround sound system ...................................... 439 Burmester 3D-surround sound sys tem ...................................................... 438 ADS PLUS damping system see AIRMATIC Adverse weather light ............................. 148 After-sales service centre see ASSYST PLUS Air conditioning menu Calling up ............................................ 162 Air distribution Setting (MBUX multimedia system) ..... 162 Air freshener system see Fragrance system Air vents ................................................... 170 Adjusting (front) ................................... 170 Adjusting (rear) .................................... 171 Glove box ............................................. 172 Air vents see Air vents Air-recirculation mode ............................ 163 Air-water duct .......................................... 461 Keeping free ........................................ 461 Airbag ......................................................... 42 Activation .............................................. 36 Belt airbag ............................................. 39 Centre airbag (driver, front passenger) ............................................. 42 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) .... 42 Installation locations ............................. 42 Knee airbag ........................................... 42 Index 653 Overview ............................................... 42 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 47 Protection .............................................. 43 Reduced protection ............................... 44 Side airbag ............................................ 42 Window airbag ....................................... 42 AIRMATIC ................................................. 233 Setting ................................................. 234 Suspension .......................................... 233 Alarm system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) All-wheel drive see 4MATIC Alternative route see Route Ambient lighting Setting (multimedia system) ................ 151 Setting (Rear Seat Entertainment System) ............................................... 448 Android Auto ............................................ 397 Connecting a mobile phone ................. 398 Ending ................................................. 399 Information .......................................... 398 Overview ............................................. 397 654 Index Sound settings .................................... 399 Transferred vehicle data ...................... 399 Animals Pets in the vehicle ................................. 65 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-skid chains see Snow chains Anti-theft alarm system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Anti-theft protection Additional door lock ............................... 71 Immobiliser ........................................... 93 Anti-theft protection see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Anticipatory occupant protection see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection) see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) Apple CarPlay ........................................ 395 Connecting an iPhone ....................... 396 Ending ................................................. 397 Notes .................................................. 396 Overview ............................................. 395 Sound settings .................................... 397 Transferred vehicle data ...................... 399 Calling up (Rear Seat Entertainment System) ............................................... 451 Overview (Rear Seat Entertainment System) ............................................... 451 Apps Ashtray Use (front centre console) ................... 131 Using (rear door) ................................. 132 Assistance systems see Driving safety system Assistant display Menu (on-board computer) .................. 278 ASSYST PLUS ........................................... 455 Battery disconnection periods ............. 456 Displaying the service due date ........... 455 Function/notes ................................... 455 Regular maintenance work .................. 455 Special service requirements .............. 455 ATA (anti-theft alarm system) .................. 93 Deactivating the alarm .......................... 94 Function ................................................ 93 Function of interior protection ............... 95 Priming/deactivating interior protec tion ........................................................ 95 Priming/deactivating tow-away pro tection ................................................... 95 Tow-away protection function ................ 94 ATTENTION ASSIST .................................. 255 Setting ................................................. 255 System limits ....................................... 253 ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection .................................................. 253 Function .............................................. 253 Attention assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro sleep detection Augmented reality see Route guidance with augmented reality Authorised workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Automatic driving lights ......................... 144 Automatic engine start (ECO start/

stop function) ........................................... 181 Automatic engine stop (ECO start/

stop function) ........................................... 181 Automatic front passenger front air bag deactivation system see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff ........................................... 45, 47 Function of the automatic front passenger front airbag deactivation system ................................................... 45 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 47 Automatic lateral support adjustment Setting ................................................. 107 Automatic measures after an accident ... 51 Automatic mirror folding function Activating/deactivating ....................... 159 Automatic seat adjustment Setting ................................................. 106 Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever ........................... 186 Drive program display .......................... 184 Drive programs .................................... 184 DYNAMIC SELECT button .................... 184 Engaging drive position ....................... 188 Engaging neutral .................................. 187 Engaging park position ........................ 187 Engaging reverse gear ......................... 187 Kickdown ............................................. 189 Manual gear changing ......................... 188 Oil temperature (on-board computer, Performance menu) ............................. 279 Steering wheel gearshift paddles ........ 188 Transmission position display .............. 186 Transmission positions ........................ 186 Axle load Permissible .......................................... 562 B Bag hook .................................................. 125 Ball coupling Folding in/out (MBUX multimedia system) ................................................ 267 Ball neck Extending/retracting ........................... 266 Index 655 BAS (Brake Assist System) ..................... 205 Battery Charging (Remote Online) .................... 176 Key ........................................................ 69 Remote control (stationary heater) ...... 168 Battery see Battery (vehicle) Battery (vehicle) ...................................... 481 Charging .............................................. 480 Charging (Remote Online) .................... 176 Notes ................................................... 476 Notes (starting assistance and charging) ............................................. 478 Replacing ............................................. 481 Starting assistance .............................. 480 Belt see Seat belt Belt airbag Activation .............................................. 36 Function/notes ..................................... 39 Bicycle rack Trailer operation .................................. 270 656 Index Blind Spot Assist ..................................... 260 Activating/deactivating ....................... 263 Function .............................................. 260 System limitations ............................... 260 BlueTEC see AdBlue Bluetooth ............................................... 324 Information .......................................... 324 Setting up an Internet connection ........ 416 Switching on/off ................................. 324 Bonnet Resetting (active bonnet) .................... 456 Boost pressure (on-board computer, Performance menu) ................................ 279 Boot box see EASY-PACK boot box Boot floor Boot lid Opening ............................................... 128 Activating/deactivating the boot lid opening limiter ...................................... 82 Closing .................................................. 77 HANDS-FREE ACCESS ........................... 80 Locking separately ................................. 81 Opening ................................................. 76 Opening dimensions ............................ 572 Power closing function .......................... 77 Unlocking (emergency key) ................... 82 Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Notes ................................................... 570 Brake force distribution EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu tion) ..................................................... 208 Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 205 Active Brake Assist .............................. 208 Adaptive brake lights ........................... 215 BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 205 Driving tips .......................................... 178 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu tion) ..................................................... 208 HOLD function ..................................... 232 Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads) .................................................. 178 New/replaced brakepads/brake discs .................................................... 177 Post-collision brake ................................ 51 Running-in notes .................................. 177 Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System) Breakdown Overview of the help functions .............. 16 Tow-starting ........................................ 486 Towing away ........................................ 483 Transporting the vehicle ...................... 484 Wheel change ...................................... 500 Breakdown see Flat tyre Burmester high-end 4D surround sound system .......................................... 439 Adjusting the balance/fader ............... 439 Adjusting the sound optimisation ........ 440 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings ............................................... 439 Automatic loudness adjustment .......... 439 Calling up the sound menu .................. 439 Information .......................................... 439 Selecting the sound profile ................. 440 Burmester 3D-surround sound sys tem ........................................................... 437 Adjusting the balance/fader ............... 438 Adjusting the sound focus ................... 438 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings ............................................... 438 Automatic loudness adjustment .......... 438 Calling up the sound menu .................. 438 Information .......................................... 437 Selecting the sound profile .................. 438 Steering wheel ..................................... 274 Burmester 3D-surround sound sys tem ...................................................... 438 Calls .......................................................... 381 Accepting ............................................ 381 Activating functions during a call ......... 381 Calls with several participants ............. 382 Declining ............................................. 381 Ending a call ........................................ 381 Incoming call during an existing call .... 382 Making ................................................. 381 Mercedes me ...................................... 400 Camera ..................................................... 238 Dashcam ............................................. 369 Buttons C Call list Calling up options ............................... 386 Deleting ............................................... 386 Making a call ....................................... 386 Overview ............................................. 386 Selecting options for suggestions ........ 386 Calling up the sound menu Burmester high-end 4D surround sound system ...................................... 439 Car wash see Care Camera see 360 Camera see Reversing camera Car key see Key Car telephony see Telephone Car wash (care) ....................................... 462 Index 657 Car-to-X-Communication Displaying hazard warnings ................. 359 Overview ............................................. 358 Sending hazard warnings .................... 359 Care .......................................................... 466 360 Camera ...................................... 465 Air-water duct ...................................... 461 Car wash ............................................. 462 Carpet ................................................. 466 Decorative foil ..................................... 464 Display ................................................ 466 EASY-PACK boot box ........................... 466 Exterior lighting ................................... 465 High-pressure cleaner ......................... 463 Paintwork ............................................ 463 Plastic trim .......................................... 466 Real wood/trim elements ................... 466 Reversing camera ................................ 465 Roof lining ........................................... 466 Seat belt .............................................. 466 Seat cover ........................................... 466 Sensors ............................................... 465 Tailpipes .............................................. 465 Trailer hitch ......................................... 465 Washing by hand ................................. 463 658 Index Wheels/rims ....................................... 465 Windows .............................................. 465 Wiper blades ....................................... 465 Carpet (Care) ........................................... 466 Centre airbag (driver, front passenger) ... 42 Changing gears ........................................ 188 Manually .............................................. 188 Changing hub caps ................................. 500 Changing the lights Driving abroad (symmetrical low beam) .................................................. 143 Charging Battery (vehicle) .................................. 480 Mobile phone (wireless) ....................... 138 USB port .............................................. 135 Child seat Approval categories ............................... 57 Attaching (notes) ................................... 57 Basic instructions .................................. 51 ISOFIX/i-Size (fitting) ............................ 60 Notes on fastening (MBUX Interior Assistant) ............................................. 315 Notes on risks and dangers ................... 52 Recommended child restraint sys tems ...................................................... 55 Saving the position (MBUX Interior Assistant) ............................................. 315 Seats suitable for iSize child restraint systems ................................... 60 Seats suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems ................................... 59 Top Tether .............................................. 62 Child safety lock Children Activating/deactivating (MBUX Remote Control) .................................. 327 Rear door .............................................. 63 Rear side windows ................................. 65 Switching on/off (MBUX Rear Seat Entertainment System) ........................ 327 Avoiding dangers in the vehicle ............. 52 Basic instructions .................................. 51 Chock ....................................................... 499 Storage location .................................. 499 Chock see Chock CI+ module .............................................. 436 Calling up a menu ................................ 436 Inserting the smart card ...................... 436 Cigarette lighter Rear ..................................................... 133 City lighting ............................................. 148 Cleaning see Care Climate control Activating/deactivating (rear operat ing unit) ................................................ 161 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (MBUX multimedia system) ... 162 Activating/deactivating the synchro nisation function (MBUX multimedia system) ................................................ 163 Air distribution settings ....................... 162 Air-recirculation mode ......................... 163 Automatic control ................................ 162 Automatically controlling (rear oper ating unit) ............................................ 162 Calling up the air conditioning menu ... 162 Demisting windows ............................. 163 Front air vents ..................................... 170 Glove box air vent ................................ 172 Inserting/removing the flacon (fra grance system) .................................... 164 Ionisation ............................................. 164 Note .................................................... 160 Rear air vents ....................................... 171 Rear operating unit .............................. 161 Residual heat ....................................... 164 Residual heat (rear operating unit) ...... 164 Setting (MBUX multimedia system) ..... 162 Setting the fragrance system ............... 164 Setting the rear passenger compart ment (Rear Seat Entertainment Sys tem) ..................................................... 447 Stationary heater/ventilation .............. 166 Switching on/off .................................. 161 THERMOTRONIC control panel ............ 160 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening) ................................................ 85 Windscreen heating ............................. 165 Cockpit ......................................................... 6 Overview ................................................. 6 Coffee cup symbol see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro sleep detection Collision detection (parked vehicle) ...... 202 Combination switch ................................ 145 Communication module Setting the Internet connection auto matically .............................................. 415 Setting up an Internet connection ........ 414 Compass .................................................. 365 Computer see On-board computer Connection status Displaying ............................................ 419 Overview .............................................. 418 Connectivity Switching transmission of the vehicle position on/off .................................... 324 Consumption indicator Calling up ............................................ 185 Contacts ................................................... 382 Calling up ............................................ 383 Deleting ............................................... 385 Deleting favourites .............................. 385 Downloading (from mobile phone) ...... 383 Importing ............................................ 384 Index 659 Importing (overview) ........................... 384 Information .......................................... 382 Making a call ....................................... 384 Name format ....................................... 383 Options ................................................ 384 Saving as a favourite ........................... 385 Selecting options for suggestions ........ 384 Storing ................................................ 384 Control elements Touch-sensitive ...................................... 22 Convenience closing ................................. 85 Convenience opening ................................ 85 Coolant (engine) Check level .......................................... 460 Notes ................................................... 571 Copyright ................................................... 34 Cornering light ......................................... 147 Cover see Roller sunblind Cross Traffic Alert ................................... 253 Crosswind Assist Function/notes ................................... 207 660 Index Cruise control .......................................... 215 Activating ............................................. 217 Buttons ................................................ 217 Calling up a speed ............................... 217 Deactivating ......................................... 217 Function ............................................... 215 Requirements ...................................... 217 Selecting .............................................. 217 Setting a speed .................................... 217 Storing a speed .................................... 217 System limitations ............................... 215 Cup holder Rear (vehicles with a rear bench seat) .................................................... 130 D Dashboard see Cockpit Dashcam Configuring the settings ...................... 370 Deleting a video recording ................... 370 Notes .................................................. 369 Selecting a USB device ....................... 369 Starting/stopping video recording ...... 369 Data acquisition Data storage Vehicle .................................................. 32 Electronic control units ......................... 32 Online services ...................................... 33 Vehicle .................................................. 32 Deactivating the alarm (ATA) .................... 94 Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop Declaration of conformity Electromagnetic compatibility ............... 24 Jack ....................................................... 28 TIREFIT kit ............................................. 29 Wireless vehicle components ................ 24 Decorative foil (cleaning instructions)

................................................................... 464 DeNOx agent see AdBlue Destination Editing intermediate destinations ........ 345 Editing the previous destinations ........ 355 Managing suggestions ......................... 355 Saving as global favourite .................... 355 Destination entry .................................... 336 Accepting a destination suggestion ..... 337 Entering a 3 word address ................... 339 Entering a POI or address .................... 336 Entering an intermediate destination .. 345 Entering geo-coordinates .................... 339 Notes .................................................. 336 Selecting a contact ............................. 339 Selecting a POI .................................... 338 Selecting a received destination .......... 341 Selecting from favourites .................... 340 Selecting from the map ....................... 340 Selecting previous destinations ........... 338 Destination suggestion Saving as a favourite ........................... 355 Detecting inattentiveness see ATTENTION ASSIST Diagnostics connection ............................ 29 Diesel Low outside temperatures ................... 567 Notes ................................................... 567 DIGITAL LIGHT Intelligent Light System ....................... 146 Digital Owner's Manual ............................. 18 Digital speedometer ............................... 280 Digital Vehicle Key sticker Locking the vehicle ................................ 72 Starting the vehicle .............................. 174 Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 72 Dinghy towing see Tow-bar system Dipped beam Setting ................................................. 150 DIRECT SELECT lever ............................... 186 Engaging drive position ....................... 188 Engaging neutral .................................. 187 Engaging park position ........................ 187 Engaging park position automatically .. 187 Engaging reverse gear ......................... 187 Function .............................................. 186 Display (Care) .......................................... 466 Display (MBUX multimedia system) Home screen ....................................... 292 Settings ............................................... 322 Display (multimedia system) ................. 293 Operating ............................................ 293 Display (on-board computer) Displays on the driver display .............. 277 Display content Selecting .............................................. 276 Display message ...................................... 574 Calling up (on-board computer) ........... 574 Notes ................................................... 574 Display messages

- - - km/h .................................... 616

- - - km/h .................................... 615

- - - km/h .................................... 617

# 12 V on-board electrical sys tem Visit workshop .............................. 623 48 V battery See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 625

: Active Light System inopera tive ...................................................... 581 AdBlue system fault Engine start not possible ................................ 632 AdBlue system fault See Own er's Manual .......................................... 631 Index 661 AdBlue system malfunction Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km ............................. 631 AdBlue system malfunction Emergency op. in XXX km See Own er's Manual .......................................... 631 5 Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling ..................................... 632 ATTENTION ASSIST inoperative

............................................................. 602 P ATTENTION ASSIST Microsleep Take a break! ....................................... 603 ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break! .................................................. 602

: Automatic driving lights inoper ative ..................................................... 581 J Brake immediately ...................... 601 Change key batteries .................. 579 J Check brake fluid level ............... 601 662 Index

# Check brake pads See Owner's Manual ................................................ 602 Check trailer hitch lock (white display message) ................................. 585 h Check tyre(s) .............................. 627

! Clean the fuel filter ..................... 593 Compressor is cooling ................ 608 Coolant Stop vehicle Switch engine off ............................................ 592 _ currently unavailable Camera dirty ..................................................... 614 Currently unavailable Radar dirty ..................................................... 613

! currently unavailable See Own er's Manual .......................................... 618 currently unavailable See Own er's Manual .......................................... 619 5 Engine oil level cannot be measured ............................................ 634 5 Engine oil level Reduce oil level

............................................................. 633 5 Engine oil level Stop vehicle Switch engine off ................................ 633 5 Engine oil pressure Stop Switch off engine ................................ 634 Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h

...................................................... 605, 606 6 Front left malfunction Consult workshop (example) ............................ 575

& inoperative Battery low .............. 583

& Inoperative Refuel vehicle .......... 583

& inoperative See Owner's Man. ... 583

! inoperative See Owner's Man ual ........................................................ 619 inoperative See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 620 T inoperative See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 621 G Inoperative ................................. 622 Intensive cleaning activated for 30 s ..................................................... 591 Key not detected (red display message) ............................................. 579 Key not detected (white display message) ............................................. 579

: Left dipped beam (example) ....... 580 6 Left windowbag malfunction Consult workshop (example) ............... 575

: Malfunction See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 580 Maximum speed exceeded ......... 617 Off .............................................. 615 Off .............................................. 614 Operation only possible in transmission position P ....................... 584

! Parking brake See Owner's Manual ................................................ 598 passive ........................................ 616 Please wait 48 V battery charg ing ....................................................... 625 Rear axle steering currently malfunctioning ..................................... 587 Rear axle steering Malfunction Stop immediately ................................ 588 Rear axle steering Malfunction Visit workshop ..................................... 588 _ Rear left seat backrest not locked (example) ................................. 590 h Rectify tyre pressure .................. 628 Refill AdBlue See Owners Manual ................................................ 629

! Release parking brake ................ 600 Replace air cleaner ..................... 593 Replace key See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 578 Replace key ................................ 578 8 Reserve fuel level ....................... 593 6 Restraint system malfunction Consult workshop ................................ 575 Steering malfunction Drive carefully Visit workshop ...................... 586 Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual .... 587 Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual ....... 587

# Stop the vehicle Leave the engine running to charge the 12 V battery ................................................. 624 STOP Vehicle level too low ......... 607

# Stop vehicle See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 623 Stop vehicle See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 624 suspended .................................. 615

: Switch off lights ......................... 581

: Switch on headlamps ................. 581 Index 663

# Switch on the engine to charge the 12 V battery ................................... 624 Top up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km See Owner's Manual .......... 630

+ Top up coolant See Owners Manual ................................................ 592 Top up washer fluid .................... 591 Trailer coupling in motion ........... 584

! Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake ................................ 601 d Vehicle is operational Switch off ignition before exiting .................... 584 Vehicle rising Please wait ........... 608 h Warning tyre defect .................... 628 h Wheel sensor(s) missing ............. 627 XX,X l Top up AdBlue Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss. in XXX km ............................................ 630 664 Index XX,X l Top up AdBlue Switch on ignition, wait 60 sec. or eng. start not poss. ............................................. 630 Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual .......... 611 Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative ..... 611 Active Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual ................................................. 612 Active bonnet malfunction See Own er's Manual ......................................... 589 Active Brake Assist Functions cur rently limited See Owner's Manual ...... 621 Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual ........................... 622 Active Distance Assist available again .................................................... 616 Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 615 Active Distance Assist inoperative ....... 615 Active Emergency Stop Assist cur rently unavailable See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 604 Active Emergency Stop Assist inop erative ................................................. 604 Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 609 Active Lane Keeping Assist inopera tive ....................................................... 610 Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Own er's Manual .......................................... 612 Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emer gency stops ......................................... 609 Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 609 Active Steering Assist inoperative ....... 609 Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently unavailable see Owner's Manual .......... 610 Active Stop-and-Go Assist inopera tive See Owner's Manual ..................... 610 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cur rently unavailable See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 582 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inop erative ................................................. 582 Anti-theft alarm system Malfunction ... 590 Apply brake and start engine to shift out of P or N ........................................ 594 Apply brake to deselect P position ...... 594 Apply brake to select D or R ................ 594 Apply brake to select R ........................ 594 Apply parking brake to park Visit workshop ............................................ 595 Auxiliary battery malfunction ............... 597 Beginning emergency stop .................. 604 Blind Spot Assist currently unavaila ble See Owner's Manual ...................... 610 Blind Spot Assist inoperative ................ 611 Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual .... 611 Cannot start engine See Owner's Manual ................................................ 625 Change steering wheel/ seat posi tion until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen .................... 603 Consult workshop without changing the transmission position .................... 597 Cruise control and Limiter inopera tive ....................................................... 616 Cruise control inoperative .................... 616 Cruise control off ................................. 616 Device detected at diagnostics con nection See Owner's Manual ............... 622 DIGITAL LIGHT Functions limited ......... 582 Driver camera inoperative See Own er's Manual ......................................... 603 Driver camera view currently restric ted See Owner's Manual ..................... 603 Front passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual ................................... 576 Front passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual ................................... 576 Hazard warning lamp system Mal function ............................................... 582 Limited availability of Active Parking Assist manoeuvring assistant See Owner's Manual .................................. 604 Limiter inoperative ............................... 617 Motor can be started again ................. 626 MULTIBEAM LED Functions limited ..... 582 N automatically activated Please select transmission position again ...... 596 Only select P when vehicle is station ary ....................................................... 594 PARKTRONIC and manoeuvring assistant not available at rear when towing a trailer .................................... 605 Index 665 PARKTRONIC inoperative See Own er's Manual ......................................... 605 Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual ........................... 580 PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual ............................ 578 PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual ................................................ 577 Push rear left seat belt extender back manually See Owner's Man ual (example) ....................................... 576 Reduce speed ...................................... 629 Reversing not poss. Consult work shop .................................................... 596 Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply parking brake to park .......................... 595 Risk of vehicle rolling away Driver's door open Transmission not in P ......... 595 666 Index Tyre(s) overheated ............................... 628 Drive Away Assist Risk of vehicle rolling away N activa ted manually No automatic switch to P .......................................................... 595 Snow chain mode Maximum speed exceeded ............................................. 589 Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h .... 617 Stop vehicle Leave engine running Wait Transmission cooling ................... 597 To switch off the engine, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec onds or 3 times. .................................. 591 Traffic Sign Assist currently unavaila ble See Owner's Manual ...................... 612 Traffic Sign Assist inoperative .............. 612 Transmission Malfunction Stop ........... 596 Tyre press. monitor currently unavail able ..................................................... 626 Tyre press. monitor inoperative ........... 626 Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors ..................................... 627 Display on the windscreen see Head-up display Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Distance recorder see Trip distance DISTRONIC Door see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Additional door lock ............................... 71 Child safety lock (rear door) .................. 63 Locking (emergency key) ....................... 75 Opening (from the inside) ...................... 71 Power closing function .......................... 75 Unlocking (emergency key) .................... 75 Unlocking (from the inside) .................... 71 Door control panel ..................................... 12 Door control panel (rear) .......................... 14 Drawbar see Tow-bar system Drive Away Assist .................................... 252 see Protection against collision Drive position Engaging .............................................. 188 Drive program display ............................. 184 Drive programs see DYNAMIC SELECT Driver camera Activating/deactivating ....................... 321 Overview ............................................. 320 Driver display ........................................... 273 Function/notes ................................... 273 Overview of displays ............................ 277 Indicator/warning lamps ..................... 634 Driver's display Driver's seat see Seat Driving abroad Symmetrical low beam ........................ 143 Driving lights see Automatic driving lights Driving safety system ............................. 203 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 205 Active Brake Assist .............................. 208 Adaptive brake lights ........................... 215 BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 205 Cameras .............................................. 204 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu tion) ..................................................... 208 ESP Crosswind Assist ........................ 207 ESP trailer stabilisation ..................... 207 Overview ............................................. 204 Radar and ultrasonic sensors .............. 204 Responsibility ...................................... 203 STEER CONTROL ................................. 208 Driving system see 360 Camera see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Change Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist see Active Steering Assist see AIRMATIC see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro sleep detection see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Driving safety system see E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL see HOLD function see Limiter see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Reversing camera see Traffic Sign Assist Driving tips Driving abroad (symmetrical low beam) .................................................. 143 General driving tips .............................. 178 Running-in notes .................................. 177 Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro sleep detection Dynamic handling control system see ESP (Electronic Stability Program) DYNAMIC SELECT .................................... 184 Configuring drive program I ................. 185 Displaying engine data ........................ 185 Displaying vehicle data ........................ 185 Drive program display .......................... 184 Index 667 Drive programs .................................... 184 Function .............................................. 184 Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch)

............................................................. 184 Selecting the drive program ................ 184 E E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL ...................... 236 Suspension .......................................... 236 E-mails see In-Car Office E10 ............................................................ 565 Easy entry feature Function/notes .................................... 112 Setting ................................................. 114 Easy exit feature Function/notes .................................... 112 Setting ................................................. 114 EASY-PACK boot box ................................ 127 Adjusting the height to any position .... 126 Care .................................................... 466 Installing/removing ............................. 127 668 Index ECO Assist ECO display EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu tion) Function/notes ................................... 208 Function/notes ................................... 182 Function .............................................. 182 ECO start/stop function ......................... 181 Automatic engine start ........................ 181 Automatic engine stop ......................... 181 Operation ............................................. 181 Switching off/on ................................. 182 Electric parking brake ............................ 200 Applying automatically ........................ 200 Applying or releasing manually ............ 201 Emergency braking .............................. 201 Releasing automatically ....................... 201 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electrohydraulic suspension see E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity ...................... 24 Electronic Stability Program see ESP (Electronic Stability Program) Electronics ............................................... 506 Electronics compartment Rear centre console ............................. 122 Emergency Fire extinguisher .................................. 470 First-aid kit (soft sided) ....................... 469 Overview of the help functions .............. 16 Removing the warning triangle ............ 469 Safety vest .......................................... 468 Setting up the warning triangle ........... 469 Emergency braking ................................. 201 Emergency braking see BAS (Brake Assist System) Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle .............................. 175 Emergency spare wheel ......................... 505 Notes .................................................. 505 ENERGIZING Coach Calling up ............................................ 334 Function .............................................. 333 ENERGIZING COMFORT ........................... 331 Overview of programmes ..................... 331 Starting the programme ...................... 332 Starting the programme in the rear passenger compartment ..................... 447 ENERGIZING seat kinetics Setting ................................................. 331 ENERGIZING seat kinetics see ENERGIZING COMFORT Emergency call system see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Engine Emergency engine start ......................... 486 Emergency key Inserting/removing ............................... 69 Locking a door ....................................... 75 Unlocking a door ................................... 75 Unlocking the boot lid ........................... 82 ECO start/stop function ...................... 181 Engine number .................................... 562 Starting (Digital Vehicle Key sticker) .... 174 Starting (emergency operation mode) .................................................. 175 Starting (mobile phone) ....................... 174 Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 176 Index 669 Starting (start/stop button) ................. 174 Starting assistance .............................. 480 Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 196 On the touchscreen (central display) ... 308 Selecting writing speed ....................... 310 Setting the keyboard language ............. 310 F Fatigue detection Engine bonnet EQ Boost Function (active bonnet) ...................... 456 Opening/closing ................................. 457 Operating safety .................................... 22 Qualified specialist workshop ................ 30 Engine data ERA-GLONASS test mode Displaying ............................................ 185 Starting/ending ................................... 412 Fault message see Display message Favourites see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro sleep detection Engine electronics Notes .................................................. 506 Engine number ........................................ 562 Engine oil ................................................. 459 Additives ............................................. 569 Capacity .............................................. 570 Checking the oil level using the on-

board computer ................................... 458 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ............... 570 Quality ................................................. 570 Temperature (on-board computer, Performance menu) ............................. 279 Topping up ........................................... 459 Entering characters ................................ 308 Function/notes ................................... 308 Handwriting recognition ...................... 310 ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ESP Crosswind Assist ................................. 207 Trailer stabilisation .............................. 207 ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ...... 205 Activating/deactivating ....................... 207 Function/notes ................................... 205 Status display (on-board computer, Performance menu) ............................. 279 EU general operating permit number .... 562 Exterior lighting see Lights Exterior lighting (Care) ........................... 465 Adding ................................................. 301 Adding a destination ........................... 340 Calling up ............................................ 301 Deleting ............................................... 302 Home address ..................................... 340 Moving ................................................ 302 Overview .............................................. 301 Renaming ............................................ 302 Work address ...................................... 340 Fill level AdBlue ............................................... 278 Filling station search Starting automatic search ................... 348 Switching automatic search on/off ..... 348 Fingerprint sensor MBUX multimedia system ................... 295 670 Index Fire extinguisher ..................................... 470 First-aid kit (soft sided) .......................... 469 Flacon Inserting/removing ............................. 164 Flat towing see Tow-bar system Flat tyre .................................................... 470 MOExtended tyres ............................... 471 Notes ................................................... 470 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 472 Wheel change ...................................... 500 Floor mats ................................................ 141 Fog light (extended range) ...................... 147 Foil covering Radar and ultrasonic sensors .............. 204 Fragrance see Fragrance system Fragrance system .................................... 164 Inserting/removing the flacon ............. 164 Setting ................................................. 164 Free software ............................................ 34 Frequencies Mobile phone ...................................... 507 Two-way radio ...................................... 507 Frequency band Selecting (on-board computer) ............ 281 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ..... 42 Front passenger seat ................................ 99 Adjusting from the driver's seat ............ 99 Adjusting from the rear ......................... 99 Front passenger seat see Seat Fuel ........................................................... 566 Additives ............................................. 566 Diesel .................................................. 567 E10 ...................................................... 565 Fuel reserve ........................................ 568 Low outside temperatures ................... 567 Petrol ................................................... 565 Quality (diesel) .................................... 567 Quality (petrol) .................................... 565 Refuelling ............................................. 190 Sulphur content ................................... 565 Tank content ....................................... 568 Fuel consumption On-board computer ............................. 280 Function seat see Door control panel Function seat (rear) see Seat (rear) Fuses ........................................................ 486 Before replacing a fuse ........................ 486 Fuse assignment diagram ................... 486 Fuse box in the boot ............................ 490 Fuse box in the engine compartment .. 487 Fuse box in the front passenger foot well ...................................................... 489 Fuse box on the dashboard ................. 489 Notes .................................................. 486 G G-meter (on-board computer, Per formance menu) ...................................... 279 Garage door opener Clearing the memory ........................... 199 Opening or closing the door ................ 199 Programming buttons .......................... 197 Resolving problems ............................. 199 Synchronising the rolling code ............ 198 Gear display (on-board computer, Per formance menu) ...................................... 279 Gearshift recommendation .................... 189 General operating permit number

(EU) ........................................................... 562 Genuine parts ............................................ 21 Glide mode ............................................... 189 Global search Function .............................................. 305 Overview ............................................. 305 Air vent ................................................ 172 Glove box H Handbrake see Electric parking brake Handling characteristics (unusual) ........ 491 HANDS-FREE ACCESS ................................ 80 Handset Activating ............................................ 445 Charging .............................................. 445 Index 671 Deactivating ........................................ 445 Features .............................................. 444 LED displays ........................................ 443 Overview ............................................. 443 Stowage compartment (rear) ............... 123 Hazard warning lights ............................. 146 HD programmes see CI+ module Head restraint Activating/deactivating neck heating

............................................................. 104 Attaching/removing the additional cushion (front) ..................................... 103 Attaching/removing the additional cushion (rear) ...................................... 104 Front (luxury head restraint) ................ 102 Rear (adjusting) ................................... 104 Rear (folding into position/folding back mechanically) .............................. 105 Rear (luxury head restraint) ................. 104 Head-up display ....................................... 284 Adjusting display elements (on-board computer) ............................................ 284 Adjusting the brightness (on-board computer) ............................................ 284 Function .............................................. 283 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 284 Operating the memory function ........... 114 Setting the position (on-board com puter) .................................................. 284 Switching on/off ................................. 285 Headlamp flasher .................................... 145 Headphones (Rear Seat Entertain ment System) Overview ............................................. 442 High beam Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ........... 148 Switching on/off ................................. 145 High-pressure cleaner (care) ................. 463 Hill Start Assist ....................................... 232 HOLD function ......................................... 232 Function/notes ................................... 232 Switching on/off ................................. 232 Home screen (central display) Overview ............................................. 292 672 Index I i-Size child seat securing system Fitting .................................................... 60 Seats suitable for attaching ................... 60 Identification plate Selecting functions (Tasks & Calls) ...... 390 Video conference overview ................. 392 Writing e-mail ...................................... 391 Increase in traffic information volume Setting ................................................. 431 Engine ................................................. 562 Vehicle ................................................ 562 Indicator lamp see Indicator/warning lamp Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 173 Ignition Ignition key see Key Immobiliser ................................................ 93 Implied warranty Vehicle ................................................... 31 In-Car Office ..................................... 389, 391 Answering e-mail ................................. 391 Calling up ............................................ 389 Features .............................................. 389 Forwarding e-mail ................................ 392 Managing e-mails ................................ 391 Marking a task as completed .............. 390 Noting an incoming call ....................... 390 Selecting functions (calendar entry) .... 390 Indicator/warning lamp ......................... 634 Overview ............................................. 634 Individual drive program Configuring .......................................... 185 Selecting ............................................. 184 Individual menu Inspection see ASSYST PLUS Instrument cluster see Driver display Intelligent Light System Active headlamps ................................ 146 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ........... 148 Adverse weather light .......................... 148 City lighting ......................................... 148 Cornering light ..................................... 147 Fog light (extended range) ................... 147 Motorway mode ................................... 147 Overview ............................................. 146 Switching on/off ................................. 148 Interior lighting ........................................ 151 Adaptive rear compartment light

(Rear Seat Entertainment System) ...... 448 Ambient lighting ................................... 151 Ambient lighting (Rear Seat Enter tainment System) ................................ 448 Reading light ........................................ 151 Setting ................................................. 151 Switch-off delay time ........................... 152 Function ................................................ 95 Priming/deactivating ............................. 95 Intermediate destination Entering ............................................... 345 Modifying ............................................ 345 Starting an automatic filling station search ................................................. 348 Starting the automatic service sta tion search .......................................... 348 Configuring displays ............................ 282 Interior protection Internal connection Setting up (Wi-Fi) ................................. 416 Internet Changing configuration of the car telephone ............................................. 417 Calling up a web page .......................... 419 Calling up the web browser settings .... 420 Calling up web browser options .......... 420 Closing the browser ............................. 421 Deleting a bookmark ........................... 420 Deleting history ................................... 420 Managing bookmarks .......................... 420 Internet connection Cancelling permission (mobile phone) ................................................. 418 Connection status ................................ 418 Displaying the connection status ......... 419 Establishing ......................................... 418 Information .......................................... 414 Restrictions .......................................... 414 Setting access data (Bluetooth) ......... 416 Setting automatically (communica tion module) ......................................... 415 Setting up (Bluetooth) ........................ 416 Setting up (business telephony) ........... 417 Setting up (communication module) .... 414 Internet radio see TuneIn Ionisation Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul timedia system) ................................... 164 iPhone see Apple CarPlay see Mercedes-Benz Link ISOFIX child seat securing system Fitting .................................................... 60 Seats suitable for attaching ................... 59 J Jack Declaration of conformity ...................... 28 Storage location .................................. 499 Jump-start connection ............................ 480 General notes ...................................... 478 K Key .............................................................. 67 Acoustic locking verification signal ....... 68 see Interior lighting Lamps (driver's display) see Indicator/warning lamp L Lamp Index 673 Battery .................................................. 69 Emergency key ...................................... 69 Energy consumption .............................. 68 Features ................................................ 67 Key ring attachment .............................. 69 Overview ................................................ 67 Problem ................................................. 70 Unlocking setting .................................. 68 Deactivating .......................................... 68 Key functions KEYLESS-GO Locking the vehicle ................................ 73 Problem ................................................. 74 Unlocking setting .................................. 68 Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 73 Kickdown ................................................. 189 Using ................................................... 189 Knee airbag ................................................ 42 674 Index Lane detection (automatic) see Active Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist Language ................................................. 328 Notes .................................................. 328 Setting ................................................. 328 Level control system see AIRMATIC see E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Overview ............................................. 143 Light switch Lighting see Interior lighting see Lights Lights ........................................................ 143 Active headlamps ................................ 146 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ........... 148 Adverse weather light .......................... 148 Automatic driving lights ....................... 144 City lighting ......................................... 148 Combination switch ............................. 145 Cornering light ..................................... 147 Driving abroad (symmetrical low beam) .................................................. 143 Fog light (extended range) ................... 147 Hazard warning lights .......................... 146 Headlamp flasher ................................ 145 High beam ........................................... 145 Intelligent Light System ....................... 146 Light switch ......................................... 143 Low beam ............................................ 143 Motorway mode ................................... 147 Parking lights ....................................... 143 Rear fog light ....................................... 143 Responsibility for lighting systems ...... 143 Setting the dipped beam ..................... 150 Setting the exterior lighting switch-

off delay time ...................................... 150 Standing lights ..................................... 143 Switching the surround lighting on/off ................................................. 150 Turn signal lights ................................. 145 Limiter ...................................................... 216 Activating ............................................. 217 Buttons ................................................ 217 Calling up a speed ............................... 217 Deactivating ......................................... 217 Function ............................................... 216 Passive mode ....................................... 216 Permanent setting ............................... 219 Requirements ...................................... 217 Selecting .............................................. 217 Setting a speed .................................... 217 Storing a speed .................................... 217 System limitations ............................... 216 Limiting speed see Limiter Live Traffic Information Displaying the traffic map ................... 356 Displaying traffic incidents .................. 357 Extending a subscription ..................... 356 Provider information ............................ 356 Registering on Mercedes me ............... 356 Switching the traffic information dis play on ................................................ 358 Loading Bag hook ............................................. 125 Notes ................................................... 119 Roof luggage rack ................................ 129 Stowage space under the boot floor .... 128 Loading guidelines ................................... 119 Loads Securing ............................................... 119 Locking an external device (child safety lock) .............................................. 327 Locking/unlocking Activating/deactivating the auto matic locking feature ............................. 74 Additional door lock ............................... 71 Digital Vehicle Key sticker ..................... 72 Emergency key ...................................... 75 KEYLESS-GO .......................................... 73 Mobile phone ......................................... 72 Smartphone ........................................... 72 Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside ............................................... 71 Low beam Switching on/off ................................. 143 Symmetrical low beam ........................ 143 Lubricant additives see Additives Luggage Net hooks ............................................ 123 Securing ............................................... 119 Luggage net hooks .................................. 123 Windscreen wipers .............................. 155 M MAGIC VISION CONTROL Maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction Restraint system ................................... 36 Map ................................................... 356, 361 Avoiding an area .................................. 363 Avoiding an area (overview) ................. 363 Changing an area ................................ 363 Deleting an area .................................. 364 Displaying Qibla .................................. 365 Displaying the compass ....................... 365 Displaying the map version ................. 363 Displaying the next intersecting street ................................................... 362 Displaying the range ............................ 366 Displaying the satellite map ................ 366 Displaying the traffic map ................... 356 Displaying weather information ........... 366 Map data ............................................. 364 Moving ................................................. 361 Selecting POI symbols ......................... 362 Index 675 Selecting text information ................... 362 Selecting the map orientation .............. 361 Setting the map scale .......................... 361 Setting the map scale automatically .... 365 Updating .............................................. 364 Massage programmes Overview .............................................. 107 Resetting the settings .......................... 108 Massage programs Massage settings Selecting the front seats ..................... 108 Resetting ............................................. 108 Maximum gross vehicle weight ............. 562 Maximum speed see Limiter MBUX authorised devices Activating/deactivating child safety lock ..................................................... 327 Managing ............................................ 326 MBUX Interior Assistant ......................... 310 Anticipatory exit warning ..................... 315 Automatic preselection of the out side mirror ........................................... 317 676 Index Emergency call with transmission of number of vehicle occupants ............... 315 Notes ................................................... 310 Notes on fastening the child seat ........ 315 Opening/closing the roller sunblind on the rear window .............................. 317 Opening/closing the roller sunblind on the sliding roof ................................ 317 Opens/closes the sliding sunroof ........ 317 Pre-setting the driver's seat position automatically ....................................... 316 Saving the child seat position .............. 315 Selecting settings ................................ 320 Switching the reading light for the driver and front passenger on/off ....... 316 Switching the search light for the driver on/off ........................................ 316 MBUX Interior Assistant (multimedia system) ..................................................... 311 Calling up favourites with the V pose ... 318 Operating a function with the favour ites pose .............................................. 318 Operating functions by proximity of the hand .............................................. 319 Overview .............................................. 311 MBUX multimedia system ...................... 291 Activating/deactivating snow chain mode ................................................... 492 Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... 203 Adjusting the volume ........................... 307 Configuring display settings ................ 322 Configuring drive program I ................. 185 ENERGIZING COMFORT programme

(overview) ............................................ 331 Overview .............................................. 291 Overview of the fingerprint sensor ...... 295 Setting route-based speed adapta tion ...................................................... 225 Setting the footwell temperature ......... 163 Setting the rear climate control ........... 163 Standby mode function ....................... 203 Starting the ENERGIZING COMFORT programme .......................................... 332 Switching the sound on/off ................ 306 MBUX Rear Entertainment System Locking displays (child safety lock) ..... 327 MBUX Remote Control Authorising a device ............................ 326 MBUX Voice Assistant ............................ 286 Audible help functions ......................... 289 Improving speech quality .................... 290 Language setting ................................. 288 Multifunction steering wheel (operat ing) ...................................................... 286 Online voice control ............................ 290 Operable functions .............................. 287 Operating safety .................................. 286 Setting (MBUX multimedia system) ..... 288 Using (Rear Seat Entertainment Sys tem) ..................................................... 454 Voice prompting .................................. 287 Mecca ....................................................... 365 Media Menu (on-board computer) .................. 281 Media mode Adding a favourite song ....................... 427 Connecting Bluetooth audio equip ment .................................................... 426 Connecting USB devices ..................... 425 Controlling media playback ................. 426 Copyright and trademarks ................... 423 Notes about the search function in categories ........................................... 428 Overview of the media menu ............... 425 Playing back similar music tracks ........ 427 Removing a favourite song .................. 427 Searching for a music track accord ing to mood ......................................... 428 Starting a search in categories ............ 428 Starting media playback ...................... 426 Supported format and data storage media .................................................. 422 Surprise mix ........................................ 427 Using the keyword search ................... 428 Operating (on-board computer) ........... 281 Media playback Media source Switching (on-board computer) ........... 281 Medical aids ............................................... 31 Memory function Head-up display Calling up stored settings ................................................ 114 Head-up display Storing settings ...... 114 Operating ............................................. 114 Outside mirrors Calling up stored settings ................................................ 114 Outside mirrors Storing settings ....... 114 Seat Calling up stored settings ......... 114 Seat Storing settings ........................ 114 Steering wheel Calling up saved settings ................................................ 114 Steering wheel Saving settings ......... 114 Memory function in the rear passenger compartment Operating rear seats ............................ 116 Operating the front passenger seat and rear seat ........................................ 117 Menu (on-board computer) Assistant display .................................. 278 Entertainment ...................................... 281 Head-up display ................................... 284 Navigation ........................................... 280 Overview ............................................. 275 Performance ........................................ 279 Service ................................................ 278 Trip ...................................................... 280 Mercedes me app Calling up services .............................. 406 Calling up your user account ............... 406 Deleting the connection to the user account ............................................... 406 Information .......................................... 406 Index 677 Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment ........ 402 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre ................................................. 401 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre after automatic accident or breakdown detection ........................... 401 Consenting to data transfer ................. 402 Information .......................................... 401 Making a call via the overhead con trol panel ............................................. 400 Transferred data .................................. 403 Mercedes me connect Accident and breakdown manage ment .................................................... 405 Information .......................................... 404 Transferred data .................................. 405 Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys tem ........................................................... 407 Automatic emergency call ................... 409 Information .......................................... 407 Information on data transfer ........ 410, 412 Manual emergency call ........................ 410 Overview ............................................. 409 Self-diagnosis (Russia) ......................... 412 678 Index Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode .................................................... 412 Transmission of number of vehicle occupants (MBUX Interior Assistant) ... 315 Mercedes-Benz Link ................................ 393 Connecting .......................................... 394 Ending ................................................. 395 Note .................................................... 394 Overview ............................................. 393 Sound settings .................................... 395 Mercedes-Benz service centre see Qualified specialist workshop Message (driver display) see Display message Message memory .................................... 574 Messages ................................................. 387 Calling a message sender .................... 388 Composing .......................................... 387 Configuring the displayed text mes sages ................................................... 387 Deleting ............................................... 389 Forwarding .......................................... 388 Overview ............................................. 387 Reading ............................................... 387 Replying ............................................... 387 Sending ............................................... 387 Using a number/URL .......................... 388 Using templates .................................. 388 Mirrors see Outside mirrors Mobile phone Cancelling permission for Internet connection ........................................... 418 Frequencies ......................................... 507 Locking the vehicle ................................ 72 Starting the vehicle .............................. 174 Transmission output (maximum) ......... 507 Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 72 Wireless charging (rear) ....................... 140 see Apple CarPlay Mobile phone see Android Auto see Mercedes-Benz Link see Telephone Mobile phone voice recognition Starting ............................................... 377 Stopping .............................................. 377 Model series see Vehicle identification plate MOExtended tyres ................................... 471 Motorway mode ....................................... 147 MULTIBEAM LED Intelligent Light System ....................... 146 Multifunction camera ROAD SURFACE SCAN ........................ 238 Multifunction steering wheel Overview of buttons ............................. 274 Multifunction steering wheel see Steering wheel Multimedia system Activating/deactivating voice ampli fication to rear ..................................... 323 Collision detection (parked vehicle) ..... 202 ENERGIZING seat kinetics ................... 331 Favourites ............................................ 301 Restoring (factory settings) ................. 330 Switches the steering wheel heater on/off .................................................. 112 Multimedia system see Display (multimedia system) see Entering characters see MBUX Interior Assistant see MBUX Interior Assistant (multi media system) see MBUX multimedia system see Notifications Centre Music online Calling up ............................................ 427 Configuring options ............................. 428 Search function ................................... 427 N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) .................. 280 Overview ............................................. 335 Showing/hiding the menu ................... 335 Switching on ....................................... 335 Updating the map data ........................ 364 Navigation see Destination entry see Map see Route see Route guidance see Traffic information see Vehicle position Navigation announcements Activating/deactivating ....................... 353 Adjusting the volume ........................... 353 Repeating ............................................ 354 Switching audio fadeout on/off .......... 353 Navigation messages On-board computer ............................. 280 Near Field Communication (NFC) .......... 375 Connecting a mobile phone to the MBUX multimedia system .................... 375 General information ............................. 375 Locking the vehicle (digital vehicle key sticker) ............................................ 72 Locking the vehicle (mobile phone) ....... 72 Starting the vehicle (Digital Vehicle Key sticker) .......................................... 174 Starting the vehicle (mobile phone) ..... 174 Switching mobile phones ..................... 375 Unlocking the vehicle (digital vehicle key sticker) ............................................ 72 Unlocking the vehicle (mobile phone) .... 72 Using a mobile phone .......................... 375 Near-field communication Activating/deactivating ....................... 324 Information .......................................... 324 Index 679 Neutral NFC Nodding off Engaging .............................................. 187 see Near Field Communication (NFC) see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro sleep detection Notifications Centre ................................ 302 Calling up a notification ....................... 303 Editing a notification ........................... 304 Global search (overview) ..................... 305 Notification types ................................ 302 Overview ............................................. 302 Selecting actions for a notification ...... 304 Using the global search ....................... 305 O Occupant safety see Airbag see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff see Automatic measures after an accident see Pets in the vehicle see Post-collision brake 680 Index see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection) see PRE-SAFE Impulse Side see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system see Seat belt Odometer see Total distance Oil see Engine oil On-board computer ................................. 275 Assistance graphic menu .................... 278 Displaying the service due date ........... 455 Driver display ....................................... 277 Entertainment menu ............................ 281 Head-up display menu ......................... 284 Menus overview ................................... 275 Navigation menu ................................. 280 Operating ............................................ 275 Performance menu .............................. 279 Service menu ...................................... 278 Trip menu ............................................ 280 On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection On-board electronics Engine electronics ............................... 506 Notes .................................................. 506 Two-way radios .................................... 506 Data storage .......................................... 33 Online services Online services see In-Car Office Open-source software .............................. 34 Opening the boot lid using your foot HANDS-FREE ACCESS ........................... 80 Operating fluids AdBlue ............................................... 568 Additives (fuel) .................................... 566 Brake fluid ........................................... 570 Coolant (engine) .................................. 571 Engine oil ............................................ 569 Fuel (diesel) ......................................... 567 Fuel (petrol) ......................................... 565 Notes ................................................... 564 Windscreen washer fluid ...................... 571 Operating safety 48 V on-board electrical system ............ 22 Declaration of conformity (electro magnetic compatibility) ......................... 24 Declaration of conformity (jack) ............ 28 Declaration of conformity (TIREFIT kit) .. 29 Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components) ............................. 24 EQ Boost ............................................... 22 Information ............................................ 22 Operating system see On-board computer Outside mirrors ............................... 156, 157 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) .............. 157 Automatic mirror folding function ........ 159 Automatic preselection (MBUX Inte rior Assistant) ...................................... 317 Folding in/out ..................................... 156 Operating the memory function ........... 114 Parking position ................................... 158 Setting ................................................. 156 Overhead control panel Overview ............................................... 10 Owner's Manual Vehicle equipment ................................. 22 Owner's Manual (digital) ........................... 18 Adjusting warning tones ...................... 241 Deactivating ........................................ 240 Function .............................................. 239 System limitations ............................... 239 P Paint code ................................................ 562 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ......... 463 Panel heating Setting ................................................. 110 Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist Parking brake see Electric parking brake Parking charges Panoramic sliding sunroof see Sliding sunroof Park position Inserting .............................................. 187 Selecting automatically ....................... 187 Parked Vehicle Locator Switching transmission on/off ............ 324 Parking Parking aid see Electric parking brake see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC .................. 239 Activating ............................................ 240 Paying ................................................. 368 Parking lights ........................................... 143 Parking option Displaying on the map ......................... 367 Selecting ............................................. 367 Parking position Outside mirrors ................................... 158 Storing the position of the passenger outside mirror using reverse gear ........ 158 Parking service Displaying a parking option on the map ..................................................... 367 Paying parking charges ....................... 368 Selecting parking options .................... 367 Index 681 Parking up ................................................ 203 PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff Pedestrian protection see Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Performance (on-board computer, Performance menu) ................................ 279 Perfume see Fragrance system Perfume vial see Fragrance system Period out of use Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... 203 Standby mode function ....................... 203 Permissible axle load .............................. 562 Permitted towing methods ..................... 482 Personalisation see User profiles Petrol ........................................................ 565 Pets in the vehicle ..................................... 65 682 Index Phone book see Contacts Plastic trim (Care) ................................... 466 POI Selecting ............................................. 338 POI symbols Selecting ............................................. 362 Post-collision brake ................................... 51 Power closing function Boot lid .................................................. 77 Door ...................................................... 75 Power output (on-board computer, Performance menu) ................................ 279 Power supply Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 173 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection) ................................................. 49 Function ................................................ 49 PRE-SAFE Sound ................................. 49 Reversing measures .............................. 50 PRE-SAFE Impulse Side ........................... 50 Activation .............................................. 36 Function ................................................ 50 PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occu pant protection plus) ................................ 50 Function ................................................ 50 Reversing measures .............................. 50 Preventative occupant protection sys tem see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection) Previous destinations Selecting ............................................. 338 Programme see DYNAMIC SELECT Programme information TV channel .......................................... 433 Protection against collision ................... 252 Protection of the environment Notes ..................................................... 20 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles ............ 20 Q Qibla ......................................................... 365 QR code Rescue card .......................................... 32 Qualified specialist workshop ................. 30 R Radar and ultrasonic sensors Damage ............................................... 204 Radio Activating ............................................ 429 Activating/deactivating radio text ....... 431 Activating/deactivating traffic announcements .................................. 430 Calling up a slide show ........................ 430 Calling up the station list ..................... 429 Deleting stations ................................. 430 Direct frequency entry ........................ 430 Displaying information ......................... 431 Displaying radio text ............................ 431 Frequency fix ....................................... 430 Managing favourites ............................ 430 Managing station presets .................... 430 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 281 Moving stations ................................... 430 Overview ............................................. 429 Searching for stations ......................... 430 Setting a channel ................................ 429 Setting station tracking ....................... 430 Setting the frequency band ................. 429 Setting the traffic information service volume increase ...................... 431 Storing radio stations .......................... 430 Radio operating permits ......................... 508 Radio stations Selecting (on-board computer) ............ 281 Rain closing function Sliding sunroof ...................................... 89 Rain-closing feature Reading light see Interior lighting Real wood (Care) ..................................... 466 Rear axle steering ................................... 180 Rear climate control Setting (MBUX multimedia system) ..... 163 Rear display Activating/deactivating ....................... 441 Home screen overview ........................ 442 Locking (child safety lock) ................... 327 Overview .............................................. 441 Rear door (child safety lock) .................... 63 Rear fog light Switching on/off ................................. 144 Side windows ........................................ 84 Rear seat Range AdBlue ............................................... 278 Displaying ............................................ 280 REACH regulation ...................................... 31 Reading light Switching on/off with hand move ments .................................................. 316 Seat ..................................................... 100 Rear seat belt Status display ........................................ 41 Rear seat belt status display .................... 41 Rear Seat Entertainment System Adjusting the ambient lighting ............. 448 Adjusting the brightness ..................... 449 Index 683 Adjusting the rear seats ...................... 446 Calling up services, apps and web browser ............................................... 451 Calling up the device manager ............ 449 Charging the handset .......................... 445 Climate control .................................... 447 Configuring the adaptive rear com partment light ..................................... 448 Controlling playback ............................ 452 Handset functions ............................... 444 Handset LED displays .......................... 443 Handset overview ................................ 443 Headphones overview ......................... 442 Information about media mode ............ 451 MBUX Voice Assistant ......................... 454 Operating safety .................................. 440 Overview ............................................. 440 Overview of services, apps and web browsers .............................................. 451 Overview of sound settings ................. 453 Overview of the rear displays ............... 441 Resetting rear seats ............................ 447 Selecting a massage programme ........ 446 Selecting sound settings ..................... 454 Selecting system settings .................... 449 684 Index Starting the ENERGIZING COMFORT programme .......................................... 447 Switching navigation on ...................... 450 Switching off the handset ................... 445 Switching on media mode ................... 452 Switching on the handset .................... 445 Switching on the radio ........................ 453 Switching on the TV ............................ 453 Switching the display on/off ............... 441 Telephone functions in the rear com partment ............................................. 450 Rear-view mirror see Outside mirrors Recycling Reducing agent see AdBlue Refrigerator box see Take-back of end-of-life vehicles Removing/fitting ................................. 137 Stowage compartment ........................ 138 Using ................................................... 136 Refuelling Registration Refuelling the vehicle ........................... 190 Topping up AdBlue ............................. 194 Vehicle .................................................. 30 Remote control (stationary heater/

ventilation) Displays ............................................... 168 Problems ............................................. 169 Replacing the battery .......................... 168 Setting ................................................. 167 Charging the battery ............................ 176 Cooling or heating the vehicle inte rior ....................................................... 176 Starting the vehicle .............................. 176 Rescue card ............................................... 32 Reserve Fuel ..................................................... 568 Reset function (multimedia system) ..... 330 Residual heat ........................................... 164 Rear operating unit .............................. 164 Restoring (factory settings) see Reset function (multimedia system) Restraint system ....................................... 35 Basic instructions for children ............... 51 Function in an accident ......................... 36 Functionality .......................................... 35 Malfunction ........................................... 36 Protection .............................................. 35 Reduced protection ............................... 35 Self-test ................................................. 35 Warning lamp ........................................ 35 Reverse gear Inserting .............................................. 187 Reversing camera .................................... 241 Care .................................................... 465 Function ............................................... 241 Rims (Care) .............................................. 465 ROAD SURFACE SCAN Multifunction camera .......................... 238 ROAD SURFACE SCAN see Camera Roll away protection see HOLD function Rear window Roller sunblind ...................................... 92 Remote Online Index 685 Roller sunblind ........................................... 91 Opening/closing on the rear window

(MBUX Interior Assistant) .................... 317 Opening/closing on the roof (MBUX Interior Assistant) ................................ 317 Panoramic sliding sunroof ..................... 86 Rear window .......................................... 92 Side windows (electric) .......................... 91 Roof lining (care) ..................................... 466 Roof load .................................................. 573 Roof luggage rack Loading ................................................ 129 Securing .............................................. 129 Route ................................................ 341, 346 Accepting a detour recommendation after a prompt ..................................... 342 Activating a commuter route ............... 347 Calculating ........................................... 341 Calculating alternative routes ..... 342, 346 Displaying destination information ...... 344 Displaying the route list ....................... 346 Editing a stored route .......................... 349 Planning .............................................. 345 Recording a route ................................ 349 Saving a recorded route ...................... 349 Selecting a type .................................. 342 Selecting an alternative route ............. 346 Selecting notifications ......................... 343 Selecting options ................................ 343 Showing a stored route on the map .... 348 Starting a saved route ......................... 349 Starting the automatic service sta tion search .......................................... 348 Switching the automatic filling sta tion search on/off ............................... 348 Route guidance ....................................... 350 Cancelling ........................................... 354 Changing direction .............................. 350 Destination reached ............................ 353 Lane recommendations ....................... 352 Motorway information ......................... 353 Notes .................................................. 350 Off-road ............................................... 354 Route guidance with augmented real ity .............................................................. 359 Activating ............................................ 360 Displaying street names and house numbers .............................................. 360 Overview ............................................. 359 Switching on display of traffic lights .... 259 Route-based speed adaptation Function .............................................. 224 Setting ................................................. 225 Run-flat characteristics MOExtended tyres ............................... 471 Running-in notes ...................................... 177 S Safety systems see Driving safety system Safety vest ............................................... 468 Satellite map ........................................... 366 Search light Switching on/off using hand move ments .................................................. 316 Seat ............................................................ 96 Adjusting (electrically) ........................... 96 Adjusting the front passenger seat from the rear ......................................... 99 Automatic seat adjustment ................. 106 Configuring the settings ...................... 106 Correct driver's seat position ................ 96 686 Index ENERGIZING seat kinetics ................... 331 Massage programme overview ............ 107 Operating the memory function ........... 114 Panel heating ....................................... 110 Pre-setting the driver's seat position

(MBUX Interior Assistant) .................... 316 Rear (adjusting electrically) ................. 100 Resetting rear seats (Rear Seat Entertainment System) ........................ 447 Resetting the settings .......................... 108 Selecting a massage programme

(Rear Seat Entertainment System) ...... 446 Setting automatic lateral support adjustment .......................................... 107 Setting options ...................................... 12 Setting rear seats (Rear Seat Enter tainment System) ................................ 446 Setting the fully reclined position ........ 101 Workout programme overview ............. 107 Seat see Front passenger seat Seat (rear) .................................................. 14 Setting options ...................................... 14 Seat belt warning see Seat belt Seat belt ............................................... 37, 41 Seat heater Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment ............................................ 41 Adjusting the height .............................. 40 Belt airbag ............................................. 39 Care .................................................... 466 Fastening ............................................... 40 Protection .............................................. 37 Rear seat belt status display .................. 41 Reduced protection ............................... 38 Releasing ............................................... 41 Seat belt adjustment (function) ............. 41 Seat belt extender ................................. 40 Warning lamp ......................................... 41 Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating ......................... 41 Function ................................................. 41 Seat belt extender ..................................... 40 Seat belt tensioners Activation .............................................. 36 Seat cover (Care) ..................................... 466 Activating/deactivating ....................... 108 Setting ................................................. 331 Seat kinetics Seat kinetics Seat ventilation Second telephone see ENERGIZING COMFORT Switching on/off .................................. 110 Connecting .......................................... 374 Selecting a gear see Changing gears Selecting the sound profile Burmester high-end 4D surround sound system ...................................... 440 Burmester 3D-surround sound sys tem ...................................................... 438 Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever Self-test Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff ............................................ 47 Sensors (Care) ......................................... 465 see Qualified specialist workshop Gearshift recommendation .................. 189 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 278 Service Service see ASSYST PLUS Service centre Service interval display see ASSYST PLUS Service station search Services SETUP (on-board computer, Perform ance menu) .............................................. 279 Shift paddles see Steering wheel gearshift paddles Shifting gears Short messages see Messages Starting automatic search ................... 348 Calling up (Rear Seat Entertainment System) ............................................... 451 Overview (Rear Seat Entertainment System) ............................................... 451 Setting a speed see Cruise control Setting the date format .......................... 323 Setting the distance unit ........................ 328 Setting the footwell temperature Setting ................................................. 163 Setting the map scale see Map Side airbag ................................................. 42 Side windows ............................................. 82 Automatic function ................................ 84 Child safety lock in the rear ................... 65 Closing .................................................. 82 Closing using the key ............................ 85 Convenience closing ............................. 85 Convenience opening ............................ 85 Opening ................................................. 82 Opening with the key ............................. 85 Problem ................................................. 85 Rain-closing feature ............................... 84 Roller sunblind (electric) ........................ 91 Sliding sunroof .......................................... 86 Automatic functions .............................. 89 Closing .................................................. 86 Index 687 Closing using the key ............................ 85 Opening ................................................. 86 Opening with the key ............................. 85 Opening/closing (MBUX Interior Assistant) ............................................. 317 Problem ................................................. 90 Rain closing function ............................. 89 Inserting .............................................. 436 Smart card Smartphone Locking the vehicle ................................ 72 Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 72 Smartphone see Android Auto see Apple CarPlay see Mercedes-Benz Link see Telephone Snow chain mode Activating/deactivating ....................... 492 Snow chains ............................................. 491 Socket (12 V) Rear ..................................................... 133 Socket (230 V) ......................................... 134 Rear ..................................................... 134 Standby mode 688 Index Sound Sound PRE-SAFE Sound ................................. 49 Wheels and tyres ................................. 491 see Burmester 3D-surround sound system see Burmester high-end 4D sur round sound system see Tone settings Sound settings Adjusting the balance/fader ............... 437 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings ............................................... 437 Automatic loudness adjustment .......... 437 Spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel Speech dialogue system see MBUX Voice Assistant Speed limitation for winter tyres Setting ................................................. 219 Speedometer Digital .................................................. 280 Activating/deactivating ....................... 203 Function .............................................. 203 Standing lights ........................................ 143 Start/stop button Parking the vehicle .............................. 196 Starting the vehicle .............................. 174 Switching on the power supply or ignition ................................................. 173 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting assistance see Jump-start connection Starting the engine see Vehicle Starting-off aid see Hill Start Assist Station Setting ................................................. 429 Storing ................................................ 430 Station list Station presets Station tracking Calling up ............................................ 429 Managing ............................................ 430 Setting ................................................. 430 Stationary heater/ventilation Displays (remote control) .................... 168 Problems (remote control) ................... 169 Replacing the battery (remote con trol) ...................................................... 168 Setting (MBUX multimedia system) ..... 167 Setting (remote control) ....................... 167 Switching on/off (control panel) ......... 166 STEER CONTROL Steering Function/notes ................................... 208 Deleting ............................................... 430 Direct frequency entry ........................ 430 Frequency fix ....................................... 430 Moving ................................................ 430 Searching ............................................ 430 Rear axle steering ................................ 180 Steering wheel ......................................... 274 Adjusting (electrically) .......................... 111 Buttons ................................................ 274 Operating the memory function ........... 114 Steering wheel heater .......................... 112 Steering wheel gearshift paddles .......... 188 Steering wheel heater Activating/deactivating ........................ 112 Switching on/off .................................. 112 Stowage areas see Stowage compartment Stowage compartment ............................ 121 Armrest ................................................ 121 Centre console .................................... 121 Door ..................................................... 121 Glove box ............................................. 121 Handset (rear) ..................................... 123 Luggage net hooks .............................. 123 Rear armrest ........................................ 122 Rear seat backrest .............................. 122 Stowage compartments see Stowage compartment Stowage space under the boot floor ..... 128 Sulphur content ...................................... 565 Surround lighting Switching on/off ................................. 150 Surround View see 360 Camera Suspension Setting the suspension level (AIR MATIC) ................................................ 234 Suspension see AIRMATIC see E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Suspension level (AIRMATIC) Setting ................................................. 234 SVHC (substances of very high con cern) ............................................................ 31 Switch-off delay time Exterior ................................................ 150 Interior ................................................ 152 Index 689 Setting the time zone .......................... 322 Setting the time/date format .............. 323 Switching NFC on/off ......................... 324 Switching transmission of the vehicle position on/off .................................... 324 System settings see Bluetooth see Language System update Updating software ............................... 328 T Tailpipes (Care) ........................................ 465 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles .............. 20 Protection of the environment ............... 20 Synchronisation function Tank content Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul timedia system) ................................... 163 System settings AdBlue ............................................... 568 Fuel ..................................................... 568 Reserve (fuel) ...................................... 568 Activating/deactivating voice ampli fication to rear ..................................... 323 Reset function (multimedia system) .... 330 Setting the distance unit ..................... 328 Technical data Information .......................................... 506 Notes (trailer hitch) ............................. 573 Radio operating permits ...................... 508 690 Index Vehicle identification plate .................. 562 Telephone ......................................... 372, 377 Activating functions during a call ......... 381 Call waiting (car telephony) ................. 380 Calls with several participants ............. 382 Car telephone (changing configura tion) ..................................................... 417 Car telephony (establishing an Inter net connection) .................................... 417 Car telephony settings ........................ 380 Changing a function ............................. 374 Connecting a mobile phone (car tel ephony) ............................................... 378 Connecting a mobile phone (Near Field Communication (NFC)) ................ 375 Connecting a mobile phone (Pass key) ...................................................... 373 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing) .................................... 373 Connecting the SIM card (car teleph ony) ..................................................... 379 Conveying the telephone number

(car telephony) .................................... 380 Data use language (car telephony) ...... 381 Disconnecting a mobile phone ............ 375 Forwarding a call (car telephony) ......... 381 Importing contacts .............................. 384 Importing contacts (overview) ............. 384 Incoming call during an existing call .... 382 Information .......................................... 373 Interchanging mobile phones ............... 374 Locking the vehicle (mobile phone) ....... 72 Mobile phone voice recognition ........... 377 Network provider (car telephony) ........ 381 Notes ................................................... 371 Operating modes ................................. 373 Overview of car telephony ................... 377 Reception and transmission volume .... 376 Replacing mobile phones ..................... 375 Setting the ringtone ............................. 377 Setting the SIM card (car telephony) ... 380 Starting the vehicle (mobile phone) ..... 174 Status of the SIM PIN .......................... 379 Switching mobile phones (Near Field Communication (NFC)) ........................ 375 Symbols of car telephony .................... 378 Telephone menu overview ................... 372 Telephone operation ............................ 381 Unlocking the vehicle (mobile phone) .... 72 Using Near Field Communication

(NFC) ................................................... 375 Wireless charging (mobile phone in the rear) .............................................. 140 Telephone operation see Calls Telephony operating modes Bluetooth Telephony .......................... 373 Making calls in the vehicle ................... 373 Displaying ............................................ 435 Overview ............................................. 435 Teletext Temperature Engine oil (on-board computer, Per formance menu) .................................. 279 Transmission oil (on-board computer, Performance menu) ............................. 279 Text messages see Messages Themes Calling up ............................................ 300 Deleting ............................................... 301 Fastening ............................................. 300 Modifying ............................................ 300 Overview ............................................. 299 Through-loading feature Locking ................................................ 125 Through-loading feature in the rear compartment Opening ............................................... 124 Time Manual time setting ............................. 323 Setting the time zone .......................... 322 Setting the time/date format .............. 323 TIREFIT kit ................................................ 471 Declaration of conformity ...................... 29 Storage location ................................... 471 Using ................................................... 472 Toll system Windscreen ......................................... 159 Tone settings ........................................... 437 Calling up the sound menu .................. 437 Information .......................................... 437 Tool see Vehicle tool kit Top Tether .................................................. 62 Torque (on-board computer, Perform ance menu) .............................................. 279 Total distance .......................................... 280 Displaying ............................................ 280 Touch Control On-board computer ............................. 275 Operating ............................................ 293 Setting acoustic operating feedback ... 293 Setting the sensitivity .......................... 293 Touch-sensitive controls ........................... 22 Touchscreen (central display) Entering characters ............................. 308 Operating ............................................ 293 Tow-away protection Function ................................................ 94 Priming/deactivating ............................. 95 Tow-bar system ....................................... 272 Tow-starting ............................................. 486 Towing away ............................................ 483 Towing eye Installing .............................................. 485 Storage location .................................. 485 Towing methods ...................................... 482 Index 691 Traffic announcements Activating/deactivating ....................... 430 Traffic information .................................. 355 Car-to-X-Communication ..................... 358 Displaying the traffic map ................... 356 Displaying traffic incidents .................. 357 Extending a Live Traffic Information subscription ........................................ 356 Live Traffic Information ....................... 356 Overview ............................................. 355 Registering Live Traffic Information ..... 356 Switching on the display ...................... 358 Traffic map see Map Traffic Sign Assist ................................... 256 Function/notes ................................... 256 Setting ................................................. 258 System limitations ............................... 256 Trailer hitch Bicycle rack ......................................... 270 Care .................................................... 465 Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer ........ 268 Extending/retracting the ball neck ...... 266 General notes ...................................... 573 692 Index Notes .................................................. 265 Socket ................................................. 268 Transporting Trailer operation Active Blind Spot Assist ....................... 261 Active Lane Keeping Assist ................. 263 Bicycle rack ......................................... 270 Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer ........ 268 Extending/retracting the ball neck ...... 266 Folding the ball coupling in/out

(MBUX multimedia system) ................. 267 Notes .................................................. 265 Socket ................................................. 268 Trailer stabilisation Trailer tow hitch Function/notes ................................... 207 Folding the ball coupling in/out

(MBUX multimedia system) ................. 267 Transferred vehicle data Android Auto ....................................... 399 Apple CarPlay .................................... 399 Transmission of the vehicle position Activating/deactivating ....................... 324 Transmission position display ................ 186 Loading guidelines ............................... 119 Vehicle ................................................ 484 Trim element (Care) ................................ 466 Trip Menu (on-board computer) .................. 280 Trip computer Displaying ............................................ 280 Trip distance ............................................ 280 Displaying ............................................ 280 TV Trip meter see Trip distance TuneIn ....................................................... 421 Calling up ............................................ 421 Calling up the station list (category last selected) ....................................... 422 Deleting stations ................................. 422 Logging out ......................................... 422 Overview .............................................. 421 Registering .......................................... 422 Saving stations .................................... 422 Selecting and connecting to a station

............................................................. 422 Selecting stream ................................. 422 Setting options .................................... 422 Terms of use ........................................ 422 Turn signal indicator see Turn signal lights Turn signal lights ..................................... 145 Switching on/off ................................. 145 Activating ............................................ 431 Adjusting the brightness ..................... 435 Calling up the menu (CI+ module) ....... 436 Overview .............................................. 431 Picture settings ................................... 435 Setting subtitles .................................. 435 Setting the audio language .................. 434 Showing teletext .................................. 435 Showing/hiding full screen ................. 432 Teletext overview ................................. 435 Activating/deactivating channel fix ..... 433 Channel fix .......................................... 433 Channel list overview .......................... 434 Country-specific character set ............ 433 EPG (electronic programme guide) ...... 433 Overview of favourites ......................... 434 TV channel Selecting from the channel list ............ 432 Selecting from the control menu ......... 432 Selecting from the favourites .............. 432 Selecting in the background ................ 433 Storing ................................................ 434 Two-way radios Frequencies ......................................... 507 Notes on installation ........................... 506 Transmission output (maximum) ......... 507 Tyre inflation compressor see TIREFIT kit Tyre pressure monitoring system Checking the tyre pressure ................. 494 Restarting ............................................ 495 Tyre pressure table ................................. 493 Tyre temperature Tyre pressure monitoring system

(function) ............................................. 494 Tyre tread ................................................. 491 Tyre-change tool kit Overview ............................................. 499 Tyre pressure ........................................... 493 Tyres Index 693 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor ing system ........................................... 495 Selection ............................................. 495 Snow chains ........................................ 491 Storing ................................................ 499 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 472 Tyre pressure (Notes) .......................... 492 Tyre pressure monitoring system

(function) ............................................. 494 Tyre pressure table .............................. 493 Unusual handling characteristics ......... 491 Checking (tyre pressure monitoring system) ................................................ 494 Notes .................................................. 492 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor ing system ........................................... 495 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 472 Tyre pressure monitoring system

(function) ............................................. 494 Tyre pressure table .............................. 493 Tyre pressure monitor Function .............................................. 494 Changing hub caps .............................. 500 Checking ............................................. 491 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pressure monitoring system) ............... 494 Fitting .................................................. 503 Flat tyre ............................................... 470 Interchanging ...................................... 498 MOExtended tyres ............................... 471 Noise ................................................... 491 Notes on fitting ................................... 495 Removing ............................................ 503 Replacing .................................... 495, 500 U Units of measurement Setting ................................................. 328 Unlocking setting ...................................... 68 Update see Updating software Updating software .......................... 329, 330 Fault message ..................................... 330 Information .......................................... 328 Performing .......................................... 329 USB port ................................................... 135 694 Index User profiles ............................................ 295 Adding a user ...................................... 296 Notes .................................................. 295 Overview ............................................. 295 Requirements for use .......................... 295 Selecting a user .................................. 298 Selecting user options ......................... 297 Synchronising ...................................... 299 User-specific content .......................... 295 V Vehicle ...................................................... 175 Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... 203 Additional door lock ............................... 71 Collision detection (parking) ................ 202 Correct use ............................................ 31 Data acquisition .................................... 32 Data storage .......................................... 32 Diagnostics connection ......................... 29 Equipment ............................................. 22 Implied warranty .................................... 31 Locking (automatically) .......................... 74 Locking (digital vehicle key sticker) ....... 72 Locking (from the inside) ....................... 72 Locking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................... 73 Locking (mobile phone) ......................... 72 Locking/unlocking (emergency key) ...... 75 Lowering ............................................. 504 Medical aids .......................................... 31 Parking up ........................................... 203 QR code rescue card ............................. 32 Qualified specialist workshop ................ 30 Raising ................................................. 501 REACH regulation .................................. 31 Registration ........................................... 30 Standby mode function ....................... 203 Starting (Digital Vehicle Key sticker) .... 174 Starting (emergency operation mode) .................................................. 175 Starting (mobile phone) ....................... 174 Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 176 Starting (start/stop button) ................. 174 Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 196 Towing ................................................. 272 Unlocking (digital vehicle key sticker) .... 72 Unlocking (from the inside) ................... 72 Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ....................... 73 Unlocking (mobile phone) ...................... 72 Ventilating (convenience opening) ......... 85 Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT) ............ 185 Roof load ............................................. 573 Transferring to Android Auto ............... 399 Transferring to Apple CarPlay ............ 399 Vehicle height ...................................... 572 Vehicle length ...................................... 572 Vehicle width ....................................... 572 Wheelbase ........................................... 572 Vehicle dimensions ................................. 572 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .................... 562 EU general operating permit number .. 562 Paint code ........................................... 562 Permissible axle load ........................... 562 Permissible gross mass ....................... 562 VIN ...................................................... 562 Cooling or heating (Remote Online) ..... 176 Vehicle interior Vehicle key see Key Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Vehicle position ....................................... 354 Saving ................................................. 354 Sharing ................................................ 354 Vehicle tool kit ......................................... 471 TIREFIT kit ............................................ 471 Towing eye .......................................... 485 Convenience opening ............................ 85 Ventilating Vents see Air vents Video conference In-Car Office ........................................ 392 VIN ............................................................ 562 Identification plate .............................. 562 Seat ..................................................... 562 Windscreen ......................................... 562 Vision Demisting windows ............................. 163 Windscreen heating ............................. 165 Voice amplification to the rear Activating/deactivating ....................... 323 Voice control system see MBUX Voice Assistant W Warm-up (on-board computer, Per formance menu) ...................................... 279 Warning lamp see Indicator/warning lamp Warning system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Warning triangle Removing ............................................ 469 Setting up ............................................ 469 Warning/indicator lamp

! ABS warning lamp ...................... 646 J Brake system warning lamp

(red) .................................................... 644 J Brake system warning lamp

(yellow) ................................................ 643 Coolant warning lamp ................ 640

! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) ............................................ 643

# Electrical fault warning lamp ...... 642

; Engine diagnosis warning lamp ... 641 Index 695 ESP OFF warning lamp ............. 648 ESP warning lamp flashes ........ 647 ESP warning lamp lights up ...... 647 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up .............................................. 642 Rear axle steering warning lamp .................................................... 639 6 Restraint system warning lamp .. 636 7 Seat belt warning lamp flashes .. 636 7 Seat belt warning lamp lights up ........................................................ 637 Suspension warning lamp .. 645, 646

! The electric parking brake (yel low) indicator lamp .............................. 643 Trailer tow hitch warning lamp ... 637 h Tyre pressure monitoring sys tem warning lamp flashes ................... 649 h Tyre pressure monitoring sys tem warning lamp lights up ................. 649 696 Index L Warning lamp for distance warning function ................................. 645 Warning lamp for electric power steering .................................... 638 Warning/indicator lamps PASSENGER AIR BAG ............................. 47 Warranty ..................................................... 31 Washer fluid see Windscreen washer fluid Washing by hand (care) .......................... 463 Water tank see Air-water duct Weather information ............................... 366 Web browser Calling up (Rear Seat Entertainment System) ............................................... 451 Calling up a web page .......................... 419 Calling up the settings ......................... 420 Calls up options ................................... 420 Deleting a bookmark ........................... 420 Deleting Internet history ...................... 420 Ending ................................................. 421 Managing bookmarks .......................... 420 Overview ............................................. 420 Overview (Rear Seat Entertainment System) ............................................... 451 Calling up ............................................. 419 Destination entry with a 3 word address ............................................... 339 Web browsers Website What3words Wheel change Fitting a new wheel ............................. 503 Lowering the vehicle ........................... 504 Preparation ......................................... 500 Raising the vehicle ............................... 501 Removing a wheel ............................... 503 Removing/fitting hub caps .................. 500 Wheel change see Emergency spare wheel Wheel rotation ......................................... 498 Wheels Care .................................................... 465 Changing hub caps .............................. 500 Checking ............................................. 491 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pressure monitoring system) ............... 494 Fitting .................................................. 503 Flat tyre ............................................... 470 Interchanging ...................................... 498 MOExtended tyres ............................... 471 Noise ................................................... 491 Notes on fitting ................................... 495 Removing ............................................ 503 Replacing .................................... 495, 500 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor ing system ........................................... 495 Selection ............................................. 495 Snow chains ........................................ 491 Storing ................................................ 499 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 472 Tyre pressure (Notes) .......................... 492 Tyre pressure monitoring system

(function) ............................................. 494 Tyre pressure table .............................. 493 Unusual handling characteristics ......... 491 Wi-Fi ......................................................... 325 Activating/deactivating ....................... 325 Setting up an Internet connection ........ 416 Index 697 Replacing (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)

............................................................. 155 Wireless charging Function/notes ................................... 138 Mobile phone ....................................... 140 Mobile phone (rear) ............................. 140 Wireless vehicle components Declaration of conformity ...................... 24 Workout program Overview .............................................. 107 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Wi-Fi see Wi-Fi see Wi-Fi connection Wi-Fi connection ...................................... 325 Information .......................................... 325 Wi-Fi hotspot Configuring .......................................... 326 Widescreen cockpit instrument dis play Instrument cluster ................................... 8 Window airbag ........................................... 42 Windows see Side windows Windows (Care) ....................................... 465 Windscreen .............................................. 155 Infrared reflective ................................ 159 Radio waves ........................................ 159 Replacing wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL) ............................... 155 Windscreen see Windscreen see Windshield Windscreen heating ................................ 165 Windscreen heating see Windscreen heating Windscreen washer fluid ........................ 571 Notes ................................................... 571 Windscreen washer system Topping up ........................................... 461 Windscreen wipers Changing the wiper blades .................. 153 Replacing wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL) ............................... 155 Switching on/off ................................. 152 Windshield ............................................... 153 Changing the wiper blades .................. 153 Winter operation Activating/deactivating snow chain mode ................................................... 492 Snow chains ........................................ 491 Winter tyres Wiper blades Setting the permanent speed limita tion ...................................................... 219 Care .................................................... 465 Replacing ............................................. 153 Germany Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi cles and about MercedesBenz AG can be found on the following websites:

https://www.mercedes-benz.com https://www.daimler.com Documentation team You are welcome to forward any queries or sug gestions you may have regarding this Owner's Manual to the technical documentation team at the following address:

MercedesBenz AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany MercedesBenz AG: Not to be reprinted, trans lated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from MercedesBenz AG. Vehicle manufacturer MercedesBenz AG Mercedesstrae 120 70372 Stuttgart As at 06.08.19 Vehicle document wallet Here you can find comprehen sive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form. Digital on the Internet You can find the Owner's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz home page. Digital as an App The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available free-of-charge in familiar App stores. Digital in the vehicle Familiarise yourself with the con tents of the Owner's Manual directly via the vehicle's multi media system (menu item "Vehi cle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips. ohne-

ohne Order no. ohne Part no. ohne Edition NA2020-09a Apple iOS AndroidTM